'■mr>:^y 'ii:HiMi''f.!C^. CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY FROM PJ 4564.G7?"l883"^''' ""''' GranjUiar of the Hebrew lang uage / iiji 3 1924 026 834 246 DATE DUE ^^-"^^ D^i^^-^^-^ fff^^ ht.f ^^L%^y r 5 CAYLORD P,..rEO,.„s. FT Cornell University Library The original of tiiis book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/cletails/cu31924026834246 '^■^ ■ ^- M s?^ 2^'->^-C. GEAMMAE OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE. BY WILLIAM HENRY GREEN, PKOFESSOE IN THE THEOLOSICAL SEMINARY AT PRINCETON, H. J. THIRD EDITION, NEW YORK: JOHN WILEY & SONS, PUBLISHERS, 15 AsTOK Place. 1883. '''' tkcn V /)73^^7'^' Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year of 1861, by JOHN WILEY, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of Now York. PREFACE. This work was begun at the instance of my friend, preceptor, an4 colleague, De. J. Addison Alexander. TEie aid of Ms counsels and suggestions was freely promised in the undertaking ; and he was to give to it the sanction of his name before the public. It appears shorn of these ad- vantages. A few consultations respecting the general plan of the book and the method to be observed in its prepara- tion, were all that could be had before this greatest of American orientalists and scholars was taken from us. De- prived thus early of 'his invaluable assistance, I have yet found a melancholy satisfaction in the prosecution of a task begun under such auspices, and which seemed still to link me to one with whom I count it one of the greatest blessings of my life to have been associated. The grammatical system of Giesenius has, from causes which can readily be explained, had a predominance in this country to which it is not justly entitled. The grammar of Prof. Stuart, for a long time the text-book in most common use, was substantially a reproduction of that of Gesenius. Nordheimer was an adherent of the same system in its essen- tial features, though he illustrated it with wonderful clearness and philosophical tact. And finally, the smaller grammar of Gesenius became current in the excellent translation of Prof. Conant. Now, while Gesenius is unquestionably the prince of Hebrew lexicographers, Ewald is as certainly entitled to IV PREFACE. the precedence among grammarians; and the latter cannot be ignored by him who would appreciate correctly the exist- ing state of oriental learning. The present work is mainly based upon the three leading grammars of Gesenius, Ewald, and Nordheimer, and the at- tempt has been made to combine whatever is valuable in each. For the sake of a more complete survey of the history of opinion, the grammars of R. Chayug, E.. Kimchi, Reuch- lin, Buxtorf, Schultens, Simonis, Robertson, Lee, Stier, Hupfeld, Preytag, Nagelsbach, and Stuart, besides others of less consequence from Jewish or Christian sources, have also been consulted to a greater or less extent. The author has not, however, contented himself with an indolent com- pilation ; but, while availing himself freely of the labours of his predecessors, he has sought to maintain an independ- ent position by investigating the whole subject freshly and thoroughly for himself. His design in the following pages has been to reflect the phenomena of the language precisely as they are exhibited in the Hebrew Bible ; and it is be- lieved that this is more exactly accomplished than it has been in any preceding grammar. The rule was adopted at the outset, and rigorously adhered to, that no supposititious forms should be admitted, that no example should be al- leged which is not found in actual use, that no statement should be made and no rule given the evidence of which had not personally been subjected to careful scrutiny. Thus, for example, before treating of any class of verbs, perfect or im- perfect, every verb of that description in the language was separately traced through aU its forms as shown by a con- cordance ; the facts were thus absolutely ascertained in the first instance before a single paradigm was prepared or a word of explanation written. Some may be disposed, at first, to look suspiciously upon the triple division of the HebrcAv vowels, adopted PREFACE, V from Ewald, as an innovation: further reflection, however, wUl show that it is the only division consistent with ac- curacy, and it is really more ancient than the one which commonly prevails. The importance of the accent, especially to the proper understanding of the vowels of a word and the laws of vowel-changes, is such that the example of Ewald has been followed in constantly marking its position by an appropriate sign. He uses a Methegh for this purpose, which is objec- tionable on account of the liability to error and confusion when the same sign is used for distinct purposes. The use of any one of the many Hebrew accents would also be liable to objection, since they not only indicate the tone-syllable, but have besides a conjunctive or disjunctive force, which it would be out of place to suggest. Accordingly, a special symbol has been employed, analogous to that which is in use in our own and other languages, thus bbj? hataV . The remarks upon the consecution of poetic accents were in type before the appearance of the able discussion of that subject by Baer, in an appendix to the Commentary of Delitzsch upon the Psalms. The rules of Baer, however, depend for their justification upon the assumption of the accurate accentuation of his own recent edition of the He- brew Psalter, which departs in numerous instances from the current editions as they do in fact from one another. Inas- much as this is a question which can only be settled by manuscripts that are not accessible in this country, it seems best to wait until it has been tested and pronounced upon by those who are capable of doing so. What has here been written on that subject, has accordingly been suffered to re- main, imperfect and unsatisfactory as it is. The laws which regulate the formation of nouns have been derived from Ewald, with a few modifications chiefly tending to simplify them. VI PREFACE. The declensions of nouns, as made out by Gesenius, have the merit of affording a convenient and tolerably complete classification of their forms and of the changes to which each is liable. Nordheimer abandoned them for a method of his own, in which he aimed at greater simplicity, but in reality rendered the subject more per- plexed. The system of Ewald is complicated with the d,erivation and formation oi nouns from which their subsequent modifications are quite distinct. The fact is, however, that there are no declensions, properly speaking, in Hebrew; and the attempt to foist upon the language what is alien to its nature, embarrasses the subject instead of relieving it. A few general rules respecting the vowel-changes, which are liable to occur in different kinds of syllables, solve the whole mystery, and are all that the case requires or even admits. In the syntax the aim has been to develop not so much what is common to the Hebrew with other languages, as Avhat is characteristic and distinctive of the former, those points being particularly dwelt upon which are of chief im- portance to the interpreter. In the entire work special reference has been had to the wants of theological students. The author has endeavoured to make it at once elementary and thorough, so that it might both serve as a manual for beginners and yet possess all that completeness which is demanded by riper scholars. The parts of most immediate importance to those commencing the study of the language are distinguished by being printed in large type. Peinoetos, August 22(?, 1861. OOl^TEI^rTS. PART I.— OETHOGEAPHY, Divisions of Grammar, §1. OETHOGEAPHIO SYMBOLS. The Lettees. — Alphabet, §2; Sounds, §3; Double forms, §4; Names, § 5 ; Order, § 6 ; Classification, § 7 ; . "Words never divided, § 8 ; Abbreviations and Signs of Ifnmber, § 9. Thb Vowels. — Masoretio Points, § 10 ; Vowel Letters, § 11 ; Signs for the Vowels, §12; Mutual Relation of this twofold Notation, §§13, 14; Pure and Diphthongal Vowels, § 15. Sh'va, silent and vocal, simple and compound, § 16. Pattahh Furtive, §17. ~ ' Syllables, § 18. Ambiguous Signs. — Hhirik, Shurek, and Kibbuts, §19.1; Kamets and Kamets-Hhatuph, § 19. 2 ; Silent and Vocal Sh'va, § 20. Points affeoting Consonants: — Daghesh-lene, §§21, 22. Daghesh-forte, §23; different kinds, §24; omission of, §25. Mappik, §26. Raphe, §27. Points attached to "Woeds. — Accents, their design, § 28 ; forms and classes, §29; like forms distinguished, §30; poetic accents, §31; position as determined by the character of the syllables, § 32. 1 ; in uninfleoted words, § 32. 2. 3 ; with affixes, suffixes and prefixes, § 33 ; use in distinguishing words, § 34 ; shifted in special cases, § 35. Consecution of the Accents in Prose. — Clauses and their subdivisions, § 36 ; tabular view, § 37 ; explanation of the table, § 38 ; adaptation of the trains of accents to sentences, § 39. VUl CONTENTS. Poetic Consecution. — Clauses and their subdivisions, §40; tabular view and explanation, §41 ; adaptation of the trains of accents to sen- tences, §42. Makkeph, §43. Methegh, its form and position, §44; special rules, §45; K'ri and K'thibh, meaning of the terms, § 46 ; constant E'ris not noted in the margin, §47;' their design and value, §48. Accuracy of the points, § 49. OETHOGEAPHIO OHANGBS. Significant mutations belong to the domain of the lexicon, §§ 50, 51 ; eu- phomc mutations to the domain of grammar, § 52. Mutations of Consonants at the beginning of syllables, § 53 ; at the clos© of syllables, §54; at the end of words, §55 ; special rules, §56. Changes op Consonants to Vowels in reduplicated syllables and letters and in quiescents, § 57. Mutations of Vowels, significant and euphonic, §58; due to syllabic changes, § 59 ; to contiguous gutturals, § 60 ; to concurrent conso- nants, § 61 ; concurring vowels, § 62 ; proximity of vowels, § 63 ; the accent, § 64 ; pause accents, § 65 ; shortening or lengthening of words, § 66. PAET II.— ETYMOLOGY. Roots of Woeds. — Design of Etymology, three stages in the growth of words, §67; pronominal and verbal roots, §68; formation and inflection of words by external and internal changes, § 69 ; parts of speech, §70. Peonouns personal, § 71 ; pronominal suffixes, § 72 ; demonstrative, § 73 ; relative, §74; interrogative and indefinite, §75. Veebs, the species and their signification, §§ 76-80. Peeebct Vekbs, § 81 ; formation of the species, §§ 82, 83 ; their inflection, §§84, 85. 1 ; paradigm of b-j]?, §85. 2. Semarhs on the Perfect Ve7l>s. — ^Kal preterite, § 86 ; Inflnitive, § 87 ; Future, §88; Imperative, § 89 ; Participles, § 90 ; Niphal, §91.; Piel, §92 ; Pual, §93; Hiphil, §94; Hophal, §95 ; Hithpael, § 96. Paragogio and Apocopated Future, § 97 ; and Imperative, § 98. Vav Conversive with the Future, § 99 ; with the Preterite, § 100. Verbs with suffixes, §§101, 102 ; paradigm, § 103 ; Remarks on the Per- fect Verbs with suffixes. Preterite, § 104 ; Future, §105; Inflnitive and Imperative, § 106. Impeefeot Veebs, classified, § 107. Pe Guttural Verbs, their peculiarities, §§108, 109; paradigm, §110; Remarks, §§ 111-115. CONTENTS. IX Ayin Guttural Verbs, their peculiarities, §116; paradigm, §117; Ke- marks, §§118-122. Lamedh Guttural Verbs, their peculiarities^ §123; paradigm, §124; Eemarks, §§ 125-128. Pe Nun Verbs, their peculiarities, § 129 ; paradigm, § 130 ; Eemarks, §§131,132. Ayin Doubled Verbs, their peculiarities, §§138-137; paradigm, §138; Eemarks, §§ 139-142. Pe Yodh Verbs, their peculiarities, §§ 143-145 ; paradigm, § 146 ; Ee- . marks, §§147-151. Ayin Vav and Ayin Yodh Verbs, their peculiarities, §§ 152-164 ; para- digm, §155 ; Eemarks, §§ 156-161. Lamedh Aleph Verbs, their peculiarities, §162; paradigm, § 163 ; Ee- marks, §§164^167. Lamedh He Verbs, their peculiarities, §§168, 169; paradigm, §170; shortened future and imperative, § 171 ; Eemarks, §§ 172-177. Doubly Imperfect Verbs, § 178. Defective Verbs, § 179. Quadriliteral Verbs, § 180. Nouns, their formation, §181; Class L §§182-186; Class 11. §§ 187, 188 ; Class m. §§189-192; Class IV. §§193, 194; Multiliterals, §195. Gender and Number. — ^Feminine endings, § 196 ; anomalies in the use of, §197; employment in the formation of words, §198; plural end- ings, § 199 ; anomalies, § 200 ; nouns confined to one number, § 201 ; Dual ending, § 202 ; usage of the dual, § 203 ; changes consequent upon aflSxing the endings for gender and number, §§206-211. The Construct State, its meaning and formation, §§ 212-216. Declension of Nouns, paradigm, § 217. Paragogic Vowels added to Nouns, §§ 218, 219. Nouns with suffixes, §§ 220, 221 ; paradigm, § 222. NuMEEALs.— Cardinal numbers, §§228-226; Ordinals, etc., §227. Pbbfixbd Pakticles, § 228 ; the Article, § 229 : the Interrogative, § 230 ; Inseparable prepositions, §§ 231-233 ; Vav Conjunctive, § 234. Sepaeate Paeticles. — Adverbs, § 235 ; with suffixes, §236; Prepositions, §237; with suffixes, §238; Conjunctions, § 239 ; Interjections, § 240. PAET III.— SYNTAX. Office of Syntax, § 241. 1 ; Elements of the sentence, § 241. 2. The Subject, a noun or pronoun, §242; when omitted, §243; its exten- sion, §244. • The Article, when used, §245; nouns definite without it, §246; omitted in poetry, § 247 ; indefinite nouns, § 248. A^ectives and Demonstratives qualifying a noun, § 249. X CONTENTS. Numerals. — Cardinal numbers, §§250, 251 ; Ordinals, etc., §262. Apposition, §253. Tlie Construct state and SuflBxes, §§254^-256; resolved by the preposition b §25T. The Peedicate, Copula, §258; Nouns, a^'ectives, and demonstratives, §259. Comparison of adjectives, §260. Verla. — Hebrew conception of time, § 261 ; the primary tenses : use of the preterite, § 262 ; the future, § 263 ; paragogic and apocopated future, §264; the secondary tenses, § 266 ; participles, §266; Infinitive, §§267-269. Olject of Verbs. — The direct object of transitive verbs, § 270 ; transitive con- struction of intransitive verbs, § 271 ; indirect object of verbs, § 272 ; verbs with more than one object, § 273. Adverbs and adverbial expressions, § 274. Neglect of agreement, § 275 ; compound subject, § 276 ; nouns in the con- struct, §277; dual nouns, §278; changes of person, §279. Eepetition of nouns, § 280 ; pronouns, § 281 ; verbs, § 282. ' Inteehogative Sentexoes, §§ 283, 284. Compound Sentences. — Relative pronoun, § 285 ; poetic use of the de- monstrative, § 286 ; conjunctions, § 287. GeammatIcal Analysis, ..... page 31P Index I. Subjects, ......" 323 Index II. Texts of Scripture, .... "331 Index III. Hebrew "Words, . . . . . "343 Index IV. Hebrew Grammatical Terms, . . . . " 399 PART FIEST. ORTHOGRAPHY. §1. Language is the communication of thought by means of spoken or written sounds. The utterance of a single thougM constitutes a sentence. Each sentence is composed of words expressing individual conceptions or their relations. And words are made up of sounds produced by the organs of speech and represented by written signs. It is the province ' of grammar as the science of language to investigate these several elements. It hence consists of three parts. Pirst, Orthography, which treats of the sounds employed and the mode of representing them. Second, Etymology, which treats of the different kinds of words, their formation, and the changes which they undergo. Third, Syntax, which treats of sentences, or the manner in which words are joined together to express ideas. The task of the Hebrew grammarian is to furnish a complete exhibition of the phenomena of this partic- ular language, carefully digested and referred as far as practi- cable to their appropriate causes in the organs of speech and the operations of the mind. The Letters. §2. The Hebrew being no longer a spoken tongue, is only known as the language of books, aiitl particularly of the Old Testament, which is the most interesting and important as well as the only pure monument of it. The fir.st step 2 ORTHOGRAPHY. ^^ towards its investigation must accordingly be to ascertain the meaning of the symbols in which it is recorded. Then liaving learned its sounds, as they are thus represented, it will be possible to advance one step fm'ther, and inquire into the laws by which these are governed in their employment and mutations. The symbols used in writing Hebrew are of two sorts', viz. letters (ni»rii«) and points (D"''71(j)5). The number of the letters is twenty -two ; these are written from right to left, and are exclusively consonants. The following alphabetical table exhibits their forms, English equivalents, nan;es, and numeri- cal values, together with the corresponding forms of the Rab- binical character employed to a considerable extent in the commentaries and other writings of the modern Jews. ^3 LETTERS. Order. Forms and EqalTnlente. Kames. Eabblnlcal Alpliabet. NnnieTlcal Taluen. 1 i; ^^!^ Aleph i> 1 2 3 Bh, B n^a Beth 3 2 3 3 Gh. G ^^i Gi'-mel i 3 4 n Dh,D f^^t Da'-leth 7 4 5 n H S" He 6 6 1 V 1? Vav 1 6 7 T z rt Zayin 1 7 8 n Hh rcn Hheth V 8 9 t: T tvo Teth V 9 10 1 Y li-i Yodh « 10 11 = 1 Kh, K ^? Kaph 1 = 20 12 b L ^«>" La'-medh J 30 13 M Q M o» Mem OP 40 14 = 1 N 1^= Nun 1' 50 15 D S ^I'?? Sa'-mekh 60 16 5> r^ Ayin » 70 17 B q Ph,P !:(& Pe ^B 80 18 sV Ts •■ T Tsa'-dhe T* 90 19 p K Slip Koph ? 100 20 1 R ffli'n Resh ■) 200 21 V Sh, S v© Shin t 300 22 n Th, T w Tav p 400 §3. There is always more or less difficulty in represent- ing the sounds of one language by those of another. But this is in the case of the Hebrew greatly aggravated by its having been for ages a dead language, so that some of it 4 ORTHOGBAPHT. §S sounds cannot now be accurately determined, and also by its belonging to a different family or group of tongues from our o\vn, possessing sounds entirely foreign to the English, foT which it consequently affords no equivalent, and which are in fact incapable of being pronounced by our organs. The equivalents of the foregoing table are not therefore to be re- garded as in every instance exact representations of the proper powers of the letters. They are simply approximations suffi- ciently near the truth for every practical piu-pose, the best which can now be proposed, and sanctioned by tradition and the conventional usage of the best Hebraists. 1. It will be observed that a double pronunciation has been assigned to seven of the letters. A native Hebrew would readily decide without assistance which of these was to be adopted in any given case, just as we are sensible of no in- convenience from the various sounds of the English letters which are so embarrassing to foreigners learning our language, riie ambiguity is in every case removed, however, by the ad- dition of a dot or point indicating which sound they are to receive. Thus a with a point in its bosom has the sound of h, 3 unpointed that of the corresponding v, or as it is com- monly represented for the sake of uniformity in notation, hh ; S is pronounced as g, 5 unpointed had an aspirated sound which may accordingly be represented \i^ gh, but as it is difficult to produce it, or even to determine with exactness Avhat it was, and as there is no corresponding sound in English, the aspira- tion is mostly neglected, and the letter, whether pointed or not, sounded indifferently as y ; 'n is d, 1 unpointed is the aspirate dh, equivalent to th in the ; 3 is ^, 3 unpointed its aspirate hh, perhaps resembling the German ch in ich, though its aspira- tion, like that of 5, is commonly neglected in modern reading ; B isji?, & unpointed is jo^ or/; n is ^, n unpointed th in thin. The letter tJ with a dot over its right arm is pronounced like sh, and called Shin ; to with a dot over its left arm is called Sin, and pronounced like s, no attempt being made in- moderD J 3 LETTERS. 5 usage to discriminate between its sound and that of o Samekh. Although there may anciently .have been a distinc- tion between them, this can no longer be defined nor ever, positively asserted ; it has therefore been thought unneces- sary to preserve the individuality of these letters in the notation, and both of them will accordingly be represented by s. a. The double sound of the first six of the letters just named is purely euphonic, and has no effect whatever upon the meaning of the words in which they stand. The case of 13 is different. Its primary sound was that of sh, as is evident from the contrast in Judg. 13 : 6 of rb.ai:3 shibboleth with nbaq sibboleih. In certain words, however, and sometimes for the sake of creating a distinction between different words of like orthography, it received the sound of s, thus almost assuming the character of a distinct letter, e. g. ^2113 to break, lail! to hope. That Sin and Samekh were dis- tinguishable to the ear, appears probable from the fact that there are words of separate significations which differ only in the use of one or the other of these letters, and in which they are never interchanged, e. g. hsv to be bereaved, isia to be wise, bstj to be foolish j IsOj to be drunken, iDia to hire,' "I3B to shut up; Ilia to look, ilia to rule, 110 to turn back; fiBia a lip, nho to destroy. The close affinity between the sounds which they repre- sent is, however, shown by the fact that is in a few instances written for ia,'e. g. no? Ps. 4: 7 from Nui:,n!i!!3bEccles. IslTforWysD. The original identity of Hi and ia is apparent from the etymological connection between isia leaven and niNllia a vessel in which bread is leavened; isia to shudder, isiisia horrible, causing a shudder. In Arabic the division of single letters into two distinguished by diacritical points is carried to a much greater length, the alphabet of that language being by this means enlarged from twenty-two to twenty-eight letters, , 2. I^ their original power 13 t differed from n t, and 3 Ic from p k, for these letters are not confused nor liable to inter- change, and the distinction is preserved to this day in the cognate Arabic ; yet it is not easy to state intelligibly where- in the difference consisted. They are currently pronounced precisely alike. 3. The letter n has a stronger sound than n the simple h, and is accordingly represented by hh ; 1 is represented by r, although it had some peculiarity of sound which we can- not at this day attempt to reproduce, by which it was allied to the gutturals. 6 ORTHOGRAPHY. §4 4. For two letters, N and y, no equivalent has been giveu in the table, and they are commonly altogether neglected in pronunciation, s is the weakest of the letters, and was prob- ably always inaudible. It stands for the slight and involun- tary emission of breath necessary to the utterance of a vowel unattended by a more distinct consonant sound. It there- fore merely serves to mark the beginning or the close of the syllable of which it is a part, while to the ear it is entirely lost in the accompanying or preceding vowel. Its power has been Hkened to that of the smooth breathing (') of the Greeks or the English silent h in hour. On the other hand H had a deep guttural sound which was always heard, but like that of the corresponding letter among the Arabs is very difficult of utterance by occidental organs ; consequently no attempt is made to reproduce it. In the Septuagint it is some- times represented by y, sometimes by the rough and some- times by the smooth breathing; thus «Ti^? Tofj-oq^a, ''^? 'IDA, p!?'o? 'A^aXrix. Some of the modem Jews give it the sound of n(/ or of the French gn in campagne, either wherever it occurs or only at the end of words, e. g. 'Sra'6 Sh'mang, ife ^namodh. §4. The forms of the letters exhibited in the preceding table, though found without important variation in all existing manuscripts, are not the original ones. An older character is preserved upon the Jewish coins struck in the age of the Maccabees, which bears a considerable resemblance to the Samaritan and still more to the Phenician. Some of the steps in the transition from one to the other can stiU be traced upon extant monuments. ' There was first a cursive tendency, disposing to unite the difi'erent letters of the same word, which is the established practice in Syriac and Arabic. This was followed by a predominance of the calligraphic principle, which again separated the letters and reduced them to theii present rectangular forms and nearly uniform size. The L'ursive stage has, however, left its traces upon the five letter* $5 LETTERS. 7 which appear in the table with double forms ; 3 M S B 5J when standing at the beginning or in the middle of words termi- nate in a bottom horizontal stroke, which is the remnant ol the connecting link with the following letter ; at the end of words no such link was needed, and the letter was continued vertically downward in a sort of terminal flourish thus, T T 5) y, or closed up by joining its last with its initial stroke, thus a . a. The few instances in which final letters are found in the middle of words, as ha-itsi Isa. 9 : 6, or their ordinary forms at the end, as art Neh. 2 : 13, 5a Job 38 : 1, are probably due to the inadvertence of early tran- scribers which has been faithfully perpetuated since, or if intentional they may have had a connection now unknown with the enumeration of letters or the signification of words. The same maybe said of letters larger than usual, as ns2l Ps. 80: 16, or smaller, as DK13'T'3 Gen. 2:4, or above the line, as "i?;a Ps. 80 : 14, or inverted, as sbca Num. 10 : 35, (in manuscripts and the older editions, e. g. thatofStephanus in 1541), or with extraordinary points, as 'tn^^'^h Gen. 33 : 4, k^Vi Ps. 27 : 13, in all which the Rabbins find concealed meanings of the most fanciful and absurd character. Thus in their opinion the suspended 3 in niB^a Judg. 18 : 30 suggests that the idola- ters described were descended from Moses but had the character of Ma- nasseh. In '|1na Lev. 11 : 42 the Vav, which is of unusual size, is the middle letter of the Pentateuch ; !1"'?.^31 Gen. 16: 5 with an extraordinary point over the second Yodh, is the only instance in which the word is written with that letter ; the large letters in Deut. 6 : 4 emphasize the capital article o( the Jewish faith. All such anomalous forms or marks, with the conceits of the Rabbins respecting them, are reviewed in detail in Buxtorf's Tiberias, pp. 152, etc. ^5. All the names of the letters were probably significant at first, although the meanings of some of them are now doubt- ful or obscure. It is commonly supposed that these describe the objects to which their forms originally bore a rude resem- blance. If this be so, however, the mutations which they have since undergone are such, that the relation is no longer traceable, unless it be faintly in a few. The power of the etter is in every instance the initial sound of its name. a. The opinion advocated by Schultens, Fundamenta Ling. Heb. p. 10, that the invention of the letters was long anterior to that of their names, and that the latter was a pedagogical expedient to facilitate the learning ol .he letters by associating their forms and sounds with familiar objects, has met with Httfe favour and possesses little intrinsic probability. An inlerest- S ORTHOGRAPHY. §6 ing corroboration of the antiquity of these names is found in their prescrva sion in the Greek alphabet, though destitute of meaning in that language, the Greeks having borrowed their letters at an early period from the Phe- nicians, and hence the appended a of "A\^a, etc., which points to the Ara- maeic form ssix . h. The Semitic derivation of the names proves incontestably that tha alphabet had its origin among a people speaking a language kindred tc the Hebrew. Their most probable meanings, so far as they are still ex- plicable, are as follows, viz: Aleph, an ox; Beth, a house; Gimel, a camel, Daleth, a door ; He, doubtful, possibly a window; Vav, a hook ; Zayin, a weapon; Hheth, probably a fence; Teth, probably a snake ; Yodh, a hand, Kaph, the palm of the hand; Lamedh, an ox-goad; Mem, water ; Nun, a fish; Samekh, aprop; Ayin, an eye; Pe,ainouth; Tsadhe, afsh-hook oT a hunter's dart ; Koph, perhaps the back of the head ; Resh, a head; Shin, a tooth ; Tav, a cross mark. §6. The order of the letters appears to be entirely arbi- trary, though it has been remarked that the three middle mutes 2 i, ^ succeed each other, as in like manner the three liquids "s a 5 • The juxtaposition of a few of the letters may perhaps be owing to the kindred signification of their names, e. g. Yodh and Kaph t/ie hand, Mem tcater and Nun a fish, Resh the headaadi Shin a tooth. The antiquity of the existing arrangement of the alphabet is shown, 1. by psalms and other portions of the Old Testament in which successive clauses or verses begin with the letters disposed in regular order, viz. Ps. 25 (p omitted), 34, 37 (alternate verses, "S omitted). 111 (every clause), 112 (every clause), 119 (each letter eight times), 145 (3 omitted), Prov. 31 : 10-31, Lam. ch. 1, 2, 3 (each letter three times), 4. In the first chapter of Lamenta- tions the order is exactly preserved, but in the remaining three chapters » and S are transposed. , 2. By the corres- pondence of the Greek and Roman alphabets, which have sprung from the same origin with the Hebrew. a. The most ingenious attempt to discover a regular structure in the Hebrew alphabet is that of Lepsius, in an essay upon this subject published in 1836.' Omitting the sibilants and Resh, he finds the following triple Dorrespondence of a breathing succeeded by the same three mutes carried through eacti of the three orders, the second rank being enlarged by the addition of the liquids. V7 LETTERS. Breathings. MnteB. Llqnlds. Middle Smooth Rough n 3 a S 1 1 n B B p n (^=) bas Curious as this result certainly is, it must be confessed that the alleged correspondence is in part imaginary, and the method by which it is reached is too arbitrary to warrant the conclusion that this scheme was really in the mind of the author of the alphabet, much less to sustain the further speculations built upon it, reducing the original number and modifying the powers of the letters. 6. It is curious to see how, in the adaptation of the alphabet to different languages, the sounds of the letters have been modified, needless ones dropped, and others found necessary added at the end, without disturbing the arrangement of the original stock. Thus the Greeks dropped 1 and p, only retaining them as numerical signs, while the Roman alphabet has P and GL; on the other hand the Romans found a and b superfluous, while the Greeks made of them ,9- and ^ ; J and T , in Greek ry and f, become in Latin C and G, while n, in Latin H, is in Greek converted like the rest ol the gutturals into a vowel tj. § 7. The letters may be variously divided : 1. Rrst, with respect to the organs by which they are prouounced. Gutturals K n n y Palatals a 1 D P Linguals 1 u b D Dentals T D a 1» Labials n n w £) 1 has been differently classed, but as its peculiarities are those of the gutturals, it is usually reckoned with them. 2. Secondly, according to their respective strength, into three classes, which may be denominated weak, medium, and strong, The strong consonants offer the greatest resistance to change, and are capable of entering into any combinations wliicli the formation or inflection of Avords may require. The weak have not this capacity, but, when analogy would bring tliem into combinations foreign to their nature, they are eithej 10 ORTHOGRAPHY. ^ 7 liable to mutation themselves- or occasion changes in the rest of the word. Those of medium strength have neither the absolute stabihty of the former nor the feeble and fluctuating character of the latter. ■yjrr ■, ( s? H 1 1 Vowel-Lettcrs, ^^^^' 1 s n n y Gutturals. Medium, -I , ^ ,. ,« o-^V^ ,.' ' T D s l» Sibilants. a s Strong, •< a 3 p V Aspirates and Mutes. (-7 nt: J The special characteristics of these several classes and the influence which they exert upon the constitution of words will be considered hereafter. It is sufficient to remark here that the vowel-letters are so called because they sometimes represent not consonant but vowel-sounds. a. It will be observed that while the p, k, and <-mutes agree in having smooth S 3 n and middle forms 3 S T, which may be either aspirated or unaspirated, the two last have each an additional representative p B which is lacking to the first. This, coupled with the fact that two of the alpha- betic Psalms, Ps. 25, 34, repeat 2 as the initial of the closing verse, has given rise to the conjecture that the missing p mute was supplied by this letter, having a double sound and a double place in the alphabet. In curi- ous coincidence with this ingenious but unsustamed hypothesis, the Ethio- pic alphabet has an additional p, and the Greek and Roman alphabets agree one step and only one beyond the letter T, viz. in adding next a labial, which in Greek is divided into v and , and in Latin into U and V, as "^ into I and J. 3. Thirdly, The letters may be divided, with respect to their function in the formation of words, into radicals and serviles. The former, which comprise just one half of the alphabet, are never employed except in the roots or radical portions of words. The latter may also enter into the con- stitution of roots, but they are likewise put to the less inde- pendent use of the formation of derivatives and inflections, of prefixes and suffixes. The serviles are embraced in the f8 LETTERS. 11 memorial words db^) nisa 'jn''S (Ethan Moses and Caleb) ; of these, besides other uses, ^fT'SJ are prefixed to form the future of verbs, and the remainder are prefixed as particles to npuns. The letters 1''ri:'asn are used in the formation of nouns from their roots. The only exception to the division now stated is the substitution of 13 for servile ti in a certain class of cases, as explained § 54. 4. a. Kimchi In his Mikhlol (bibsa) fol. 46, gives several additional ana grams of the serviles made out by different grammarians as aids to the memory, e. g. ns^a inssbxiiB _/br his work is understanding; fiabtB ''5X ana / Solomon am writing; fiDSn ^x "laiiiB only build thou my peace , •pan as ^Tca like a branch of the father of multitude ; irbx ana nu;a Moses has written to us. To which Nordheimer has added ''anaa "jin i>X'i" consult the riches if my book. ^ 8. In Hebrew writing and printing, words are never divided. Hence various expedients are resorted to upon occasion, in manuscripts and old printed editions, to fill out the lines, such as giving a broad form to certain letters, >* n S a t~i , occupying the vacant space with some letter, as p, repeated as often as may be necessary, or with the first letters of the next word, which were not, however, accounted part of the text, as they were left without vowels, and the word was written in full at the beginning of the following line. The same end is accomplished more neatly in modern print- ing by judicious spacing. §9.1. The later Jews make frequent use of abbreviations. There are none, however, in the text of the Hebrew Bible ; such as are found in the margin are explained in a special lexicon at the back of the editions in most common use, e. g. W for "Toill ef completio = etc. 3. The numerical employment of the letters, common to the Hebrews with the Greeks, is indicated in the table of the alphabet. The hundreds from 500 to 900 are represented either by the five final letters or by the combination of Ji with the letters immediately preceding; thus T or pn 500, n or "ir 600, ) lan or pin 700, C| or nn 800, V or pnn 900 Thou 12 ORTHOGRAPHT. §i 10 sands are represented by units with two dots placed over them, thus 8 1000, etc. Compound numbers are formed by joining the appropriate units to the tens and hundreds, thus s:n 421, Fifteen is, however, made not by ni , which are the initial letters of the divine name Jehovah, ■iin'', but by its 9+6. This use of the letters is found in the accessories of the Hebrew text, e. g. in the numeration of the chapters and verses, and in the Masoretic notes, but not in the text itself. Whethei these or any other signs of number were ever employed by the original writers of Scripture, or by the scribes in copying it, may be a doubtful matter. It has been ingeniously con- jectured, and with a show of plausibility, that some of the discre|)ancies of numbers in the Old Testament may be accounted for by assuming the existence of such a system of symbols, in which errors might more easily arise than in fully written words. The Vowels. ^10. The letters now explained constitute the body of the Hebrew text. These are all that belonged to it in its original form, and so long as the language was a living one nothing more was necessary, for the reader could mentally supply the deficiencies of the notation from his familiarity with his native tongue. But when Hebrew ceased to be spoken the case was different ; the knowledge of the true pronunciation could no longer be presumed, and difficulties would arise from the ambiguity of individual words and their doubtful relation to one another. It is the design of the Masoretic points ( nnio'a tradition) to remedy or obviate these inconveniences by supplying what was lacking in this mode of writing. The authors of this system did not venture to make any change in the letters of the sacred text. The signs which they introduced were entirely supplementary, consist- ing of dots and marks about the text fixing its true pronun- $11 VOWELS. 13 ciation and auxiliary to its proper interpretation. This haa been done with the utmost nicety and minuteness, and with such evident accuracy and care as to make them rehable and efficient if not indispensable helps. These points or signs are of three kinds, 1. those representing the vowels, 2. those affecting the consonants, 3. those attached to words. a. As illustrations of the ambiguity both as to sound and sense of indi- vidual words, when written by the letters only, it may be stated that 12T is in Gen. 12: 4 •f'^'l he spake, i?i Ex. 6: 29 na'n speak and li'l speak- ing, in Prov. 25 : 11 13^ spoken, in Gen. 37 : 14 ^3^ word, in 1 Kin. 6 : 16 lifl the oracle or most holy place of the temple, in Ex. 9 : 3 "13^. pestilence. So pllJil is in Gen. 29 : 10 is'a^l and he watered, and in the next verse pfe^l andhe kissed; xz^'i occurs twice in Gen. 29 : 23, the first time it is si'l and he broiight, the second NSJI and he came; Qinscm is in Jer. 32: 37 first oinaicrn omd I will bring them again, and then D'^Mdni and I will cause them to dwell; Diao is in Gen. 14 : 19 D^aa heaven, and in Isa. 5 : 20 D^c-iU putting. This ambiguity is, however, in most cases removed by the con- nection in which the words are found, so that there is little practical diffi- culty for one who is well acquainted with the language. Modern Hebrew 18 commonly written and read withojit the points : and the same is true oi its kindred tongues the Syriac and Arabic, though each of these has a system of points additional to the letters. ^11. 1. The alphabet, as has been seen, consisted exclu- sively of consonants, since these were regarded as a sufficiently exact representation of the syllables into whiph in Hebrew they invariably enter. And the omission of the vowels occa- sioned less embarrassment, because in the Semitic family of languages generally, unlike the Indo-European, they form no part, properly speaking, of the radical structure of the word, and consequently do not aid in expressing its essential mean- ing, but only its nicer shades and modifications. Still some notation of vowels was always necessary, and this was furnish- ed in a scanty measure by the vowel-letters, or, as they are also called, quiescents, or jraa^j-es lectionis (guides in reading). The weakest of the palatals '^ was taken as the representative of the vowels I and e of the same organ to which in sound it bears a close affinity ; the weakest of the labials i was in like manner made to represent its cognates u and 6 ; and the 14 ORTHOGRAPHY. §11 two weak gutturals s and n were written for the guttural vowel a, as well as for the compound vowels S and o of which a is one of the elements. Letters were more rarely employed to represent short vowels ; n or '' for e is the most frequent case ; others are exceptional. a. Medial a when written at all, as it very rarely is, is denoted by N , e. g. Bsb lal Judg. 4 : 21, 5ST dag- Neh. 13 : 16 K'thibh, CXp /cam Hos. 10 : 14, iiTSts "zazel Lev. 16: 8, BSl rash Prov. 10: 4 and in a few other passages, masi sometimes for ramoth, isia tsavvdr, -SOsas Hos. 4 : 6 if not an error in the text perhaps lor emasaJc; final a, which is much more frequent- ly written, is denoted by rt, e. g. nij gala, na^a malka, nnx atta. rarely and only as an Aramisism by S , e. g. »Jn hhogga Isa. 19:17, snip korhha Ezek. 27 : 31 K'thibh, Kfiaj gabh'ha Ezek. 31 : 5 K'thibh. The writing of e and I. O and U is optional in the middle of words but necessary at the end, e. g. nn"'i2 or nipiis isicnlktm, ^niis tsivvilhl ; ".a'J or ftiia shabhu. In the former position i stands for the first pair of vowels, and 1 for the second, e. g. mp'^J'^a menlkath, TiaioJ n'sughothl ; S for e and so situated is rare and exceptional, e. g. taxi resh Prov. 6 : 11, 30 : 8, and perhaps yS3i yanets Eccles. 12:5; nxi zolh, nsns poroth Ezek. 31:8, inNsn bilstsolhav Ezek. 47: 11; At the end of words e is commonly expressed by '', and o by 1 , though fi is frequently and K rarely employed for the same purpose, e. g. ■'3ba malkhe, isba malko; JT'n A'j/e, nsis parOy iib /o. Final g is re- presented by n, medial e if written at all by "', e. g. nin^ yWye, i^3■'''■'^^ or njinn tih'yena. b. The employment of the vowel-letters in conformity with the scale just given, is further governed, (I.) By usage, which is in many words and tbrras almost or quite invariable; in others it fluctuates, thus sobhebh is commonly 230 or 3310, only once a'^ao 2 Kin. 8 : 21 ; ya'kobh is apy ex- cept in Jer. 33:26 where it is aipsi; thease is niasn, but in Ex. 25 : 31 nas^n ; gtham according to the analogy of similar grammatical forms would be ens, but in Ps. 19: 14 it is nnis ; hemlr is in Jer. 2:11 written in both the usual and an unusual way, n^an and "i^aTi ; m'lakhim is o'^aba except in 2 Sam. 11 : 1, where it is .Q^asba; g'bhaloth is in Deut. 32 : 8 nbaJ, in Isa. 10: 13 nbias, in Ps. 74:17 mbiaS; la meaning not is xb, meaning to him is 1^ , though these are occasionally interchanged ; zo is written both ff and 11; and po fis, is and NS. (2.) The indisposition to multiply the vowel-letters unduly in the same word, e. g. 'lo'h mis , 'lohiih Qinist ; ndthun lins, n'thUnim D'jr.J or nj'nj . (3.) The increased tendency to their employment in the later books of the Bible, e. g. ma klfhh Dan. 11:6, always elsewhere na ; lailp kodhesh Dan. 11 : 30, for Oip ; T'lT ddmdh in the books of Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah and Zechariah, elsewhere com- monly in . This must, however, be taken with consider-able abatement, as is shown by such examples as addirlm QinilX Ex. 15: 10, Dllx Ezek. 32:18. It is to be observed that those cases in which x is used to record vcwels must be carefully d'stinguished from those in which it properly ^12 VOWELS. IE oelongs to the consonantal structure of the word, though from its weak Dess it may have lost its sound, as KSa matsa, ')Vi!!K"i rlshon. § 57, 2. ' 2. When used to represent the Hebrew vowels, a ia sounded as in father, Q, as in fat, e as in there, e as in met, I as in machine, i as in pin, o as in note, o as in not, u as in rule, and u as in full. The quantity will be marked when the vowels are long, but not when they are short. § 12. There are nine points or inasoretic signs represent- ing vowels (nisissn motions, viz.^ by which consonants are moved or pronounced) ; of these three are long, three short, and three doubtful. They are shown in the following table, the horizontal stroke indicating their position with reference to the letters of the text. Long Vowels. yaj^ Ka'-mets a — ■•nis? Tse'-re B — dbin Hho'-lem 6 -^ Short Vowels. np)B Pdt-tahh a — iiab Se'-ghol e — Si^bn ira^ Ka'-mets Hha-tuph' 9 — Doubtful Vowels. pn'ifi Hhl'-rik ~ I ox i yrita Shu'-rek faps Kib'-buts " u or u AU these vowel-points are written under the letter aftei which they are pronounced except two", viz., Hholem and Shurek. Hholem is placed over the left edge of the letter to which it belongs, and is thus distinguished from the accent R'bhi*, which is a dot over its centre. When fol- lowed by IB or preceded by to it coincides with the diacritical point over the letter, e. g. niD'a moshe, sito sonB; when it follows 10 or precedes to it is written over its opposite arm, 16 ORTHOGEAPHT. §12 e. g. ^h'6 shoniEr, iBisiin tirpos. Its presence in these cases must accordingly be determined by the circumstances. If preceded by a letter without a vowel-sign, © will be osh and te OS ; if it have itself no vowel-sign, to will be so and fe sho, except at the end of words. Shurek is a dot in the bosom of the letter Vav, thus *i. It wiU be observed that there is a double notation of the vowel u. When there is a T in the text this vowel, whether long or short, is indicated by a single dot vpithin it, and called Shurek ; in the absence of 1 it is indicated by three dots placed obliquely beneath the letter to which it belongs, and called Kibbuts. a. The division of the vowels given above differs from the common one into five long and five short, according to which Hhirik is counted aa two, viz., Hhirik magnum ■'. = «, and Hhirik parvum -:- ^= i; and Shurek IS reckoned a distinct vowel from Kibbuts, the former being a and the latter u. To this there are two objections. (1.) It confuses the masoretic signs with the letters of the text, as though they were coeval with them and formed part of the same primitive mode of writing, instead of being quite distinct in origin and character. The masoretic vowel-sign is not "' . but -:-. The punctuators never introduced the letter i into the text; they found it already written .precisely where it is at present, and all that they did was to add the point. And instead of using two signs for i, as they had done in the case of a, e. and o, they used but one, viz., a dot beneath the letter, whether i was long or short. The confusion of things thus sep- arate in their nature was pardonable at a time when the points were sup- posed to be an original constituent of the sacred text, but not now when their more recent origin is universally admitted. (2.) It is inaccurate. The distinction between "^ . and ^, 1 and ~r, is not one of quantity, for i and u are expressed indifferently with or without Yodh and Vav. Gesenius, in his Lehrgebaude, while he retains the division of the vowels into five long and five short, admits that it is. erroneous and calcu- lated to mislead ; and it has been discarded by Rodiger in the latest edi- tions of his smaller grammar. That which was proposed by Gesenius, however, as a substitute, is perplexed and obscure, and for this reason, if there were no others, is unfitted for the wants of pupils in the early stage of their progress. On the other hand, the triple arrangement here adopted after the example of Ewald, has the recommendation not only of clearness and correctness, but of being, instead of an innovation, a return to old opinions. The scheme of five long and five short vowels originated with Moses and David Kimchi, who were led to it by a comparison of the Latin and its derivatives. From them it was adopted by Reuchlin in his Rudimenta Hebraica, and thus became current among Christians. The Jewish grammarians, before the Kimchis, however, reckoned Kibbuts ant Shurek as one vowel, Hhirik as one, and even Kamets and Kamei* §13 VOWELS. 17 Hhatuph as one on account of the identity of the symbol employed to represent them. They thus made out seven vowels, the same number as in Greek, where the distinction into long, short and doubtful also pre- vails. That the literary impulses of the Orientals were chiefly received from the Greeks is well known ; that the suggestion of a vowel-system came to the Syrians from this quarter is certain, both from direct testi inony to this effect and from the shapes of their vowels, which still betray their origin. May not the Hebrews have learned something from the same school? b. The names of the vowels, with the exception of Kamets-Hhatuph contain the sounds of the vowels which they are intended to represent Kibbuts in the last, the others in their first syllable. Their signification IS indicative either of the figure of the vowel or the mode of pronouncing it. Kamets and Kibbuts, contraciion, i. o. of the mouth ; Pattahh, open- ing- j "Cserejbursiing forth; SeghoX, cluster of grapes ; Hhirik, gnashing ; Hholem, strength; Kamets-Hhatuph, hurried Kamets; Bhurek, whistling. It is a curious circumstance that notwithstanding the diversity of the vowel-systems in the Syriac, Arabic, and Hebrew, the name Pattahh is common to them all. §13. This later and more complete method of noting the vowels does not displace but is superinduced upon the scanty one previously described. Hence it colnes to pass that such vowels as were indicated by letters in the first in- stance are now doubly written, i. e. both by letters and points. By this combination each of the two methods serves to illustrate and explain the other. Thus the added signs determine whether the letters ""ifis (which have been formed into the technical word iirisj U/i^vi) are in any given case to be regarded as vowels or as consonants. If these letters are themselves followed by a vowel or a Sh'va, §16, or have a Daghesh forte, §23, they retain their consonant sound ; for two vowels never come together in Hebrew, and Sh'va and Daghesh forte belong only to consonants : thus ^''^'p koveha, tiTSB mitsvoth (where S being provided with a separate point, the Hholem must belong after 1), n^riT vhaya D*)? hiyyam. Otherwise they quiesce in a preceding or accompanying vowel-sign, provided it is homogeneous with themselves; that is to say, they have the sound indicated by it, the vowel- sign merely interpreting what was originally denoted by the 18 ORTHOGRAPHT. . §14 letter. E and i are homogeneous to "^ , o and w to i , and these being the only vowels which they were ever employed to represent, they can quiesce in no others ; thus "'3. bi, "''a ■ne, x-^^ ffc, ia bo, 'ib lu, but '''ite sarai/, lia yoy, I'lba ffuliiy, in tuv, ii^ shulEv, IT ziv ; the combination I"", is pronounced av, T^iy and li» «;? 2 Sam. 2: 19, also written bJ<-niU3 1 Chron. 2: 16. In such words as naiaij Jer. 22:6, fiasir Deut. 21 : 7. n does not quiesce in Kibbuts, for the points belong to ihe marginal readings isais , IDSlT § 46. §14. On the other hand the vowel-letters shed light upon the stability of the vowels and the quantity of the doubtful signs. 1. As ? was scarcely ever and ii seldom represented by a vowel-letter, Hhirik with Yodh ^ .) is almost invariably long and Shurek (i) commonly so. 2. The occa- sional absence in individual cases of the vowel-letters, does not determine the quantity of the signs for i and u; but I heir uniform absence in any particular words or forms makes it almost certain that the vowel is short. 3. The occasional presence of 1 and "' to represent one of their homogeneous 'on'2 vowels proves nothing as to its character; but if in any ^15, 16 VOWELS. 19 word or form these letters are regularly written, the vowel is, as a general rule, immutable. When 1 and ^ stand for theii long homogeneous vowels, these latter are said to be written fully, e. g, l=ip kol, T'? nir, rri'a muth; without these quies- cent letters they are said to be written defectively, e. g ■iinapn Jfklmdthi, OttS kumus. a. Hhirik with Yodh is short in T'ii''a(nj vak'niittlv 1 Sam. 17 . 3b TjiO'i-ipia bikk'rothekha. Ps. 45:10, -m'^-'b likk'hath Prov. 30:17. In sVpis 1 Chron. 12: 1, 20, i is probably long, although the word is always else\\rhere written without the Yodh ; as it sometimes has a secondary accent on the first syllable and sometimes not (see 1 Sam. 30: 1), it may have had a twofold pronunciation tslk'lag, and tsiMag. Shurek as u ia of much more frequent occurrence, e. g. "'fein hhukke, B''fe!|S^ Pummlm, nsin hhukka Ps. 102 : 5, cfasia^X 2 Chron. 2 ;7, n'sin Ezek. 16 : 34. §15. The vowels may be further distinguished into pure, a, i, u, and diphthongal, e, o ; e being a combination of a and i, or intermediate between them, and o holding the same re- lation to a and u. Sh'va. §16. 1. The absence of a vowel is indicated by — Sh'va (STO emptiness, or as written by Chayug, the oldest of Jew- ish grammarians, saw), which serves to assure the reader that one has not been inadvertently omitted. It is accordingly placed under aU vowelless consonants except at the end of words, where it is regarded as unnecessary, the absence of a vowel being there a matter of course. If, however, the last letter of a word be 1 , or if it be immediately preceded by another vowelless letter, or be doubled by the point called Daghesh-forte, § 23, Sh'va is written to preclude the doubt which is possible in these cases, e. g. ni'i'aoa, ijlba, ai»p, B'l'a'J, PS, r\hs. Sh'va is not given to a quiescent letter, since it represents not a consonant but a vowel, e. g. fi)5''i!'in , nor as a general rule to a final consonant preceded by a 20 ORTHOGKAPHT. § 10 quiescent ; thus riSBri , nsii Ruth 3:4; n"'?nT Isa 62 : <'5, though in this case it is sometimes written, e. g. t^si' 2 Sam. 14 : 3 ; n''^m 2 Sam. 14 : 2 ; 'n'^'ni Judg. 13 : 3; nsiir. 1 Kin. 11 : 13. 8 at the end of a word, preceded either by a vowelless letter or a quiescent, is termed otiant, and is left unpointed, e. g. sun s-isn sii-n s^in . a. Final "] may receive Sh'va for the sake of distinction not only from Tj , as already suggested, but also from 1 with which it might be in danger of being confounded in manuscripts; Freytag conjectures that it is prop- erly a part of the letter, like the stroke in the corresponding final i^in Arabic. In such forms as T'^5'] Sh'va is omitted with the closing letters because the "^ is not sounded. 2. Sh'va may be either silent (TO quiescens), or vocal (yj mobile). At the close of syllables it is silent. But at the beginning of a syllable the Hebrews always facilitated the pronunciation of concurrent consonants by the introduction of a hiatus or shght breathing between them ; a Sh'va so situated is consequently said to be vocal, and has a sound approaching that of a hastily uttered e, as in given. This will be represented by an apostrophe, thus, "it'7'?T' b'midhhar, 'is pkadhtem. a. According to Kimchi (Mikhlol Ibl. 189) Sh'va was pronounced in three different ways, according to circumstances. (1.) Before a guttural it inclined > the sound of the following vowel, e. g. lis^ y'ahbedh, psiu t'elh, 1"^ d'D,, and if accompanied by Methegh, §44, It had the full sound of that vowel, e. g. ixto sSS, "via tlhhl, Byisb loolam. (8.) Before Yodh it inclined to ?', e. g. 5|5S|;3 b'ya'kobh, ni^3 k'yom, and with Methegh was sounded as Hhirik, e. g. n^a biyadh. (3.) Before any other letter it in- clined to a, e. g. •~i3'^a b'rakha., n"'^"'ba g^lllim, and with Methegh wn« pronounced as Pattahh ni^npiDa bamakheloth. 3. Sh'va may, again, be simple or compound. Some- times, particularly when the first consonant is a guttural, which from its weakness is in danger of not being distinctly heard, the hiatus becomes still more audible, and is assimi- lated in sound to the short guttural vowel a, or the diph. tliongal e or o, into which it enters. This assimilation is rep. ^17 V0WEL8. 21 resented by combining the sign for Sh va with those for the short vowels, thus forming what are called the compoundl Sh'vas in distinction from the simple Sh'va previously ey- plained. These are, Hhateph-PattahV Hhateph-Seghol Hhateph-Kamets thus, lbs; "modh. thus, ^bs *mor. thus, ibn hWll. a. Hhateph (6)0(1 snatching) denotes the rapidity of utterance or the hurried character of the sounds represented by these symbols. 6. The compound Sh'vas, though for the most part restricted to the gutturals, are occasionally written under other consonants in place of sim- ple Sh'va, to indicate more distinctly that it is vocal: thus, Hhateph- Pattahh 3lr!J|i Gen. 8:12, ni^ari Gen. 27:38; Hhateph-Kamets nn^b Gen. 2 : 23, ri|iiR;3X Jer. 31 : 33 ; but never Hhateph-Seghol except n'^ysbs 2 Sam. 6:5 in some editions, e. g. that of Stephanus. This is done with so little uniformity that the same word is diflerently written in this respect, e. g. frissa 2 Kin. 2 : 1, nns&a ver. 11. Pattahh Puktive. §17. A similar hiatus or slight transition sound was used at the end of words in connection with the gutturals. When y , ti , or the consonantal Tt at the end of words is pre- ceded by a long heterogeneous vowel (i. e. another than a), or is followed by another vowelless consonant, it receives a Pattahh furtive — , which resembles in sound an extremely short a, and is pronounced before the letter under which it is written, e. g. inii rWM, saia sAumo", «"!i'^|5'a mag1ibi"'h, tf^aiB sUamaH, nn^ yi%M. a. Some grammarians deny that Pattahh furtive can be found under a penultimate guttural, contending that the vovyel-sign is in such cases a proper Pattahh, and that nsauj should accordingly be read shdmaat, and iin" yihhad. But both the Sh'va under the final letter, §16, and the Daghesh-lene in it, § 21, show that the guttural is not followed by a vowel. The sign beneath it must consequently be Pattahh furtive, and represent an antecedent vowel-sound. In some manuscripts Pattahh furtive is writ- ten as Hhateph- Pattahh, or even as-simple Sh'va ; thus, S'^P'J or S^P^ for Sip:- •, ' ■ 22 orthographt. §1s Syllables. ^18. 1. Syllables are formed by the combination of ccnsonants and vowels. As two vowels never come togethel in the same word in Hebrew without an intervening conso- nant, there can never be more than one vowel in the same syllable ; and with the single exception of i occurring at the beginning of words, no syllable ever consists of a vowel alone. Every syllable, with the exception just stated, must begin with a consonant, and may begin with two, but never with more than two. Syllables ending with a vowel, whether represented by a quiescent letter or not, are called simple, e. g. ^^ I'Mia, nbiy o-ld. (The first syllable of this second example begins, it will be perceived, with the consonant "S . though this disappears in the notation given of its sound.) Syllables ending with a consonant, or, as is possible at the close of a word, with two consonants, are said to be mixed : thus OMj? ham-tern, r^s^i^ ha-lahht. As the vocal Sh'vas, whether simple or compound, are not vowels properly speak- ing, but simply involuntary transition sounds, they, with the consonants under which they stand, cannot form distinct syllables, but are attached to that of the following vowel, Pattahh furtive in Hke manner belongs to the syllable formed by the preceding vowel. Thus ?iTr ^Vo", "iss "ni are mono- syllables. 2. Long vowels always stand in simple syllables, and short vowels in mixed syllables, unless they be accented. But accented syllables, whether simple or mixed, may con- tain indifferently a long or a short vowel. a. The following may serve as a specimen of the division of Hebren wor(jB into their proper syllables ; thus, n|jK D''h^?$ K'ia c'i''3 D'ix nH^in isb r\\ frdha'm 'lo-hi'm b'ro' b'yo'm a-dha'm to-1'dho'th se'-pher ze' Gen. 5 : 1. ink tips o-'fiSs n!ia"i3 O-tho' a-sa' 'lo-hi'm bidh-mOlfc ^19 SYLLABLES. 33 6. The reason of tne ru.e for the quantity of syllables appears to be this. In consequence of their brevity, the short vowels required the ad dition of a following consonant to make the utterance full and complete unless the want of this was compensated by the greater energy of pronun- ciation due to the accent. The long vowels were sufficiently complete without any such addition, though they were capable of receiving it undei the new energy imparted by the accent. This pervading regularity, which is so striking a feature of the Hebrew language, was the foundatiou of the sysiema morarum advocated by some of the older grammarians of Holland and Germany. The idea of this was, that each syllable was equal to three moras, tliat is, three rests, or a bar of three beats ; a long vowel being equivalent to two morae, or two beats, a short vowel to one. and the initial or final consonant or consonants also to one : thus Pibajs fc (1) -I- a (3) = 3. t (I) + a (1) + U (1) = 3. An accented syllable might have one mora or beat either more or less than the normal quan- tity. This system was not only proposed by way of grammatical explana- tion, but also made the basis of a peculiar theory of Hebrew prosody. See Gesenius, Geschichte d. Heb. Sprache, p. 123. c. The cases in which short vowels occur in unaccented simple sylla bles, are all due to the disturbing influence exerted by the weak letters upon the normal forms of words ; thus, nirfi ha-elh is for nsn, and Kinr hi-hu' for liah-hu' : such words as KiB'n, X'lB, nIjb, nsn, fisjs are formed after the analogy of T|^a. A long vowel in an unaccented mixed syllable is found in but one word, and that of foreign origin, "iSSiZitsba bel-t'shdts- tsar , though here, as in the majority of instances falling under the previ- ous remark, the syllable receives, if not the primary, yet the secondary accent, e. g. ''rn'T'Sn, D"'"inrt , 153?,P1. The same is the case when a long vowel is retained before Makkeph, e. g. ''^"Hld. In the Arabic, which is exceedingly rich in vowels, there are comparatively few mixed syllables; nearly every consonant has its own vowel, and this more frequently short than long. The Chaldee, which is more sparing in its use of vowels than the Hebrew, observes in general the same rule with respect to the quan- tity of syllables, though not with the same inflexible consistency. Ambiguous Signs. §19. It will now be possible, by aid of the principles already recited, to determine the quantity of the doubtful vowels, and to remove the ambiguity which appears to exist in certain vowel-signs. 1. Hhirik, Shurek, and Kibbuts, in unaccented simple syllables, must be long, and in unaccented mixed syllables, short, e. g. ©'!!''? or W'i': yl-rash, ^i^? yibh-nu, iiJua or iSia ghhu-lo, ^\ or ill'' yul-ladh, d53 or Q?13 hul-lam, ''iiy^ 24 OBTHOGRAPHI. ^19 or "^i.yn mauzzi. In accented syllables, whether simple or mixed, they are always long, e. g. Dln''te or wvS'^ si-hlm,'''7 It, Vis or bia^ (fbhul, infcnn or iniicn'i d'ru-shu-hu, the only ex- ception being that Ilhirik is short in the monosyllabic parti- cles DS , tJsi , D» , yq, and in some abbreviated verbal forms of the class called Lamedh-He, e. g. T*:i, Siic*'D, a'^?. The only cases of remaining doubt are those in which these vowels are followed by a letter with Sh'va, either sim- ple or compound. If the former, it might be a question whether it was silent or .vocal, and consequently whether the syllable was simple or mixed. If the latter, though the syl- lable is of course simple, the weak letter which follows may interfere with the operation of the law. Here the etymology must decide. The vowel is long or short as the grammatical form may require ; thus in n'jn;;!, -jSnn , il5"nNn;;i Gen. 22 : 8, which follow the analogy of ^'lij''? , and in ''?3D Isa. 10 : 34, ■iS'QjP the first vowel is short ; in D?f5?? , ^''r?!' the first vowel is long. In a few instances the grammatical form in which Hhirik is employed is itself doubtful ; the distinction is then made by means of Methegh, §44, which is added to the vowel- sign if it is long, but not if it is short ; thus, is^,'? yi-ru, from sn^ to fear, and '^'i't^. yl-slinu from "liij^ to sleep ; but '^y: yir-u from Tk") to see, and '^'JO^, yish-nv, from sifi? to do a second time. 2. Kamets d and Kamets-Hhatuph o are both repre- sented by the same sign ( t ), but may be distinguished by rules similar to those just given. In an unaccented simple syllable it is Kamets ; in an unaccented mixed syllable it is Kamets-Hhatuph ; in an accented syllable, whether simple or mixed it is Kamets, e. g. "t^ dorbhdr, "^icsn hhoph-sJil, niia md-vetli, hb^ Idm-md, D''P3 bot-tlm. Before a letter wath simple Sh'va, the distinction is mostly made by Methegh, §44 ; without Methegh it is always Kamets-Hhatuph, with it commonly Kamets, e. g. ~'i?3i7 hhoJch-md, iraDn hlid-klimd. Before a guttural with Hhateph-Kamets or Kamets-Hhatuph \ §19 AMBIGUOUS SIGNS. 2E it is frequently u, though standing in a simple syllable and accompanied by Methegh, e. g. I'ina ho-hh°n, D'iasn to>. obhdhBm. The surest criterion, however,' and in many cases the only decisive one, is found in the etymology. If the \owel be derived from Hholem, or the grammatical form re- quu-es an or a short vovi^el, it is Kamets-Hhatuph ; but if it be derived from Pattahh, or the form requires an a or a long vowel, it is Kamets : thus i^i'?«5 with the prefixed con- junction vo°myyoth, n^'Sijin with the article hofniyya ; Tay;; in the Hophal yo'madh, ^ni^Ot' Isa. 44.: 13 in the Piel ytlta"' r2hu. The first vowel is o in B?']ns from "ilni, Qiis'iiJ froir n-;p, n^isn© from irinfe, ^^-nijw Isa. 38 : 14, ^^-na]5 Nmn. 22 : 11, ■'5-n'iN Num. 23 : 7 and the like, and the first two vow- els in such words as D3^?s from b?S, DsCNtt Isa. 30 : 12 from DiSKj, nbanj? Deut. 20 : 2, k\'yo'^ Hos. 13 : 14, ^u;: 2 Chron. 10:10, oy-ba)? 2 Kin. 15:10, because. they are shortened from Hholem. On the other hand the first vowel is a in 'hxH Job 16:19 from Into, Qifenrj from tht) , ^Wti3. from naa, and in F\ci?tt, R^^jJ and the like, because it is originally and properly Kamets. The word iTiTa© is in Ps. 86 : 2 the imperative sliomru, in Job 10:12 the preterite shamrd. a. In a very few instances Kamets-Hhatuph is found in a syllable hearing a conjunctive accent, viz.: "'S'ln Ps. 38:21, bs Ps. 35:10, also Prov. 19 : 7 (in some copies), and in the judgment of Ewald "isa Judg. 19 : 5, comp. ver. 8 and :s Ezek. 41 : 25 ; in Dan. 11 : 12 or^l the points belong to the marginal reading Bil, and the vowel is consequently Ka- mets. Tliere are also a few cases in which Kamets remains in a mixed eyllable, deprived of its accent by Makkeph, §43, without receiving Methegh, viz. : -rya Ps. 16:5, -3"np Ps. 55: 19, 22, "=0 Ps. 74:5; and a final unaccented Kamets is not affected by the insertion of Daghesh-fbrte conjunctive, § 24, in the initial letter of the following word, e. g. Ota PitilC^ Gen. 31 : 13. When an accent takes the place of Methegh, it serves squally to distinguish rt from C, e. g. 's?:') Ex. 21:88 v'na.gli'phu, sinsafl Ex. 21 : 35 Swafc^Va. §45. 5. ' ' . '' b Inasmuch as trnna is derived from "irio mahhar, its first vowel might be suspected to be a; but as it is so constantly written with Hliateph-Kamets, the preceding vowel is probably conformed to it. It is consequently regarded and pronounced as o. Kimchi (Mikhlol, fol 188) declares that the first vowel in •^h'n 1 Sam. 13: 21, niih'i^ Eccles. 12 : 11 26 OETHOGRAPHT. § 20 and l^b^ Num. 24 : 7 was universally held to be Kaniets, and that with the exception of Rabbi Jonah ben Gannach, who was of a contrary mind, the same unanimity prevailed in regard to the first vowel of IS^iJ Ezok. 40 43. As, however, this last word is in every other place written without the Methegh, and there is no analogy for such words as those mentioned above leaving a in their initial syllable, the best authorities are now agreed that the vowel is 6, and the words are accordingly read dorbhun, etc. In MEB^ jasper, and rfs"!^ emerald, Ezek. 28 : 13, which are mentioned by Kimchi in the same connection, the first vowel is Kamets. c. In some manuscripts and a few of the older printed books, e. g. Ste- phanos' Hebrew Bible and Reuchlin's Rudimenta Hebraica, Kamets- Hhatuph is denoted by ( t: ). It then differs from Kamets, but is liable to be confounded with Hhateph-Kamets. It can, however, be distinguishea from it by the circumstance that Kamets-Hhaluph is always followed either by simple Sh'va, Daghesh-forte, or Methegh ; none of which ever immediately succeed Hhateph-Kamets. Such a form as iBag Ezek. 26: 9 in the editions of Michaelis and Van der Hooght is an impossible one if ( ''0 have its ordinary meaning. d. It is surprising that in so minute and careful a system of orthogra phy as that of the Masorites, there should be no symbol for 6 distinct frorc that for a; and some have felt constrained in consequence to suppose tha the signs for these two vowels were originally different, but became assimilated in the course of transcription. This seems unlikely, however. The probability is that a and 6, whose resemblance even we can perceive, were so closely allied in the genuine Hebrew pronunciation, that one sign was thought sufficient to represent them, especially as the Masorites were intent simply on indicating sounds ^ithout concerning themselves with grammatical relations. § 20. 1. As simple Sh'va is vocal at the beginning of a syllable and silent at its close, there can be no doubt as to its character when it stands under initial or final letters. Pre- ceding the first vowel of a word it must of course be vocal, and following the last vowel it must be silent, Qi?'i?T zkhartdm, ri'ii?! zuJchart. In the middle of a word, the question whether it belongs to the syllable of the preceding or the following vowel must be determined by the circumstances. If a com- plete syllable precedes, that is, either an unaccented long vowel or a vowelless consonant^ serving as the complement of a previous short vowel, it is vocal. If it be preceded by a short vowel which cannot make a complete syllable with- out the aid of a follovnng consonant, or by a long accented ^ 21 DAGHESH-LENE. 2"^ vowel, it is silent: "^y^ zo-hlirB, i'tstpi Uz-Jctr, itst si'M-m^ TObtij:n liktol-nu. Sh'va under a letter doubled by Daghesb forte, § 23, is vocal, such a letter being equivalent to two. the first of which completes the previous syllable, and the second begins the syllable which follows : D'*'i?-jn = Q'^^^n'' haz-z Ichumn. 2. In addition to this it is to be remarked that Sh'va ia vocal after what may be called intermediate syllables ; thai is to say, when the consonant under which it stands per^ forms, as it occasionally does, the double office of completing one syllable and beginning the next. Thus, when it follows a consonant from which Daghesh-forte has been omitted, ''io!??!'!! vayhhalcshu for vay-ybJiah-h'sliu, or the first of two similar letters, in order that the reduplication may be made more distinct, 'libn hal'lu, in^bp kil'lath, '^'^ tsiVlo, ''"'^s? aVlay, "'pj'n hJdk'kt, and in several other cases, which wiU be more particularly described in § 22. a. The same double office is performed by gutturals beginning one syllable and yet inclining to complete the one before it, §18. 2. c. In nsn , for example, S belongs in a measure to both syllables. It properly begins the second, and yet it is preceded by a short vowel just as if it ended the first, which is accordingly to be reckoned an intermediate sylla- ble, being in strictness neither simple nor mixed, but partaking of tha nature of both. Daghesh-Lene. § 21. The second class of signs added to the Hebrew 'text are those which are designed to guide in the pronuncia- tion of the consonants. These are the diacritical point over Shin, Daghesh-lene, Daghesh-forte, Mappik, and Raphe. The use of the first of these has already been sufficiently explained, § 3. 1 . 1. Daghesh-lene (^p »W) is a point inserted in the six letters n s D 1 a a (technically called B'gJtadh K'j)liath), 1,0 indicate the loss of their aspiration, e. g. a bh, 3 b, etc, 28 OBTHOGKAPHY. § 21 A.S these letters are always aspirated after a vowel-sound, however sUght, and never as an initial utterance or when fol lowing a consonant, they invariably require Daghesh-lene whenever they are not immediately preceded by a vowel or a vocal Sh'va. It is consequently inserted in the initial aspirate of a word which begins a verse, fT^ostiSi Gen. 1:1, or which follows a word bearing a disjunctive accent (inas- much as this represents a pause of longer or shorter dura- tion), wa in''5^ Ex. 1 : 1, If i npy Gen. 3 : 22, or ending in a consonant, ^?a-b^• , ''ii-i^ n-^bsa Gen. 24 : 42 ; but. not if it fol- lows a word ending in a vowel and having a conjunctive accent, ninn ■'^sp, iinn riin';n Gen. 1 : 2. The sacred name nin^ is followed by Daghesh-lene, even though it may have a conjunctive accent. Num. 10 : 29, Deut. 3 : 26, Josh. 10 : 30, 11 : 8, Ps. 18 : 21, because in reading the Jews always sub- stitute for it the word ''i'T*, which ends in a consonant. In a very few cases, however, e. g. 02 ''t^^: Ps. 68 : 18, i~rri5 Isa. 34 : 11, tta ibia Ezek. 23 : 42, Daghesh-lene is not in- serted after a vowel-letter, which retains its consonant sound. 2. Daghesh-lene is inserted in a medial or final aspirate preceded by a voweUess consonant, whether this be accom- panied by silent Sh'va or Pattahh furtive, e. g. R"ir!03, ns'biB; but not if it be preceded by a vowel or vocal ShVa, whether simple or compound, e. g. fT"?!!^, ^k'^^t . a. The primary signification of the name Daghesh is commonly ex- plained from the Syriac ^^-« ? ('^M), to which CastelluB in his lexicon gives the sense o? piercing. This is by some applied to the puncture or point which is its written sign, by others to its power of sharpening the Bound of letters by removing their aspiration or doubling them. Buxtorf, however, in his Chaldee Lexicon, disputes the existence of such a root in either S3rriac or Chaldee, alleging that in Prov. 12 : 18, the passage quoted to prove the word, the true reading is M-^' (SC)J-i). The six letters which receive Daghesh-lene in Hebrew have the same twofold pronunciation in Syriac, a red dot called Rukhokh (•^o? softness), being written beneath them when they were to be aspirated, and another called Kushoi (■ - ^ - - hardness), being written above them when they were not. § 22 DAGHESH-LENE. 29 fa. Grummarians are not agreed whether the aspirated or unaspirated Bound of these consonants was the original one. There being no data fo* ■"he settlement of the question, each decides it by his own theory of pho- netic changes. The correctness of the Masoretic punctuation has some • imes been questioned in regard to this matter, on the ground of the im probability of such fluctuation in the sound of these letters in the samw word. But besides the Syriac analogy just referred to, the Sanskrit lan- guage shows the almost unlimited extent to which euphonic changes may be carried by a people possessing a sensitive and discriminating ear. The Sanskrit aspirates, besides being subjected to other mutations which can- not here be detailed, regularly lose their aspiration when finals, and under certain conditions when medials, throwing it back, where this is possible^ upon a previous letter. Bopp Kritische Grammatik, pp. 30. 42. Similar laws prevail to some extent in Greek, e. g. Opt^, Tpi)(6s; Tpi, dpeij/m; Bvw, tTvBrjv ; ovK e)(w, ov)( e^o) ; /xeS v/uv. ^ 23. The absence of Daghesh-lene in an iaspirate some- times shows a preceding simple Sh'va to be vocal when this would not otherwise have been known. In most of the cases referred to, a letter originally belonging to the succeeding syllable is by the prefixing of a short vowel drawn back to complete the syllable before.it; instead, however, of giving up its previous connection altogether, it forms an interme- diate syllable, § 20. 2, the Sh'va remaining vocal though the antecedent vowel is short ; thus, sab Vhltabh with the prefix a becomes aaba UVhhabh, not aiaba Ul-habh. a. The particular instances in which this may occur are the following, viz. : (1) The Kal imperative of verbs and the Kal infinitive with suffixes, e. g. 1"i3S, yvss, onns, ll'ins from l"a?. ; yet with occasional exceptions, as CDSDX3 Lev. 23 : 39. (2) Those forms of Pe Guttural verbs in which the first radical assumes a short vowel in place of the silent Sh'va in the reg ular inflexion, e. g. I'la?,^ D'i!??P! for 'nasi, o'lasn. (3) The construct plural of nouns inas from c^t?., nisns i'rom ri'isrs, r\'6rm from niinn, though with occasional exceptions, as "'BiB"! Cant. 8 : 6, but "'S'JJT Ps. 76:4, itias Isa.5: 10, ris-in Ps.69: 10, isia Gen. 50: 23, but on^s-ia Judg.7: 6; in^a , 'i'133 from laa are peculiar in omitting Daghesh in the singular with suffixes. (4) Three feminine nouns ending in nn, Msbia from T|^a, riib^ fromll>t'.i "'^as (only occurring with suffixes) from tas, but not nWna Also a few other nouns of different forms, viz.: D'^na'^v but ''na'^^, Hd-:u, lans, a^'snaJ, oi^nna, l^as, bknp; Josh. 15 : 38, ' cr-jisj Josh. 15:56 (5) After prefixes, as He interrogative, e.g. cnS"!^r! Gen. 29:5 from cnS'i';!, and inseparable prepositions, e. g. ^"'S'l^ from i"'M , na"i3 from ris ■'B'ia from I3fi. Usage is not -initbrm in the case of Kal infinitives folicw dO ORTHOGRAPHY. ^23 ing inseparable prepositions, e. g. awsV) -^f^??; ^S??! -'^5?) ^S?^; <^^^\ loa. 31 :4, sasb Num. 4: 23, 8: 24; nlsb, ^3)3. (6) The' suffixes of the iecond person T], D3, ^a never receive Daghesh-lene, i\i2, Dsnpa. These rales are sometimes of importance in etymology; thus, ?|';^iai3 Ezek. 27 : 12 must have as its ground form "pajs , not '(1315 J and DB'^X Hos. 7 ; 6, D3!Ti Ps. 90 : 10 cannot be infinitives with suffixes, but must be from the segholates nns , 3ri"l . 6. The omission of Daghesh-lene in the final letter of C)DiFl Prov. 30 : 6, abbreviated from Sl^DiPl or r|DiPi , is exceptional. The Daghesh occasion- ally occurring in initial aspirates after words ending in a vowel and having a conjunctive accent, is best explained not as an exception to the ordinary rules, but as Daghesh Ibrte conjunctive, § 24, e. g. 'jS33 nS'iN Gen. 11 : 31 and elsewhere, )'si nsnx Gen. 46:28, nxa nxa Ex. 15:1.'21, Fib^a >it Ex. 15: 13, nOB Pibsi Deut.'^16: 1 (comp. «|' ni'iUS Gen. 20:9), ca'n-jiSKI Deut. 31:28'(c^rap. •')) nn-'SX'! Isa. 8 : 2),' m'Ssis ^'^';^ Josh. 8:24', lo':20, y^B r,;bs Gen. 35 : 29, 13 ti:ivii ' Isa. 40 : 7. See 'also' Gen. 39 : 12, Ex. 14 : 4. 17, isa. 10:9, Job 9:2. Ex.^S: 11. 16, Ps. 35: 10, Isa. 54: 12, Jer. 20: 9, Dan. 3:3. 5: 11. The old strife as to the Daghesh in the word D'l'raS twc is not yet settled. Kimchi explained it as Daghesh-lene upon the suppo- sition that the word was abridged from n^nii'K ; Schultens as Daghesh- forte arising from an assimilated 3, contending that it was for D'jnilS from D'^n:!!: ; Nordheimer as an anomalous Daghesh-lene, introduced as a euphonic expedient to prevent the combination of an aspirated n with a sibilant, such as is obviated in the Hithpael of verbs by a transposition that would here be inadmissible. The puzzle is still further perplexed by the circumstance that it once appears with the preposition "(Ta without the Daghesh, "'niBO Judg. 16 :28, and again with the same preposition with it, D'^niaia Jon. 4: 11, the Methegh showing the Sh'va to be vocal, as might also be inferred from the fact that Daghesh-forte has been omitted. Daghesh-Porte. § 23. 1. When the same consonant was repeated with a vowel or even the shghtest hiatus intervening, so that suc- cessive movements of the organs of speech were required in the pronunciation, the Hebrews invariably wrote the letter twice. When, however, there was no interval between the reduplicated consonants, and the only audible result was a more protracted or vehement utterance of the same sound effected by a single eflfort of the organs, the letter was written but onco. This fact the Masoretic punctuators have indi- cated by placing a point called Daghesh-forte (prn ffiS'i) in the bosom of a letter so affected, to show that it is to be ^ 24 -DAGHESH-FORTE. 31 doubled iii the pronunciation ; thus, bi3?5 vayyimmal. Da ghesh-forte may be found in any letter with the exceptioc of the gutturals s n n y , which on account of their weak ness do not admit of reduplication. The letter i, par taking of this with other peculiarities of the gutturals, re- ceives it only in a very few exceptional cases, e. g. ''fcs'^ia tka. 2. The aspirates, when doubled, always at the same time lose their aspiration ; thus, 1^6;' yippaMdh. Daghesh-forte in these letters is readily distinguishable from Daghesh-lene by the consideration that a consonant cannot be pronounced double except after a vowel. A point in one of the aspirates is, therefore, Daghesh-forte if a vowel precedes, otherwise it is Daghesh-lene. 3. Daghesh-forte in 1 may be distinguished from Shurek in the same way. Inasmuch as two vowels cannot come to- gether in the same word, if a vowel precedes it is Daghesh- forte, if not it is Shurek. a. Some Grammarians speak of Daghesh-forte implicitum in the gut- turals, by which they mean that these letters appear in certain cases to complete a foregoing syllable as well as to begin that in which theyprop- " erly stand, in spite of the omission of Daghesh, which analogy would re- quire them to receive. As these are included under what have already, § 20. 2. a, been explained as intermediate syllables, it is not thought neces- sary to employ an additional term. b. The Arabs have a sign of reduplication, Teshdid ( « ), which in written above the doubled letter. The Syrians have no written sign for this purpose, and it is disputed whether their letters were ever doubled in pronunciation. According to Asseman Biblioth. Orient. III. 2. p. 379, the Western differed from the Eastern Syrians in this respect, " Occidentales nullibi literas geminant." § 24. Different epithets have been applied to Daghesh- forte to describe its various uses or the occasions of its em- ployment. 1. When separate letters, whether originally alike, or made so by assimilation, are by the inflection oi formation of words brought into juxtaposition, the Daghesh 32 OETHOGBAPHr. § 24 forte \vhich represents such a doubling is called compensa- tive; e. g. "'n'il, formed by appending the syllable "'S? to the root trbl ; ''PtiJ composed of the same syllable and the root )Ti- , whose last letter is changed to ri to conform with that which follows ; ''30 from aio. 2. When the reduplication ia indicative of a particular grammatical form the Daghesh forte is called characteristic, e. g. in the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael of verbs ; as, ?y|n, ^^nnn, and certain forms of nouns, as, liaa . 3. When it has arisen from the necessity of con- verting a previous simple syllable into a mixed one in order to preserve the quantity of a short vowel which it contains, it is Daghesh-forte conservative ; e. g. S^!! for ao^ . 4. When the initial letter of a word is doubled under the influence of the final vowel of the word preceding, it is Daghesh-forte conjunctive; e. g. n-T-nTa, ^iji^n^n;:, !ii«s iia^iji. 5. When the last letter of an interaiediate syllable is doubled in order to make the following hiatus or vocal Sh'va more distinct, it is Daghesh-forte dirimens or separative, because the letter which receives it is thus separated in part from the syllable to which it belongs ; e. g. "'isS' innbM for ''isy in'bM. 6. When the first letter of a final syllable is doubled under the influence of a previous vowel bearing the accent (mostly a pause ac- cent, § 36. 2. «.), for the sake of increased fullness and force of pronunciation, it is Daghesh-forte emphatic ; e. g. ilsiti for i'5~n . In the first three uses named above Daghesh-forte is said to be essential, in the last three it is euphonic. a. Daghesh-forte conjunctive occurs regularly after the prpnoun na , e. g. n^r3"na!| sia na Ps. 133: 1, and in a multitude of cases after final Ka- mets or Seg-hol in words accented on the penult or followed by Makkeph, h 43, 6. g. rw-nriijb Gen. 2 : 23, tsffi-nbsx Deut. 27 : 7, ii nn-jnl Num. 25:13, la-nrSS Gen. 3dT33; !T.np-iJ Num.' 34 : 6, 7, 9, lastfe'nba Ex. 13:1 (where the accent is on the ultimate), t|t!"f^??^ Prov. 15: 1 (in some edi tionB),more rarely after other vowels, e.g. ix^ W^p Gen. 19: 14, sib si-iax^ij 1 Sam. 8: 19, once after the liquid 1, e. g. xb "ib!<«1 1 Kin. U: 22 See also §22. 6. In a few instances words thus united are written as one, e. g. nja Ex.4: 2 for nj na, so Ds^a Isa. 3:15, nx^na Mai. 1:13, nkesB:) §25 DAGHESH-rORTB. 33 Isa. 27:8, and posBibly taSsj'il* Isa. 33:7. See Dr. Alexander's Com'- •nentary upon this passage. b. Daghesh-forte separative occurs only in the following examples : ri'iBX Hos. 3:2. 1:1!!': Tjiriiiis^a Ps. 45 : 10. n33''nin&3 . n'lnitii Am. 5 : 25. nr;i?SS3n Gen. 18:21. r,nft5? ' npsn Gen. 37 : 32. innaa 1=^(1 Gen. 17 : 17. cnitjiir! 1 Sam. 10: ni-i5Ha 24, 17:25, ni'ihaa . 2 Kin. 6: 32. T^h Dni-iar. Job 17 : 2. irn^a is-'san Ex. 2 : 3. friiJa tinsiT^n (7) Judg.20: ilSB? 43. !T1S3 nastin l Sam. 1 : 6. h'ns: -■ ijsinlsa. 57:6. sin^s'ljn; nn;?': Gen. 49:10. isao . nnpib Prov.30:17. i \ 1 Sam. 28 : 10, C?) Ezek. 13:20. i Isa. 33:1. oriinaaPs. 89 :' 45. Joel 1 : 17. Job 9: 18. Nah. 3 : 17. Ex. 15:17. Deut.23:ll Job 30 : 8. Ps. 141:3. Prov. 4 : 13. Judg.20:32. Jer. 4:7. Tbaolsa. 9:3, 10: 27. ■'SSSDeut. 32:32. inns? 2 Sam. 23: ' 27, Jer. 29: 27. DSiass Isa. 58 : 3. D3"iniSS Am. 5:21. ■^'=;3S(?) Cant. 1:8. n-biss Ps. 89 : 52. ^iniaiJS Ps. 77 : 20. ril's^S Prov. 27 : 25. ■'jnnBa Ps. 119; 139. iJ^rinss Ps. 88 : 17. EninVp. (?) Ps. 37: ' 15. Isa. 5: 28. ■'baas Zech. 4 : 12. bilbaui Ps. 58 : 9. This list is corrected and enlarged from Gesen. Lehrg. pp. 86 ff. Those words which are followed by a note of interrogation (?) are found in some editions but not in others. Daghesh separative may be found after He interrogative in some instances not included in the above list. c. Daghesh-forte emphatic occurs only in ifcin Judg. 5:7, 1 Sam. 2:5; ifen-'l Job 29 : 21 ; sinn; or inn;; Job 21:13; >^f\^'] Isa. 33 : 12, Jer. 51 : 58 ; na'iJaEzek. 21:15; !lB1p3 Ezek. 6:9; nnij; Jer. 51: 30; ISn; Ezek. 27- 1 9 ;'>ifeai3 (?) Isa. 19 : 6 ; and probably ifenrin Job 13 : 9 (not in pause). § 25. In order to the distinct utterance of a reduplicated consoi'iant, it must be • followed as well as preceded by a vowel-sound. Daghesh-forte is consequently never written in a final vowelless letter, with the exception of the two words PS , ijifi? , both of which end in aspirates whose pronuncia- tion would be changed by the removal of the Daghesh. In every other instance the doubling is neglected, even though the letter be an aspirate, which will for this reason resume its aspiration ; e. g. ''^j l^ip; 30, ''ID; ^h'll abridged from "1*3?!! ; !^!^?5 from nfesiin . In a medial letter with Sh'va Daghesh may be written, because the Sh'va being thus ren dered vocal the reduplication can be made audible by means 3 34 ORTHOGRAPHT § 26 27 of the hiatus which it represents ; it is, 'however, quite as frequently omitted, the Sh'va commonly remaining vocal aa tf it were inserted, and compound Sh'va being occasionally substituted for simple to indicate this fact, § 16. 3. h.; e. g. D'^nw for flinty, isM for is©?, particularly after prefixes, afj Vav conversive, the article and preposition )2 , so ^^TS , i^'il?'?'^' It is seldom omitted from a medial aspirate on account of the change in its sound involved : yet even this is done occasion- ally, e. g. "TiaM Judg. 8 : 2 for T^ata^, «rin Isa. 22 : 10 for isnn , liiDT from "jiilT . In a few rare instances it is dropped from a letter followed by a vowel, when the laws of syllables will permit and the pronunciation will not be materially affected ; e. g. njiijn Ruth 1 : 13 for niiyri . Mappik. % 26. Mappik (p"'lB'!a bringing out or uttering), is a point in one of the letters i5 n 1 i, showing that it represents a consonant and not a vowel, or in other words that it does not quiesce in the preceding vowel-sign. It is unnecessary, however, to employ any notation for this purpose in the case of s 1 and ■>, for their quiescence can be readily determined in all cases by the rules already given, § 13. Although it is much more extensively used in manuscripts, therefore, Map- pik is in modern editions of the Hebrew Bible only inserted in final n when it retains its consonantal power ; e. g. r^iis artsdh, ■^^'^i? artsd, t^ri)?^ I'kdhhuh, '^'^'p^ lak'hha. The point four times found in s, iS'^if!! Gen. 43:26, Ezra 8:18, win Lev. 23 : 17, ^s"! Job 33 : 21, though called aDaghesh in the Masoretic notes in the margin, is probably to be re- garded as Mappik. Raphe. § 27. Raphe (nsn weak), is a small horizontal stroke ])laced over a letter, and denotes the opposite of Daghesh- 5 28 ACCENTS. 35 lene, Daglie«ih-forte, or Mappik, as the case may be. As no mconvenience can arise from its omission, it is only occa- sionally used in modem Bibles, and not with, entire uni- formity in the different editions. It is chiefly found where a Mappik has been omitted in n , which according to analogy might be expected to be inserted, e.g. fTiPSr" Ex. 9:18, rvnytoi Lev. 13:4, fi^tina Num. 15:28, hb Num. 32:42, httSffia Job 31 : 22 in some copies. In ^fi^-riteijri Ex. 20 : 4, Deut. 5:8, it is the opposite of Daghesh-forte, and shows that b may either be doubled agreeably to the point in its bosom or not. In nir^ri sb Ex. 20 : 13, Deut. 5 : 17, it is the opposite of Daghesh-lene, and shows that the n may either have its unaspirated sound, as the Daghesh indicates, or may be aspirated. It is often referred to in the marginal Masoretic notes even where it is no longer found in the text, e.g. Judg. 16-16, 28. Accents § 28. The third class of Masoretic additions to the text are those which relate to the words. These are the accents, Makkeph, Methegh, and the K'ri. An accent (D?a) is writ- ten upon every word with a twofold design, 1st, of marking its tone-syllable, and 2dly, of indicating its relation to other words in the sentence. The great number of the accents has respect entirely to this second function, there being no difference in the quality of the stress laid upon particular syllables, such for example as is marked by the Greek acute, grave, and circumflex, but only that difference in its amount which arises from, the unequal emphasis naturally laid upon the different members of a clause or period. The punc- tuators have attempted not only to indicate the pauses to be made in reading, as is done by the stops in use in other Ian guagf.'s, but to represent to the eye the precise position held 86 ORTHOGEAPHT § 29 by each word in the structure of the sentence, and the various grades of attraction or repulsion arising from the re- lations whether co-ordinate or subordinate which subsist among them. Every sentence is fancifully regarded as a ter« ritory, which, partitioned into its several clauses, forms em- pires, kingdoms, and principalities, ruled by their respective sovereigns, each of whom has his own train of inferiors and dependants. The accents are accordingly divided into Dis junctives or* Rulers (Diibna), and Conjunctives or Servants (Di'ia?). The former indicate that the word upon which they are placed is more or less separated from those that follow ; they mark thus the end of a clause or of the section of a clause over which they exert control. The latter indi- cate that the word over or under which they are written is connected with what follows and belongs to the clause or section ruled by the next succeeding Disjunctive. a. The stress of voice denoted by the accent must not be confounded with quantity. An accented syllable may nevertheless be short, the energy with which it is pronounced not necessarily affecting its length. b. The Jews made use of the accents as musical notes in the cantilla- tion of the synagogue, whence they are also called nis"'J3. In the judg- ment of some this is a part, and perhaps a leading part, of their original design. Their great variety, the frequent occurrence of accents of oppo- site powers upon the same word, and the distinct system of poetical accents, favor this opinion. Such as are curious to know the details may find the mode of their employment for this purpose explained at length in Bartoloccii Bibliotheca Magna Rabbinica, vol. iv. pp. 427-444. § 29. The Disjunctive accents may be divided into foui classes of various rank or power, as follows, viz : Class I. Emperors. *1. Sillak (,) spsiio *2, AthnRhh (0 njnx §29 ACCENTS. Class II. Kings. 3. S'gholta (*) SnisD postp. ' 4. ZakephKaton C) )iai? dSJ 5. Zakeph Gadho I ('•) ^?^a qgj *6. Tiphhha (J Class III. Lukes. xnBB IT I • *7, R'bhi" n .. sih-i *8. Shaleheleth C) V V 1 - *9. Zarka n «i?r' postp. 10. Pashta C) l*H"^B postp. 11. Y'thlbh (<) prep. 12. T'bhlr Class lY. OounU. si- 1 ♦13. Pazcr o f •• T ' 14, Karne Phara n fi^B "'.?"^i5 15. T'lisha Gh'dhola {') nHna xifl-'^B prep. 16. Geresh . C) «5^l 17. G'rashayim n n'^u'ia *18. P'slk (') ipiOB 37 The Conjunctive accents, or Servants, are the follo^^ing VIZ *19. Merka \» / N3ia 111 » *20. Manahh V J/ 21. Merka Kh'phflla ^ *' nb^BD NBia •22 Mahpakh \< ) ^a^a 23. Darga Vf / ''.n* *24. Kadhma / ^ \ «?1i? ♦26, Yerahh ben YomO \\l) laii-ia nil 26. T'llsha K'tanna f^. iisafj xttS-i'sB po»«p. 88 ORTHOGRAPHY. ^ 30 a. Merka Kh'phula has sometimes been reckoned among the Disjuno lives, as by Gesenius in his Lehrgebaude ; but the absence of Daghesh lene in the word following that on which it stands in Ex. 5 : 15, Ezek 14 :4, proves that it is a Conjunctive. b. According to their most probable significations, the names of tha accents appear to be in part borrowed from their forms and in part from their uses. Thus the Disjunctives: Silluk, end/ Athnahh, resi ; Segholta, bunch of grapes ; Zakeph, small and great, causing suspension ; Tiphhha. palm of the hand; R^hhi", square or reposing ; Shalshel eth, c/iatra; Zarka, dispersion; Pashta, cvpansion or lelling down (the voice) ; Y'thibh, sil- ting still; 'Y''hhir, interruption ; Pazer, separator ; Karne Phara, a /lei^r's horns; T'lisha, great and Btnail, shield ; Geresh, expulsion ; G'rashayim, double Geresh; P'sik, cut off. Conjunctives: Merka, prolonging; IVIu- nahh, (a trumpet) at rest, i. e., in its proper position ; Merka Kh'phula, double Merka; Mahpakh, (a trumpet) jnuerterfy Darga, progress ; Kadh- ma, beginning; Yerahh ben-Yomo, moon a day old. Other names are given to some of these accents, particularly^ where they occur in certain situations or combinations ; thus Tiphhha is also called Tarhha ( sn-ia ), Munahh with P'sik is called L'gharmeh ( aa"i5^ ), etc. c. The classification of the Disjunctives, according to their respective powers and the laws of their consecution, has been the work of Christian writers, from whom all accurate investigations of the accentual system have proceeded. In fact, this whole subject is treated. by the Jewish grammarians in the crudest and most perplexed manner. Buxtorf says, in his Thesaurus Grammaticus, p. 45 : Accentuum ratio hactenus nee a quo- quam nostrorum nee ab ipsis etiam Hebraeis sufficienter explicata est. The division exhibited above is the one now commonly adopted. The current names, Imperatores, Reges, Duces, Comites, are those used by Wasmuth in his Institutio Accent. Heb. 1664. Others have divided them diiferently. The learned Pfeiffer, author of the DubiA Vexata, distin- guishes one Emperor, one Archduke, four Dukes, seven Counts, and five Barons. Boston, the well-known author of the Fourfold State, in an elab- orate Latin treatise upon this subject left by him in manuscript and pub- lished shortly after his death, distributes them into *hree classes of taperior and one of inferior rank. Mention is made, in a commendatory preface by Mill, the distinguished critic of the New Testament, of another manuscript in English, in which Boston applied his views practically in a twofold translation of the first twenty-three chapters of Genesis, with copious notes, both philological and theological. This, it is believed, has never been published. A curious little book upon the Canon by Ferdinand Parkhurst, London, 1660, makes six Regal and ten Principial Disjunctives Y'thibh and P'sik being omitted altogether. § 30. 1. Ponrteen of the accents are written over, and eleven under, the words to which they are attached. P'sik, whose only use is to modiiy the power of other accents, is written after the word to which it belongs, and in the same line ^ 30 ACCENTS. 39 witli it. The place of the accents is either over or ur.der the letter preceding the tone-vowel, with the exception of the prepositives Y'thibh and T'lisha Gh'dhola, which always ac- company the initial letter of the word, and the postpositives S'gholta, Zarka, Pashta, and T'Hsha K'tanna, which stand upon the final letter. Y'thibh is only used when the first is the tone-syllable. Pashta is repeated if the word on which it stands is accented on the penult, e. g. ^nn Gen. 1 : 2, or ends with two vowelless letters, e. g. ni»*5 Ruth 3 : 7, or if the last letter has Pattahh furtive, e. g, ?T Gen. 33 : 13, and in some manuscripts and editions there is a like repetition of S'gholta and Zarka. When a word bears the other preposi- tive or postpositives, there is nothing to mark its tone-syllable unless this may chance to be the one upon which the nature of the accent in question requires it to be placed. 2. Silluk has the same form as Methegh, ^ 44 ; but the former invariably stands on the tone-syllable of the last word in the verse, while Methegh is never written under a tone-syllable. Pashta is likewise distinguished from Kadhma only by its position upon the last letter of the word, and after the superscribed vowel, if there be one, e. g. "ics Gen. 1 : 7, ^3^?''? Gen. 24 : 7, while Kadhma is placed upon the letter preceding the tone-vowel, e. g. liBs Gen. 2 : 19 : where this chances to be a final letter the laws of consecution only can decide ; thus, in ^^;^r Gen. 26 : 4, !?inss Deut. 16:3, the accent is Pashta, but in ^?7!b^ Gen. 17:8, ^ns? 1 Sam. 29 : 6, it is Kadhma. Y'thibh is distinguished from Mahpakh by being written under the first letter of the word and taking precedence of its vowel if this be subscribed, e. g. atoy Gen. 1 : 11, ■'s Geil. 31 : 6, Deut. 10 : lY ; Mahpakh belongs under the consonant which precedes the tone-vowel, and after its vowel-sign if this be subscribed, e. g. lO?*!? Gen. 2 : 14, ""I Gen. 32 : 33, Deut. 4-: 7. When the initial syllable bears the tone and there is no subscribed vowel, the laws of consecu- tion must decide ; thus, in «^n the accent is Y'thibh in Gen 40 ORTHOGRAPHY, Pl 3:15, 44:17; Deut. 10:17; but Mahpakh in Josk 17:1. § 31. The accents already explained are called the prosaic accents, and are found in all the books of the Old Testament •with the exception of the Psalms (D"'^nn), Proverbs (''liffi'a), and the poetic portion of Job (ai'''?), whose initials form the technical word ti5?!* . Here a different system of accentua- tion prevails. Thirteen of the prosaic accents, one-half of the whole number, nowhere occur in the books just named, viz, : S'gholta, Zakeph-Katon, and Zakeph-Gadhol of the Kings, Pashta, Y'thibh, and T'bhir of the Dukes, Karne Phara, T'lisha Gh'dhola, Geresh, and G'rashajdm, of the Counts, Merka Kh'phula, Darga, and T'lisha K'tanna of the Con- junctives. Such as are common to both systems are in the previous table distinguished by an asterisk. The powers of some of these, however, are altered, so that a new arrange- ment of them is necessary ; and they are supplemented by additional signs formed by combining the prosaic accents or assigning them unusual positions. The scale of the poetical or metrical accents thus constituted is as follows, viz. : Disjunctive Aooents. Class I. 1. Silluk (•.) : "lias!-! ( T - 2. Athnahh (J "'''r?^ 3, Merka-Mahpakh C) lialn Class II. 4 R'bhi" o niisn 5. Pazer C) liasn 6, R'bhi' Geresh (•') T-;=si-i T - 7, Tiphhha initial (,) prep. 8, Zarka D •niasn postp. 9. P'sik (0 ' "''^-^Ti poslp. 6 32 POSITION OF THE ACCENT. 4i CoNJinfOTivB Accents. 10. Morka u m'asn 11. Merka-Zarka LI nS:2n ' T 12. Mahpakh L) m'asri 13. Mahpakh-Zarka C) « T - li. Munahh C) J T - 15. Muriahh Buperior n liasn 16. Yerahh ben Yomo (v) Y T - 17. Kadhma n niaBrt 18. Tiphhha L) \ » - 19. Shalsheleth C) niasn T - a. It will be perceived that there are fewer Disjunctives but more Conjunctives than are exhibited by the prosaic accents. Merka-Mahpakh answers eubstantially to S'gholta; R'hbi'-Geresh to Tiphhha before Silluk, and Tiphhha initial to Tiphhha before Athnahh. Tiphhha and Shalshe- leth are transferred from the list of Disjunctives to that of the Conjunc- tives, whence it comes to, pass that if a word bearing either of these accents terminates in a vowel, Daghesh-lene will not be inserted in a fol- lowing initial aspirate, e. g. Bsia n^JBS Ps. 31 : 10, o-innB Niaa Prov. 8 : 3, niHiaa sifeJSFi': Ps. 10:2. b. P'sik, in the poetic as in the prosaic accents, is never used alone but always in conjunction with another accent. It serves to strengthen Dis- junctives and to reduce the power of Conjunctives without disturbing the order of their consecution. It is thus used with Merka-Mahpakh Ps. 5 : 13, Pazer Ps. 10: 14, Tiphhha initial Ps. 31:4, Mahpakh Ps. 5: 9, Munahh Prov. 1:22, Merka Ps. 10:13, Kadhma Ps 10:5, Shalsheleth Ps. 7:6. Position op the Accent § 32. The accent in Hebrew may fall either upon the iiltimate or the penultimate syllable, but never at a greatei remove from the end of the word. In the former case words are technically termed Milra (y^btt from below), and in the latter Milel {^"'bbri from ahove). 42 OBTHOGRAPHT. ^ 33 1. The position of the accent may be coi sidered in rela- tion either to the syllabic or to the etymological structure of a word, that is to say, as affected by the nature of its syl- lables on the one hand or of the elements of which it is com posed as a significant part of speech on the other. It is so far determined by the syllabic structure of words, that a long mixed syllable or a short simple syllable, whether in the ultimate or the penultimate, must receive the accent, § 18. 2. thus: ph:2\ nj^ji^rii, nnto, S'l';. 2. Considered in reference to their etymological structure, words exist in two conditions, (1.) their primary uninfiected state, by which their essential and proper meaning is con- veyed ; (2.) with added affixes and prefixes, by which that meaning is variously modified. In their nude or primary state aU words, whether primitives or derivatives, are ac- cented upon the ultimate, and so continue to whatever flexion, involving no terminational appendages, they may be sub- jected. Thus,'i55S, ipB, "ipb, 1^5, ij?B, nps^ n^ann; •ji'isT, Tirol; "ia7'a, is^io; I'??'"?; Q'a'i"'; '^'??,??- 3. The only exception is a class of words called Se- gholates, in which the last vowel does not belong originally or essentially to the form, but is introduced for the sake of softening the pronunciation, § 61 . 2 ; these are accented on the penultimate, as ifva, i?o, nab, n:ia, inn, n:ro, ba^ , ba^, inriic;' . a. fTiass Is. 50: 8 is said to be the only instance of a woid accented on (he antepenult. The proper tone-eyllable of this word is the ultimate, but upon the recession of the accent by § 35, the vowel next preceding, which has arisen from Sh'va and is unessential to the form, cannot receive it, so that it necessarily falls upon the one still further back. § 33. The additions which words may receive at the be- ginning or end affect the accent in proportion to the respect- ive weight accorded to them. Additions to the end of words are of two sorts, which may be distinguished as affixes and suffixes. Affixes are so welded to the word or merged in i* ^33 POSITION OF THE ACCENT. 48 that in the popular consciousness they have become an in tegral part of it, and their independent existence or separate origin is no longer thought of; such are the personal inflec- tions of verbs and the terminations indicating gender and number in nouns and adjectives. Suffixes are not so inti- mately blended with the word to which they are attached as to have lost their individual identity and independent charac- ter, and consequently are of greater weight as respects the accent; such are the fragmentary pronouns appended to verbs, nouns, and prepositions. 1. If the appendage consists of a vowel (as n, , rt, i, i, \, \), or begins with one (as rt„ \, "i\, D\, ni, ?[,, 5j., d,, 1,, D?-, =1?-), and can consequently only be pronounced by the aid of the final consonant of the word to which it is at- tached, it wiU attract the accent to itself or to its initial vowel from a noun, adjective, participle, or preposition, as "'^S? > i-b^, D^-ia^, ■'na^, ?i^na^. i^^a^ from ^a?; d^te'i^, ^4?71j, from is^p . Such an appendage to a verb, if a suffix, will so far accord with the rule just given as to carry the accent forward one syllable ; but the accent will remain in its origi- nal position if it be an affix, unless it is either dissyllabic or causes the rejection of the vowel previously accented ; D"'in\3 with a suffix n'iai':.nn , but with an affix i»"''?tin ; li» with a suffix i-T?? , but with an affix ^13? , ina? ; o)? , n^fe , n^jj ; b^, r.^jj , !)>J5 , Tf^ ; ansj , nsnx , 5iri?ins . It is to be observed, however, that a paragogic n, or n.. , § 61. 6, attached to noxms, pronouns, and adverbs, and occasionally a paragogic •'. does not disturb the position of the accent, e. g. T'lS , nsns ; a: , nai ; so nisn , n|^ , n:3ti , •'n^n Lam. 1 : 1, but "iy&byi Isa. 1:31; neither does the feminine ending n,, which is a Segholate formation, e. g. lil^ , ^i^^ ■ a. Paragogic n^ receives the secondary accent Methegh in D-^, t^J^a Gen. 28 : 2, 5, 6, 7. ' 2. The appending of a simple syllable, such as tlif 44 ORTHOGRAPHY. § 33 suflixes ■'? , 13 , !in , n , ia , or the verbal affixes n , "'W , 13 , *t?, will not alter the position of the accent provided it originally stood upon the ultunate ; if, however, its original place was the penult, or if the syllable in question be attached to the word by a union vowel, the accent must be carried forward one syllable to prevent its standing on the antepenult, which is never admissible: nfes, infes. ia)??, ''Sna?; ofeia, PiOiti, linDjitt; b|p, iii'i]?, ""WSl?. Suffixes appended to a word ending with a consonant mostly require a connecting vowel, and con- sequently shift the position of the accent. Affixes, by reason of the less weight accorded to them, commonly do not. The suffix ^ follows the general rule when preceded by a union vowel, but draws the accent upon itself when it is not, e, g. "^r > '^'2'^ > ^7iJ > 'T'^'J • A. consonantal appendage to a long un- accented vowel, inasmuch as it converts the ultimate into a mixed syllable, necessarily draws the accent upon it from the penult, §32. 1, e.g. "'rios'a, rnosa, D''ncNTa; inra;;!, ■jihi'n;' . 3. A mixed syllable, whether an affix as on, iri, or suffix as D? , ]3 , on , 'jn, will attract the accent to itself, nppbn from ^bn ; Disip'a , Dd''?!:'!?, from 1\)h ; diibpn from Dinn . In the unusual form Dr?b3 2 Sam. 23 : 6, the accent stands upon the union vowel. 4. The only prefixes which exercise any influence upon the position of the accent, are the Vav conversive of the future, which draws back the accent from a mixed ultimate to a simple penult, nas\ nas^i , so?, ai»i:5 ; and the Vav con- versive of the preterite, which throws it forward from the penult to a simple ultimate, Pi'i'as, i^nm), Pah^';; , i^^t^), |. ~:r- a. Some languages invariably accent the same part of the word; thvis, Bohemian and Lettish the initial syllable, Polish and Lazian, one of the Caucasian tongues, the penult of all polysyllables. Others, in which more freedom is allowed, have no respect to the etymological structure o-f words, but are guided entirely by the character of their syllables. Thus, in ^rabic.and Latin words are accented according to the quantity of the penult ; the accent is given to the penult if it is long, to the antepcnul' § 34, 35 POSITION or the accent. 45 if the penult is short. In others still the etymological pr.nciple is the prevailing one, and this often has a wider scope than in Hebrew. Thus in Greek the accent has the range of the last three syllables. In San- scrit it may stand upon any syllable whatever even of the longest words. In English it is almost equally free, e. g. peremptorily, inconsider&lion, its removal from its primary position upon the radical portion of the word being conditioned by the respective weight of the formative syllables ap- pended, e. g. person, personate, personally, persdnify, person&lity, per- sortificaiion. § 34. The location of the accent being thus influenced by the etj'mological structure of words, it may serve to dis- tinguish words of like appearance but different formation Thus, nhtt Gen. 30 : 1, nj. Num. 24 : 22, V^ ^33 Isa. 40 : 7. ay »tt«n Deut. 4 : 83. 2. The. special emphasis given to the last word of a clause or section, and represented by what are called the 46 ORTHOGEAPHT. ^86 pause accents, ^ 3G, 2, a, is sometimes rendered more distinct by a change of the accented syllable from the ultimate to the penult, e. g. ''ws, ^?bs; nns, nns; rm?, nw; 133, iIjS; or from the penult to the ultimate, particularly in the case of forms with Vav conversive of the future 51^;!] , -ybsi ; so ^'9??5 , n5?5 , ittS'i . The accent is in a few instances at- tracted to a short final syllable ending in a weak letter, which either loses its sound entirely, converting the syllable into a simple one, or requires considerable effort and energy of voice to make it distinctly heard, e. g. sn.'; Gen. 41 : 33 for sni: ; so i5^n Zech. 9 : 5, Mic. 7:10, yton Ps. 39 : 14 for SiiT) . Consecution op Accents in Prose. §36. 1. The second use of the accents is to point out the relation of words to one another. The Disjunctives in- dicate a greater or less separation between the word on which they stand and the following one ; the Conjunctives indicate a connection. The greatest separation of all is effected by Silluk, which is written under the last word of every verse, and is followed invariably by two dots vertically placed ( '. ), called Soph Pasuk (pWB v|iO end of the verse). The next in power are Athnahh and S'gholta. When a verse was to be divided into two clauses, Athnahh was placed under the last word of the first clause, Silluk maintaining its position at the end of the verse. If it was to be divided into three clauses, which is the greatest number that any verse can have, the last word of the first clause receives S'gholta, the last word of the second Athnahh, and the last of all Silluk. Verses of one clause range from Gen. 26 : 6, containing 'three words, to such as Jer. 13 : 13 and 1 Chron. 28 : 1, con- taining more than twenty : the most common division is into two clauses, e. g. Gen. 1:1: fisn . . . DinbN ; three clause? §37 CONSECUTION OF ACCENTS IN PROSE. 47 are much less frequent, Gen. 1:7 '•)'$. T'2i^ . . . ^''j?'^^ 23:16,24:30,26:28. a. In Job 1 : 8 S'gholta occurs in a verse of two clauses -vrithout A,h iiiihh, probably because the accentuation is conformed to that of Job 2 : 3. 2. Each of these clauses is capable of subdivision tc whatever extent its length or character may seem to demand by the Disjunctives Zakeph Katon, Zakeph Gadhol, R'bhi*, Pazer, and T'lisha Gh'dhola, according to the number of sec- tions to be made and the various degrees of their completeness. Thus, ia Josh. 1 : 8 the clause of Athnahh is divided into five sections, ''3 , riite?b . , nb;<3 . . . ^•'biz . . . iBia^i , in 2 Kin. 1 : 6 into six, iTifP? . . . on'^i? nbiij . ^ikys":^ . , n^n^ . . rbs , The choice of the accent to govern a particular section de- pends not only upon its power, but likewise upon its rank, the more exalted officer standing in ordinary cases nearer the sovereign. Accordingly toward the beginning of a clause an inferior Disjunctive will be used, even though the separa- tion is such as would require an accent of much higher power to indicate it in a more advanced portion of the same clause. These accents, moreover, have not a fixed value Hke the stops in other languages ; their power is not absolute but relative, and varies endlessly with the circumstances of the case. Athnahh in Gen. 1 : 1 marks the greatest division in the verse, but that is not sufficient to require a comma. In the next verse Zakeph Katon is equal to a semicolon in the first clause and less than a comma ia the second. In Gen. 27 : 16 the separation indicated by R'bhi* is wholly rhythmical. a. T^ose accents which, as above described, mark the limits ofclausea and sections, are denominated pause accents. §37. In the sections thus created the accents are dis- posed relatively to the Disjunctive which marks its close. Each ruler has his servant and subordinate officer, whose 48 ORTHOGRAPHY. §37 function it is to wait upon him. In other words, each I)is. junctive is regularly preceded by a particular Conjunctive and inferior Disjunctive ; and the train of accents in each section is formed by arranging the Disjunctives in their fixed order of succession with or without their regular Conjunctives until all its words are supplied. The trains proper to the different sections are shown in the following table : I Primary Sections. ca M • go en a > H O 1 K O O u So ft CO 6 CO . I! P O Si! Ci -i ss o o (fiO 6 Conjunctives. '\ t .(,.) y .c)b' /(") A J. A ..C) eod i:)0 Secondary SJ5CTION3. S J J \) sSl) a • jfjVj/ K»^^/ H J J J .i ? TTirusuAL Sbotions. .. — 1 1 •>.? VJ Jv J J $3B CONSECUTION OF ACCENTS IN PROSE. 49 a. Accents of like forms are readily distinguishable in the table by the column in which they stand. Where perspicuity requires it the distinction will hereafter be made by appending their initial letters, thus : Kadhma''* Pashta > Mahpakh'^.T'thibh'". § 38. Explanation of the Table. — The trains preceding the three principal accents are exhibited in the horizontal lines of the uppermost division ; those of the ordinary de- pendent sections in the middle division, and those of rare occurrence at the bottom. 1 . Train of Silluk. — If Silluk be immediately preceded by a Conjunctive, it v»?ill be Merka ; if a Disjunctive precede it in the same section, vpith or without an intervening Merka, it will be Tiphhha, Gen. 1:1. If there be a Conjunctive before Tiphhha, it wUl be Merka, Gen. 1 : 1 ; if two Con- junctives, which occurs but fourteen times, they will be Merka Kh'phula and Darga, Gen. 27 : 25, Lev. 10:1, 2 Chron. 20 : 30. The next Disjunctive before Tiphhha, in the same section, will be T'bhir, Gen. 1:4. If T'bhir be pre- ceded by one Conjunctive, it wUl be Darga, Gen. 1 : 12, or Merka, Gen. 1 : 26 ; if by two, the second will be Kadhma, 1 Sam. 15 : 33, or Munahh, Gen. 2 :4j and if by three, the third will be T'lisha K'tanna, Gen. 2:19. The next Disjunctive before T'bhir, in the same section, will be Geresh, Gen. 2G : 11, 27 : 4, or G'rashayim, Ex. 23 : 4. If Geresh be preceded by one Conjunctive, it wHA. be Kadhma, Gen. 24 : 7, or Munahh, Isa. 60 : 17 ; if by a second, it wUl be T'lisha K'tanna, Gen. 2:5, or Munahh with P'sik, Gen. 28 : 9 ; if by a third, it will be Munahh, 1 Sam. 14 : 34 ; if by a fourth, it wiU also be Munahh, Deut. 1:19. a. The parentheses of the table contain alternate accents. Thus, Merka is substituted for Darga and for Mahpakh (before Pashta in the clause of Zakeph Katon) if no more than one vowel intervenes between the Conjunctive and the king which it precedes, e. g. Gen. 1 : 22, Gen. 1 : 24, 26 ; Gen. 5:17, Deut. 1 : 2, 35. Munahh is also regularly substi- tuted for Kadhma, whenever the accent stands on the initial letter of the word, Gen. 25:8, Gen. 19:35; 1 Kin. 19:7, Deut. 1:28; Gen. 19: 12; 5Q ORTHOGRAPHY. §38 Eccl. 5 : 7. G'rashayim takes the place of Geresh provided the accent is an the ultimate and it is not preceded by Kadhma either on the same or the previous word, Ex. 16 : 23, 36 : 3. When two accents are included in a parenthesis the meaning is that if an additional accent is required, these two will take the place of the one before the parenthesis. P'sik has no separate place in the consecution, but is joined with the other accents to modify their power. It is constantly associated with the Disjunctive Shalsheleth to add to its strength, and occasionally with the different Conjunctives to reduce their strength, but without disturbing the order of their consecution, e. g. with Merka Ex. 16:5, Munahh Gen. 46:2, Mahpakh Ex. 30 : 34, Kadhma Lev. 11 : 32, Darga Gen. 42 : 13, T'lisha K'tanna 1 Sam. 12 : 3. 2. Train of AtJinaJih. — If Atlmahli be preceded by a Conjunctive, it will be Munahh, Gen. 1:1; if by a Disjunc- tive in its own section, it will be Tiphhha, Gen. 1:1. The accents which precede Tiphhha have already been mentioned in explaiaing the train of SiUuk. 3. Train of S'ffholta. — The first Conjunctive before S'gholta vpill be Munahh, Gen. 3:3; if there be two, the second will be Munahh, Lev. 8 : 31, or Merka, Gen. 3 : 14. The first Disjunctive in its section will be Zarka, Gen. 1 : 28 ; and if this be preceded by one Conjunctive, it will be Mu- nahh, Gen. 1 : 7, or Merka, 1 Chron. 5:18; if by two, the second wiU be Kadhma, Gen. 30 : 16, 31 : 32 ; if by three, the second will be Munahh and the third Kadhma, Lev. 4:35. The next Disjunctive before Zarka will be Geresh, Gen. 24:7, or G'rashayim, Ex. 39:3. The accents pre- ceding these have been explained in 1. 4. Train of Zakeph Katon. — The first Conjunctive before Zakeph Katon wiU be Munahh, Gen. 1 : 2, the second like- wise Munahh, Gen. 27 : 45. The first Disjunctive will be Pashta, Gen. 1:2; or, if the proper place of the accent be the first letter of the word, Y'thibh, Gen. 1:11, 2:11 The first Conjunctive before Pashta will be Mahpakh, Gen. 1 : 9, or Merka, Gen. 1:2; the second, Kadhma, Gen. 39 : 19, or Munahh, Gen. 1 : 12; the third will be T'lishii K'tanna, Ezr. 3 : 11. The Disjunctive before Pashta will be ^ 38 CONSECUTION OE ACCENTS IN PEOSE, 51 Geresh, Gen. 1 -. 24, or G'rashayim, Gen. ^ : 11 ; the furthei consecution is explained in 1. a. In some instances Pashta is found not in the -rain of Zakeph Katon, but seeming to govern an independent section, i . g. Ex. 29 : ^J, Deut. 9 : 6, Josh. 10 : 11, 2 Sam. 14 : 7, 2 Ghron. 18 : 23. 5. Zalceph Gadhol is mostly used instead of Zakeph Katon when no other accent precedes it in its own section, whether upon the same word or one before it : ipa ?!» Gen. 9 : 4 (in some editions), in which it is preceded by Munahh, is exceptional. 6. Train ofIi'dM''.—T!he first Conjunctive before R'bhia" will be Munahh, Gen. 1:9; the second, Munahh commonly with P'sik, Gen. 2:5, or Darga, Gen. 6:15; the third, Munahh with P'sik, Gen. 7 : 23, 31 : 29, or Merka, Ex. 14 : 10. The Disjunctive before R'bhi* wiU be Geresh, Ex. 16 : 3, or G'rashayim, Deut. 1 : 11, which are preceded as in 1. 7. !Pram of Pazer. — ^Pazer may be preceded by one Munahh, 1 Sam. 14 : 34, by two, Ezek. 9:2, by three, 1 Sam. 14 : 34, or by four, Isa. 66 : 20. 8. Train of T'lislia Glidhola.—TXsSas, Gh'dhola is the weakest of the Disjunctives which are ever set to rule inde- pendent sections. Its weakness is in fact such, that it is sometimes drawn into the section of a stronger Disjunctive ; thus, in Gen. 1 : 12, Lev. 4 : 7, 1 Sam. 17 : 51, Isa. 9 : 5, Neh. 5 : 18, it takes the place of T'lisha K'tanna among the antecedents of Pashta, standing between it and Geresh or G'rashayim ; in Gen. 13 : 1, 21 : 14, Deut. 26 : 12, it stands similarly between T'bhir and Geresh or G'rashayim. And in many cases, perhaps in most, when it rules a section of its own, this is a mere subsection, not so much a division of one of the principal clauses as a fragment broken off from one of the larger sections at a point where T'lisha K'tanna would have stood had the connection been sufficiently close 52 ORTHOGBAPHT. § 39 to require a Conjimctivie, e. g. Gen. 19 : 2, 1 Kin. 20 : 28, That this is not always so appears, however, from examples like 2 Sam. 14 : 32, Gen. 7 : 7, Isa. 66 : 19, Jer. 89 : 5, and particularly Gen. 31 : 52, where sinsTisi corresponds to the preceding "'Sif-ns . T'lisha Gh'dhola may be preceded by one Munahh, Gen. 27 : 46, by two. Josh. 3:1, by three, or by four, 1 Kin. 2:5. 9. Shalsheleth occurs but seven times, viz., Gen. 19:16, 24 : 12, 39 : 8, Lev. 8 : 23, Isa. 13 : 8, Am. 1 : 2, Ezr. 5 : 12, and in every instance stands upon the initial word of the verse, and is accompanied by P'sik. It has consequently no antecedents. 10. Karne Phara is only used sixteen times. Its section never contains less than three words : its immediate prede- cessor is always Yerahh ben Yomo, to which may be added one Munahh, Num. 35 : 5, Neh. 5:13, 13:5, 2 Chron. 24 : 5 ; two, 2 Kin. 10 : 5, Jer. 38 : 25, Est. 7 : 9, Neh. 1 : 6, 2 Chron. 35 : 7 ; three. Josh. 19 : 51, 2 Sam. 4 : 2, Jer. 13 : 13 ; four, 1 Chron. 28 : 1 ; or five, Ezek. 48: 21. § 39. 1. The complete trains of the several accents con- tain one Disjunctive from each of the inferior orders, dis- posed in due succession of rank, vrith one Conjunctive immediately preceding the first class of Disjunctives, two Conjunctives preceding the second class, three the third class, four or more the fourth class. These trains are adapted to sections of different length and character by omitting such of the Conjunctives, and more rarely by repeating such of the Disjunctives, as the mutual relations of the words may seem to require, and breaking off the series as soon as every word in the section is supplied. Thus, while the general order of consecution is fixed and invariable, there is the utmost liberty and variety in particular cases. a. In a very few instances the Conjunctives go oeyond the nnrabe. here assigned. Thus, Athnahh is preceded by two Munahhs in Es. .3 : 4 $ 39 CONSECUTION OF ACCENTS IN PROSi. 53 and, according to some editions, in Isa. 48 : 11. T'bhir is precec ed bj foui Conjunctives, Josh. 10: 11, 2 Chron. 22: 11, Isa. 66:20; Paslila by four, Ex. 5 : 8. 2 Kin. 5 : 1, and even by five, Josh. 19 : 51. 3. If a section consists of but a single word, this will re- ceive the appropriate Disjunctive, the entire antecedent series of the table being then- omitted as unnecessary ; thus, SiUuk J nbjT Gen. 5:5; Athnahh ittsi^ Gen. 24 : 34 ; Zakeph Katon nhsi Isa. 1 :30; R'bhi'' D?iam Gen. 7:19; Pazer ntts^i Gen. 22 : 2 ; T'lisha Gh'dhola p^ Gen. 19 : 8. This, as has been already said, is the regular length of the sections of Zakeph Gadhol and Shalsheleth; but those of S'gholta are never composed of less than two words, and those of Karne Phara never of less than three. 3. In sections of greater length there is a disposition towards a regular alternation of Disjunctives and Conjunc- tives upon successive words, e. g. Gen. 23 : 11 s , , ^ , , , , Gen. 24 : 7 \ ' ^ ' '*, and consequently though two or more Conjunctives may be allowed before a particular Disjunctive, only the first of these is in the majority of cases employed. The actual relations of words may, however, so interfere with this regularity as on the one hand to cause the intervening Conjunctives to be dropped entirely, e. g. Gen. 1 : 22 ,,.,,, 1 Cliron. 15 : 18 ' ' '',/''', or, on the other, to introduce as many Conjunctives as the table will admit,' e. g. Gen. 3:14 ., , ",^ '*'. But if either of the three primary sec- tions consist of but two words, the first must have a Dis- junctive accent, however close its relation may be to the second, e. g. : D^s »E?5 Gen. 9 : 20, Dsrsv inj?Bi) Gen. 3 : 5, ^311)1 D-112 Gen. 19:4. a. In Gen. 24 : 15, where, however, editions'differ, Silluk is in a section of two words immediately preceded by Merka. b. Sometimes an excluded term of the series will take the place of the secondary accent Melhegh, §44. Tiphhha is thus five times written upon 'he same word with Silluk, e.g. Nuit 15:21, and eleven times with 64 ORTHOGEAPHT, § 40 Athnahh, e. g. Num. 28 : 2t5. Munahh, Gen. 21 : 17, for which Kaiihma le sometimes substituted, Gen. 18: 21, often stands upon the same word with Zakeph Katon. Kadhma is also joined in this manner with Munahh, Lev. 10:12, Merka, Judg. 21:21, Neh. 12:44, Mahpakh, Lev. 25:46, and Ge-esh, Ex. 16 : 15, 21 : 22, 35. Mahpakh with Munahh, Lam. "4 : 9. 4. Occasionally a subordinate Disjunctive or its alternate is repeated in the same section with or without its ante- cedents. Thus, T'bhir, Deut. 26:2 , '\ . '*, so Deut. 30 : 20, 1 Sam. 20 : 21, 2 Kin. 17 : 36. Zarka, 2 Kin. 1 : 16 ■■//•/, so ver. 6, Gen. 42 : 21, Jer. 21 : 4, Neh. 2 : 12. Pashta, Gen. 24 : 14, 42, 48, 65 ; 1 Kin. 20 : 9. Pashta, Pashta and Y'thibh, 2 Kin. 10:30, Ezr. 7:25. Geresh and G'rashayim, Gen. 28 : 9. a. There is a double accentuation of part of Gen. 35 : 22, and of t.ie entire decalogue, both in Ex. 20: 2-17, and Deut. 5: 6-21, which involveg a double vocalization in certain words, e.g. Pb3 Ex. 20:3, i.e. either fJB or ■'iQ . Single words also occur with alternative accents, e.g. witli G'rashayim. or Geresh and T'lisha Gh'dhola nV Gen. 5:29. W"i^ Lev 10 : 4, iiattj' 2 Kin. 17 : 13, nlsbii Ezek. 48 : 10, nxY Zeph. 2 : i5. Poetic Consecution. §40. 1. The principle of the consecution is the same in the poetic as in the prosaic accents, although there is consid- erable diversity in the details. There is a like division of verses into clauses and sections ruled by a Disjunctive at the end, which imposes upon them its own special train of accents. The sections are fewer, however, and the trains shorter than in prose, on account of the greater brevity of the sentences in poetiy for the most part. But this reduc- tion is more than compensated by the new complexity arising from the latitude allowed in the choice of Conjunctives, which it seems impossible to reduce to fixed rules, and is probably to be referred to their use as musical notes for the ^ 40 POETIC CONSECUTION. 55 cantillation of the synagogue. It should be added, that the embarrassment arising from this inherent complexity of the subject is seriously aggravated by the numerous discrepancies in the different editions of the Bible, by which the true ac- centuation in the three poetical books is often involved in doubt and uncertainty. a. In addition to availing himself of the researches of others, particu- larly of Nordheimer and Ewald in their discussions of this subject, the author has examined verse by verse the entire book of Proverbs and the first division of the Psalms (Ps. 1-41), as well as other selected Psalms and portions of Job. As the result, he confesses himself quite unable to disentangle the mystery; and as the only contribution he can make towards its solution he has concluded to present in detail, and in as con- venient a form as possible, the facts observed, hoping that some future ex- ploration may discover the principle of order, if any such principle there be, in this apparently inextricable confusion. 2. Verses may consist of one, two, or three clauses, dis- tinguished by the three Disjunctives of the first class. If the verse contain but one clause, Silluk will be written upon the last word, Ps. 4 : 1 ; if it contain two clauses, the divi- sion wiU be made by Athnahh, Ps. 1:4, or by Merka- Mahpakh, Ps. 1 : 2. 3 : 3, upon the last word of the first clause ; if it contain three, the last word of the first will have Merka-Mahpakh, the last word of the second Athnahh, and the last word of the thjrd Silluk, Ps. 1:1. Clauses may consist of a single section when no subdivision of them is necessary; or they may consist of two or more sections, when the subdivision is effected by R'bhi* or Pazer, e. g, : , . . • Ps. 18 : 51, ! ..... 'Prov. 1 : 10, .. .'. ' Ps. 41:7, • .' Ps.7:6,, : ' ..'Ps. 17:14. 'oG ORTHOGRAPHY. §41 §41. The order of the accents in the various sections is exhibited in the following table : Principal Sections. Conjunctives. Conjunctives. ' 1 .c)U.)ic) •^ .\AJi. or-'. : < • A J J^ '■ y. j< * L j| js ^ V Jn. -m:\ -r(:)M\)]' /■ > s ii CO .Ui.'Oi.c;);. subordiwatb Sections. • f:iH^.lH:i H ■OHH^-" Explanation of the Table. a. Tram of Silluk. — If Silluk is preceded by a single Conjunctive, it will be Munahh, Prov. 1 : 4, or Merka either alone as Prov. 1:2, or com- pounded with Zarka, Ps. 10 : 5, and P'sik, Ps. 10 : 3. If it be preceded by- two Conjunctives, they will be ^ ^ Ps. 5:5,^^ Ps. 10:6,^ _ Prov. 12 :1 (in some editions), , ^ Prov. 25 : 26, ■" ,, Ps. 18 : 7, "■ "■ Ps. 36 : 1, or "■ ' Prov. §41 POETIC CONSECUTION. 57 8: 13. If it he preceded by three Conjunctives, they will he ^ ^ ^ Ps. 24:6 'Ps. 10:2 (or 'Ps.7:6), Prov. 26 : 25 (or ^ " Ps. 28:8 or^ ^ „ Prov. 29 : 13), j . ■" Ps. 4:8,^^ ' Prov. 3 : 27, ■" . If it he preceded by four Conjunctives, they will be ^ ^ \ Ps. 89:2, ^ ^ ^" / Ps. 32:5, of "* ■" '^ Ps. 3 : 3 (in some editions '*'''.). If it be preceded by five Con- junctives,' they will be ^ ^ \ ^ Job 32:6, 37: 12 (in this latter example come editions substitute a Makkeph for Merka). If Silluk be preceded by a Disjunctive in its own section, it will he R'bhi'-Geresh, Ps. 1 : 1, 5 : 3, 10. R'hhi°-Geresh may be preceded by one Conjunctive, , Ps. 5 : 4 ; by two, , , Ps. 8 : 2, or, _. Ps. 31 : 10, 19 ; by three, or Ps. 73:4. There are occasional deviations from the Conjunctives of the table ; thus, R'bhi'-Geresh is in Ps. 34 : 8 preceded by ^ " ^. In some of these cases, however, editions differ in their notation of the accents. Thus, in Ps. 5 : 7 some editions have " before Silluk, others " ; in Ps. 18 : 36, Prov. 30:17, some have , others ; in Ps. 20:2 some have . . , others . ; in Prov. 24 : 8 some have , , , others , , the two words being joined by Makkeph. So, again, some editions have in Ps. 9: 11 ^ before R'bhi"- Geresh, in Ps. 18:44 , in Prov. 27:19 , in Prov. 21:17 ; while other editions do not depart in these passages from the order given in the table. Similar discrepancies exist in the other sections likewise. b. Train of Alhnahh. — Athnahh may be preceded by one Conjunctive, ,Ps.5:8 (or ^^ Prov. 8:30, 34), , Ps.5:3(or ^, Ps. 35:21, / Ps. 69:2), . Prov. 23:3,^ Ps. 14:3, Prov. 6:3 (or_ ^ Prov. 16:10); by two, ^ ^ Ps. 6:8 (or^ ,^ Ps. 7:17), ^ ^ Prov. 28:25, Ps. 5:2 (in some editions the latter example has ), Ps. 14:5, Prov. 11:12, 14:21, ' Ps. 37:1, Prov. 8:21, Ps. 25 : 16 ; by three, Prov. 24:21, Ps. 6:6 (or "Ps. 9:10, or Ps. 16:10), ""Ps. 10:17, ' 'Prov. 8:13, ^. ,, Ps. 18:50, , ^ ,. Ps. 10:13, ■■ ^ Prov. 6:27,, ' ', Ps.72:3i by four, Prov. 3:12, Prov. 24:16, Ps. 34-7 ' Ps J 'J4J '-'■'I* ^JCJ* '. 32:2 (in some editions), "" . ,, Prov. 1: 19, ' ' ^ Ps. 65:2. If Athnahh be preceded by a Disjunctive in its own section, it will be Tiphhha initial, Ps. 1 : 6, 26 : 4. Tiphhha initial may be preceded by one Conjunctive, , Ps. 5 : 6 ; by two, , ^ Ps. 9 : 19 (or ^ ^ " Ps. 14 : 1, or _ ^ Pa 16:9),^ 'Ps. 32:11,,, Ps. 35:14,15,, / Prov. 25:20; by three, ^,, Ps. 23:6, 'Ps. 27:1, ' Ps. 12:5(or " Prov. 27 : 14), ' Ps. 9 : 14. c. Train of Merka-Mahpakh. — Merka-Mahpakh maybe preceded bj one Conjunctive, which is almost always Yerahh ben Yomo, Ps. 1:1 58 OETHOGBAPHT. § 42 though occasionally it is, in some editions at least, Merka, Ps. 15 : 5, 35 10 or Mahpakh, Ps. 24:8, 31:10. If it be preceded by a Disjunctive in ila own section, Zarka will be employed, Ps. 1 : 1, Prov. 1 : 11. Zarka may be preceded by one Conjunctive, ^ Ps. 12: 7 (or ^^ Prov 1:22), ^ Ps. 6:3, _,Ps. 12:3, / Ps. 31 : 12 } by two, ^ ^' Prov. 30: 15 (la Bome editions ^ _'), ^ ^ Ps. 24 : 10 (or ^ _, Ps. 13 : 6), , ^ ^ Ps 21 : 10, ^ ' Ps. 27 : 2 (or / ] ■ Ps. 35 : 26), _ ' ■" Ps, 7 ; 10 ; by three, ^ ' , Ps. 29 : 9 ''Ps. 31:14, ' ' Ps. 10:14; or by four, ' Ps. 40 : 6. d. Tiain o/R^bhf. — R'bhi" may be preceded by one Conjunctive, ^ Pa, 5 : 1, ^ Ps. 8 : 2 (or , " Ps. 23 : 4, or _ ^ Ps. 6 : 7),^ Prov. 28 : 22, "" Ps. 22 : 25 ' Ps. ll:2(or/ Ps. 5:11); by two, , . Prov. 8 : 33, , ^ Ps. 28:7 (or ^ Ps. 18:3), , /Ps. 9:7,, "_. Ps. 11:4,^ , 'Ps. 26:1, ■". Ps. 27 : 6 (or •" ',] Ps. 5:9), 'Prov. 6:22, ' Ps. 18:1 (or ' "Ps. 7:7, or ' ' Ps, 39 : 5), , ' ■■ Job 16 : 10 ; or by three, , / ^ Ps. 40 : 7, , , ' , Ps. 41 : 7 (or " ' Ps. 39:6, or " ' " Ps. 3 : 8, 'or ' " Ps. 41 : 14), ■" ' Ps, 19:14(or'', ', " Ps. 39 : 12), ■" , ' ■" Ps. 40 : 11,, , " ' Prov. 24:31. e. Train of Pazer. — Pazer may be preceded by one Conjunctive, , Ps 89:20 (or, , Prov. .30:8),' Ps. 32:5 (or, Ps. 17:14); by two,,, Ps, 5 : 10, Prov. 7 : 23 (or , ,, Ps. 28 : 5), / Ps. '3:3 (or , , ' Prov. 27 : 10), Ps. 90 : 4, ' Ps. 7:6, ' Ps. 39 : 13, Ps. 11 : 2, ' Ps. 5 : 12 ; or by three, ,' , Ps. 22 : 35, 23 : 4, , ^ , Prov. 23 : 29 (where sone editions have ). "I , ^43. The trains of these several accents are adjusted to sections of varying length by expedients similai to those, employed vi^ith the prose accents, viz. : 1. Omitting the Con- junctives in whole or in part. 2. Repeating the Disjunc- tives, e. g. " Ps. 14 : 1, ' Ps. 17 : 14, or their equivalents, e. g. Tiphhha initial before "' Ps. 7:10, before ' Ps. 9:1; " before ■' Ps. 18 : 1, before ' Ps. 22 : 1-5 ; ' before Tiphhha initial Ps. 16:17. 3. Writing two accents upon the same word, an'-ritoBtt Ps. 5:11, ''Siin Ps. 27:11, is'i^i Ps. 18:16. 4. Uniting two or more words by Makkeph, so that they require but a single accent. 5. Writing the different parts of a compound accent upon separate words ; thus, Merka. Mahpakh ''5S b5as Ps. 6:3, Merka-Zarka ysri 13 Ps. 22:9 Mahpakh-Zarka ri!*3 '^i Prov. 6 : 8. ^ 43 niAKKEFH. 59 a. Sometimes when two accents are written upon the same wor.l one 18 the alternate of the other; thus, ?S^ I'rov. 1 : 19, may be either SsSi oi 93t^ according as the accent remains in its proper position in the ultimate^ or is thrown back upon the penult in consequence of the next word being accented upon its initial syllable Makkeph. §43. Makkeph Cp^i^joininff) is a horizontal stroke by which two, three, or even four words may be united. ^S-jriK, -i^mte^n-ns Gen. 30:31, iJrib-is.^ Gen. 33:11, i!5-"i«!!i:-b3-ns;i Gen. 12 : 20, 26 : 5, Ex. 20 : 11, S>iBB~ia^-b3-b:? Ex. 22 : 8, Vni?""'.?a-b3-b? Job 41 : 26. It belongs properly to the accentual system, words which are closely related being oftfen connected in this manner in order to obviate the necessity of unduly multiplying Conjunctive accents. Thus, the first fifteen words of Ex. 22 : 8 are in this manner reduced to eight. Monosyllabic particles are frequently, and some almost constantly, Hnked with the succeeding or pre ceding word, of which they may be regarded as in a manner appendages ; thus, bs , b? , ns , bis , bs , IB , Da , KJ , etc. Exam- ples are not wanting, however, of longer words similarly united, e. g. ■ayhfry^^t Deut. 19:15, ib*ri-ics3 1 Kin. 17 : 21, n'in;i-"i)3S Isa. 31:4. This use of Makkeph is not to be con- founded with that of the hyphen in modem languages between the members of a compound, as self-same, master-builder. Words united by Makkeph are still as separate as ever in char- acter and signification ; but they are pronounced together and are accented as though they formed but one word. Hence, ; whatever number of words be thus joined, the last only will receive an accent. And, as a further consequence, if a word preeeding Makkeph properly ends in a long mixed syllable, this will, by the loss of the accent, be shortened, ""^OTis C|iy"b3, nr^lnrnn, or failing this, wiU commonly receive the secondary accent Methegh, sjoii-no, fiN7;'"j''S. 60 ORTHOGEAPHY. § 44 a. Tsere remains before Makkeph in ',3, 13, 1?, T? ; it sometimes re- mains and is sometimes shortened in Dia, lUKJ sia?, ns e.g. Gen. 16:13 MliT'-caS, but ver. 15 iJ3"Cia. It once remains according to some editions in "HN Job 41:26, a word which is three times written nx withoul Makkeph, Ps. 47 : 5 60 : 2, Prov. 3:12. Comp. § 19. 2, a. b. Makkeph is occasionally found in the middle of a long word, which has been erroneously divided into two, e. g. njS-rtS'J Jer. 46 : 20, and perhaps nip-npB Isa. 61 : 1. Sometimes words are thus divided without a Makkeph to unite the sundered parts, e. g. D-^iiS '^3 Lam. 4: 3, cn"'na 'nna 2 Chron. 34: 6, and probably dn sianx Hos. 4: 18, ni-is IBni Isa. 2 :'20. (See Dr. Alexander's Commentary on this passage.) The last two ex- amples are plainly intended by the punctuators to be read as separate words. This might likewise be done in the preceding examples if they were pointed CSS i3 and on/'na ina . Methegh. §44. Methegh (Stnia bridle), a small perpendicular stroke under the initial letter of the syllable to which it belongs, is a secondary accent denoting a stress of voice inferior to the main accent. As this latter always has its place in Hebrew either upon the ultimate or the penult, distinctness was promoted and monotony relieved, especially in long words, by giving prominence to one or more of the antece- dent syllables. There is a natural tendency to heighten the force of the accent by passing hghtly over the immediately preceding syllable, this diminished force creating in its turn a new stress upon that next beyond it, and so on in alternate elevations and depressions to the beginning of the word. Agreeably to the principle just stated, Methegh regularly stands in polysyllables upon the second syllable before the accent, and again upon the foiu-th if the word have so many, e. g. nntjn, ^is;], iss-'Si;', oh'^Fa, DhininaDBM, niiininna^. And so upon two or more words connected by Makkeph, which are pronounced as one, e. g. iSrns'i';! Gen. 22 ? 8, yrfrusr^ 1 Sam. 21 : 7. a. Sometimes, however particularly when the nature of the syllables requires it, §32. 1, Methegh takes the place of the principal accent before $45 METHEGH. 61 Maiikeph irrespective of the position of the accent upon the following word, ii-n-jSlBn Num. 21:35, ■jajan-Ti^^a Nnm. 21: 33, 'ia~|V.« Jer. 34:1 tJ!|n-nb-!)3l Gen. 30: 32, ni-sibn'l Sara. 21 : 12, ■'S-'^a Ex. I'o": 5. b. It is to be observed that the position of Methegh is determined bj that of the tone-syllable, not by that of the accentual sign when these are not coincident, as frequently happens with prepositives and postpositi res e. s. 'TiT'Sn beut. 4:26. !i2''ni-i'i«I Josh. 22:27, where the tone falls on the penult, 0"'i3^in'' Jer. 26 ; 21, where the tone is upon the ultimate. §45. The secondary accent is liable to be shifted from its normal position for the following reasons, viz. : 1. If the syllable which should receive it is mixed, it may be given in preference to an antecedent simple syllable, e.g. nnrinujsi 2 Sam. 32:24, n^finrteii Job 1:7, niiinripnr Ezek. 42 : 5, T»''Si:n-bsi» Gen. 43 : 7 ; or if none such precede, it may be omitted altogether, e. g. di?!*''?!'!] Jer. 33 : 24, "'?s?'iT?0 1 Kin. 21 : 1, niSBn-^3-ns5 Deut. 6 : 25. 2. It is always given to simple syllables when followed by a vocal Sh'va, whether simple or compound, or a vowel which has arisen from Sh'va, the slight pronunciation proper to the Sh'va or its derivative giving new prominence to the preceding vowel, r\'n^l , nijn'; , itisib, nitij^iaa Gen. 30:38, ^'VTi'^. ; sometimes to intermediate syllables, § 20. 2, e. g. ignp Isa. 9:17, 10 : 34, il'Jtt? Obad. ver. 11, particularly after He interrogative or when Daghesh-forte has been omitted as after the article, Vav conversive, and the prepo- sition TO, e. g. biiJan , n^tnn , -^bn , ni\33 , Qi:^^,-iB2n , rtk^-ab, "'til'i ; rarely and only as an exception to a mixed syllable standing in the first place before the principal accent, e, g, 8«^r! Gen. 1:11, n^r?|n Ex. 12 : 7, Zech. 14 : 2. a. It hence appears how Methegh comes to be of use in distinguishing the doubtful vowels, § 19, and to what extent it can be relied upon for thig end. As it invariably accompanies the vowel of a simple syllable when followed by vocal Sh'va, it must always be found with a, I, and u preced- mg Sh'va, inasmuch as this will necessarily be vocal. Initial 1 fi, the un emphatic conjunction, is an exception, with which it is commonly no written, e. g. nagsi Gen. 6: 19, fiisfibsi Gen. 31 : 4, though it is sometimes 62 ORTHOGRAPHr. ^ 45 e. g. i"'^2nb^ Gen. 1 : IS, nais^j Judg. 5 : 12. The absence of Methegh, except in the case just mentioned, is consequently conclusive evidence of the shortness of the vowel. As, hovs^^ever, short vdwels in intermediate syllables, and in a few rare instances even in mixed syllables, may receive Methegh, the presence of this sign does not of itself determine the vowe' to be long; the ultimate decision must in this case depend on other con siderations. 3. When by the operation of the preceding rule Me- thegh comes to stand in the first place before the accent, another Methegh is nevertheless occasionally found in the second place, the two thus standing in immediate succession, e. g. nsriBa Gen. 33 : 22, l!3?;:i Gen. 45 : 25 ; and even three occur upon successive syllables, e. g. ?i'i'a?'a'a') Isa. 22 : 19. But commonly where there is more than one Methegh, their position relatively to each other is governed by the same rules as the position of Methegh generally with relation to the principal accent, e. g. '^nyiiBib , hhigni ^ '?i'P''?n¥'!' » 4. Methegh is sometimes written under a letter with Sh'va, e. g. n^^-rho Job 1 : 11, 2 : 5, iixn!*'? Job 19 : 6, njjWJ Ps. 2 : 3, niBnas Jer. 49 : 18, ''Swa Ruth 1 : 11. a. A Methegh so situated is called Gaya (K'JS? bellowing) by Jewish grammarians, and, according to Elias Levita, it occurs eighty-four times, the number yielded by its name arithmetically reckoned. Methegh upon a short vowel before a compound Sh'va was called Ma'rikh ( Tp'iN]? pro- longing), with a short Hhirik it was called Hhirak (psnin gnashing). 5. The place of Methegh is frequently supplied by an accent chosen agreeably to the laws of consecution, § 89. 3. 6., e.g. Dbiams ' Isa. 66:13, ob-'n-bsb Deut. 13:31, D'lSCS'i Zech. 7:14, mhr^k) Num. 10:23, i^nlfi Josh. 22 : 12. a. The want of consistency or of uniformity, which may be occasioi: ally observed, in regard to the insertion or omission of Melhegh, e. g naiNt" Cant. 1 : 7. ninxa: Cant. 3:1; ornr Cant. 6 : 5, cfrr Lam. 4:9 §46 k'ei and k'thibh. 68* md-is Num. 31 12, mn'iS Jo&h. 4:13, and the discrepancies between different manuscripts and editions, e. g. nS'/S or nibx Gen. 45 : 28, iriaT-iiisiu or n'jarsiXiB Ps. 81 : 3, if not arisi'ng in the first instance from clerical errors, are probably to be attributed to the inferior importance of the sign itself, whose place might be presumed to be sufficiently determined «»ven if not written. K'ri and K'thibh. §46. Various notes extracted from the Masora (fTjlDtt tradition), a collection of remarks upon the text, are found in the margin of the Hebrew Bible, which are explained in the glossary at the end of most editions. The most im- portant of these are the various readings known as the K'rl (■'l|? read), and K'thibh (aTiS written). If in any instance traditional usage sanctioned a reading different from that which was written in the text or the K'thibh, the punctuators did not venture to alter the text itself for the sake of making the correction ; they went no further than to connect with the letters of the text the vowels of the word to be substi- tuted for it in reading or the K'ri, with a reference to the margin where the letters of the substitute might be found. Thus, with the word 'Ti'ai?''^ Josh. 6 : 7 is connected the marginal note "'"ip "lax^T. The vowels here attached to the K'thibh belong not to it but to the unpointed word in the margin, which is accordingly 'I'ais*!] . The proper vowels for the pronunciation of the K'thibh are not written, but must be supplied from a knowledge of the form indicated by the letters, which in this case is i"iX!S«5 . Again, in ver. 9, Wp'n in the text refers to j? "'ypn in the margin ; the K'ri is here ••yph , and the K'thibh, whose vowels are left to be deter- mined by the reader, i^pF). Jer. 42 : 6 has iibs where the marginal note is "'ip iJnsx ; the K'ri is accordingly linb^ , and the K'thibh *ii^ . In order to indicate that a given word ivas to be omitted in reading, it was left unpointed, and the *64 ORTHOGRAPHY. ^ 47 note ''ip i«bl ains , written but not read, placed in the margin, e.g. »ttn Ezek. 48:16, S2 2 Kin. 5:13, TiT Jer. 51 : 3. If, on the other hand, a word was to be supplied, its vowels were inserted in the text and its letters placed in the margin, with the note STD sbl inp, read iut not written, e. g. Judg. 20:13 in the text ^... and in the margin ''W, to be read :.?a ; so Jer. 31 : 38 D'^xa . In 1 Kin. 21 : 8 the first leltei of ci"iSDn is left unpointed as superfluous, and in Job 2 : 7 "?, is explained by the margin to stand for T^l : so Jer. 18:23 i"'n,.'i for rn;pT . a. The number of these marginal readings differs in different editions. Elias Levita states that there are 848. Others have computed them to be 1,000 ; others still, 1,200. § 47. Sometimes a different reading from that of the text is suggested by the points alone without a marginal note being added in explanation, as when a particular word or orthography is regularly substituted for another of frequent occurrence. These cases are presumed to be so familiar to the reader as to require no other index of their existence than the presence of the appropriate vowels. Thus, the divine name STini , which the Jews had a superstitious dread of pronouncing,' was and still is read by them as if it were ''i'lisi Lord, whose points it accordingly receives, nih)! , unless these two names stand in immediate connection, when, to avoid repetition, it is read Dih'bs and pointed nnh^ Gen. 15:2, Hab. 3:19. The antiquity of this supei-stition is attested by the Kvpio^ of the Septuagint, followed in the English as well as in other modern versions by the rendering Lord. The true sound of the name never having been noted, is now lost ; the only clue that is left being its ety- mology and the form which it assumes in composition, § 62. 1, from which the conclusion has been variously drawn that it was "li^!!, ^0<7- , or nifi;! . The common pronunciation Jehovah is manifestly founded upon the error of combining §48 k'ri and k'thibh. Go the consonants of this word with the vowels of another and an entirely different one. There is, however, especially as it is uncertain whether Yalwe or Yah%a, or either of these, was its original sound, no good reason for abandoning the pro- nunciation familiar to the Christian world and hallowed by the association of constant usage for the sake of adopting another which is, or is supposed to be, phonetically more exact, any more than we need be guilty of the pedantry of preferring YeshayaJm to Isaiah because it approaches more nearly to the original pronunciation of the prophet's name. Other standing K'ris, unnoted in the margin, are sin , the form of the pronoun of the third person feminine which is used throughout the Pentateuch ; this is designed to be read S"'^ , though the sound indicated by the letters is in aU proba- bihty s^n . So nDUSi?:' read lite'? , and p'iic^n;' read D?^i$ii;' . §48. In the absence of definite information respecting the origin and sources of these various readings, it is difficult to determine with absolute precision the weight to which they are respectively entitled. The current opinion of the ablest Hebraists, based upon a careful scrutiny of their in- ternal character and the relation which ordinarily appears to subsist between them, is that while tlie K'ri may perhaps, in a few cases, correct errors in the K'thibh, and so restore the original reading, it is in the great majority of instances an explanatory gloss rather than an emendation. With the rare exceptions already suggested, the K'thibh is esteemed the true reading, the object of the K'ri being to remove ortho- graphical anomalies, secure grammatical uniformity, substi- tute usual for unusual, prevailing for obsolete words and forms, and occasionally to introduce euphemistic expressions. While the K'ri is probably not to be esteemed the original reading, therefore, it deserves attention as the grammatical or exegetical comment of a steadfast tradition. 66 OETHOGEAPHT. § 49 ACCUEACY OF THE PoiNTS. §49. 1. All the Masoretic additions to the text designed to facilitate its reading have now been considered. The cor- rectness of the pronunciation, which they yield, is vouched for not only by the esteem in which they are universally held by the Jews, but by the scrupulous minuteness of the system, its consistency with itself and with the vowel-letters of the text, its affinity with and yet independence of the vocalization of the kindred languages the Arabic and Syriac, and the veneration for the already established text which evidently characterized its authors, since they did not venture to change the text even in the slightest particular. 2. The only additional information which has come down to us respecting the true sound of Hebrew words, is furnished by the mode of writing proper names in the Septuagint version, and the few Hebrew words preserved by ancient authors, particularly Origen and Jerome. These have been subjected to an elaborate comparison with the Masoretic punctuation, and the result has been to establish their sub- stantial agreement in the main, with, however, not a few remarkable points of divergence. In relation to this subject it should be observed, that the Hebrew pronunciation of the Seventy is inferred entirely from their mode of spelling proper names, not from words in living use in the language. The chances of inaccuracy, on the part of the translators, are here peculiarly great. Many names were not familiar and were of rare occurrence ; and as no system of vowel notation then existed, they were left entirely to their independent knowledge of the sound of each individual word. These words were MTitten by them in a foreign alphabet, whose sounds did not coincide precisely with those of the Hebrew, and in which the proper equivalents varied somewhat accord- ing to their combinations. The true sound was also de- ^49 ACCXJEACY OF THE POINTS. 67 parted from sometimes because the laws of Greek euphony forbade its exact reproduction. The negligence with which they are chargeable elsewhere was also probably aggravated here, and in fact there are many instances in which they not merely deviate from the vowels but transpose or change the letters. Leaving out of view, therefore, such incidental dis- crepancies as are to be accounted for in the ways now sug- gested, a thorough and extended examination of the subject reveals, with all the general agreement, a number of regular and systematic deviations. a. These are thus stated by Ewald, Lehrbuch, p. 116. (1.) An e or i de- rived from a is written d, as rrnft 0apa, nslsa BaXaa;u,. "lisna Ta^awv, D'J'l'? Mapta/4 ; and on the other hand, a is sometimes written e, ina2"'bris 0Xi/3e;u,a, 1?;; Keve^, ra VeS^, especially before n , as nyp Kopc, nnj Zape. (2.) e is written for i and d for u, D'^tlS XeTraioi, c3n"'S Teevva, "(iS'll TtSewv, n':'iua Meapai/i, rma.^ Oxot,a&, n«W O^ta. (3.) for the diph- thongal e and their constituents ai and au are substituted, "ij"';? Kaivav, 133 Na/3ov. (4.) The vowel letters are softened into their homogeneous vowels K'^P.?!! ouiKpa, ^a']'J5 omSaySijp. (5.) Vocal Sh'va is written as a full vowel, commonly a, or if an o follow, o, nisas Sa^Saco^, ^^t1S^ Vayovrjk, D'^ailS XepcrvfiiiJ,, CIO So8o/Aa ; the final vowel of Seghdates is also written 6 if o precedes, tj^a MoXox, "i'?.S yop,op. 3. The regularity of these deviations seems to be best accounted for by the assumption that the pronunciation represented in the Septuagint is that which prevailed among the Jews in Egypt, which would naturally be less pure than that of Palestine represented in the vowel points, and which, moreover, betrays in the particulars recited above a strong leaning to Aramaean forms and sounds. Accordingly the view now commonly entertained is that the vowel notation of the Masorites is correct, at least in all essential particularSj and that it is properly to be put at the basis of all investiga- tions into the phenomena of the language. 68 ORTHOGBAPHT. § 50 Obthogeaphic Chanses. §50. The signs thus far desciibed represent all the sounds of the Hebrew language. Its stock of words is formed by combining these in various signific^ant ways. The laws of such combinations, and especially the mutations to which they are subject, or which they occasion, next demand attention. When a particular idea has been attached to a certain combination of sounds, its different modifications may naturally be expressed by slightly varying those sounds. This may take place, 1. By the substitution of one letter for another of like character, and for the most part of the same organ, e. g. : fi^n to be, exist, n^n to live ; J'33 to pour forth, N23 the same idea ap- plied to words, to prophesy ; ~3S to encircle the neck with an ornament, pan to strangle, p:x applied to sounds uttered in strangulation, to groan; ^?"^ to go about as a spy, bs"; to go about as a merchant; D33 to collect, DiTSJ treasures; S'^aj a cup, Jrais or raip a helmet (of similar shape); "•n tender, delicate, p'l thin ; "isn to make straight, isn to straighten the beam of the balance, to weigh ; ".133 firstborn, ^132 first ripe, ^p's the first portion of the day, the morning ; nbri to suspend, fit'n applied to a bucket. to let down ; ^t5 to cut, "iS^s to reap ; "HJ gold, 2hs yellow ; "ao to con- ceal, "|Sia and 'jSS to hide away as treasures, 'SO to cover with boards ; yn; but in the book of Esther B''aittJ; Damascus ptoa'fl , in Chronicles piasitj ; how 1 Chron. 13:12; Dan. 10 : 17 Tj"'n , in earlier books TpN . 3. Of Dialect : The same word may come to be pro- nounced differently by those who speak distinct though re- lated languages. Thus, the Aram8ea,n dialects, the Chaldee and Syriac, in very many words regularly substitute s for the Hebrew final n, and the corresponding Unguals for the He- brew sibUants, s being sometimes still further weakened by the loss even of the lingual sound to that of the guttural 7 , e. s. : 70 ORTHOGRAPHY. § 52 Heb. nsn to wander, ChaJd. xso , Syr. }i-{ ; Heb. snj g-oZd Chald. S-fl , Syr. VaoiJ ; Heb. isiS a rock, Chald. irj , Syr. \lLl ; Heb. lail? i^T-ee, Chald. pirj , Syr. l^J., Arab, oi^' 5 Heb. yyx the earth, Arab, jjOjt, Chald. snx, Syr. li.?) . Other consonant changes: Heb. '3 a son, Arab. \^\ , Chald. ia , Syr. j^ ; Heb. iit3|3 to MZ, Arab. JJcS; Heb. iap';, Syr. '^a^-aS; Heb. N6S a throne, Chald. ''D'liis, Syr. J-iJSjaay Arab lljSl Heb. r^phn afield, Chald. sifsn , Syr. \L1 , Eth. A^A I . 4. Of simple euphony: An alternate form of a word may be produced to facilitate its pronunciation or make its sound more pleasing, e. g. : ■(asns, "|1S1X purple; cab, yq'a to hate; f^S^h , nsajj chamber, •|3S,'-i3S Achan; -iSSS'lSW? , ■ISX"!'13^33 Nebuchadnezzar; JS^I, J^iT Doeg-;'o"'5«be<, Qiasubs* almug ov algum trees ; nissba, nisfcna to«/j. a. Mere varieties of orthography must not be mistaken for consonantal changes, e. g. tib occasionally for ib and vice versA, probably Plbsiu for wbsb, and such permutations of gutturals as abound in the manuscripts of the Samaritans, who, making no distinction in the sounds of these letters, perpetually confounded them in writing, Gesen. Sam. Pent. p. 52. A like faulty pronunciation has been attributed to the Galileans, to which there is a probable allusion in Matt. 26:73. Buxtorf Lex. Chald. p. 434. § 52. The changes thus far described result in the pro- duction of distinct words, and belong to the domain of the lexicon rather than of the grammar. The lexicographer re- gards such words as cognate, and traces them back to their common source ; but, in the view of the grammarian, they are totally distinct. The mutations with which the latter concerns himself are such as take place in the direct deriva- tion and inflection of vi^ords. These are altogether euphonic, are more restricted in their character, and take place within far narrower limits, than those heretofore considered. When words are subjected to grammatical changes their sounds are brought into new connections, attended, it may be, with ^ 53 CONSONANT CHANGES. 7i a difficulty of utterance which demands some measure of relief, or they pass readily and naturally into other sounds, which are easier of pronunciation or more agreeable to the ear. The mutations thus induced are of three sorts, viz. : Consonant Changes, the Conversion of Consonants into Vowels, and Vowel Changes. These will require to be con- sidered separately. Consonant Changes. § 53. The first class of changes embraces those which affect the' consonants. These mostly arise from the concur- rence of two consonants, creating a difficulty in the pronun- ciation or yielding a sound displeasing to the ear. This may take place either at the beginning or the close of a syllable. Syllables in Hebrew may, and often do, begin with two con- sonants, §18. 1; but the necessity of this is avoided in certain cases by the following expedients : 1 . In the beginning of words the weak letter ^X^^^- 2. The first of the concurrent consonants, if it has a comparatively feeble sound, is sometimes dropped. 72 ORTHOGRAPHY. § 53 a. This occurs regularly in verbs whose first radical is "i or 3 , and in nouns derived from such verbs, e.g. -t? (or 2VU^ , MS-I for Ms"!'?, ^'3 for M=i , 'liil for "in? , "^h Ezek. 2 : 10 for •'hi , bnisn Ezeic. 1 4 for ^h'^ni , and perhaps ^N3 Am. 8:8 for isi]'?. ' X is thus dropped in sijni for iljn:!*,© for "ilUX; also in a few instances from the beginning of the second syllable of words, e. g. "jTaKl Ezeic. 28: 16 for ill?!?!*.! ; v't!} Job 32: 11 for •ji't''?.? ! oi'iiion Eccl. 4:14 for Bi^siDxn; ni5a'nri'2"Chron.'22:5 for Dikisri: n"i"Da Ezek. 20:37 for niDS.a; nVs? . - IT ■ - -: IT ' ••■ T , V I- ' 1 Kin. 5:25 with Daghesh-fbrte conservative for npDsa ; ~ns Prov. 8 : 17 for =nxs : li ta Prov. 17 : 4 for t'txi: ; Ttt^hv \ Sam. "l : 17 for Tjnbxu . These examples likewise admit of a different explanation ; i< may give up its consonantal power, losing its sound in that of the pre- ceding vowel, agreeably to §57. 2 (2), after wh ch it may readily be dropped altogether. a is occasionally dropped from the participles of the Pual or fourth conjugation, as njsb for njsiia ; b in Pips for n;;!? ; n in nab Ex. 3:2 for ninb; 'cn-'db Ex.'7:22 for' Cih^anb Ex. 7: 11;' and perhaps = in nrisiD Gen. 49 : 11, which appears to be for nhlDB . b. The rejection of a consonant from the beginning of a syllable, when not immediately followed by another consonant, is exceptional ; as IT Judg. 9:11 for I'l; ; nnn 2 Sam. 22:41 for fiPin; ; nn Ezek. 33:30 for iriK; niDisn Neh. 3:13 for m'SBNir, •'inV'nnn Judg'. 9:9 for inb'innn, and ' I IT : - IT ' • : -t: r.. f^_ • : -t: IT ■.*» perhaps alEJ Jer. 42: 10, which seems to be tor 3112] V 3. The second consonant is sometimes dropped, if it is a letter of feeble sound. o. This is regularly the case with rt of the article and of verbal pre- fixes, and "• as the final radical of verbs, e. g. P^ab for n^artb ; bapi for bBlsri';; ^^ for i^'ba. It occurs besides in a few sporadic examples with these same letters, and more rarely still with N , i , and s , e. g. iT for V]\ , 15 Ezek. 2 : 10 for tive 3: bn: Isa. 13 : 20 for bnx': , intnl 2 Sam. 22 :'40 for ■'nTxrii ; i3 Isa. 3:' 24 for ■'■3, ■'S for "lis, , D'^a; for oiai'j ; ■'3 as a particle of entreaty, probably for ■'S3, np'L'S Am. 8:8 (K'thibh) for ni'Rlc; ; bs the name of a Babv- lonish deity for bS3 is a foreign contraction. The conjecture that "isa Mic. 1 : 10 is for iSSS in Accho is ingenious and favoured by the occurrence of nJ3 in Gath in the parallel clause; but it is at variance with the points, which, upon this hypothesis, should be "isa . b. In rare cases this rejection occurs even after a mixed syllable, whose final consonant is thus drawn forward, e. g. Mesj for nrrsx fian Job 29:6 for nknn, aSPPj Ex. 2:4 for 3k^nn and'probably psx vi 139 : 8 with Daghesh-forte conservative for pbcx . ^54 CONSONANT CHANGES. 78 ' ^ 54. When the concurrence takes place at the close of B syllable, whether the second consonant belongs to the same syllable with the first as at the end of words, or to a differ- ent syllable as in the middle of words, the following changes may be produced. 1. An aspirate following another consonant loses its aspiration, § 21 j or if it be brought into juxtaposition with its hke so as to form a doubled letter, the aspiration of both will be removed, § 23. 2, unless the combination occurs at the end of a word, where the reduplication is not expressed, § 25. Thus, nia for nriib , dfenn for oisrinn , ihai for inaiab , but n"! from aa-i, triica 1 Kin. 1 -. 15 for nnStJa or nn'iTBU, niqtt Ezek. 4 : 3 for nnina , nhaia Mai. 1 : 14 for fifiniaa . 2. The first of two concurring consonants is in certain cases assimilated to the second, the doubling thus occasioned being expressed as in the case of letters originally alike by Daghesh-forte, except at the end of words, §25, where Daghesh disappears or is only virtually present, being re- sumed upon the addition of a fresh vowel or syllable. This is most frequently the case with the liquid 3 , rarely with b and 1 and only in particular words ; so n of the Hithpael of verbs before T and I3 , and in a few instances before sibi- lants and other letters, and T at the end of a few words before ri. Thus, fi": for in?':, nna for wwa ; n^^ for ri{:b\ nh Ezek. 27 : 23 for nib? Am. 6:2; ''Ji? for "-b -ii?x ; i&3'i? for *is3'^ti':, si?!?? for K'BQn'?, "^im for istnri, oniiEn for DibiiBrin, isasn for wasnn, nfean for rtbsriri; nb for mb, nns for ri'ins . a. So perhaps 3 in nsa according to Gesenius for fi62^ and Do ftr 63B . Compare Greek avyyev^i for o-wyevijs, TeTu/t/j,at for TCTDTr^at, and Eng. il-logical, ir-religion, im-malure formed by the negative prefix in. 3. A few isolated cases occur of the reverse process more common in Chaldee and Syriac, by which a doubled letter ia resolved into two different consonants by the change of the 74 ORTHOGBAPHT. § 55 first or the second member of the reduplication to a liquid lor 5, e.g. bla-iM fori>iM, piott'i'j for pi»iQ!!, 0"';R'? Isa. 23 : 11 for ry'l.ya, ■'iip Job 18 : 2 in the judgment of some for ''Sp ends, though others make the : a radical, and give the word the sense of snares. The conjecture that isiar) Ps. 64 : 7, Lam. 3 : 22 is for IBR is unnecessary and unwar^ ranted. 4. When n of the Hithpael of verbs would stand befoic a sibilant, it is transposed with O and » , and with 22 it is in addition changed to t) . Thus, inno^ for incna, iferiia^ foi ii3»ri;i , lynto:" for "iS?©!!? , p'^^^? for pt!?*^? . a. In njaBllzirin Jer. 49 : 3 the transposition does not take place in con- sequence of the number of similar letters which would thus be brought into proximity. In the cognate languages n is likewise transposed with T and changed to 1: thus, Chald. "iHwn for IHTPn; so, also, in Syriac and Arabic. The only example of a Hebrew verb whose first letter is T ap- pearing in this conjugation is sistn Isa. 1 : 16, where H is assimilated agreeably to 2. Compare with these transpositions the frequent DoHp change of ^ (= 8cr) into o-S, as cnjptcrSu) for (ropLtfu. ^55. The occurrence of a consonant at the end of a word may, inasmuch as the succeeding word must necessarily begin with one, be regarded as an additional case of the con- currence of consonants. As the contact is less close, how- ever, than when they meet in the same word, it is less fruitful of changes than in the cases already considered. 1. There are three instances in which it has been doubt- fully conjectured that a final 1 has been assimilated to a fol- lowing initial la ; viz. Dii»to;i Isa. 35:1 presumed to be for ■jTOic^; ni^73 Num. 3 :49 for li^7E Ex. 21 .- 30, Ps". 49 : 9; Dfc Gen. 28 : 12. a. Final consonants are in Sanskrit perpetually modified by the initia. letter of the following word. But it is by no means clear that this is so i] Hebrew, even in the examples alleged, as the forms admit of a diffcren explanation. See in regard to the first passage, Dr. Alexander's Com mentary. ^56 CONSONANT CHANGES. 7E 2. A few cases occur of the rejection of a letter, chiefl) 1 and tt , from the end of a word. a. "i of the verbal endings '|1 and ']'' . is almost always dropped, bt iny only retained as an archaic or emphatic fprm, and chiefly at the end of a clause, e. g. IW-i^^ Deut. 8 : 16, bat mostly >\'jy^; "il-iann Gen. 32:20, com- monly 1131PI ; ■p'^'Sp Ruth 3 : 4, commonly "'iasri . So, too, in some proper nouns', li^Ja Zech. 12: 11, i'lW Josh. 12 : 21 ; iS'^ai, whose original 1 is shown in the derivative ^i'^'^'J? and is perpetuated in the modern name SeilAn. b. In like manner » is rejected from the dual and plural terminations of nouns upon their entering into the close connection of the construct state with the following word, i:tx from o'jsttt, ^iia from Cna. c. If the feminine endings n, and fi^ have, as is probable, a common origin, this may be best explained by the assumption that n is in many cases rejected (rom the termination, leaving only the vowel, though it ia always retained when any addition is made to the word: thus, the con- struct state ni=n, absolute n»=n, but with a sufHx ifiaDn ; niap (comp. n5TX Deut. 32 : 36), ijn^ap. It is to be observed here, that this phenomenon does not establish the possibility of an interchange between the consonants n and n, because ti in this case represents not A but the vowel a. § 56. A few other changes remain to be mentioned which are due to special causes. 1. Nun is often inserted in certain forms of verbal suffixes to prevent the hiatus between two vowels, 'insnayiJ Jer. 5 : 22, or ^ 53. 3. a. ^is^a?;: Isa. 33 : 21 for mv^ , insBuinx, Ex. 15:2 for inaMinx. Comp. Gr. dwo-w? and English indefinite article an. 2. Vav at the beginning of words is changed to "' , e, g. 1?;' for 1?? , "fi": for I^J, Vti]?^ for Vajpi . The only exceptions are the four words 11 , it? Prov. 21 : 8, 'J^J Gen. 11 : 30, ib-j 2 Sam. 6 : 23 (K'ri), and the prefixes Vav Conjunctive and Vav Conversive. 3. Vav, though capable of being reduplicated, e. g. 1?J» is in most instances relieved from this necessity by the sub- stitution of "I, or by doubling the following letter in ita stead, 6. g. D^;?« or otaips for D^i^S . 76 ORTHOGRAPHr. ^ 57 a. In one instance after such a change of 1 to '' , a following ^ Bufien the contrary change to 1 to prevent the triple recurrence of the same letter, ri5.^1X, Isa. 6:9 for r)!;-!':!?,. 4. Yodh before the plural termination D"". is in a fe'W cases changed to s to prevent the conjunction of like sounds, D^xiibn- Hos. 11 : 7 for D^ibrji Josh. 10 : 26 ; n-'iiiiaa Hos. 11 : 8 for D^hs Gen. 10 : 19 ; D^i?n^^ from ''ni^; D-'xaa (also fTis??) for n''73S: ; isiba Jer. 38 : 12 for ""jba (or as somt, read, r^iba) ver. 11. a. In like manner l is changed to S before ni in the word niS3 fof nil3 from ni3; it is consequently unnecessary to assume, as Gesenius does, a singular ni<5 which never occurs. Change op Consonants to Vowels. ^57. The second class of changes is. the conversion of consonants into vowels, or the substitution of the latter for the former. This occurs, 1. Occasionally in reduplicated syllables or letters, aii3 for 2sa? ; nittprj for nisijst:; bia for baba Gen. 11 :9 ; nitibs 2 Chron. 35:13 from nn^it Prov. 19 : 24. 2. Much more frequently with the quiescents. (1) A prefixed 'y is softened to its homogeneous vowel u before other labials or voweUess letters, e. g. rr^ii, li'ii; the softening of an initial "i to ^ only occurs in "'fe'^s 1 Chron. 2 : 13 for ''ffi!' ver. 12, tJs 2 Sam. 14 : 19, Mic. 6 : 10 for o? . (2) Medial or final quiescents without vowels of their own often lose their sound in that of a preceding vowel. This is invariably the case with 1 and "^ following their homo- geneous vowels, e. g. Tiiin for Ti'iin § 59, triitT'a for triin^a, unless Ihey are doubled, as '^i'^^'o , ""As , and occasionally even ^ 57 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS TO VOWELS. 77 then, e. g. ''hi^ for ''h^'a . Pinal s always, and medial x £r© quently, gives up its consonant sound after any vowel what- ever, e. g. sia , Kiia , nsib for nsib . a. Medial X regularly loses Its consonantal power in the future Kal o" Pe Aleph verbs, e. g. bist'i ; in "las preceded by b, thus laSb ; in ni|N?is and certain forms of "iTS preceded by the prefixes ai 3 1, thus, B%'i1ss^ iri'isb but nf?!*^; ^p^\\ '^''P^^-i '''p'^\ but liis^, ■'inxb , w^nsib . The following examples are of a more individual character, e.g. nn.!»3 for rriss, nbsi 1 Kin. 11:39 for n,|»SJ, tlfaE&sn Num. 11:4, B^]^1»a Jer. 46:'"l, n^nsasB Isa. 14: 23. In a few cases this has led to a change of ortho- graphy, the X which is no longer heard being dropped, or another vowe. letter substituted for it, e. g. lissi"! Ezek. 42:5, and b-'ils Hos. 11 : 4 from b?!}, 'i'iiji-i Job 8:8 for ^iiisi,' Bl'i Deut. 32:32 for BJKi, and the exam- ples cited § 53. 2, a. b. The consonant fi never loses its sound in that of a preceding vowel like the rest of the quiescents. The letter fi is often used to denote a vowel, but if in any word it properly expresses a cons(Jnant this is never converted into a vowel, or vice versA. The exceptions are apparent not real, as in the frequent abbreviation of the ending ^'T; in proper names to iT' , thus in JRin , njplfn . The change here does not consist in the rejec- tion of the vowel >! and the sollening of the consonant n, but the syllable in is dropped, whereupon final Kamets ip written by its appropriate vowel letter, § 11. 1, a, just as irr^D'^a after the rejection of ^tn; becomes fis'^a . So in those rare cases in which n is substituted for the suffix Pi , e. g. .irisb Lev. 13:4 for nnsiu. The proper name bxms Num. 34:28 is de- rived not from iTis but nna, a root of kindred meaning, of whose exist- ence, though otherwise unattested, this word is itself a sufficient voucher. (3) Medial s often gives its vowel to a preceding vowel- less letter and rests in its sound; '' occasionally does the same with a homogeneous vowel, when preceded by a vowel- less prefix. a. Thus, k: ciiixn for n-iiasT, nson for nxan; !f]tsxo Ezek. 25: 6 from BSir ver. 15; Mm Ps. 139': 20 for sixiOJ , so xfes^ Jer.'lO:5; ■'JaiX-l from pix-i; Bsnia Neh. 6:8for oinia; Kin Isa. 51:20, iSB Deut. 14 : 5 ; B-isishl Sam. 'l4:33 for Diiah ; '-i-'axa Isa. 10:13 for ni3X3; liisxi Zech. 11:5 for "iiiJSN^; tliis even occurs after mixed syllables, e. g. fi=xba for fiDSj nouns I for li'in': . _ . ,, There is no instance of this with 1, on the contrary, nisip Cant. 5:2, 12. (4) At the end of words 1 and ">, when without a vowel of their own and preceded by a voweUess letter, invariably 78 ORTHOGBAPHT. ^ 58 quiesce in their homogeneous vowels, 1 in an unaccented m, ■' in i, which draws the accent upon itself and frequently causes the dissolution of a previous syllable and the rejection of its vowel, W3 for wa , inin^O'i for innici ; ^7V\ for yy^ , I'iiB for ;ins , 1^5 for I'm . (5) When preceded or accompanied hy heterogeneous vowels, 1 and "^ are sometimes dropped, or if the vowel be a, they not unfrequently combine with it, forming the diph- thongal and e, § 62. 1, e. g. piw for p%':r\ , r\% for "'"ia , nia for "iHa, Dji for oil?, D^pn for Diipn, nti for niia; aioin for a-icin , B5i^2 for »5'7? , fTi» construct state of n jia , rr^a const of n^i , bi3"'n for biSi^n , nS?': for '^i . a. Vav rarely rfemains with a heterogeneous vowel unless accompanied by weak letters, by contrast with which it becomes comparatively strong, e.g. mn, nis, ni-i . Vowel Changes. ^58. 1. The third class of changes embraces those which take place in the vowels. The primary ofRce of the vowels is to aid in pronouncing the consonants, to which conse- quently they are quite subordinate, merely occupying, so to speak, the interstices between them. Their number and variety being greater, however, than is demanded for this single purpose, they have besides to a certain extent an in- dependent value and meaning of their own in the constitu- tion of words. (1) Changes of vowels, while they cannot hke a difference of consonants create distinct verbal roots, are yet fruitful of those minor modifications of which etymology takes cognizance, such as the formation of derivatives and grammatical inflexions, e. g. b-ia to be yreat, ij'isi greatness, bina great; bijp ],.e killed, bitij? to kill, Vtb]? kUl thou, btJJs hilling, bitJp killed; DTO a horse, fioiO a mare. (2) They may indicate differences in the forms of words which have §58 VOWEL CHANGES. 79 arisen in the lapse of time j "i?i in the Pentateuch means in- differently girl or hoy, in later books girl is frny? ; sin in the Pentateuch he or she, in other books she is always STi ; the^ form of the demonstrative tiT'jn is found only in Genesis, t^n in writers after the time of Moses, iT^n in Ezekiel; the plural of the demonstrative in the Pentateuch ^s or ti^i? , elsewhere, with a single exception, njx . The imperfect no- tation of the vowels in the original mode of writing by letters alone has, however, left us without the means of ascertaining to what extent such changes may have taken place. (3) They may indicate diversity of dialect, e. g. it?)? to hill, Chald. ^t?)?, Syr. V^D , Arab. "^ , Ethiop. ^I-A: . 2. The vowel changes with which orthography is con- cerned, on the other hand, are purely euphonic, being in themselves void of significance, and springing solely from the natural preference for what is easier of utterance or more agreeable to the ear. Orthographically considered, vowels are either mutable or iitimutable, the latter being unaffected by those circumstances which occasion changes in the former. A vowel may be immutable by nature, or made so by posi- tion. A short vowel in a mixed syllable before the ac- cent is ordinarily immutable by position, being beyond the reach of the common causes of mutation, e. g. "'^'7'P, "^f^^icp . Long vowels are immutable by nature in certain words or classes of words ; but they are only distinguishable as such by a knowledge of the etymological forms which require them. It may, however, be observed, as a general though not an invariable rule, that the vowels of such words and forms as are prevailingly written with the vowel letters are less liable to mutation than those which are prevailingly written without them. Mutable vowels are hable to changes both of quantity, from long to short, and the reverse, and of quality from pure to mixed iji to o, i to e, a to c) and the reverse, these changes being confined, except in rare in- 80 ORTHOGRAPHY. ^ 59, 60 stances, to the cognate forms ; thus, i never passes into u or 0, nor these into a. Only as G stands in relation to both i and a, it serves to mediate the interval between them, and thus accounts for the occasional changes of i to a or the re- verse, e. g. !5'^'i?J?ri , iJr'i?!?!! ; ^5 for Kz , irja ; tn , ubi?! comp. a. The exceptional change from m or o to e occurs only in the pro- nouns, e.g. cri^Bp, belbre suffixes wbap; and in the particle nx , before suffixes nx . There are also a fevsr examples of the change of short vowels in mixed syllables before the accent, e. g. n33"ia , construct n33"ia, plural nias-iH. § 59. The mutations of vowels are due to one or other of the following causes, viz. : 1. Syllabic changes. 2. The influence of consonants. 3. The influence of vowels. 4. The accent. 6. The shortening or lengthening of words. As the vowel of unaccented mixed syllables is always short, and that of simple syllables long, §18. 2, it is evident that a change in the character of a syUable will involve a corresponding change in its ' vowel, unless the accent interfere to prevent. Accordingly, when for any cause a mixed syllable becomes simple, its short vowel will be converted into a long one ; and when a simple syllable becomes mixed, the reverse change will take place, e. g. in , DiSn ; tittp , Pttj? . In the case of the vowels i and u there is frequently an addi- tional change of quality, viz., of ? to e and u to o, e. g. Difsn for D-iipn ; liis for li):: in place of 1^3 ^ 56. 3. a. Daghesh-forte is thus resolved by the prolongation of the previous vowel in 'Ciap, icia-'p; 'rj|Q , viii^s; ■'li'sn , ■'lii-'an; D^siTa, nisi-iia; ■ipn, -ipiin; n-iiiisr Eccies. 9:12 for 'oii:;3;;a §33. 2. a; »"ipQnn for iii);Bn!-, ; rri^J Lara. 1:8, if this is for n^3 seever. 17; and if the conjecture' of Gesenius (Thesaurus, p. 483) be correct as to the true reading in 1 Chron. 23:6, 24:3 OESn^ for c^\r\\ §60. Contiguous consonants may give rise to vowel changes by their individual peculiarities, as is the case with ^ 60 VOWEL CHANGES. 81 the gutturals, or by their concurrence. The pecuharities of the gutturals are fourfold, viz. : 1. A preference for the vowel Pattahh of the same organ, into which, consequently, a preceding or accompanying vowel is frequently converted, e. g. nbi? for nbio ; wh for D?& ; Jii^f for >^M?: ; yao for yaii? ; ifisiste from sito . a. The instances in which this permutation occurs cannot easily be embraced under any general rules. In some cases it was optional; in others, usage decides for it or against it without, however, being absolutely uniform. The following statements embrace what is of most importance. (1) The stability of the vowel often depends upon the weight attached to it in the etymological form ; thus, Sai2J in the imperative but not in the in- finitive for sau; sh^-j for SM^, but saaJ not vhb for sh'vi. (2) The vowel preceding the guttural is more liable to change than that which succeeds it, e. g. saia^ always, hut Vsiq"; and VsiST); nsni but Onrii; ipy\ but 110S . (3) An accented vowel is sometimes retained where one up- accented would suffer change, e. g. lin^i. but in'l ; "in^l ; cnl? . (4) O and u are less subject to alteration than i and e, e. g. bsis for biB ; a which is already cognate with the gutturals is mostly retained, though it occasion- ally becomes a before n, e.g. CiflN from HN, "'nasa Job 31:24 (in most copies) from nana, na^ from nnai. (5) x in many cases prefers the diphthongal vowels e and o, thus 'iipK, "TixiaJ, jXiaS, ^DN^ but fcil'iDS^^; N'a^, isN''. (6) 1 partakes of this preference for a to a limited extent, e.g. "ipjl for npf] or "'D^t; S"i»i from fisni . 2. The reception of Pattahh furtive, § 17, at the end of a word after a long heterogeneous vowel (i. e. any other than a), or before a vowelless final consonant, e. g. T^ , : T a. This is necessary when the vowel preceding a final guttural cannot be converted into Pattahh. Sometimes the form with Pattahh and that with Pattahh furtive occur interchangeably, e. g. (nSiab and nSob , or with a slight distinction, as Hbiax, in pause 'Hfeiax; tnaia, construct DBTB . In a few instances a guttural preceding a final vowelless letter takes simple Sh'va instead of Pattahh furtive, e. g. ftnpb 1 Kin. 14 : 3, and in most editions FiO?"? Jer- 13 : 25. As final N is always either quiescent or otiant, it never receives Pattahh furtive. The letter 1 never takes it unless it be in a single instance, and that in a penultimate syllable Pj'^n^ Ps. 7 : 6, which is probably to be read yi'rdoph; though it might be pronounced yiraddoph, which some conceive to be an anomalous form for CJ'Ti.^ , after the analogy of "HS^ Gen. 21:6, the compound Sh'vji being lengthened into a vowel followed by euphonic Daghesh, as in the related words 6 82 ORTHOGRAPHY. § 60 n^ian Isa. 1:6, and nnan Isa. 53:5, while others adopt the explanation of the old Jewish Grammarians, that it is a peculiar comhination of the Kal tl^n': and the Piel Cl'j'i'; . 3. A preference for compound rather than simple Sh'va, ^16. 3, whether silent or vocal, inasmuch as the gutturals are more readily made audible at the beginning than at the close of a syllable, and the hiatus accompanying them as- sumes more of the complexion of a vowel than is usual With stronger consonants. a. The gutturals occasionally retain simple Sh'va when silent. This is regularly done by a final radical fl, n or S, followed by a servile letter, e.g. nn^^) *'^^.'7li ons'i^, onsaca, innsaa, with few exceptions as r|!i:3'n'i 'Hos. 8 : 2, 'TilissV Gen. 26 : 29, C!i:5i?in' 2 Sam. 21 : 6. Other cases have more of a casual or sporadic character, and occur chiefly with the stronger guUurals n and n, n.;n^, rjBn;, fi^n;;, banp, wn^nn, mrrna but niicna, uiin^i^ but lijan^, n^n.5 a possession, but Hbn: from hm a brook; niore rarely with Stand s] oisj Lev. 4 : 13, Nizjsa 1 Kin. 15:16, B'jsa Isa. 11:15, nyh Deut. 25:7 but in pause : STism ' Isa. 28 : 6, I'inNJ Ex! 15 : 6; 1 has for the most part simple Sh'va niin, Dffl-i}^, though in a few instances it has compound "13^,3, instlj?]- 6. (1) Among the compound Sh'vas the preference, unless there is some reason for choosing another, is ordinarily given to Hhateph Pattahh, as the simplest and most in accordance with the nature of the gutturals, and to this an antecedent Hhirik, when unessential to the form, is commonly made to correspond, e. g. laS , "las.^. for las'! . Sometimes, particularly with X (see 1. a. 5.) Hhateph Segho'l is taken n^i;x . fljla.s , nnjK, nax, -la-Nt, ci-ix, cn-'';ri, ms, nsiis, ni-is Joel 2: 5, TyimAl Jer. 13 :2i, which not infrequently becomes Hhateph Pattahh upon the prolongation of the word ?;"ic!<. , "^as Prov. 25:7, inax^, ■'aiist^, OTHthk'; Judg. 10:2, or the carrying forward of its accent "'Fi'iixn , ■'n'lax.ni , "Tia'inr! , "'nanqril . (2) If, however, z or 6, characteristic of the form, precede, this commonly determines the Sh'va to be selected, e. g. T'aSn for T'asn, 1as;| for las;, "'Uss for ''I'SB; though sometimes Hhateph Pattahh is retained and the intermediate syllable, §20. 2, resolved info a simple one by prolonging the vowels, e. g. rj"i2?n Josh. 7 : 7, fi^S^ii, iSi'B Isa. 1 : 31. Hhirik may, how- ever, remain short, e. g. Tj^Hn, S^?''?, llO.'i; Job 6:22, particularly if a Daghesh-forte has been omitted from the guttural, e. g. HEXJ Jer. 3:8, though even in this case the assimilation sometimes takes place, e. g. !|ari;;°Gen. 30 : 39 for sian^, l-inx Judg. 5 : 28 for nrnx . If a vowel has been rejected from the form, the corresponding Hhateph is generally pre- ferred, e. g. D"''iBS from iBii, Ciijin, ■'•inttln Ezek. 16:33, •'N^ Gen. 16:13; ia^'ain 1 Kin. 13:20 from a-i'in ; 'ia"'u5r!, Gen. 37 : 22 fronTa^BJn. There are occasional instances of the same word being variously written in this respect, e.g. linx Ruth 3:15, Mns Cant. 2:15; IH'ixm and §61 VOWEL CHANGES. 83 in-ixn'; Isa. 44: 13 ; l-ianan Job 16: 16 (K'ri in some copies), "liJDian Lam. 1 : 20, iSs'n Isa. 52 : 14, inxn 1 Sara. 28 : 14. " " " c. Before another guttural the compound Sh'va is frequently re- placed by the corresponding short vowel, e.g. 7(.^»p for TJ^Kt!, ■>ln''i"'Sn for ■'n'T'Sri , nsinxn for D^-insn ; and occasionally under N by a long vowel before other letters as well as gutturals, or by a short vowel with Daghesh, e. g. o-'ftjx for cjinx, Tinrnk, Otts for osiix, -liw for liix, 1B^« for "lOtJ. This disposition to render the gutturals more audible by the aid of a vowel is further shown by their attracting to themselves the vowel of another letter, particularly in triliteral monosyllables, e. g. S'nt fors-it (snj), sian, SB3, tssa, nnp 2 Kin. 12:9, tsia for i2;«a, -iKa] also'lS-ip Ex. 2:20 for JS'^ip'Ruth'! : 20, Wi^Nn Prov.'l :22 for cnxn, in53i!}n'.Tob20:26 for >in^3Kri, n-irosi Zech.7:14for DnSDsi, and by their sometimes causing an antecedent or accompanying vowel to be re- tained where analogy would require its rejection, e. g. ''XSia for ■'NSia from Nsia, ■'xar;, "'saa, "'O-'-io and ''0"''id, ci-i^na from' -ifina comp'. 1. a. (4)', sinxsa-; 'Deut.'32: 10; n'isa, nfrn ; 4. An incapacity for being doubled, whence they never receive Daghesh-forte, and the previous syllable thus becom- ing a simple one, its vowel is generally lengthened, § 69, a to a, I to e, u to 0, e. g.' is^ for l^'a, ^«» for )m, l^h"; for 51^2"; , ins? , ar?^ . a. Sometimes an intermediate syllable, §20. 2, is formed, and the vowel remains short. (1) This is commonly the case before n, frequently be- fore n , less often before S , rarely before N , never before i , e.g. Dn3 , iha, "^na, 2j;n , "('S; . (2) It is more likely to occur in the body of a word than after a prefix, e. g. "'iribn': Ps. 1 19 : 43 from bli;, but pbn;; Job 38 : 24 from pin . (3) When the guttural comes to stand at the end of the word the short vowel is often resumed, e. g. snnn Prov. 22 : 24 from n?"inFi, "isn Ps. 141:8 from n'nSPl but ISPR Deut. 2:9. There are a very few in- stances in which Daghesh-forte is found in 1 , e. g. Tjljia rT^B Ezek. 16 : 4, ntia Prov. 14: 10, TiTrissa Prov. 15: 1 (in some editions), ■'liJN'nir Cant. 5:2, see also §24. 6. , §6,1. The concurrence of consonants gives rise to the following vowel changes, viz. : 1. When two vowelless letters come together at the be- ginning of a syllable in contravention of the law in §18, the impossible combination is relieved by giving to the first of them a short vowel. This, if there be no reason for prefer- ring another, will be the briefest of the vowels, Hhirik, e. g. 84 ORTHOGRAPHY. . §61 ''San for I'la^ , -lina for -1273 , ipjTn for iprn . If a vowel has been omitted from the word, the corresponding short vowel is frequently employed, e. g. "^ib^ for ■'sba from if^'o (^^tt); '6)-a from 0ti ; ■'Ban from bnn . ^m^ for ^:n: from ifr . Or if one of the consonants be a guttural, the vowel mostly con- forms to the compound Sh'va, which it has or might have, e. g. '"'^2? for iins; , ^piri^ for ^pTn;j , iSnb for "^brk , nisnb for isnb , i\byQ for ?i'??s • a. Vav before a guttural follows the rule just given; before 'i, and sometimes before n or n followed by "^ , it takes Hhirik ; before other vowelless letters it gives up its consonant sound and quiesces in its homo- geneous vowel Shurek, § 57. 2. (1), thus inayi , ■'n-'i , rrji and niin". , s^^i , 6. In triliteral monosyllables or final syllables with the vowel Pattahh, the first letter sometimes receives an accented Seghol, to which the fol- lowing Pattahh is then assimilated, e. g. Cjnii) for Ein3 construct of tins , n:^B^ for rsbaa , the Seghols being liable to be changed to Pattahhs by the presence of a guttural rnsda for ntiBiaa . c. In aissa Gen. 32:20 for cdXsb the. vowelless letters belong to '-■ .1-1 V - : T o different syllables, and the introduction of the 'new vowel makes it neces- sary to lengthen the one before it. 2. Although two vowelless letters are admissible at the end of a word, §18, the harshness of the combination is commonly relieved by the insertion of Seghol, e. g. 2'i'i for S"!^ , fi?^ for P3^ . If either letter is a guttural, Pattahh is mostly used instead, e. g. nsi - bys), ']'n\ If either letter is ">, its homogeneous vowel Hhirik is used; if the second letter is 1, it will rest in Shurek, §57. 2. (4.), e. g. rr^i, ife, *inri, but niib . a. When the penultimate letter is n or n, it in a few instances takes Seghol, as hrvk, 'jna , on^, crn. When the final letter is X, it either remains otiant, §16, or requires Seghol, tfiB, S'^?^ , NTl!!, ^"Vk; a penulti- mate K either quiesces in the antecedent vowel or attracts it to itself, § 60. 3. c, nst55 , nx'i! or nxto , irstn . The alternate mode of facilitating the pronunciation of gutturals before a vowelless letter at the end of a word by means of Pattahh furtive, has been explained §60. 2. 3, When the same letter is repeated with or vdthout a mutable vowel intervening, there is often a contraction into ^ 61 VOWEL CHANGES. 85 one doubled letter, and the vowel is rejected or thrown back upon the preceding consonant, e. g. ^30'? for ^338^ , sb'^ for aso;;! (Daghesh-forte disappearing at the end of the word), 3b for 33b, i3|nD;« Job 31 : 15 for i3Mi3;i (see 4. below); if another consonant immediately follow the contracted letters, a diphthongal vowel '', or i may be inserted to render the re- duplication more audible and prevent the concurrence of three consonants, "^tiiio, ^ . This is still the case when at the end of a word an auxiliary Seghol or Pattahh has been inserted between the letters (according to 2.), e. g. ■jsii , nssp , b?ii), npjia from p"''3"'» , or the reduplication of the doubled letter is no longer heard and the Daghesh-forte does not appear, § 25, e. g. 3ph corap. biQpln . a. The vowel e is ia like circumstances often reduced to one of its con- stituents a, e. g. ^nbipn from b'^Bpfi , '^Fii|0[? from bBp , nss^n from T\?Vi , nS'iypl. n3"isjtn, iscn, and occasionally to its other constituent j', e. g. nniiflprfi from ci'ni;'?^' , CFI'^J'?? from irn; . The only example of Shurek in a Segholate form is nsiiBFi Lev. 5 : 21. 5. In unaccented syllables i and u are preferred to c and before doubled letters, "ns , ins ; -nn , inn ; nMpn from 3pn; 3p^5, i5|di; iiyq comp. bapa, -pn, i;?n, though such forms as isiO* 'I'??; ^^"^ > ^^^ likewise occur. 6. A vowel is occasionally given to a final consonant to soften the termination of the word, and make the transition easier to the initial consonant of that which follows ; thus, ^i7, ");"?; "Cr'^ for nba; on, n^r.; b«, n|i?; ii?, n*N; 5jsh, liBPi; niaaa, inias^; n*n, ifirn; iMSS Ex. 15:10; I'aJP?? Ex. 15:5'. a. These paragogic vowels have established themselves in the cur- rent forms of certain words, as nb^S, nan, n^s, lis,, ■'ns^, ''B. But, 86 OETHOGEAPHT. • § 62 with these exceptions, they are chiefly found in poetry. The vowels '' . and i are mostly attached to words in what is called the construct state, fi ^ to words in the absolute; and all of them to the feminine ending n. Examples of i : ■ija Num. 23 : 18, 24 : 3, 15, ir':n several times, -irsa Ps. 114:8. Examplesof ■'.: TiSlrfX Hos. 10:ll,-'npif Gen. 49:11, iJa'ibid., "■nS!? Gen. 31:39, ■'nn=^ Ps. 110:4, ■'IjeH Ps. '114:8, -i'^-; Ps. 123:1, "'n-^aJT? Ps. 113:5, ■')i-'3i;a ver. 6, "'a^'Ra' ver. 7, ■'i"'«r'i!7 ver. 8, "'i^'aJIO ver. 9, ■'rsba Isa. 1 :21,'-''i^i<3 Ex. 15:6,' ■'StSi Zech. ll':17, "'Pa'n Lam. 1 : 1, TiTsa ibid., lis'iJ Deut. 33 : 16. It is also attached to the first member of the compound in many proper names, e.g. bN'''i3a, p'lS'^aia, to certain particles, as "fiia, "'H^?', ''?'?, and perhaps to such participial forms as ■'Fiaia-' Jer. 22 : 23. Of n , : nra-'S Ex. 15:16, na^k Isa. 8 : 23, Job 34 : 13, 37 : 12, no-in Judg. 14 : 18, nnsit'-i';' Ps. 3 : 3, 80 : 3*, 'jon. 2 : 10, nb-;| almost constantly, 'nnia Ps. 116 : 15, nbrii' Num. 34 : 5, Ps. 124: 4, nn^ns Ps. 92: 16 (K'ri), 125: 3,'Ezek. 28 : 15, Ho's.' 10: 13, r^^Ys Job 5: 16, nri^is Ps. 44:27, 63:8, 94: 17, nnss Job 10 :22, nniap) Josh' 19:43, Judg. 14: i, and regu- larly in the third person feminine of the preterite of fib verbs. In modern Persian i is similarly appended to nouns in close connection with a following word, to remove the obstruction of the final consonant and serve as a uniting link. § 62. The changes due to the influence of vowels may arise from their concurrence or proximity. 1. Concurring vowels may coalesce; a uniting vdth a forms a, uniting with i or u it forms the diphthongal e or o, e. g. niiDicn Neh. 3:13 from niBicxn after the rejection of n by § 58. 2. b ; fi!*? after the softening of "^ to i becomes ti"'? ; inSaj? by the rejection of n becomes iSa]? ; in;i prefixed to proper names is from ^T\'i for ^iyi , § 57. 2 (4). 2. One of them may be hardened into its corresponding semi- vowel ; f '' . with i "* may form ^ "^ . , or the first i may be changed to ty, which, upon the reduplication of the ^ to preserve the brevity of the antecedent vowel, § 24. 3, becomes ■'!'., e. g. "^ys with D'' . becomes Diiay or D'^'iia? . So, "^ . be- fore fi , forms nj . , and before i forms i' . , e. g. ri*nay , nisia? ; in Hke manner ^ is changed before i into uv, form- ing il. , which, by § 56. 3, becomes i". , e. g. n^D^a , by the substitution of Jri for n , nibb'a . / 1 followed hj u^ forms IV, ^n-'Pibajp, rpibt?!?; w^h, i-^S; rhisn for rb»n Josh. 14 : 8. U "> , before ^ "^ . or m i is resolved into ay, which, joined with the appropriate semi-vowels, becomes "^ and I"! ,, the virtual § 63 VOWEL CHANGES. 87 reduplication of the final consonant in the one case preserv- ing the short vowel, which is. lengthened in the other; thus ''010 with "i . becomes ''fa'io , and with in , 1161D . The same resolution of "^ .. occurs before final Ij , forming -[7 ., and by § 61. 2 5i: ., thus "i-iiys with If becomes ^f^nw? . a. Grammarians have disputed whether in such words as C'las ni'sba the point in i is Daghesh-forte or Mappik, §26, and accordingly whether they are to be rend ibknyylni, malkhuyyolh, or ibknylm, mallfhuyolh. If the explanation given above be correct, it is Daghesh- forte Conservative. Comp. cfp, 0^15. b. Such forms as i^-iQ, ii-is, c;-iq from ■'•IQ are only apparent excep- tions to the above rules. The word is properly ■J-iB , and to this the addi- tions are made, the auxiliary Hhirilc being dropped with the cessation of the cause from which it originated, §57. 2.(4). In Biitis-is 2 Chron. 17:11 from i3"is and Qi . the vowels are kept separate by an interposed N. c. In words of rib formation, such as rii^s, iiB3, niias from niijs and •^,1 1) ^'^ .' 't might appear as though one vowel were rejected before another. But the correct explanation is that "^ is the true final radical, and the forms above given are for rt^iijs, rias, Bi^iis (like o^Ba'p) from which "i is rejected by §53. 3. In the same way flibs', t^m, etc., from nicr are for liJUS, TJ^iUS. In such alternate forms as nj"is from nVs, the radi- cal 1 is retained by preserving the antecedent vowel, which, before Daghesh-forte Conservative, becomes Hhirik, §61. 5. ^63. The following euphonic changes are attributable to the proximity of vowels, viz. : 1 . Pattahh before a guttural is often changed to Seghol if another a follows, and the same change sometimes occurs after a guttural if another a precedes. The particular cases are the following : a. When (.) stands before a guttural with'(,) always before n, e.g. ann for inn, fin"J=a Prov. 21:22. c=nfi, ■'BC';;Sfi (also when n has Hhateph Kamets, e.g. D^onnrt; ^ribnnn Judg. 9:9), often before n and S, particularly if it receives the secondary accent, e.g. C^fifi for D'^nnrt, nan^ but r^rib, >lir;Eri; nBsn, n-irs na, rarely before X and l, nnfi Gen'.' 14:10, nisss Neh. 9 :' 18, 26 but ^"^mssf; Ezek. 35 : 12. 6. When (_) before a guttural is followed by another consonant with (-) or (J ^?'7-i ''^^'^- **"' '''in^i ''sr'?. liut nxanj, Nan^, once before the liquid ^, e. g. '^bss. E.x. 33:3 lor ?]^?S||, and once before 3 e.g. ^^Vk for '<^yi^\ • ' c. In Hx^pxi 1 Sam. 28:15 and the combination 151 Dbir a similar change takes place after a guttural to prevent the repetition of the vowel &; so in niisni Ps. 20:4, and n:kl n:x after the liquid 3. 88 ORTHOGRAPHY. § 64, 65. 2. Pattahh is sometimes assimilated to a following Seghol, or to a preceding Kamets or Tsere. a. The assimilation to (..) takes place regularly in what are called Segholate forms, in which an auxiliary Seghol has by §61. 2 been intro- duced between two vowelless letters, T)^a forTir!?, 3^1?. ft"" ^"J-i V!)? '°'' yy/i , but n'l'i , DSB ; only before 1 , which can combine with a and not with e, a is retained and lengthened to (J by §59, 'i.;;K, Ti'lh. Rarely in other cases cb"!;; for dd"!;;, where the change is facilitated by the pre- ceding ■'. h. The assimilation to (^) occurs in a few cases after a guttural with rt prefixed, e. g. Bsn for Dsn, ^nrj for inn, ^-i^n for Ti^n. c. The assimilation to ( ) occurs in the Kal future of Pe Yodh verbs where the alternate forms are aia|; and ]'i?'''? . \ 64. The following vowel changes are due to the accent, viz. : 1. If a long vowel in a mixed syllable be deprived of its accent, it will be shortened, §18, e.g. Tai^n, "iiQTCri; ^0?, nosv Qizji, Dic^i: afy\ -aryi. a. If a vowel preceding Makkeph is incapable of being shortened, it' will receive the secondary accent Methegh, agreeably to §43. 2. The accent prefers to be immediately preceded by a simple syllable and a long vowel. Accordingly an antece- dent vowelless letter often receives what may be called a pre- tonic vowel. This is commonly the simplest of the long vowels a, q. g. ^'i?^ , 20^ , nn{:b , I^S^rii; , occasionally e, e. g. b^.':, nilbiB, i^iib;:, 'j'linsri, rarely 6, e. g. 'j^'isj?^ . Such a vowel is sometimes inserted, even though a pre-existing mixed syllable is thereby destroyed, e. g. in the plurals of Segholates and of feminine nouns derived from them, CD^tt from ip^, niibtt from nsbtt . §65. The special emphasis, with which the last word of a clause is dwelt upon, gives rise to certain vowel changes in connection with the pause accents, §36. 2. a. These are (1) lengthening short vowels, viz., (J and not infrequently (..) which has arisen from (.) to (,), e. g. nfcx, Tasf; P>=ir!3, p\3n2; ^ns, ynS; na?, lay, and bringing back Kamets §66 VOWEL CHANGES. 89 Hhatuph shortened from Hholem to its original length ti'aji , ^^'SJ^ . (2) Restoring vowels which have been dropped in the course of inflection, e. g. r\3.'S , I'la? ; T^s^ , sna'i ; r\i2y , iTby . (3) Changing simple Sh'va in triUteral sylla- bles and before the suffix ^ to Seghol, e. g. Ti^ia , ^rinia ; iri;i , ■^m ; D3» , D3tt5 . (4) Changing compound Sh'va to the cor- responding long vowel, e. g. "liiii, i?K; ■'in (i'lin), ■'sri ; ^Sn, a. Pattahh sometimes remains without change, e. g. IS Ps. 132 : 12, Fi-i3^ 2 Sam. 2:27, Wbs? Jer. 7:10, ipian Prov. 30:9, Tlisns Job 34:5, !"'B^=!} Neh. 5:14. Seghol more frequently, t^ba, p^S, bng, Ti'iJ. and TjTfl . Long vowels are mostly; unaltered ; only Tsere is in mixed syllables occasionally changed to Pattahh, e.g. i'nn Isa. 18:5 for tnn, so !-t'n Isa. 42:22, i^sn Gen. 17:14, baa'l Gen. 21:8, Tj^^vGen. 25: 34, which, in one word of Segholate formation, is converted to Seghol, e. g. sui^ , SC'H. Where the same word has alternate forms, one is sometimes se- lected as the ordinary and the other as the pausal form, thus 'J'Sn^ , ysn;; ; laim, BJan;;; fi'^ia^, fi'2'O'!; ''nbad, •'^^\^^ Gen. 43:14; in'-i;! Eccl. 12:11, !13-i'J 1 Sam. 13:21; TS, ':TS Gen. '49:3, raqri , natn Lev. 26:34, 35; ai'S';!, 121037. .Sometimes, instead of changing the Sh'va be- fore ?] to Seghol, its vowel is shifted, thus "(3, ~3; Tib, T\BS, ^f^S*, and in Ex. 29 : 35 nspk.. The position of the pause accent, so far as it differs from that of the ordinary accent, has been explained §35. 2. b. Of the pause accents, or those which mark the limits of clauses and sections, the first class, viz., Silluk, Athnahh, and Merka with Mahpakh, almost always give rise to the vowel changes which have been described; the second and third classes, S'gholta, Zakeph Katon, Zakeph Gadhol, R'bhi* and Shalsheleth, e. g. 1^n=3l Isa. 13: 8, do so frequently; the fourth class, Pazer, e.g. 2 Kin. 3 : 25, Prov. 30:4, and T'lisha Gh'dhola, e.g. Ezek. 20 : 21, but seldom. Pausal forms are occasionally found with other Disjunctives, thus, Tiphhha lain Deut. 13 : 5, Pashta snaaJS ibid., Geresh yh'li Ezek. 40 : 4, and even with Conjunctives, e. g. '''l^ Isa. 49 : IS , nbs^n Ezek. 17 : 15, W} 2 Chron. 29 : 31. §66. 1. The shortening and lengthening of words has an effect upon their vowels. The shortening may take place (1) At the end of a word by the rejection of a vowel. This occurs only with (..)or(„) in certain forms of nb verbs, e. g.bjn from il^sn, 1X75 for "-i.^??! 'If?'?] 1 Sam. 21 : 14 for nw";!, nia.'! for nniB^I . In the last two examples the short vowel is lengthened upon its receiving the accent, comp. §64.1. If the rejected vowel was preceded by two con- sonants, these will now stand together at the end of the word, and be lia- ble to the changes described §61. 2, e. g. Sj")ii for nE")!! . 90 ORTHOGRAPHT. § 66 (2) In the body of a word by shortening a long vowel in a mixed syllable, which must, of course, be the one bearing the accent, § 32. 1, or rejecting a long vowel in a simple syl- lable before the accent (the pretonic vowel, §64. 2), "li'i. n?'7; ^'Ha, ifi-q; v^'^-a; itJtlpt?. a. This is in general the only reduction possible. The vowel of a mixed syllable, if short already, is capable of no further abbreviation ; and it cannot be rejected, or there would be a concurrence of vowelless con- sonants which the language seeks to avoid (TiP'in Prov. 30:6 is an excep- tion). And the vowel of a simple syllable, if short, must have the accent, § 32. 1, which preserves it from rejection. The changes above recited are confined to the last two, or, in case the accent is upon the penult, the last three syllables of the word ; for the antecedent portions of polysyllables are already abbreviated to the utmost. Contractions due to the peculiari- ties of certain letters, as the gutturals and quiescents, which have been before explained, are not here taken into the account, e.g. St'^, S531B; ma, nia: cf-ii, -ni. .6. Where the last vowel cannot be shortened, it sometimes experiences a change of quality from pure to diphthongal, such as is produced by the pressure of two following consonants, §61.4, e.g. ^"''na!; , ^"^3^)1; a^iCin, aciin; niBi, niri; riiiai. 2iai; ci&^o, ■'DIO. 2. If a word be lengthened by additions at the end, its vowels are liable to changes in consequence. (1) Such additions create a tendency to shorten the pre- vious part of the word in the manner just described. Tor the normal length of words in Hebrew being dissyllabic, the genius of the language is opposed to transcending this limit any further than is absolutely necessary. If the addition is not of sufficient weight to affect the position of the accent, no abbreviation results. But if it is of weight enough to remove the accent, an abbreviation follows if it is possible for one to be made, e.g. "lin, D'^'??'?, D3'^!i3'7 for niinni by §61.1. (2) They produce changes in an ultimate mixed syllable. If the appendage begin with a consonant, the antecedent vowel wiU now be succeeded by two consonants and be hable to the changes consequent upon such a position, § 61. 4, e. g. hib^Jjp) from ^■'t?];!?; njttjs from Dip; "ipbuipn from l="'t:i5n; § 66 VOWEL CHANGES. 91 inbsjp from -Bj? . If the appendage begin with a vowel, it will attach itself to the final consonant, which will in conse- quence be drawn away from its own syllable to begin the new one. This may occasion the following changes : («) If the preceding vowel is an auxiHary Seghol or Pattahh, introduced to facilitate the pronunciation of the second of two vowelless consonants, ^ 61. 2, it will be rejected, inasmuch as it is no longer required for this purpose, e. g. iifea from l\)'h , innp from nno . (5) If it be a short vowel, it must either be lengthened to adapt it to the simple syllable in which it now stands, or rejected on account of the disposition to abbreviate words upon their receiving accessions at the end, e. g. t^^ajp and n^ifJJ from -i?)5 . The cases are very rare in which a short vowel remains unchanged in consequence of its having the accent, ^18. 2, e. g. ma-i^ 1 Kin. 19 : 15 from ^klV, "^tisn Ezek. 8 : 2 from "^hm . (c) If it be a long vowel, it may be rejected, as i^i^lp^ from itijp? , "''bo from hv , or retained either unaltered, as nin'^pn from ^i?^, "^3 sis'? from 'Jisi?'!? , or with a change of quality from pure to diphthongal or the reverse, nj^irra from pintt , ■'iniTO? from aib: , >i2Hpri from D''j?n , o'^bbs from tJ-i^s . TABLE SHOWING THE CHARACTER AND AFFINITIES OF THE VOWELS AND THE ORDINARY LIMITS OF EUPHONIC CHANGES. . QUALITY. QDAKTITT Long. Short. Guttural, . Palatal, . Labial, . PART SECO^fD. ETYMOLOGY. Roots of Wokds. § 67. EtymojlOGY treats of the various kinds of words, their forhiation and inflections. Three successive stages are here to be distinguished. The first is the root or radical portion of words. This embraces those fundamental sounds, in which the essential idea originally inheres. Roots do not enter, in their nude or primitive form, into the current use of language, but they constitute the basis upon which all actually occurring words, with the exception of the inorganic interjections, are constructed. The second stage is the word itself in its simple uninflected state ; this is formed, if a prim- itive, directly from the root, if a derivative, from a pre-existing primitive, by certain changes or additions, which serve to con- vert the radical idea into the precise conception intended, which is as yet, however, expressed absolutely. The third and only remaining stage is the word as it appears in the ac- tual utterances of speech, so modified by inflections as to suggest the definite qualifications of the idea, such as the tense of verbs, the gender and number of nouns, and the de- gree of adjectives, or its relations whether of agreement or subordination, such as the persons and modes of verbs and the cases of nouns. ^ 68. There are in Hebrew, as in most languages, two classes of roots, which may be denominated respectively pro- ^ 68 BOOTS OF WORDS. 93 nominal and verbal. Pronominal roots form the basis of such words as express the relations of things to the speaker or to one another, viz., pronouns and certain prepositions, adverbs, and other particles. Prom verbal roots, which are by far the more numerous, spring words expressive of ideas, viz., verbs, nouns, and such particles as are derived from them. Verbal roots consist exclusively of consonants, and are almost invariably trUiteral. The introduction of a vowel or vowels, even for the sake of pronouncing them, destroys their abstract radical character, and converts them into specific words of this or that description. Nevertheless, for reasons of conve- nience, the letters of the root are usually pronounced by the aid of the vowels belonging to them in the simplest form of the corresponding verb, which is mostly the third person sin- gular of the preterite, e. g. buj? , tf^B . This must not be suffered, however, to lead to the confusion of identifying that particular verbal form with the proper radical, nor of supposing the verb to be the radical part of speech from which nouns in aU cases are derived : verbs and nouns are rather to be regarded as co-ordinate branches springing from a common root. a. The few quadriliterals and quinqueliterals which occur are mostly formed from pre-existing triliterais by the addition of a weak letter, or a letter similar to one of the original radicals, e. g. B0"]3 to lay waste comp. C03; kisb] to bum comp. r|St ; riES"iD a branch comp. MBSp ; cfes-iio thoughts comp. n'^QSto ; a^'inia a sceptre comp. BSa ; "iis^EJ tranquil comp. "|!StlB; f'■S')^ to spread comp. ti^S ; or by blendipg two different roots, e.g. li-'feon to be fresh composed of SBT and ll'sa ; "'ao^s a certain one = ■'ia^!? ""i'sB ; S^'JES a frog from "SS to leap l"i'i (in Arabic) a marsh. Some, which are not thus reducible, may perhaps be of foreign origin. b. Many of the triliteral roots appear to be based upon pre-existing biliterals. Thus, the cognates "lia, ^'n, tis, nia, I'ia, 7W, have in com- mon the two letters M with the associated idea of cutting. § 50. 3. The frequent examples of this description, together with the fact of the exist- ence of a few biliterals, e. g. 3S father, nx brother, CX mother, have suggested the thought that the ultimate roots may in all cases have been biliterals, and that the triliterais were a secondary formation. Various in- genious but unsuccessful attempts have been made to demonstrate this 94 ETYMOLOGY. § 69 position by an actual analysis, and to effect the reduction of all roots to two primitive letters. Still more extravagant and fanciful is the endea- vour, which has actually been made, to explain the origin of roots from the individual letters of which they are composed, and to deduce their mean- ings from the names, the shapes, or other peculiarities of those letters. The existence of roots and the meanings attached to them must be ac- cepted as ultimate facts. Some have arisen, no doubt, from the imitation of sounds in nature; but in most cases no satisfactory reason can be given why a given combination of sounds has that particular sense, which is in fact connected with it. § 69. The formation of words and their inflection are ac- comphshed partly by internal changes and partly by external additions. The internal changes are the insertion of vowels and the reduplication of consonants in various significant ways, e. g. bb)?, btJfs , bBj? , baj? . The external additions are significant syllables welded to the root or to the word, either at the beginning or the end, e. g. bi2]? , n^'^I? , ^i>'^'^ , i:bB];rin . a. The triliteral and exclusively consonantal character of Semitic roots is their most remnrkable -peculiarity in distinction from those of the Indo-European languages which are as prevailingly nionpsyliabic, the vowel being an essential constituent, while the number of consonants is variable. The fact of the vowel being an integral part of the root in these languages interferes with their employment of internal changes for purposes of derivation and inflection, and confines them almost entirely to external additions, e. g. doco, vocabam, vocatio, vocabulum, vocito, etc. The composition of words of which such large use is made in the Indo- Eiiropean tongues, e. g. ad-voco, in-voco, etc., lis almost unknown in He- brew except in the formation of proper names. b. Different languages differ greatly in their flexibility, that is to say, in the variety of words which may spring from a common root, and the number of forms which the same word may assume to express the various relations into which it enters. Relations, which in some languages are expressed by flection, as the cases of nouns, tenses of verbs, concord of adjectives, are in others indicated by additional words, as prepo- sitions, auxiliary verbs, etc., or suggested by the order of words in the sentence. c. Formative syllables, added either at the beginning or the end of words for the sake of inflection, are, in the ordinary consciousness of those who use the language, completely amalgamated with them, so that theit separate origin and signification is never thought of They are thus to be distinguished from those words which, by reason of their dependent character, are attached to others as prefixes or suffixes, but yet preserve their separate identity as prefixed conjunctions and prepositions and suf- fixed pronouns. §70, 71 PRONOUNS. 95 §70. The parts of speech in Hebrew are either declina- ble as pronouns, verbs, and nouns (including adjectives) ; or indeclinable, as the article, adverbs, prepositions, conjunc- tions, and interjections. As most if not all of the syllables employed in the formation and inflection of verbs and nouns are of pronominal origin, it wiU be necessary to consider the pronouns first. a. The classification usual witli the Jewish grammarians is into verbi Cn"'isB actions), nouns (niiio names), and particles (D''Ba words). Pronouns. PEESOITAL PEONOtrNS. § 71. The Hebrew pronouns are personal, demonstrative, relative, and interrogative or indefinite. The personal pro- nouns are the following, viz. : eiNOVLAR. PLURAL. 1. I •'iiiN, ''i» We ^jnJN, vn\, siij? 2 j Thou m. nns? Ye m. DPS (Thou/. Fis?, ■'m Ye/. li^x, njns „ j He «in They m. on , man ^^•|She N-'n They/, ■jn, nsn There are, it will be perceived, distinct forms for singular and plural in the three persons, and for masculine and fem- inine in the second and third. There is no form for the neuter, as that gender is not recognized in Hebrew. a. (l) The alternate forms of the first person singular "'sbx (in pause ''Dbtt with the accent on the penult except Job 33 : 9), and ''3S (in pause ''3N) are used interchangeably and with perhaps equal frequency. It has been observed, however, that while the former is the more common in the Pentateuch, it never occurs in the books of Chronicles, and but once in Ezekiel, viz., 36:28, a passage borrowed from the Pentateuch. The usual plural of this person is ':nr»; ^l:^li occurs but six times, viz., Gen. 96 ETYMOLOGY. § 71 42 : 11, Ex. 16 : 7. 8, Num. 32 : 32, 2 Sam. 17 : 12, Lara. 3 : 42 ; si5X though common in later Hebrew, occurs but once in the Old Testament, viz., Jer. 42 : 6 K'thibh, where the K'ri substitutes the usual form. (2) The second person masc. sing. riRK (in pause occasionally npis Ps. 2 : 7, 25 : 27, 40 : 18, 70 : 6, but mostly nnx) is in five instances written BX without the final He, which is however restored in the K'ri, viz., 1 Sam. 24 ; 19, Ps. 6 : 4, Job 1 : 10, Eccles. 7 : 22, Neh. 9 : 6, and in three instances PIS without the final vowel Num. 1 1 : 15, Deut. 5 : 24, Ezek. 28 : 14. The feminine ris is occasionally written "'Fix Judg. 17 : 2, 1 Kin. 14 : 2, 2 Kin. 4 : 16. 23, 8 : 1, Jer. 4 : 30, Ezek. 36 : 13 ; the K'ri invariably retrenches the superfluous "', though it is probable that the original pronunciation proper to this orthography was "^ns. The feminine plural init occurs only Ezek. 34:31, where a few manuscripts read "itiS; the alternate form n:ns oc- curs Gen. 31 : 6. Ezek. 13 : 11, 34 : 17 ; in Ezek. 13 : 20 most editions have njiris . (3) The third person fem. sing. NTI occurs but eleven times in the books of Moses, viz., Gen. 14 : 2, 20 : 5, 38 : 25, Lev. 2 : 15 (in some editions), 11:39, 13: 10. 21, 16:31, 21:9, Num. 5: 13, 14. In its stead is found Xin a combination of the letters of the masculine with the vowel of the fem- inine. The explanation of this is that Nin hii was at that early period of common gender and used indifferently for both masculine and feminine. As this primitive usage subsequently became obsolete, the word, when used for the feminine, was read XTi hi according to the uniform practice of the later books, and the punctuators have suggested this by giving it the corresponding vowel, §47. According to Kimchi ")fi Ruth 1: 13 and HSn 2 Sam. 4 : 6, Jer. 50:5, stand for the masculine plural; this assump- tion is unnecessary, however, as in the first passage the feminine may have the sense of the neuter "these things," and in the last two it is an adverb of place, meaning here. b. (1) The pronoun ^sbx unites the palatal found in the nominative singular of the first person in Indo-European languages, Gr. iyui, Lat. ego, Goth, ik, with the nasal of its other parts Gr. /ac, vSii, Lat. me, nos, Goth. viik. The same combination is found in the Coptic and the Phoenician. The Arabic and Syriac have retained only the abbreviated form in the singular and the prolonged form in the plural. The second person l1Fl^t is based upon the lingual Fl as the Doric tv, Lat. tit, Ger. du, Eng. thou ; and the third person Nin upon the guttural H as the Zend ho, Gr. 6, Lat. hie, Eng. he. (2) Words in such constant and familiar use as the pronouns are sub- ject to more or less irregularity in all languages. The original plural termination, as will be shown more fully hereafter in the case of verbs and nouns, is CI . In the first person D is omitted to prevent the concur- rence of nasals in the same syllable, "'JX. , ISX. ; the plural of the prolonged form seems to be best explained by supposing it to have been originally iSJJX. , which was in the singular softened to "'Six by §57. 1, and in the plural by a transposition and weakening of the palatal to a guttural (comp. Gr. £y(o, Sans, o/iam), became IJn'sX. or by §53.2, IJni . The plurals of the second and third persona were originally wns, cin, which are still § 72 PRONOUNS. 07 preserved in the Arabic, and have left their traces in the inflections of verbs, e. g. "il^ajs^, "'J'lFibap . The vowel U. however, which in the plu- rals of masculine nouns has been converted into I, has in the pronouns undergone a still further modificalion into the diphthongal ? Crt or e cnx . The distinction of gender is indicated in the plural not by affixing the characteristic termination of that gender as in nouns, but by a change of the final nasal. An unaccented fi , is often added by §61. 6. to relieve the harshness of the consonantal ending. c. In the technical language of the Jewish grammarians pronouns are called C^liS cognomina ; the first person is "Sl'ii? the speaker, the second NSi;3 jiresent, the third "P.pj hidden or absent. § 73. When the pronouns are used in their separate form as distinct words they have the forms already given. When, however, they stand in a relation of dependence to verbs, nouns, and particles, they are appended to them in the follow- ing abbreviated forms, called the pronominal suffixes : SINGULAR. FLURAL. 1. Com. V ■'3 12 2 I Masc. ^ n? ( Fem. ?r 15 Q f Masc. 'in D on [Fern. rt n 1 10 In the first person- singular '' . is attached to nouns, and ■i? to verbs. In the second person the palatal 3 is substituted for the lingual n of the separate pronoun. For a similar change in the first person see § 85. a. (i). The modifications in the forms of the suffixes, occasioned by the endings of the words to which they are attached, will be considered here- after, §§101,220. The third plural forms on, in are used with plural nouns ; D , 1 with verbs and singular nouns. The suffixes of the second and third persons plural 03 , 15 , on , "y) are called grave, the rest are ligld. The former being mixed syllables, always receive the accent, \ 33. 3, and tend more strongly to shorten the words to which they are attached than the latter. 7 •98 ETYMOLOGY. § 73, 74 Demonstrative Pronouns. ^73. 1. The ordinary demonstrative is — Maso. Fern. Common. Singular, ht nsT this Plural, Iss si^s t/iese. The poetic form IT is sometimes a demonstrative, Ps. 12:8, Hab. 1 : 11, but more frequently a relative (like the EngUsh t/tat), in which case it is used without change for both genders and numbers. The feminine is occasionally written without the final n and with a different vowel letter riT or it . The plural, coming from a different root, is suffi- ciently distinguished without the usual termination ; bs occurs eight times in the books of Moses and once in 1 Chron. 20 : 8 ; in all other places the consonantal termination is softened by an appended n .. . 2. The singular of this pronoun is in a few instances compounded with b either without any change of meaning, or, as Ewald and Nordheimer follow Jarchi in supposing, in the sense of the remote demonstrative t/tat Thus (with the article n prefixed) — Masc. Fern, Ccm. Sing, this or that nf3n iT^n rSn a. The first form occurs twice in Genesis (24 : 65, 37: 19), tlie third six times in the post-Mosaic booics as a masculine (Judg. 6 : 20, 1 Sam. 14 : 1, 17:26, 2 Kin. 23:17, Dan. 8:16, Zech. 2:8), and once as a feminine (2 Kin. 4:25), the second once in Ezekiel (36 : 35). 3. The personal pronoun of the third person S^n is used for the remote demonstrative that. Relative Pronoun. § 74. The relative who, which is "iiBi? , which may be em- ployed as a separate word, or may be shortened to a prefix B? §75 INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 99 with Daghesh-forte compensative in the following letter, unless it be a guttural and consequently incapable of receiv- ing it, §23. 1. In a few instances the prefix v takes the vowel (.) followed by Daghesh-forte, Judg. 5 : 7, Cant. 1 : 7, Job 19 : 29 ; once it has (J before x Judg. 6 : 17, and twice (,) Eccl. 2 : 22 (in some copies), 3:18. The relative suffers no change for gender or number either in its separate or its prefixed state. Its objective relation to verbs and particles and its possessive relation to nouns are expressed without changing the relative itself, or removing it from its position at the beginning of its clause by appending the appropriate pronominal suffix to the governing word, e. g. iVibiB niBs tc/io he sent him, i. e. whom he sent, iy^T lies which its seed, i. e. whose seed. It may also receive an adverbial sense from being followed by the pronominal adverb di? there, e. g. m» — "iffls where, naia — -i»s whither, oibm — iidsi! whence. a. The prefix 23 occurs to the exclusion of the full form of the relative in the Song of Solomon, and with great frequency in another production of Solomon's, Ecclesiastes. There are besides occasional examples ofit in other books, e. g. Judg. 5:7, 6: 17, 7: 12, 8 : 26, 2 Kin. 6:11, 1 Chron. 5:20, Job 19: 29, Ps. 122-124, 129, 133-137, 144, Lam. 2:15, 16. The word ciira Gen. 6:3 is in several ancient versions and in thd common English translation rendered as though it were made up of the preposition a, the relative IS and the particle Da /or that also; but the most recent inter- preters derive it from the verb SJ'SJ to err, and translate in their erring. b. ic|s or Cj is also used for the conjunction that. Comp. Lat. quod. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. §75. 1. The pronouns ^"o who? or whoever rd&im^ to persons, and na what ? or whatever relating to things, are employed both as interrogatives and in an indefinite sense. They experience no change for gender or number. The vowel of !Ta is regulated by the initial sounds of the succeeding word. Before a letter capable of receiving Daghesh-forte it is pointed Tfq and the following letter is doubled, e. g. iiif-rffl Ex. 3 : 13. Before the stronger gut- 100 ETYMOLOGY. ^76 turals n and n it also commonly receives (.), e. g. X'^n-rra Ps. 39 : 5, "-nsBn na Gen. 31 : 36. Before the weaker gut- turals s , y and 1 , it commonly takes (J, e. g. ii^s-na Zech. 1 : 9, 'Ti'ia? na 2 Kin. 8:13, Din-'S-i na Judg. 9 : 48. Before n , n , and » with Kamets, and occasionally before other let- ters it takes (..), ^ 63. 1. «, e.g. iS n^n-na Ex. 32 : 1, "'nsibn-n'g Gen. 20 : 9, n"''ib?-na ib., bip n^ 1 Sam. 4 : 14, CBica na 2 Kin. 1:7. In a few instances the final vowel letter is omitted and the interrogative is joined with the following word, e. g. n-Ta Ex. 4 : 2, csiia Isa. 3:15, nsbna Mai. 1:13, ona Ezek. 8:6 K'thibh. 3. Another interrogative is formed by prefixing the par- ticle ''^? to the pronoun nr , nsT , thus nr is wJdch? or what? 1 Kin. 13:12, Eccles. 11:6, mrb •'«/or what? why? Jer. 5:7. 3. The words ''iabx li'bs which are always used in com- bination, or contracted into one ""iabs , arr in usage equivalent to an indefinite or indeterminate pronoUi^, Eng. a certain one, Lat. quidam, Gr. o hdva ; they are, however, derived not from pronominal but verbal roots. Verbs. THEIK SPECIES. §76. 1. Hebrew verbs have seven different forms which have been denominated species or conjugations (D"!?'?? build- ings). These represent as many modifications of the verbal idea, and are as follows, viz. : 1. ^'1? Kal Simple active. 2. b?ss Niphal " passive. 3. b?s Piel Intensive active. 4. bys - ■-. Pual " passive. 5. b-iysn HiphU Causative active. 6. bysn Hophal " passive, 7. byann Ilithpael Reflexive. • §77 SPECIES OF VERBS. 101 a. The term conjugations was introduced by Reuchlin, and is very gen- erally employed in Hebrew grammars and in those of the cognate lan- guages. It must be borne in mind, however, that Hebrew conjugations are totally unlike the conjugations of Latin and Greek. The latter denote the various modes of inflection adopted by different roots. The former are modifications of the same root, which differ in meaning while their inflec- tions are substantially alike. They correspond rather with voices or with derivative verbs, such as frequentatives and causatives, although they not infrequently require to be translated by words radically distinct. The term species proposed by Schultens, though less commonly adopted, is more descriptive. t'. 2. Kal means li^ht, and denotes that species in which no ^% other than the three radical letters appear, and these only in vv ^ their single power. The other species are called heavy d»' (Qi'iss), because burdened by the reduplication of the radi- ^^h^^-^ cals or the addition of other letters. Their names are de- * ^ rived from b?B to do, which was the model for inflectioil, the •»* u \ "\ ^^^'^ assumed by this verb in each species serving as its '^ (,?- ' designation. Unusual verbal forms are in like manner de- noted by the corresponding forms imposed upon its radicals. 3. Other technical expressions, such as the names of the various classes of verbs, are also to be traced to this source. A verb whose first radical is a guttural, a Nun, or a Yodh, is called a Pe Guttural, Pe Nun (fs), or Pe Yodh (-^b) verb, Pe as the initial of i?B becoming the technical designation of a first radical generally. So a verb whose second radical is Vav is called an Ayin Vav ("b ) j one whose third radical is He, a Lamedh He {'^); one whose second and third rad- icals are alike an Ayin Doubled (55?), etc. §77. The general idea of the several species already stated is hable to certain modifications in the variety of cases to which it is applied. 1. The Niphal is commonly the passive of Kal or of the simple idea of the verb, 335 to steal, Ni. to be stolen ; ana to write, Ni. to be written. 3. Sometimes, like the Greek middle voice which coin- cides with the passive in certain of its forms, it has a reflex- 102 ETYMOLOGY. §78 ive signification, )ii^ to hide, Ni. to hide ones self; Tao to keep, Ni. to keep one's self, v\dTrecr6ai; DHp Ni. to repent, lit. to grieve one's self, /jLerafiiKea-dai,; or expresses reciprocal action, y?^ to counsel, Ni. to take counsel together ; Dinb Ni. to fight, fid')(ea6aL, lit. to devour one another. In some verbs it ' has both a passive and a reflexive sense, "012 Ni. to be sold and to sell one's self; 'r\ix~\ Ni. to be seen and to let one's self be seen, to appear. 3. Sometimes VFhen the Kal is intransitive and does not admit of a proper passive, the Niphal is either identical with it in- signification, a"!)? K. and Ni. to approach, or retains a shade of its original force by representing the state 01; condi- tion not absolutely as in Kal, but as something effected and involving a change from another previous condition, s^^ to be full, Ni. to be filled, n;;fi to be, Ni. to become. § 78. 1. The Piel gives new intensity to the simple idea of the verb, by which its meaning is variously modified ac- cording to the nature of the case, t/ra to be few. Pi. to be very few ; X^ to follow, Y\. to follow ardently, to pursue; 'ina to fear. Pi. to fear constantly, to be timid ; 'Sl? to ask. Pi. to ask repeatedly and earnestly, to bey ; s<'i3 to create, as God, Pi. to form with pains and labour, as man ; 2ri3 to write. Pi. to write much with the implication that it is to little purpose, to scribble ; 151? to bury. Pi. to bury great numbers. 2. The energy resident in this species displays itself by signifying the producing or causing of that which is denoted by the simple idea of the verb, thus quickening intransitive verbs into transitives, and making such as were transitive before to be doubly so. In this, which is the more frequent case, it becomes virtually equivalent to a causative, lix to perish. Pi. to make to perish, to destroy ; Tab to learn. Pi. to teach, i. e. cause to learn. Both these senses are occasionally found united in the same verb, a"!]? Pi. to be very near and to bring near ; tiHtj Pi. to be very corrupt and to corrupt or de- stroy. §79,80 SPECIES OF VERBS. 103 3. Pual is the passive of Piel, and therefore can only exist when the sense of the latter is such that a passive is possible. §79. 1. The Hiphil denotes the causing or producing of that which is signified by the simple form of the verb, and, as in the corresponding case of Piel, intransitive verbs become transitive, and such as admitted of one object before are now capable of receiving two : Tn)' to descend, Hi. to cause to de- scend, bring doion; sia to come. Hi. to bring; T\k'\ to see. Hi. to show. 2. In some verbs Hiphil has an intransitive sense, but in most of these cases there is either an eUipsis of the object or the idea of production and causation can stiU be obscurely traced, afejj Hi. to be attentive, prop, to make {one's car) at- tend; plntt Hi. to be sweet, prop, to cause sweetness; ^ito Hi. to be wise, prop, to act voisely, exhibit wisdom; "fiyA Hi. to' be brave, prop, to act bravely; "^1 Hi. to grow old, prop, to acquire age. In a few instances both senses are found united in the same verb, fris Hi. to cause to bud and to put forth buds ; '^S^& Hi. to prolong and to be long ; "i^S Hi. to enrich and to grow rich ; '\^ Hi. to make fat and to become fat (comp. '^Vl^^. fatten). 3. Hophal is the passive of Hiphil. a. When Kal has both a transitive and an intransitive sense, Hiphil, as the causative of the latter, becomes substantially identical with the former, tiBS K. to extend or to bend, trans, and intrans., Hi. id. trans. In Job 23 : 11, Ps. 125: 5, Isa. 30 : 11, where the Hiphil of this verb appears to be used intransitively in the sense of turning aside, there is an ellipsis of its proper object, to bend (the steps). §80. 1. The Hithpael is reflexive or reciprocal of the idea of the verb, mostly as this is expressed in the Piel spe- cies (from which it is formed, § 82. 5), the particular shade of meaning being modified according to the circumstances of the case. (1) It indicates that the subject is likewise the direct object of the action, 'ofa Pi. to deliver, Hith. to escape, deliver ones self; p^? Pi. to jasiifg, Hith. to justify ones sef; 104 ETYMOLOGY. §80 'tsin Pi, to seek, Hith. io disguise one's self, prop, to let one's self he sought for ; ti'jri Pi. to make sick, Hith. to make one's self sick Y{\\e\hev in reality or in the esteem of others, i. e. to feign, sickness ; oifj Hith. to show one's self wise whether in reahty or in his own conceit. (2) Or that he is the indirect object of the action, which is for his benefit, or relates en- tirely to him, nns Pi. to open, Hith. to open for one's self; in? Hith. to inherit {for one's self) ; lin Pi. to make gracious, Hith. to implore favour, prop, to make to be gracious to one's self. (3) Or that the action is mutual between two or more parties, i^p Pi. to bind, Hith. to conspire, prop, to' band to- gether ; 'i^'\ to see, Hith. to look upon one another. 2. This species is sometimes a mere passive like the Niphal nii» to forget, Hith. to be forgotten ; 1B2 Pi. to atone, Hith. to be atoned ; IP? Pi. to prepare, Hith. to be prepared. In a few instances the reflexive and the passive senses are found in the same verb, li'a Hith. to sell one's selfasiA to be sold. a. (1) The affinity between the Piel and Hiphil species is such as in very many verbs to render it unnecessary to retain them both, and one or the other has been allowed to fall into disuse. Where both exist, they are often nearly or quite synonymous, and are used indiscriminately, 12J";3 Pi. and Hi. 1o sanctify, or differ only in the frequency of their employment, H^B Pi. and Hi. (rare) to send, snia Pi. (rare) and Hi. to cause to hear. In other cases they are distinguished by adhering to those significations of the species in which they depart palpably from one another, nas Pi. (intens.) to grow luxuriantly. Hi. (caus.) to make to grow, bits Pi. (caus.) to Tnake foolish. Hi. (intrans.) to act foolishly ; or by developing them from different significations of the root, buia Pi. to cook (food). Hi. to ripen (fruit) ; Ti'ia Pi. to bless (prop, to kneel in worship), Hi. to cause to kneel (as a physical act), ess PI. to break the bones ( nss ), Hi. to render strong; or by restricting them to special applications, lajs Pi. to burn in- cense {to idols), Hi. to burn incense (to God); rfn Hi. to change,Pi. to change (the clothes) ; BIBS Hi. to strip. Pi. to strip (the slain in battle). (8) It is still less common to find both Niphal and Hithpael in the same verb. Where this does occur they are sometimes used interchangeably, at others a distinction is created or adhered to, T\h'd Ni. and Hith. to be poured out ; "iM Ni. and Hith. to talk with one another; T\'^Z Ni. to be blessed, Hith. to bless one's self; iiJnn Ni. to be ploughed, Hith. to keep {one's telf) quiet; 111)13 Ni. to be bound, Hith. to conspire. (3) When in particular verbs two species have substantially the sam« § 81 PERFECT VERBS. 105 sense, it sometimes happens that parts only of each are in use, one supple- menting the deficiencies of the other, or that one of the active species, losing its proper passive, is supplied by another whose corresponding active is wanting. Thus ia; to be able has a Kal preterite and infinitive j but its future is Hophal (strictly, iobe made able, but in usage the equiva- lent of Kal) ; f)D3 to be pale, ISH to draw near, Tjli); to be poured out, have their lutures in the Kal but their preterites in the Niphal ; C)6;; to add has both a Kai and a Hiphil preterite, which are synonymous, but only a Hiphil future. Again, in b j3 to separate and laia to destroy, the Kal has yielded to the Hiphil (strictly, to cause separation, destruction), but the Niphal is retained as its passive ; yrn to bathe and p'nj to sprinkle, have in the active the Kal form and in the passive the Pual. (4) All verbs are found in one or more of these species or conjugations, but very kvf in the whole of them. Of the 1,332 triliteral verbs in the Hebrew Bible, 530 appear in some one species only. 360 in two species, 235 in three, 118 in four, 70 in five, 12 in six, and but 7 in the entire num- ber, viz. : rpa to cleave asunder, ribs to uncover, nSn to be sick, Sn"! to know, "I9J to bring forth, "ipB to visit, vn to be high. The number of species in which a given verb appears, is sometimes limited by the ne- cessity of the case, as when its meaning will not admit of the modifica- tions denoted by all the species; or by usage, as when certain species are dropped as unnecessary, the ideas which they would convey being ex- pressed in another manner; or by the circumstance that in the small vol- ume of the Old Testament, examples may not occur of all the species which actually were in use. b. Instances occur in which the active species, and less frequently the passives, derive their meanings not directly from the root, but from some noun wliich has sprung from it. These are called Denominatives. Thus, Cjns K. to break the neck (Clt'S'); "iiiS K. to tithe (ibi; ten); 'izb to make bricks (njal?) ; Z^hi Ni. to be possessed of understanding, or, according to others, to be devoid of understanding (32b heart); '(7)3 Pi. to act as priest (iri^); 'dp. Pi- fo build a nest d)?) ; sa^a Pu. part, square (sa-it< /owr) ; njsira Pu. almond-shaped ("iRir); ^"1'^'? P"- dyed scarlet (J'Sip); l"'5strT Hi. to snow (sbia); "pisfi Hi. to give ear Cijx); nsn Hi. to snare (ne); nb?:n Ho. to be salted (nba); ^^^^^ Hith. to make one's self a Jew ("'i'ln^); I'lssri Hith. to supply one's self with provision (T^s). A verbal form may orcasionally arise even from an adverb, nsfjfJ^ Ni. part, removed far away (nxbn), or an interjection, Drt^i Hi. and he stilled (on hush.'). Perfect Verbs. ^ 81. There is one normal standard for the formation of these several species and their further inflection, to which all verbs conform unless prevented by the character of their radicals. There are no anomalous or irregular deviations 106 ETYMOLOGT. § 83 from this standard, such as are found in other languages, for which no explanation can be given but the fact of their oc- currence. Whatever deviations do occur result from the presence of letters in the root vphich do not admit of certain combinations and forms, and compel the adoption of others in their stead. Verbs are hence distinguished into perfect and imperfect. They are styled perfect when their radical letters are capable of entering into all those combinations and exhibiting all those forms which conformity with the standard requires. They are imperfect when the root con- tains a weak letter, § 7. 2, or is otherwise so constituted as to lead to a departure from the standard inflections. ^82. 1. In perfect verbs the Kal is formed by giving Pattahh, or more rarely one of its compounds, Tsere or Hholem, to the second radical as its essential or characteristic vowel, and to the first radical a pretonic Kamets, § 64. 2, thus: bb5,ni3,rt3?. a. The number of verbs, perfect and imperfect, whose second radical has Tsere or Hholem. or as they are technically called middle e and mid- dle 0, is quite inconsiderable. They are mostly of an intransitive sig- nification. (1) The following have Tsere, viz. : ■ife; to be old. ^i^ (Isa. 24:20 123) to be na to die. yin to delight. heavy. isi; to fade, ■zkn to hew. liis to be right. sis to thirst. -itia to be clean. ttJib and liib to put on. ia;? (Isa. 33 : 9 iajj) lo H'C-.i to be unclean, xba trans, or intrans.(Esth. wither. wi; to be dry. 7 : 5 S^a trans.) to NJb to hale. sn; to fear. Jill or befidl. ioia to be brought low. (2) The following have Tsere in pause, § 65. 3. a, or as a pretonic vowel, § 64. 2, before a suffix, but Pattahh in other cases. Such as only occur in pause or with suffixes are printed with Tsere. aiis to love. ins to be or betome hnn to cease. c45x to be guilty. great. yx/n to be leavened. psa to swell. p5^ to cleave to. Sjin to be profaned. 155 to prevail. '^m to grow fat. ifan to lack. § 82 PERFECT VERBS. 107 iBn to blush (distin- Das to be strong. sib to be sated. guished from IBM n^s to come upon, to naia to rejoice. to dig). prosper. n5\d to forget. C)?; to be weary. UJ'ip; to be holy. '^v^ to dwell. ISn; to possess. a'n;? to come near. ci'iJ to be desolate. BS3 to be pleasant. 2ST to be hungry. siiZJ to hear. Several others are marked wiih Tsere in the lexicon of Gesenius, in which that vowel does not occur. (3) The following have Hholem : lik to shine. bs; to be able. sS (Pa. IS : 15 a;n ) to iBia to be ashamed. Bp; to snare. shoot. 2iB to be good. Vis (see §86. a) to flow. Wld (Gen. 43: 14 '^B^s'iT) ia; to dread. ",b|3 to be small. to be bereaved. 3. The Niphal is formed by prefixing 5 to the letters of the root ; thus, bap; , which by § 61. 1. becomes biglp? . 3. The Piel and Pual are formed by doubling the second radical and attaching the appropriate vowels ; thus, Is^j? , 4. The Hiphil and Hophal are formed by prefixing n with the proper vowels ; thus, ^Jipjpn , bajpn . 5. The Hithpael is formed by prefixing tirt to the con- struct infinitive of the Piel ; thus, Ijcspnn . If the first radi- cal be one of the sibilants o, iB or to, the n of the prefixed syllable will be transposed with it, 'Inon , tfsnton , innton . If the first radical be s , the n will be transposed, and in addition changed to 13 , e. g. "p^^o^l} . If the first radical be one of the Unguals 1 , t: or n , the fi will be assimilated or united to it by Daghesh-forte, pl^in , ifiisri , Diann . a. In one instance njaaiianri Jer. 49:3 n remains before liJ without transposition, which would bring three Unguals in close connection, and once it is assimilated to B, Eccl. 7: 16 Daiii)';, elsewhere cainia^; n is likewise assimilated to the sibilant T in the only Hithpael form in which that letter is the initial of the root IB-frt Isa. 1 : 16. In one instance V^pWrpi Judg. 19 : 22 n remains without assimilation before i . The n may either be assimilated or not to the initial 3 of two verbs xaj, KiBS, and the initial 3 of two "13, iss. It is assimilated to the 3 of 023, which occurs but twice in the Hithptiel, to the 3 of 7x5 , which only occurs once; and in one instance to "i, viz. caKx isa. 33:10 but niiin^ Dan. 11:36. 108 ETYMOLOGY. § 83 6. The seven epecies may, agreeably to their formation, be reduced to three with their derivativee, viz. : Active 1. Kal 2. Piel 3. Hiphil Passive Pual Hophal Middle Niphal Hithpael (1) The prefixed letters of the Niphal and Hithpael 3 and n (with fi prosthetic, §53. 1. a) are probably in their origin fragmentary pronouns signifying selfj whether they are referable to "'JS and nnN of the first and second persons must be left to conjecture. The idea primarily sug- gested is that of performing an action upon one's self; but in the Niphal usually, and in the Hithpael occasionally, the reflexive signification has, as in certain tensesof the Greek middle and in the reciprocal verbs of some modern languages, given place to the passive. In the Aramaean the forms with a prefixed ns have not only quite lost their original char- acter as reflexives, but have superseded all other passives. (2) The idea of causation in the Hiphil and Hophal, if the author may venture to offer his own opinion upon this perplexed subject, is not due, as in the Indo-European causatives, to the introduction of a syllable directly suggesting it. It appears to be primarily another intensive form, with which usage has ordinarily connected, as it frequently has with the Piel, the notion of productive energy or the quickening of an intransitive into a transitive. As in the Piel and its derivatives, the idea of intensity is suggested by giving a doubled and consequently more intense pronun- ciation to the central radical ; so in the Hiphil, by a like symbolism, the power of the root is augmented by the accession of a new initial syl- lable, whether the weak letter n is merely for the sake of pronouncing the vowel, which seems likely from the corresponding K in Aramsean and Arabic, or is itself significant, in which case it must be of pronominal origin, related possibly to Kin of the third person, and having a prepo- sitional or intensive force. (3) The distinction between active and passive in the intensive and causative species is made by the vowels alone, and that in a way perfectly simple, and yet as clearly marked as possible. Of the three pure vowels i and u offer the most striking contrast, and these are severally set in op- posite syllables in the forms to be distinguished; i or its cognate e marks the second syllable of the actives, u or its cognate o the first syllable of the passives, the other syllable receiving in every case the simplest and only remaining vowel : thus, ^■'apn , bBp — bap , 'Bpn . For that a primarily belonged to the first syllable of both Piel and Hiphil is apparent from its retaining its place throughout these species with the exception of the preterite, and from its preservation in the cognate languages. ^83. If 't2j3 to kill be taken as the representative of the regular verb, the various species with their significations will be as follows, viz. : '83 PERFECT VEEBS. 109 1. Kal ^i?!? to Mil. 2. Niphal bbj>2 to be killed. 3. Piel '=!?)? to kill mani/ or to massacre. 4. Pual ^t?l? to be massacred. 5. Hiphil ■ b'fl'upn to cause to kill. 6. Hophal ''^pO to be caused to kill. 7. Hithpael ^Bjjnn to kill one's self. a. It is in each case the third person masculine singular of the preterite which is given above, and the strict signification therefore is he has killed, etc. These being the simplest forms of the various species, however, and destitute of any sign of tense or person, are commonly used to represent the species ; and in this sense the proper equivalent is the infinitive, which is the form used for designating verbs in English. 6. The verb iajs is well fitted for a model, and is now generally so employed. The consonants, which compose its root, have no peculiarities to interfere with its inflection, it has a signification capable of being car- ried through all the species, and as it exists likewise in the cognate lan- guages, it offers a good basis for their comparison. It occurs, indeed, but three times in the Bible, Job 13:15, 24:14, Ps. 139:19, and in but one species ; still the very rarity of its occurrence only restricts it more com- pletely to its use as a representative or typical verb. The old Jewish model bJB, §76.2, is objectionable on account of its weak letter s, and on account of the twofold sound of its initial radical S, which, with its Daghesh-lene, might prove perplexing to beginners. c. (1) The existence of other and less usual species is a needless as- sumption. The Poel, Pilel, Pilpel and the like, are not additional species but identical in character and signification with those already named. The more copious Arabic, with its nicer shades of distinction, has greatly mul- tiplied the number of its species or conjugations, incorporating into its standard paradigm forms corresponding to some of these which the He- brew only occasionally employs. In the latter language, however, they are at the utmost alternate forms substituted in place of the ordinary ones, and found for the most part in the imperfect verbs, to the nature of whose radicals they owe their peculiarities of structure. When, as is the case in a very kw instances, there is a double form to a particular species in the same verb, usage has mostly created an arbitrary distinction be- tween them, e.g. Pi. lan^a to uproot and ttiniJ to take root; Pi. B«p to cause to stand, applied to covenants and oaths, to ratify, and oaip , in a physical sense, to raise up; Hi. tyvr\ to cause to rest, to set down, and h'^sn to leave, to let alone. There is no objection to the employment of these names as convenient designations of particular modes of formation, provided it is understood that they mean nothing more. (2) There are very few instances of what may be called compound ' species; thus, Niphal of Pual iBsH Isa. 59:3, Lam. 4: 14, to be exceed' 110 ETYMOLOGY. §84 ingly defiled, stronger than the simple Niphal b&» ; Niphal of Hithpael nana Ezek. 23:48, IJSSJ Deut. 21:8, smniSJ Prov. 27:15. §84. To each of these species belong a preterite and fu- ture, two forms of the infinitive, an absolute and a construct, a participle, and, except to the Pual and Hophal which as pure passives cannot express a command, an imperative. The Kal has both an active and a passive participle, one more, con- sequently, than the other species. The preterite of each species is the form already described, § 83. The remaining parts are formed in the following manner, viz. : 1. The absolute infinitive is formed by changing the last vowel in Hiphil and Hophal to Tsere, and in each of the other species to Hholem, observing likewise that Hhirik in the penult of Piel and Hiphil is to be changed to Pattahh. (See Paradigm of the Perfect Verb.) This rule gives to Niphal the infinitive bibj?5 , which form actually occurs, §91. 5. If, however, the original Sh'va be suffered to remain after the prefixed 3, §82. 2, thus, ^B)?i, a prosthetic fi wiU be re- quired in order to its pronunciation, § 53. 1. «, after which 3 will be assimilated to the following letter, § 54. 2, and a pre- tonic Kamets, § 64. 2, added to the p in order to give full effect to the reduplication ; thus bajsn , which is the form written in the paradigm. 2. The construct infinitive is formed from the absolute in the Kal by rejecting the pretonic Kamets, §82. 1, in Niphal by changing the last vowel to Tsere, and in the re- maining species by making the last vowel conform to the corresponding vowel of the preterite. 3. The future is formed from the construct infinitive by the appropriate personal prefixes ; if the first letter of the infinitive be n, it is rejected, § 53. 3, and its vowel given to the prefix. a. (1) Some verbs take Pattahh in the last syllable of the Kal future instead of the Hholem of the construct infinitive. This is particularly the case with intransitive verbs. Such as have Tsere in the preterite rega- §84 PERFECT VEKBS. Ill larly take Pattahh in the future; of the list given §82. l.a. (1) and (8) but three =sn, ls35, "jiia take Hholem, and two ypn and OH^C take indif- ferently Hholem or Pattahh. Of verbs with middle in the preterite three Vtl, "(ajs and Vsvi take Pattahh in the future; the rest either do not occur in the future, or have imperfect letters in their root which obscure their true formation. (2) The following verbs with Pattahh in the preterite have Pattahh likewise in the Kal future. Those whicli do not occur in theKal preterite, or occur only in forms which do not reveal the character of the vowel fol- lowing the second radical, are distinguished by an asterisk. Verbs having a Pattahh in the future, which is due to imperfect letters in the root, (e. g. Pe Yodh, Ayin Guttural, Lamedh Guttural), are not included in this list. isx to mourn. * C)b8j to learn. * yax to be strong. * rj2X to be angry. *iafj to become vain. p;n to be strong. csri to be wise. Tjisn to be dark. *b6a to be foolish, lab to learn. pna to be sweet. ttJSJ to come near. i>c3 (intrans.) to fall off- * TiHJ to be poured. p^D (§86. 6.) to ascenrf. ■|1BS to smoke. ♦pris to be removed. * p'ia to be righteous. iBj? to be lightly es- teemed. ♦-iip to be attentive. yin to lie down. lin' to rage or tremble. * z6-\ to be wet. zs^ to ride. * nsn to spread. * :p'^ to rot. ZDii to lie down. ab'^a to rule. * obia to be completed * "BU to grow fat. (3) The following with Pattahh in the preterite have both Pattahh and Hholem in the future. iJa to deal treacher- Can to be hot. Titu; to bite. ously. "lin to be gracious. hks to do. Iia fut. 0, to tear, fut. *\:;'nn fut. 0, to plough, BffiS to strip off. a, to resolve. [at. a,to be silent. t-Xy^ to use divination. TjBfj (mosllyfut. e) tog-o. Cj'ia to tear. BST to curse. IS"' to form. *"rin to bind. isa to trespass. *«j^n fut. 0, to subdue, Tn; toflee. flit, a, to be weak. "n to vow. iSp i\xl.O,tocutoff,i\ii. a, to be short. TiSIO to rest. can to be finished. b. Some imperfect verbs, chiefly Pe Yodh, take Tsere in the second syllable of the Kal' future, e. g. SK?:: , 'k: ■ 4. The imperative has the same form with the construct infinitive except in Hiphil, where the last vowel is Tsere as in the infinitive absolute. 112 ETTMOLOGT. § 85 a. Where the Kal future has Pattahh or Tsere the imperative takes the same. 5. The Kal active participle takes the form biap and the passive iltbp. The participle of the Niphal lengthens the last vowel of the preterite from Pattahh to Kamets ; those ' of the other species are formed by prefixing "a to the con- struct infinitive, rejecting n where this is the initial letter, § 53. 3, and lengthening the last vowel where this is short. §85. 1. The preterite and future are inflected through three persons, the imperative only in the second person, a command presupposing the form of direct address. There are also distinct forms for the singular and plural numbers and for the masculine and feminine genders. Verbal inflec- tions are made by means of pronominal fragments added to the end of the preterite and imperative, and for the most part prefixed to the future. a. The following are the fragments used for this purpose in the various parts of the verb : Preterite (i??). (1) Singular. 3rd pers. masc. The third person alone has no per- sonal ending in any of its forms; as each of the others has such a termi- nation, none was needed for the sake of distinction. Nothing more was required than to indicate the gender and number. The masculine singu- lar is expressed by the simple form of the species with no appended sign whatever. 3 fern. The original feminine termination is n_, which, appended to the masculine, would give fi^Bjj, a form used before suffixes, §101.1, in Lamedh He verbs and occasionally elsewhere, §86.6. Commonly, how- ever, in verbs as in nouns and adjectives, the final n is dropped, §55. 2. c, and the previous vowel, which thus comes to stand in a simple syllable, is lengthened, •^'^^]^- 2 masc. The appended B is derived from nnx . 2 fern, n from Px . 1 com. Tn changed from ""B of ''hix ; compare the similar relation of the suffixes ?], ns to the pronouns nhtA , ohx §72. The Ethiopic retains the k unaltered, katalku. ^85 PERFECT VERBS. 113 Pluhal. 3 com. The original plural termination § 71. 6. (2) is a nasal n or T preceded by the vowel 1 . The full ending 'y\ is still found in a very few instances, §86. 6, generally the ) is dropped, § 55. 2. a. 2 masc. Cn from DP.X . 2 fern, in from ^iix. 1 com. IS from 13!* . Future (IW). (2) Singular. 3rd pers. masc. The prefixed '' is from Nin ; the vowel u, which distinguishes the masculine pronoun, is changed to the corresponding semivowel 1, and this at the beginning of words becomes ■' , §56.2. 3 fern, n , the sign of the feminine, is here prefixed. 2 masc. and fern. The prefixed in is from nps, "'PK, from the latter of which is derived the appended "i . of the feminine. 1 com. The prefixed S. is from "'JS, . Plural. 3 masc. and 2 masc. The same plural termination as in the preterite is appended to the corresponding singular forms. 3fem. and 2fem. The feminine plural is, as in the pronouns ^p!!i! Plur. 3 m. ^^^p." ^^pp: ^btap^ ^^tcp:' 3/ pij^tij^n t^^btjjsn rijbiapi^ ™^'^PF1 2 m. ^btipFi iibpjsn *t2pn iibispri 2/. rabtij^n n-btipn njbtapn nsb^pn 1 c. btippp ^l^P? ^^P? ^^-P? Impeh. 2 TO. bq. '^pn ^t3l2 2/. '^PP '"p^m ^btap Plur. 2 m. ^btip iibtpjpn ^bt?p wanting 2/ ™^^ '^Jf^PH' rebfej? - Part. ac<. ^^p ^^P^? pass. b^^i? ^i?P? ^^P^ 114 Perfect Verbs. HIPlHL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL. KAL (micZ. e). KAi (mid. o). ^*^I?f7 btij?n btbprsiT! 133 biizj nybpri "^^PO nbtij^nri n^D3 nbs^ ^^^pn ^f^HO nbaprir; niis nbiir '^Y^J^r} ribtbijr; i^ib^gnn FlliS Fibitfl ■P^^pf? •nbiaprin ■ : — T ^rb'iffl !ib^j?rr !ibt:j?H iib'taprin ^n33 : IT iibiizj : IT D^^t?pri • Dnbt:j5ri dnbi32t?n drnss V ; — ; (QP^?^) ]^>^r>ri tP)^^PO ■(thbteBrn |f?75? (|i?^5^) ^ihh^ti iiDbapn *i3bt2pnri mis : — T iisbiiti : T ^te ^'^i?': (btopnn) 1ii| biiifl T b^^pri ^^Pv ^^Er^f^ -lis bii:^ ^'^p: ^t?p: btgl^n: 1135^ b^i?i:n iJ^pi? b'Bpnn "!3Dn bibiiin ^^^oi^n ^^I?i? btspnn ntsn biffin ^b^fc)i:n ^?^pP "^ISjJtTl "biffin b^^I?>5 "^m ^tspinsj — : V ^?^*? ^b^ipp: ^^^p: 6t:j2ri: iinas" iibsffi" ra^^pP- ffibibpn njb^l^rin n3*5:35Fi rebisujn ^btbpn ^btippi ^btapnn snasn Baffin a^fte {Ti^bibpn fflbtapnn nsiisn nibibiBn T : — : • b^^ps ^^PP ^^piO? ■tli? b|ffi5 "^m ^tapr^n iM "b^^pij "bispinr! ■'■ins ^b^iipn wanting iibtcpnri si^ns ^r^pu t^5^^Et?n ^75? b^p5j ^^pr*''? 55*?^^ 115 116 ETYMOLOGY. § SG a. In order to a belter understanding of the preceding paradigm, ]t should be observed that certain changes result from attaching the per- sonal inflections to the verb, which are to be exphiined by the general laws of sounds and syllables. (1) The prefixes of the future occasion no changes unless they stand before n which is rejected, and its vowel given to the prefix, §53. 3, e. g. bap'; for bi;|3!i7, or stand before a vowelless letter when the Sh'va of the prefix becomes Hhirik. §61. 1, thus forming a new syllable to which the initial radical is attached, e. g. Vop^_ for -bp'j . Where X of the first per- son singular would receive Hhirik, it takes the diphthongal Seghol in- stead, §60. La (5), e. g. iiipjx., ioiss. (2) Terminations consisting of a vowel, viz., rt^ and "i . of the femi- nine singular and 1 of the plural, occasion the rejection of the vowel in the ultimate, §66. 2, which is no longer needed, except in the Hiphil who.=e long ^ is retained in the preterite and future, and takes the place of ( ) in the imperative, e.g. fi^Bj?, '^Bl^'n but nbiBpfi . In the Kal impera- tive the rejection takes place although it creates a necessity for the forma- tion of a new syllable, ■'^ap, ilS-jp for ■'^■Ji?, l'«i5 from Vi|3,§61. 1. (3) Terminations consisting of a consonant Pi or of a simple syllable n, Tl, 13, 03 occasion no change, except the compression of the antece- dent vowel, which now stands before two consonants, to (.) in the preterite, and from -^ . to (_) in the future, niaprj, rlB3 . The vowel letter X is once written in place of n , Nfja* Ezek. 31 : 5 K'thibh, § 11. 1. a. 2 masc. The vowel letter fi is sometimes appended as in the pro- noun iiFiX from which the termination is taken, nmia Mai. 2: 14, nnaittj Jer. 17 : 4 ; so in other species besides Kal, iiFlSOSJ Gen.'Sl : 30, nnS'^i^ Job 38 : 12 K'thibh, nnasn Ps. 73 : 27. In the last example the n of' the root is united by Daghesh-forte with the n of the personal affix ; this union regularly occurs between roots ending with n and affixes beginning with the same letter "'FiaSJ Job 23 : 17, Fiai^'H Ps. 89 : 45, Tjafflri Isa. 16:10, tjnaicfi Ex. 5:5, ntna Ezek. 28:8, '^v\h Gen. 19:19, -ipinnm Jer. 49:37. 2fem. The fall termination "'in of "^t^K is frequently added in Jere- miah and Ezekiel and occasionally elsewhere, '^n"iij Ezek. 16 : 22, and repeatedly in the same chapter, ■'ril.'^^ Ruth 3:3; so in other species ■'inni'n Jer. 3:5, ■'I^'iab Jer. 13:21. 'See also Jer. 4: 19, 22:23, 46:11. 1 com. The vowel letter i is, contrary to the ordinary rule, §11. 1. a, omitted in four instances in the K'thibh, though it is supplied by the K'ri, ftsn; Ps. 140 : 13, Job 42 : 2, nija 1 Kin. 8 : 48, n-'to Ezek. 16 : 59. Plur. Scorn. The full ending "|1 only occurs in "i^y'ij Deut. 8 : 3, 16 ■|>ip3 Isa. 26: 16, and ■jlfflp': Isa. 29: 21 from lip;, the restoration of the Hholem before the pause accent causing the rejection of the Kamets, which is a pretonio vowel and can only remain in. the immediate vicinity of the accent; the forni is thus sufficiently explained without the neces- sity of assuming it to be the future of a verb llJip which nowhere else occurs. An otiant !!<,^§16. 1. is twice added to this person, as is regularly the case in Arabic, Nilibn Josh. 10 : 24. Xlis Isa. 28 : 12. The forms of ' , ) IT ' I T similar appearance Xliaj Ps. 139 : 20, Nliaa'; Jer. 10 : 5, are in reality of different character as the St is in these a radical, whose vowel has been shifted to the preceding letter, §57. 2. (3). The occasional omission of the vowel letter 1 from the K'thibh, e. g. 'nax 1 Sam. 13 : 19, 5?p Esth. 9:27, nisei Deut. 21:7, n''liai!3'? Isa. 35 : 1 preserves this ending in a still older form : Ewald thinks the final 1 has been assimilated to the initial a of the following word, §55. 1; in all probability, however. D is here, as it usually is, the 3 plur. suffix, and it is §89 EEMAEKS ON THK PERFECT VEEBS. 119 properly so rendered in the common English version shall be glad for them. 3 fern. In a very few cases the initial "^ of the masculine form is re- tained, the distinction of gender being sufficiently marked by the termina- tion njnas^ Dan. 8:22, naan; Gen. 30:38, n;-iiS7 1 Sam. 6:12; or, on the other hand, the termination 1 of the masculine is retained, the gender being sufficiently indicated by the prefixed V\, :iir,a2B Jer. 49: 11, 'S^pn Ezek. 37 : 7; sometimes the gender is neglected entirely and Ihe mascuiino form used for the feminine, e. g. VJJa'i^ Hos. 14 : 1. The assumption that the 3 fein. phir. is used for the 3 fern. sing, in njifipn Ex. 1 : 10, njTnn Job 17:16, njoann Isa. 28 : 3, "J^ilVn Isa. 27 : h.'njnSlcn Judg. 5V26, is unnecessary; in the first passage nanbo , the subject of the verb, is used in a collective sense, wars shall occur; the others are to be similarly explained with the exception of the last, where nj maybe the suffix with Nun epenthetic in place of the more usual form nstlblLT) her hand — she puis it forth. Comp. Obad. ver. 13. 2 and 3 fern. The vowel letter n is occasionally in the Pentateuch, and more rarely in other books, omitted from the termination Fis , particu- larly when there are other vowel letters in the word, ,'i''fi=ril Gen. 27 : 1, ,"|K2n Gen. 30:38, 'iiaam Gen. 33:6. Tiitn Ezek. 3:20, ■."'''npi nine times in the Pentateuch, three times in Ezekiel, and once in 1 Samuel. When the root of the verb ends with •) this is united by Daghesh-forte with the affix n;, §23, npuiFl Ezek. 17:23, nsiipn Ezek. .32 : 16. or with- out Daghesh, nJiSFl Ruth 1 : iS, : njaxn Isa. 60 : 4, rijS'in Ps. 71 : 23 in most editions. So in the fem. plur. imperative, nsjsn Gen. 4 : 23. §89. Imperative. Sing. masc. The Hholem of the last syllable, as in -the future and infinitive construct, is mostly written without 1, e. g.''pB, yet not always, Ti^SJ and T\'^hw ; before Makkeph it is shortened to Kamets Hhatuph ~ba Judg, 9 : 14. It may perhaps be similarly shortened with- out Makkeph in ISO Judg. 19 : 5, comp. ver. 8, §19. 2. a, or the vowel may be Kamets lengthened from Pattahh by the accent, which does occur, though rarely, with conjunctives, §65. 3. 6. Fem,. sing, and masc. plur. The vowel of the first syllable is com- monly Hhirik, but under the influence of the rejected Hholem it is occa- sionally Kamets Hhatuph, §61.1, •'iba Judg. 9:10, sistria Ezek. 32:20 (but >i3'ra Ex. 12:21, for. the Methegh see §45. 2), "ij^S Zeph. 3:14, •■n-iis Mic. 1 : 16, and (with 1 retained in the K'thibh) ■'aiDJ; 1 Sam. 28: 8, Judir. 9 : 12. Upon the restoration of the original vowel hiy the pause ac- cent, the vowel under the first radical is dropped as no longer necessary, 13&3 Zech. 7 : 9, iias Nah. 2 : 9. When the third radical is an aspirate it rarely receives Dagesh-lene in this mood though preceded by Sh'va, §22. a. (I); such cases as ■'Sirn Isa. 47: 2, "'fe&s Jer. 10: 17, are excep- tional. Fem,. plur. The final vowel n, is dropped in '(SBIH Gen. 4:23, §90; occasionally n is not written though the vowel remains, ;|SSa Ruth. 1 : 9. 120 ETYMOLOGY. § \>0 §90. Participles. Actioe. The Hholem of the first syllable is written in- differently with or without Vav, lis and ijiaj mostly without when addi- tions are made to the word. In rrir^a Prov. 25 : 19 Shurek is substituted for Hholem, unless, as Ewald suggests, it is a Pual participle with a omitted ; or, as others propose, it is to be taken as an abstract noun. The Tsere of the second syllable is written without "» except 3"'sb 2 Kin. 8 : 21 ; it is shortened to Seghol in cbin Isa. 41 : 7, upon the recession of the ac- cent. r|"'5?'in,Ps. 16: 5, and :)&ii Isa. 29: 14, 38:5, Eccles. 1:18, have been improperly regarded as participles with Hhirik in place of Tsere. The former is the Hiph. fut. of the verb T{0^ , which is found in Arabic though it occurs only in this place in Hebrew, and means thou wilt enlarge; the latter is the ordinary Hiphil future of E)D; , and the construction is ellip- tical, I (am he who) will add, see Dr. Alexander's Commentaries. Partici- ples are rarely formed from neuter verbs, yet \'zl fading, 05aia desolate, verbal adjectives of the same form with the preterites middle e and o being mostly used instead, Kba full, "(gj old, 1J^ afraid. Passive. This, in the few cases in which it is in use in intransi- tive verbs, has the sense of the active, UJi'^ and Vi^'zh wearin^V?.^ and •jiisilj dwelling, nilB3 trusting; there are occasional instances oi the same thing in transitive verbs, "i^isj remembering, tins holding. The last vowel is with few exceptions as cas Deut. 32 : 34, ori'iU, nx? written with Vav. There are a very few instances in which participles appear to be in- flected in the different persons by means of the terminations proper to the preterite. This, although common in Chaldee and Syriac, occurs in He- brew only in the following examples : 2 fern,, sing, vri^"^ Gen. 16 ; 11, Judg. 13 : 5, 7; and with the fuller end- ing ■'I^as'', ■'tnsSfjii'jer. 22 :23, ''PJiiu Jer. 51 : 13. The punctuators must have regarded these terminations as personal inflections, because the simple form of the feminine participle and that which it always has when joined with a noun of the third person, is n'l^'' Gen. 17: 19, and with "" paragogic in the K'thibh Tiai'' Ezek. 27 : 3. ' 2 inasc. plur. ctn-'inBaJa Ezek. 8 : 16, the Hithpael participle of nna. There is, it is true, an abruptness and difficulty in the construction, they, ye were vxirshipping, which can only be explained upon the assumption that after describing these bold transgressors in the third person, Ezekiel turns to them and directly addresses them in the second, or that his mean- ing is, not only they but ye too (the people) were worshipping in these your representatives. But in view of the frequent and sudden changes of person found in the prophets, and the unusual forms and bold constructions which abound in Ezekiel, almost any explanation seems preferable to an unauthorized change of the text, with most modern interpreters, to the ordinary plural B'^ltinlSa which is contained in a very few manuscripts, but not enough to overcome the presumption in favor of the more difficult reading; or the supposition of a mongrel word compounded of the two roots nna to worship, and rnia to corrupt, in order to suggest the idea of a corrupt or corrupting service. § 91 REMARKS ON THE PERFECT VERBS. 121 3 plur. x'^i'jV>p_ia they are cursing' me, Jer. 15:10. Kimchi explains this word as a compound of the roots b^rj to curse, and rii^ to treat as vile; Gesenius, as a confusing of two distinct readings, the participle ■'?i''?l?'9 and the preterite ""Jli^p; and Ewald changes the text to "'zs'Bbpa, thougii his conjecture is unsustained by a single naanuscript, and Nun epenthetic never occurs with participles. The suggestion is here offered that the letters of the word may be regarded as the plural of the partici- ple inflected after the manner of the preterite, with the added suffix, so that the proper pointing would be ■'3i3bi?a ; the punctuators, however, have sought here, as not infrequently elsewifere, §48, to establish a more exact agreement between the participle and its subject pSs by pointing the former as a singular, whereupon the Vav must be looked upon as epen- thetic or superfluous, ; "'Jl^i'iia as if for i ''iVsj^'O . In fact, a few manu- scripts omit the Vav", while others remark that it is superfluous; the weight of authority is certainly in favor of retaining it, though the other reading may be accepted as an explanatory gloss. NIPHAL. §91. a. Preterite Sing. 3masc. Some copies have S'nJJ Jer. 50:23 with Seghol under the prefixed Nun lor 5^53 . b. Infinitive. The following may be mentioned as examples of the shorter form of the absolute ^ibsj Gen. 31 : 30, t:rii3 Judg. 11 :25, rih: 1 Sara. 2:27, K"ii53 2 Sam. 1:6; of the longer form given in the paradigm "hsn Jer. 32 : 4, which once appears with prosthetic N in place of n Ezek. 14 : 3 Ci'i'nx, §53. 1. a. The construct infinitive usually has Tsere "St^'n Ezek. 16: 36,but is in one instance Il^ifi Ps. 68 : 3, formed as in Kal by rejecting the pretonic Kamets from the absolute. There are a few examples of the construct form used for the absolute i|5Bn 1 Kin. 20:39, "iHlEn Deut. 4 : 26. The prosthetic rt is commonly retained after prefixed prepositions IjjSf}!; which are less closely connected with the word 1,han the formative prefixes of the future; it is, however, rejected in "iiuisa Prov. 24:17, comp. cVasna Dan. U :34. The Tsere of the last syllable of the con- struct infinitive, as well as of the future and imperative wliich are formed from it, is shbrtened to Seghol upon losing its accent, infen Job 34 : 22, Dn^n Judg. 9: 38, 1=^7 Eccles. 7:26, rarely to Pattahh, ajrri Job 18:4. In the Imperative 'I'r.'i'n the form with Seghol is the u^ual one, that witli Tsere only occurring in Isa. 7:4. The pretonic Kamets of this species is singular in not being liable to rejection on the shifting of the tone, e. g. cins-tn Ezek. 21 : 29, 'Ah-^S-^ Ps. 37 : 9. c. Future Sing. 1 com. The prefixed K occasionally has Hhirik, BEli-K Ezek. 20:36, 1 Sam. 12:7, irn^S Ezek. 14:3, fri^BX Ex. 14:4,17. Plur. fem,. Tsere rarely remains in the second syllable HjlJ'Pi Ruth 1:13, being, as in the Piel preterite, commonly changed to Pattahh before the concurring consonants, njbs.vpl Jer. 24:2, so with a pause accent, nnsffin Isa. 13: 16 K'ri, Zech.'l4:'2 K'ri, fijoa'jn Isa. 28: 3; the first, as theoriginal form, is, however, placed in the paradigm. 122 ETYMOLOGY. § 93 d. Imperative. Ewald regards '33p3 Isa. 43:9, Joel 4:11, >nb3 Jer. 50 : 5, as imperatives without the usual n prosthetic ; but this assumption is needless, for they can readily be explained as preterites. e. Participle. In 1 Sam. 15: 9 rtjaaj contemptible, \s in formaNiphal participle from the noun fina contempt. §92. a. The intensive species is usually formed by doubling the second radical ; in Wss Ezek. 28 : 23, and the passive form ibax the third radical is doubled instead, an expedient resorted to repeatedly in Ayin Vav verbs and occasionally in Ayin gutturEtl. In ijlnrss Ps. 88 : 17 both radicals are doubled; the entire second syllable is repeated in "h'lnp Ps. 38:11, 1na"iari Lam. 2: 11, 1 : 20 a passive Ibrm, as shown by the Hhateph-Kamets, 582. 5. b (3), and in fi";nfin.x Hos. 4 : 18, provided this is to be read as one word, §43. b; if. according to the division in the Masoretic text, lifi is a separate word, it is the imperative of -tn^ to give, though this is always elsewhere pointed 'sn . In ri^s^E^ Ps. 45 : 3, the first syllable is repeated, the 6 under the first letter indicating it to be a passive form. b. Intensity may likewise be denoted without a reduplication by insert- ing the long vowel Hholem in the first syllable of the root. This is often done in Ayin doubled verbs, but only in the following instances in others, pret. ■'Fisni-i 1 Sam. 21:3, 'Jni: Isa. 40 : 24, is-ij Ps. 77:18, Tiiijiiu Isa. 10:13 jut. 1507 Hos. 13:3. inf. abs. iah and iiH Isa. 59: 13. irif. const. oiofflia Am. 5:11, part. "'BSiaa Job 9:15, ijaiba Ps. 101:5 K'thibh. These are called Poel forms by many grammarians, and those in the pre- ceding paragraph Pilel, Pulal, Pealal, etc. They are in reality, however, only modified forms of the Piel, whose signification they sh&ie. c. Preterite Sing. 3 masc. The original Pattahhofthe first syllable §82. 5. 6 (3) is preserved in ^31B3 Gen. 41 : 51. The second syllable has Seghol in i?':! (in pause laTi), nB3, 023 (twice D3S), fattahh in nax, bhi (ija in pause), --in, J^s, USfip, C^O (in pause '.nht Isa. 19: 21), and before Makkeph in "lab , "ufea (i aba in pause) ; a appears likewise in the pausal form MSap Mic. 1 : 7. The Tsere is always retained in the infinitive con- struct and future, and with the exception of iba Ps. 55: 10, in the impera- tive ; though throughout the species it is shortened to Seghol upon losing the accent, ?lS3j3 Deut. 30:3, "ttinps Ex. 13:2, -cbia'; Deut. 7:10. d. Infinitive. The primitive form of the infinitive absolute is of rare occurrence, e. g. ViB^ Ps. 118: 18, Wj? 1 Kin. 19: 10, n'!3-i Ex. 21: 19, Tjlna Josh. 24: 10. Most commonly it has Tsere in the second syllable like the infinitive construct, lax Jer. 12: 17, nab Jer. 32:33, a^5 Jer. 39:18, yajs Mic. 2 : 12, nb'ir Ex. 21 : 36; and in one instance it has Hhirik in the first syllable like the preterite yxi 2 Sam. 12 : 14. There is no need of assum- ing a similar form for the infinitive construct in 'j'.^n Lev. 14: 43, which can readily be explained as a preterite. Tsere of the construct is short- ened to Seghol before Makkeph, li'n Isa. Ot); 1.3, or on the recession of the § 93 REMARKS ON THE PERFECT VERBS. 123 accent, pHS Gen. 39: 14, 17, and in one instance besides, cnb Judg. 5:8. There are a kw examples of the construct infinitive with a feminine ter- mination, rris:; Lev. 26:18, n'iBt Ps. 147:1, nz^vi Isa. 6:13, riHi^'ja Ezelt. 16:52.' e. Future Sing. 1 com. S is commonly prej^xed with Hhateph-Pat- tahh ; it has, however, the diphthongal Hhateph-Seghol in nnjK Lev. 26: 33, §60. 3. 6, and draws to itself the full vowel which has hence arisen to a preceding 1 , in on".0!ibjbin Ps. 78:63, l^li Judg. 18:29, 13:8, Job 5:7, b MSa Ezek. 27 : 10, but mostly without it. c. Preterite Sing. Z wasc. An instance of paragogic n,_ appended to the preterite is found in f^i^S Ezek. 31: 15. d. Infinitive. The absolute form occurs in 23a Gen. 40: 15; there is no example of the construct. e. Participle. As "3013, ti^O'?, ''is'^sj in a few instances the initial a is omitted, nisb 2 Kin. 2:10 for fiisia, nana (with Daghesh-forte euphonic) Ezekr21:15, 16, aiuifjr Eccles. 9:12 for B-'tCis^a, §59. a. Some of the forms in which this has been alleged may however be better explained as preterites. 124 ETYMOLOGT. § 94 §94. a. Pbetehite. The first vowel is usually Hhirik but occasionally Seghol, e. g. wiabrn l ^am. 25 : 7, particularly in Pe guttural and a few Lamedh He verbs. Once X is prefixed instead of M, : ''n'?!<5!{ Isa. 63 : 3 ; in Isa. 19 : 6 !ini;tsii is not a double Hiphil with both 6t and n prefixed, but is a denominative from n:tN, a derivative of Pist, which does not indeed occur in its simple form but is justified by the analogy of ajDX from ats . n takes the place of n in inbjiPl Hos. 11:3; so likewise the future '^Tl'nfJ'? Jer. 12:5, and participle n^rina Jer. 22:, 15, though the corres- ponding preterite is nnnn Neh. 3:20. Sing. 3 masc. The I of the second syllable is almost always written with Yodh, rarely without it, e. g. i'nan 1 Sam. 12 : 24, but in every other place i>"''73n. So in the participle cV^a Job 11 : 3 but a-'isTi Judg. 18 : 7. 6. Infinitive. Absolute. The Tsere of the second syllable which be- fore Makkeph is shortened to Seghol "isn Prov. 24 : 23, 28: 21, is mostly written without -i, thus ii'iar!, ia:rt, viibn, birn, "sor!, li'^pn, :3irn, Ti^Jain, though sometimes with itT'htri' Am. 9:8 but ihctj Isa. 14:23, ib''3t'n and isbn, twice c-'icn , nine times csdn, '^''B|;n, 'T'K?n . Hhirik in this syllable is rare and exceptional, b''B\rn Ezek. 21 : 31, I'^iSH Josh. 7:7. X is prefixed instead of n in c'skIs Jer. 25:3 and Tp^tf Gen. 41:43, provided the latter is a Hebrew and not a Coptic word. Construct. The second vowel is commonly Hhirik written with i, ffii'npn, T("'l'ffin rarely and as an exception without ■", ih'ob Isa. 23:11, or with Tsere hmri Deut. 32:8, -I'UJsb Deut. 26:12, Neh. 10:39, labb Dan. 11:35. In a few instances the first vowel is Hhirik as in the preterite ^lairri Deut. 7:24, 28:48, Josh. 11:14, 1 Kin. 15:29, l-'hn Jer. 50: 34,'n=^-i'in Jer. 51:33, nisirn Lev. 14:43. The initial n is mostly retained alter prefixed prepositions, though it is sometimes rejected, as n^iab Am. 8 : 4 but n-'airnis Ps. 8:3, nacb once but i-'^trih fifteen times. c. Future Plcr. In a very few instances Hhirik is rejected upon the addition of the masculine plural termination 1pai51 1 Sam. 14:22, 31:2, !l3"i"i«l Jer. 9:2. There is no example of this without the presence of Vav conversive unless it be TiafiP) Job 19:3, which maybe re.garded as Kal. d. Imperative Sing. masc. The second syllable usually has Tsere without Yodh BfesiDi T\i^f}, and before Makkeph, Seghol "flpn Job 22:21, -15n 1 Sani. 23:1]', "Jan Isa. 64:8. There are a very few ex- amples with Hhirik in pause, i?''Sin Ps. 94: 1, to which some would add S''Sin Isa. 43:8, but see Alexander, niiin Prov. 19:25, tfirt Jer. 17: 18. e. Participle. In NSia Ps. 135: 7, Tsere is taken in place of Hhirik upon the recession of the accent; "ri6a Isa. 53:3 is not a participle but a noun, Alexander in loc. Hhirik is, in a few exceptional cases occurring in ^95, 96 REMARKS ON THE PERFECT VERBS. 125 the later books, rejected in the plural, B'^itna Zech. 3:7 for Disi^Jha, n">abna Jer. 29:8, 'nintra 2,Chron. 28:23, niVsna 1 Chron. 15:24 K'rij 2 Chron. 7: 6 K'ri. Comp. Chald. ■pibna Dan. 'S: 25. HOPHAL. §95. a. The first vowel, though mostly Kamets Hhatuph "i^Krt, lalssn, same an. nablijn, is occasionally Kibbuts, both vowels even appearing in the sa verb,' =3irri Ezek. 32:32, ri33»fi ver. 19, aitua 2 Kin. 4:32 ; r^^an D 8: 11, taitn Isa. 14:19, ■'ibiin Ezelc. 16:5''iifttJa 2 Sam. 20:2'l; iiapn Lev. 6:15, iBpa Mai. 1 : il, ifesn niipsa :' Dib'-eJsa , rata, nnpa Ezek. 29:18. 6. Preterite. In ""Pi^inn am I obliged to leave? Judg. 9:9, 11. 13, the characteristic rt is rejected after n interrogative. c. iNriNiTivE. The absolute has Tsere in the second syllable, innn Ezek. 16 : 4, Ian Josh. 9 : 24. The construct has Pattahh, "IDIPI Ezr. 3:11.' d. Imperative. This mood occurs twice, n^B'IJn Ezek. 32 : 19, lisfl Jer. 49 : 8. e. Participle. In nisspfia Ezek. 46:22 fi remains after the pre- formative a . HITHPAKL. §96. a. Preterite. In two instances nx is prefixed instead of Pifi, viz., lannx 2 Chron. 20 : 35, ^ibinttJx Ps. 76 : 6. In the verb ipQ Daghe'sh- forte is omitted in the second radical and the previous vowel lengthened, §59. a. I'i-Bnn , ripan'^ Judg. 20 : 15, 17, igari^ Judg. 21 : 9, in addition to which the vowel of the prefixed syllable is 6 in !)npDnn Num. 1 : 47, 2,: 33, 26: 62, 1 Kin. 20 : 27. In three verbs upon the assimilation of n to the first radical, the prefix takes u, §61.5, njUJ'^n (the accentuation is unusual) Isa. 34:6, nxaan Deut. 24:4 (but in the future always KSB7 Lev. 21 : 1 and repeatedly elsewhere), DSsn {inf. const.) Lev. 13 : 55, £6. These are sometimes called Hothpaal and regarded as passives of Hith- pael. Where both Ibrms exist in the same verb, however, as in ipS and VXZ , there appears to be no distinction in their meaning ; they seem rather to have arisen from a disposition to give to the Hithpael, where it has a passive signification, §80. 2, the vowels of a proper passive species, §82. 5. b (3). In laSapn Jer. 25: 16, sajiln^ Jer. 46: 8 (elsewhere IliiSSn"!), and * VSja Isa. 52 : 5, prolonged from u. on account of the absence of Daghesh-forte, is for a like reason given to the first radical. , 6. The last vowel of the preterite, infinitive construct, future, impera- tive and participle, is Tsere written without Yodh, 'Ti^iinn , Wji^?, ahn'' llSflpnn inf. const., lasf.f? imper., I23na , which before Makkeph is"shortened' to Seghol, -m^r^n Isa. 30 : 29,' "Tl^nnn Gen. 6:9, -c|rn7 Job 6:16. Frequently, however, Pattahh is used, or, with a pause accent, Kamets, F|Spnn pret., "^ni^H P'^"'- 'i'"' 'imper. (but inf. cmst. ani part. 126 ,, ETYMOLOGY. §97 withe, futaande), iii'^gnrt, oHjsn'i, '.insnn, pj-^s?, ^^vp^r^"! , ••r^^.r^'!, : snsbn"' , : -iSisfeBni , : !|tt;^sn-' Ezek. 27 : 30, : ''vifcBnn Mic. 1 : 10 K'ri, : rsS53 Isa. 52 : 5. Pattahh is also sometimes found in the feminine plural of the future, njsfnnri Zech. 6:7hut njDEnuJn Lam. 4:1, where some copies have njSBBUJn. Hhirik occurs instead of Pattahh in the preterites, ipib'nanni' 'inia'nisrri'i Ezek. 38 : 23, tljoi'nisnni Lev. 11 : 44, 20 : 7, each of which has Vav conversive, throwing the accent more strongly on the final syllable. c. There is no example of the infinitive absolute. Pakagogic and Apocopated Puture and Imperative. § 97. The paucity of moods in Hebrew is partially com- pensated by modifications of the future, known as the para- gogic and apocopated futures. 1. The paragogic or cohortative is formed from the ordi- nary future by appending the termination n, to the first person singular or plural, and in a very few instances to the third person singular, thus converting it from a simple declaration of futurity to an expression of desire or determination, "laiss / s/iall keep, ""j'siBJ* I will surely keep or let me keep, Ps. 39 : 2 ; njiws let us break, ra"'^iB5 let us cast away, Ps, 2:3; nffiin^ let him hasten, Isa. 5:19. a. The third person of the paragogic future occurs besides the example just given, in nxian lei it come Isa. 5: 19, nssn be it dark (by some ex- plained as a noun, darkness) Job 11 : 17, fisiB'i'^ may he accept (as fat), or, according to Kimchi, may he reduce to ashes. Ps. 20 : 4, n.in Prov. 1 : 20, 8 : 3. and after Vav conversive nissni Ezek. 23 : 20, and ver. 16 K'ri. It has also been suspected in nmpi Lev. 21 : 5 K'thibh. b. Instead of n^, n.. is appended in ni'jfsK'; 1 Sam. 28: 15, nilS'l'' Ps. 20 : 4, §63. 1. c;'so in the imperative nsyi or n?^ Prov. 24 : 14. 2. The apocopated or jussive future is an abbreviation of the second or third persons singular and expresses a wish or command, or with a negative, dissuasion or prohibition. In the perfect verb it has a separate form only in the Hiphil species, the ''. of the ultimate being changed to (..), or before Makkeph to (..), p'^k'}1 he will cause to cleave, pia'i;^ may he or let him cause to cleave; b"'3iBn thou wilt understand, ^3ten § 98 PARAGOGIC FUTURE, ETC. 127 thou mayest understand or understand thou, Dan. 9 : 25, -abopi-bs may it not or let it not rule, Ps. 119 : 133. In some classes of imperfect verbs, as in the Ayin-Vav and par- ticularly the Lamedh-He, it is used in other species still. a. The only instances of the abbreviated future occurring in the first person are pmx Isa. 42:6 and K-i3 Isa. 41:23 K'thibh, where the K'ri has nx"!?. 6. The paragogic and apocopated futures may be regarded as mutually supplementary, and as forming together something liite a complete Opta- tive or Subjunctive mood. The apocopated future has, it is true, no sep- arate form for the second fem. sing, or the second and third pers. plur., in which the verb has terminal inflections, but it may be regarded as coin- ciding in these with the ordinary iuture, except that it never has the final ■( . So in those species in which it is indistinguishable from the ordinary future, it may yet be regarded as included under it. Neither the apocopated nor the paragogic futures occur in the strictly passive species, viz., the Pual and Hophal, self-determination and command both implying that the subject is the originator of the action. The more flexible Arabic has three varieties of the future in addition to the ordinary one, to express as many modifications or moods. c. The apocopated future derives its name from the apocopation of the final letter by which it is characterized in fib verbs ; the brevity of its form is adapted to the energy and rapid utterance of a command. On the other hand, the speaker dwells upon the word expressive of his own desire or determination, thus giving rise to the prolonged form of the paragogic future. The appended fi^ may perhaps be identical with a like termination added to nouns to indicate motion or direction, denoting as it does the direction of the speaker's will or wishes towards that which the verb expresses. ^98. 1. Paragogic n. is sometimes appended to the masculine singular of the imperative, sqftening the command into an earnest entreaty or expression of strong desire, swic hear (thou), nj^iaTB oh, hear! or pray, hear! 3©pip;, Oisjl; D"'p;, 0|3;1. The same drawing back of the accent and shortening of the ultimate syllable occurs in the Piel of the following verbs, whose middle radical is 1 , Ti^S^l , 12T!?^? , "'IJ'O'?! but not in q^n'^l; so in I'lia'Jl Hab. 3: 6, and the Hithpael CSBDW Dan. 2:1. It occurs also in the Niphal of a few verbs, which form the ex- ception, however, not the rule, fijhi, tr;^*i, cibi}?! or SiDi<;5'i, CjBFil but ans^l, 1a^?], Ti^B^H, "'ii??!!i "?'?!!!. etc. The first person singular is mostly exempted from shortening or change of accent, isS;, -'??,;i 132 ETYMOLOGY. ^100 WpSI or fipsy , ts'^RS'' ) though it sometimes suffers apocopation in n b verbs 8*T!^3 5 ''h^^ ■ The prolonged plural ending 'fl is very rarely used after Vav Conversive ; it does, however, oQCur, e. g. "(IS'^i^R] Deut. 1 : 22, "(llaSR^ Deut. 4:11, -liliri'l Judg. 11 ; 18. 6. In a very few instances Vav Conversive takes Pattahh before K, its vowel being confcrmed to the compound Sh'va, which follows, e. g. ISnjSJ Judg. 6:9. >innnaxi 2 Sam. 1 : 10, TiBasT. Ezek. 16: 10 but nssiij.'; ver. 8, "^niisi Job 30': 26, fi2l^T,s,l_ Ps. 73: 16." § 100. 1. Vav Conversive prefixed to the preterite makes of it a continuative future or imperative, by connecting with it the idea of futurity or command expressed in a preceding verb. It is properly the conjunction ) and, vphose pointing it takes, its peculiar force being derived from its connecting power. Accordingly, in speaking of coming events, the stand-point is first fixed in the future by the opening words, and the description is then continued by the preterite with Vav Conversive. Thus, in Samuel's recital, 1 Sam. 10: 1-8, of what was to happen to Saul, he first refers the whole to the future by the word, ver. 2, ^np^a upon thy depart- ing, and then proceeds with preterites with Vav prefixed, nxiai thou shaltfind, I'i'aiJ) and they shall say, ver. 3, J^B^nT andiJiou shall pass on, etc. etc. In like manner injunctions begun in the imperative are continued in the preterite with Vav Conversive. Thus the Lord directed Elijah, 1 Kin. 17:3 ?y!? (imper.) yo, ^"lis^ (pret.) and turn, Ij'nnDpl (pret.) and hide, rTJnn (pret.) and it shall he. 2. This prefix commonly has the effect of removing the accent to the ultimate in those forms in which it ordinarily * * ' stands upon the penult ; and if the penult be a long mixed syllable, as in the Kal preterite of verbs with Hholem, it wiU in consequence be shortened, i^bii^ , 'P'??,';'!' • a. The shifting of the accent, which served in some measure to indicate to the ear the alteration in the sense, takes place chiefly in the following cases, viz. : (1) It occurs with great regularity in the first and second persons sin- gular of every species, Tp^T^ thou hast gone. T\z>hrv) and thou shall go, ''Fi3bn|i and I will go, so ij"ia'7!i, "^nhiDn^, ^npinHv!^ i though ■'n'isri.T. Zeph. 1 : 17, except in x'b and n'b verbs, where the accent usually re- §101 VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 133 mains in its original position although the usage is not uniform, "'niiBI Lev. ae : 9, ■'rixa>i 1 Kin. 18 : 12. n"'^"ini 1 Chron. 4 : 10, in-'nnni^n^ 1 Sam. 15 : 30, Tl-'Btli 'isa. 8 : 17 hut tJiSKI 'Lcv. 24 : 5, hsz^ Gen. 6 TlS, '■'nianm in^^iBni Lev. 26: 9, h»zm Ex. 26': 33. In the first person pluralofali verbs the accent generally remains upon the penult, IJnin Ex. 8 : 23, :!i3:5ini, lanfebi Gen.' 34: 17. (2) It occurs, though less constantly, in the third feminine singular and third plural of the Iliphil of perfect verbs, and of the various species of Ayin-Vavand Ayin-doubled verbs, njiflaw Ex. 26 : 33; ns"'3!in Lev. 15:29, nnsi Isa. 11:2, siSpi, si^m Hab. 1:8 'but wSiiJm Ezek. 43:24, IBEil Hah. 1 : 8. Verbs with Suffixes. §101. Pronouns are frequently suffixed to the verbs of which they are the object. The forms of the suffixes have already been given § 72. It only remains to consider the changes resulting from their combination with the various parts of the verb. 1. The personal terminations of the verbs undergo the following changes : Freteriie, Sing. S/em. The old ending M. , §85. a (1), takes the place of n. . 2 masc. !? sometimes shortens its final vowel be- fore the suffix ■'? of the first person. 2 /em. The old ending il? , § 86. h, instead of n . Plur. 2 masc. iPi from the old pronominal ending mn , § 71. 5 (2), takes the place of Dn . The fem- inine of this person does not occur with suffixes. Future. PtUR. 2 and S/em. The distinctive feminine termina- tion is dropped, and that of the masculine assumed, ibtifpn for njbtbjjn. 134 ETYMOLOGY. §101 a. In several of these cases it would be more correct to say that it is the uncompounded state of the verb in which the change has taken place, and that before suffixes the original form has been preserved, the added syllable having as it were protected it from mutation. 2. Changes in the suffixes : The suffixes are joined directly to those verbal forms which end in a vowel ; those forms which end in a consonant insert before the suffixes of the second pers. plur. D3 , p , and the second masc. sing. ^ , a vocal Sh'va, and before the remaining suffixes a full vowel, which in the preterite is mostly a and in the future and im- perative mostly e. The 3 fem. sing, preterite inserts a before the suffixes of the third pers. plural, and c before the second fem. singular ; when it stands before the third sing, suffixes in , n , there is frequently an elision of n , requiring Daghesh-forte conserva- tive in the verbal ending n to preserve the quantity of the previous short vowel, w?'Q)3 for 'inn^aj? , npStajp for >7inrt:j5 , see §57. 2. 6. When the third masc. sing, suffix in is preceded by (J, the n may be elided and the vowels coalesce into i , ilsaip for in^Qj? ; when it is preceded by "^ . , Shurek may be hardened to its corresponding semi-vowel 1 , 1''r>fl?|5 for inipi!?::]? § 62. 2 When the third fem. suffix n is preceded by (J, final Kamets is omitted to prevent the recurrence of the same sound, nSup for nS'jjp. When in , n of the third pers. singular are preceded by (..), the vowel of union for the future, a 3 , called Nun Epen- thetic, is sometimes inserted, particularly in emphatic and pausal forms, to prevent the hiatus between the two vowels, (..) being at the same time shortened to (..) ; n is then com- monly elided and a euphonic Daghesh-forte inserted in the Nun, is^tpj:;' for m;?::]:^ . The same shortening of the (.) and insertion of Daghesh may occur in the first person singular and plural and the second masculine singular ; this, like the preceding, takes place chiefly at the end of clauses. §101 VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 135 a. The Nun Epenthetic of the future and the Preterite vowel of union a, which is abbreviated to Sh'va before ^ , C3 , "(S , may be relics of old forms of the verb still represented in the Arabic, where the Preterite ends in a, and one mode of the future has an appended Nun. Daghesh-forte in the suffixes of the first and second persons may be ex- plained, as is usually done, by assuming the insertion and assimilation of Nun Epenthetic, "^^Pt for ~\^^''^p^. ; or it may be Daghesh-forte emphatic, §24.6, and the few cases in which Nun appears in these persons may be accounted for by the resolution of Daghesh, §54. 3, instead of the Daghesh having arisen from the assimilation of Nun, so that ?]3]?Bp; may be for r^baps^ instead of the reverse. b. The suffixes, since they do not in strictness form a part of the word with which they are CDnnected, are more loosely attached to it than the pronominal fragments which make up the inflections; hence vowels of union are employed with the former which serve to separate as well as to unite. Hence too the vocal Sh'va, inserted before the suffixes of the second person, does not so completely draw the final consonant of the verb to the appended syllable as to detach it from that to which it formerly be- longed ; this latter becomes, therefore, not a simple but an intermediate syllable, §20. 2. A like distinction exists between prefixed prepositions, etc., and the personal prefixes of the future. The latter form pitrt and parcel of the word, while the former preserve a measure of their original separateness. Hence when they form a new initial syllable by the aid of the first consonant of the word, this is properly a mixed syllable after a personal prefix but intermediate after a preposition, -ins^ but ainsa, §22. a. Hence, too, a liability to contraction in one case which does not exist in the other, iiip^l but ^iitsnb. Vs^ but bS33. 3. Changes in the body of the verb : Except in the Kal preterite those forms which have per- sonal terminations experience no further change from the addition of suffixes ; those which are without such termina- tions reject the vowel of the last syllable before suffixes re- quiring a vowel of union and shorten it before the remainder, iStpjp:', ''?i5ajp\ Volp:', ''?l?t?i??, ?i^VI?^; biit ^ of the Hiphil species is almost always, preserved, ''5S''t315ri , ''5'i"'t:j3;: . In the Kal imperative and infinitive the rejection of the vowel occasions the concurrence of two voweUess letters at the beginning of the word, which impossible combination is obviated by the insertion of Hhirik to form a new syllable ; or, if the rejected vowel was Hholem, by the insertion of Kamets Hhatuph. 136 ETYMOLOGY. ^102 In the Kal preterite, where both vowels are liable to mu- tation, a distinction is made by rejecting the first before suf- fixes and the second before personal inflections where this is possible, e. g. ^bj, n'it!)?, ■iSag but M^aj?, iStij?. Accordingly upon the reception of a suffix the vowel of the second rad- ical, whether it be a, e, or o, must be restored, and if need be lengthened, whenever, in the course of regular inflec- tion, it has been dropped, and the vowel of the first rad- ical, wherever it remains in the regular inflection, must be rejected. a. Final mixed syllables, as shown in 2 ^ordinarily become interme- diate upon appending CD, "i? , ?], and consequently take a short vowel notwithstanding the following vocal Sh'va. This is invariably the case before D3 and "(S , unless thei word to which they are attached has a long immutable vowel in the ultimate which is of course incapable of being shortened; it is also usually the case before ^, the principal exception, so far as verbal forms are concerned, being the a and e of the Kal preterite, a of the Kal future, and i of the Hiphil, Tjsnj , i^sas , Tjanx , ?1^,S13S< , ijsiijx , Tia-'brn^ but T]-T:?3n , ijsap , i^-is."* . §102. 1. The first and second persons of the verb do not receive suffixes of the same person with themselves, for when the subject is at the same time the object of the action the Hithpael species is employed or a reciprocal pronoun is formed from the noun OB: soul, self, as "'ffiB? myself. Suffixes of the third person may, however, be attached to the third person of verbs, provided the subject and object be distinct. a. There is a single example of a verb in the first person with a suffix of the first person, but in this case the pronoun expresses the indirect object of the verb, "'Jn'^iaj. I have made for me, Ezek. 29 : 3. 2. Neuter verbs and passive species, whose signification does not admit of a direct object, may yet receive suffixes expressive of indirect relations, such as would be denoted by the dative or ablative in occidental languages, '^sn'ps ye fasted for me Zech. 7 : 5, ''iiojn thou shalt he forgotten hyme. Isa, 44 : 21. §103 VERBS WITH SUFFIXJBS, ' ^ 137 3. The infinitive may be viewed as a noun, in which case its suflBx is to be regarded as a possessive, and represents the subject of the action ; or it may be viewed as a verb when its suffix represents the object, e. g. ""^t!? my killing, i. e. that which I perform, ''?!?t?15 hilling me. The participle may also receive the suffix either of a verb or a noun, the pronoun in either case denoting the object, "issfn seeing me Isa. 47 : 10, ■'Sjto hating me, Ut. my haters, Ps. 35 : 19. a. The infinitive with a verbal suffix represents the subject in "isisilBai at my returning, Ezek. 47 : 7. ^ 103. The paradigm upon the next page exhibits certain portions of the regular verb Vajp with all the suffixes. a. The parts of the verb selected are sufficient representatives of all the rest, and by the aid of the rules already given will enable the student to determine any other required form, for himself. The third person sin- gular of the Hiphil preterite, which undergoes no change in the body of the verb, will answer mutatis mutandis for ail the forms in that species ending with the final radical. The third singular of the Piel preterite, which suffers a change in its last syllable only, will in like manner answer for all the forms in that species ending with the final radical. The Kal preterite is given in all the persons, both on account of the peculiarity of that tense, which suflers changes in both its vowels, and in order to exhibit, the changes Lnthepersonal terminations which. apply equally to the preterites of the other species. The Kal infinitive and imperative are peculiar in forming a new initial syllable which echoes the rejected vowel. The third person singular of the Kal future affords a type of all the forms in that tense which end with the final radical ; and the third plural of the same tense is a type of all the future forms in this and in the other species which hiive personal terminations appended. The par- ticiples undergo the. same changes in receiving suffixes with nouns of like formation and are therefore not included in this table. Paradigm of the Perfect Singular. 1 com. 2 masc. '2 fern. 3 masc. Zfem. Kal Preterite. Sing. 3 mmo. ''5^f3 5J|bt2p TjUta!? ilPlStip ) Wbti]? 3/m. "pri^ap 'fjfi^tai? tinBtafj ^nnpap) nnB^i? 2 masc. "'inbtop ) 1~P^t2p j Flf^lbttp 2/m. "p^Fibtii? in"inbaj5') fi'-nbtti? Icom. ^"Fi^^l? T'^i'^I? ''"'^^^i? O'^t'^I? pltje. 3 com. "p^wp fjibafp tj^btip iin^b^p n^ibtti? 2 Bjosc. ■'p^nbaj: simnbtof) t\irb^_ I com. 'f|^3^^|? ^^i^^l? 1^^3^^.I5 O^^t'^!? Infinitive. "'^l?!? ) irfbta]? ?j5aj3 ibt))? nbpjj FCTCRE. Sing. 3 masc. "'pbtip;' ) !?jbt:]5;' ) '^btpfs;' inSpp;' ) Tfi^>': \ Pltte. 3 masc. ^plSti]?: ^^^tlp.'' tj^btij?;' ^~*l3t?p;' O^^^Pr Imperative. Sing. 2 m^c. "pbtij? ^nbpl? flbpjj PiEi, Preterite. Sing. 3 masc. ''pblDj? !?(bl^I? TfbKp ibtip PlStpp HiPHiL Preterite. Sing. 3 masc. ''iSti'^n ^Y'^'^tj '^^''tipn ib^cipri n^-'topn 138 Verbs with Suffixes. P LUKA L. 1 com. 2 jnosc. 2fem. 8 masc. 8/«m. ilDSttp Dibap #f^l? "=^^1? fe !i5ri3^p I?*?^^!? dnbt:p l^^^l? .iijinbttp dfnb^p )J?^^I? iirinb^i? d-'inbap rFi'^i? itI; ■]5^Fibtip l?^5bt:p d^i^b^p d^ibsap d^itibap diibbtop V^iibtap ■j^inbtap ■ l^ib^p 'i2^t:p dDbtJp l^^^I? t=^^I? l^PI? c^?^*?)?: i^^^i?: t3^tip: )^^i?r iii^cip: di^biap: i=^^^i?r d^btpp." l^%!?r ' ^3^^I? t35ap ifi^Ep dibtap i^^^p ^?^P t^^P iiDb^tppn dib^tjpn l=^^^)r^ db^tipn i^^i?n 139 140 ETYMOLOGY. § 104 E.EMAEKS ON THE PERFECT VeRBS WITH SUFFIXES. PEETBEITB. § 104. a. There are two examples of (_) as the union vowel of the preterite, ''J^S^ Isa. 8 : 11, TlBxtt? Judg. 4:20. Daghesh-forte euphonic is Bpmetimes inserted in the suffix of the first pers. sing., ''n67 Ps. 118: 18, ■'S?^ Gen. 30:6. 6. The suffix of the second masc. sing, is occasionally T] , in pause ! T(|iK.B Isa. 55 : 5, so with the infinitive, ti^aiin Deut. 28 : 24, 45 ; and a similar form with the future may perhaps he indicated by the K'thibh in Hos. 4:6 ■jscsax, §11. 1. a, where the K'ri has ^IDsjax. With Nb and rfb verbs this form of the suffix is of frequent occurrence, : TjJS Isa. 30 : 19, Jer.23:37, TiS'ian Ezek. 28 : 15. In a kw instances the final a is represented by the vowel letter n, and the suffix is written ns, fi='iSS.;i. 1 Kin. 18:44, nsnsJB Prov.-2:ll, riS'li-ia': Ps. 145:10, nsiss,;'. Jer. 7:27. c. The suffix of the second fem. sing, is commonly Tj,, "^^"^p Isa. 54:6, Ti'is.Q Isa. 60 : 9, except after the third fem. sing, of the verb, when it is t(.,i 'noins. Ruth 4: 15, '^nisiB Isa. 47: 10; sometimes, especially in the later Psalms, it has the form "^a corresponding to the pronoun ""RSt , ■'S'lS'!'*! Ps. 137 : G, •'SyjSBn Ps. 103 : 4. d. The suffix of the third masc. sinjr. is written with the vowel letter f1 instead of 1 in n»-;B Ex. 32 : 25, na,-? Num. 28 : 8, and in some copies HMSJ 1 Sam. 1 : 9, where it would be feminine ; this form is more Irequently ap- pended to nouns than to verbs.. e. In a few instances the n of the third fem. suffix is not pointed ■yyith Mappik, and consequently represents a vowel instead of a consonant, i"fn?aa (with the accent on the penult because followed by an accented syllable) Am. 1 : 11, so with the infinitive, irjojri Ex. 9: 18, nissn Jer. 44 : 19, and the future, nnjsPiFil Ex. 2:3. f. The suffix of the third masc. plur. receives a paragogic 1' once in prose, iatiic'ia Ex. 23:31, and repeatedly in poetry, iaiibaF}, ■ia"i!"'nin Ex. 15:9; once 1 is appended, la"'p3^ Ex. 15:5; on is used but once as a verbal suffix, ijn-'XBN Deut. 32 : 26. §■. The suffix of the third fem. plur. ") is seldom used, "i"''??'^'? Isa. 48:7, ■|!?T17 Hab. 2:17; more frequently the masculine o is substituted for it, WaFip Gen. 26: 15, 18, BiitiS-ja^l Ex. 2: 17, onpX*i 1 Sam. 6: 10, BoNuraV 17 : 3, 4, Josh. 4 : 8, 2 Kin. 18 : 13, Hos. 2 : 14, Prov.^'e : 21 ; in is never used with verbs. When attached to infinitives a paragogic fl is sometimes added to ■), njxia Ruth 1 : 19, rim-h Job 39 : 2. h. Verbs, which have Tsere for the second vowel in the Kal preterite, re- tain it before suffixes, 'fialix^ Deut. 7 : 13, B'^al; Lev. 16 : 4, nx3ia Deut. 24:3, sinsixn': Job 37:24. The only example of a suffix appended to a preterite whose second vowel is Hholem, is T^riisi Ps. 13: 5 from "'Piiis''. » ' • ! f i ■ T I § 105 PERFECT VEEBS WITH SUFFIXES. 141 the Hholem being shortened to Kamets Hhatuph by the shifting of the accent. Tsere of the Piel species is mostly shortened to Seghol before ?], CD, 'is', ?|S3p Deut. 30:3, fisap^ ver. 4, but occasionally to Hhirik, BSSBX^|i (the Methegh in most editions is explained by §45. 2) Job 16 :5, Tjaai-is'lsa. 25:1, csir^jpa Ex. 31:13, nio-iB Isa. 1:15. Hhirik of the Hiphil species is retained before all suffixes with very few exceptions, iis-itrsi 1 Sam. 17:25, Ps. 65: 10; in ^-il": Deut. 32:7, the verb has the form of the apocopated future. I. The third fern, preterite sometimes takes the thjrd mase. sing, suffix in its full form, !innSH|, Prov. 31 : 12, inn^sst, Ezek. 15 : 5, so in pause ! innanj*^ 1 Sam. 18:28, Wniss Gen. 37:20, sinnsats Isa. 59:16, and sometimes contracted by the exclusion of n , iFiPaa 1 Sam. 1 : 24, IFi'i?^ Ruth 4 : 15, !in!::5 Job 21 : 18. The third fem. suffix is always contracted, tininx. Jer. 49:24, npifsfen Isa. 34:17, nn6?3 1 Sam. 1:6. The suffix of the third masd. plurai is n., not n^, with this person of the verb, the accent falling on the penult, oniwa Gen. 31 : .32, crttsa Ex. 18 : 8, 'orhi': Ps. 119:129, onsniB Isa. 47:14. In the intermediate syllable before ?] the vowel is usually short in this person, ~\i)'i>1 Jer. 22:26, ^in^SN Ezek. 28:18, though it is sometimes long, fjri^an Cant. 8:5, as it regularly is in pause '•'inU^? ibid.; so before "'; and, 13 of the first person, "'Jf^^^S. Ps. 69 : 10, : linssa Num. 20 : 14. j. The second masc. sing, preterite usually takes Pattahh before ''3 ex- cept in pause, "'sn'^isn Ps. 139: 1, "'.snnn Job 7:14, ""^tsW Ps. 22:2. It takes the third masc. sing, suffix either in its full form. ilnn'iBB Ezek. 43:20, or contracted; inSOS 2 Kin. 5:6, 'JnriU Hab. 1: 12, irajj (accent thrown back by §35. 1) Num. 23:27, ihaEn^ Ps. 89: 44. k. The second fem. sing, preterite assumes (.), commonly without Yodh, §11. 1. a, before suffixes, and is accordingly indistinguishable from the first person except by the suffix which it receives, § 102. 1, or by the connection in which it is found, ■'SFi'i^'; Jer. 15:10, ■'Jl^l^ai Cant. 4:9, VniK^ 1 Sam. 19; 17, inn-i'M Ex. 2: 10; once it takes (J, "n'l'iin Josh. 2: 18, and in a few instances the masculine form is adopted in its stead, Sisnssian Josh. 2:17, 20, Cant. 5:9, «n"ii^ Jer. 2:27 K'ri, inxnn, 2 Sam. 14:10.' I. The plural endings of the verb may be written fully 1 or defectively ( ), thus, in the third person, ^liaft Ps. 18:6, •'3=30 Hos. 12:1; the second ■':nas Zech. 7:5, ^nilssn Num. 20:5, 21:5; and the first inssjnfl 1 Chron.'lS : 3. rtrTTTEE. § 105. a. The union vowel a is sometimes attached to the future, thus ''3., •^SglJiFi Gen. 19:19, '^?in!<; Gen. 29:32, ''SS'i': Ex. 33:20, Num. 22:33, i3b'i^-l^ Isa. 56:3, ■'SSaiioV'job 9:18; 13,, W^3^ Isa. 63:16; i (for in,), 18^1^1108.8:3, insin Ps. 35:8, isipn: EccleB.4:l2, 'i5B5':i lSam.21:14, BO in the K'thibh, ISam. 18:1 lans"!, where the K'ri ^has in=fiX*1; Pi,, (for T) ), ni^S'i Gen. 37:33, nsnni 2 Chron. 20:7, T\Y'Bt^. Isa. 26:5; B , DC'ai'' Ex] 29:30, Baii!J7 Deut. 7 : 15, B'n''? Num; 21:30, 0513 Ps. 142 ETTMOLOGT. § 106 74:8. D^1H^l Ps. 118:10; •),, Isisi; Ex. 2:17. In 1 Kin. 2:24 the K'ri has '';2"'ii")i, while the K'thibh has the vowel letter ■" representing the ordinary e, ■'ra-'iaTi . 6. The suffixes with Daghesh inserted occur chiefly in pause ; thus 13 „, nnsi-' Jar. 50 : 44 ; "3 . , ''?='?=PI Gen. 27 : 19, : ■'?ns2n Job 7 : 14, 9 : 34 ; IS , (1st plur.), Wrw: Job 31: lb";' 7).., !,^S3j3N Isa. 43: 5, "^JS^ Isa. 44:^ ! "0'''' P®- 30:13'; W^. (3 masc' sing.')/ 13''ji?SPl , i.lSjsnnn'job'?: 18, IS^W? Job 41: 2 K'ri, iisxso'j Hos. 12:5; ns.., ViS"iirsn Ps.'65:l0, or without Daghesh, njnb'irn Judg. 5 : 26, Obad. ver. 13 ; the unemphatic form of the suffix and that with Daghesh occur in conjunction, Pib'iBa^ ns]3iBl23^ Isa. 26 : 5. There are a very few examples, (bond only in poetry, of 5 inserted between the verb and the suffix without fujther change, ''33"i337 Ps. 50 : 23, ;^:]3I5tnx Jer. 22:24, >in?;;;3?;i Jer. 5: 22, :!in:=n=7 Ps. 72: i5,'inns': Deut. 32': lO,' ; in:aa"-ix Ex.'r5':2. c. The plural ending 'fl is in a few instances found before suffixes, chiefly in pause, "'SjA'ip'? , "'"'^rii^'; , : ■'::sisa)i Ps. 91:12, T!:'irni:"i Isa.' 60:7. 10, !>in:-=r'' Jer. '5:22, :n:>ixsri Jer. 2:24; twice it has the union vowel a, ■'SJil.ss'in Job 19:2, 'iJiB''; Prov. 5 : 22. d. When the second vowel of the Kal future is o, it is rejected before suffixes requiring a union vowel, compound Sh'va being occasionally sub- stituted lor it in the place of simple, D"iBX Hos. 10:10, ISE^Hi; Num. 35:20, sns^SS Isa. 27:3, i wais'? Isa. 62 : 2^' ?]sn-i'i Ezek. 35:'*'6,'n5a5=X Jer. 31 : 33 ; once the vowel remains, but is changed to Shurek, snpiaicri Prov. 14: 3 ; a, on the other hand, is retained as a pretonic vowel, §61. 2, ''iiis^. Job 29:14, BVUab^ Ex. 29:30, nSBJabs Cant. 5:3, ''Jpa'in Gen. 19:19. Hholem is shortened before ?i, CD, ^3, though the vowel letter 1 is occasionally written in the K'thibh, ?)"i''SX Jer. 1 : 5. e. The following are examples of feminine plurals with suffixes: 2 fern, plur. '':«'in Cant. 1 : 6, 3/em. plur. ■'33«JnP| Job 19 : 15, T\T^Dm Jer. 2 : 19. The masculine form is sometimes substituted for the feminine, fJ'l'ilEN'' , n-lSini Cant. 6:9. INFINITIVE AND IMPEEATIVE. § 106 a. Kal Infinitive. Before V| , C3 , "13 , Hholem is shortened to Ka- mets Hhatuph, TjbsK, Gen. 2: 17, i]-ias (Methegh by §45. 2) Obad. ver. 11, D-ih2H Gen. 3:5, Ei.'ia>| Mai. 1:7. Pattahh remains in the single example, 033317. Isa. 30 : 18 ; sometimes the vowel of the second radical is rejected before these as it is before the other suffixes, and a short vowel given to the first radical, commonly Kamefs Hhatuph, 5^p3S Deut. 29:11, ^?ai3 2 Kin. 22:19, B3'n3S Deut. 27:4, once Kibbuts', ' d3-)St5 Lev. 23 : 22,' sometimes Hhirik, fl'asta Gen. 19 : 33, 35 but iisaj Ruth'St'i^ isato Zech. 3:1, i5s3 2 Sam. I:i0, inns Neh. 8:5, and occasionally Pattahh, ?i?.|3'5 Ezek. 25 : 6. In the feminine form of the infinitive, as in nouns, the old feminine ending n is substituted for fl, "insaiD Isa. 30: 19, ■ihsan Hos. 7 : 4. The Niphal infinitive retains its pretonic Kamets before suffixes, DsiSJn Ezek. 21 : 29. § 107 IMPERFECT VERBS. 143 6. Kal Imperative. The first radical commonly receives Kamets Hhatuph upon the rejection of Hholem, ''3'33J, "'HP^ Jer. 15 : 15, but occasionally it takes Hhirik, fj'iSJ (with Daghesh-forte euphonic) Prov. 4: 13. Imperfect Verbs. §107. Imperfect verbs depart more or less from the standard already given, as the nature of their radicals may require. They are of three classes, viz. : I. Guttural verbs, or those which have a guttural letter in the root. II. Contracted verbs, two of whose radicals are in cer- tain cases contracted into one. III. Quiescent verbs, or those which have a quiescent or vowel letter in the root. These classes may again be subdivided according to the particular radical affected. Thus there are three kinds of guttural verbs : 1. Pe guttural verbs, or those whose first radical is a guttural. 2. Ayin guttural verbs, or those whose second radical is a guttural. 3. Lamedh guttural verbs, or those whose third radical is a guttural. There are two kinds of contracted verbs : 1. Pe Nun verbs, or those whose first radical is Nun, and is liable to be contracted by assimilation with the second. 2. Ayin doubled verbs, or those whose second and third radicals are alike, and are liable to be contracted into one. There are four kinds of quiescent verbs : 1. Pe Yodh verbs, or those whose first radical is Yodh. 144 ETYMOLOGY. §108,109 2. Ayin Vav and Ayin Yodh verbs, or those whose second radical is Vav or Yodh. 3. Lamedh Aleph verbs, or those whose third radical is Aleph. 4. Lamedh He verbs, or those in which He takes the place of the third radical. The guttural differ from the perfect verbs in the vowels only ; the first division of the contracted verbs differ only in the consonants ; the quiescent and the second division of the contracted verbs differ from the perfect verbs in both vowels and consonants. a. The third class of imperfect verbs may either be regarded as hav- ing a quiescent letter in the root, which in certain forms is changed into a vowel, or as having a vowel in the root, which in certain ibrms is changed into a quiescent letter. As the settlement of this question is purely a matter of theory, the usual name of quiescent verbs has been retained as sufficiently descriptive. 6. The origin of these various technical names for the different kinds of iinperfect verbs is explained § 76. 3. Pe Guttural Verbs. §108. Gutturals have the four following peculiarities, §60, viz. : 1. They often cause a preceding or accompanying vowel to be converted into Pattahh. 2. They receive Pattahh furtive at the end of a word after a long heterogeneous vowel or before a vowelless final consonant. 3. They take compound in preference to simple Sh'va. 4. They are incapable of being doubled, and conse- quently do not receive Daghesh-forte. §109. Pe guttural verbs are affected by these peculiari- ties as follows, viz. : §109 PE GUTTL-RAI, VERBS. 145 1. The Hhirik of the preformatives is changed to Pat- tahh before the guttural in the Kal future, if the second vowel be Hholem, "ia?^ for TioS'^ ; but if the second radical has Pattahh this change does not occur, because it would occasion a repetition of the same vowel in successive sylla- bles, §63. l.b. In the Kal future a, therefore, in the Niphal preterite and participle, where the vowel of the second sylla- ble is likewise a, and in the Hiphil preterite, where i is characteristic and therefore less subject to change, Hhirik is compounded with Pattahh, or, in other words, is changed to the diphthongal Seghol, prn;; , Tttys , Ti'byn , Seghol accom- panying « of the first person singular of the Kal future, §60. 1. a (5), and Kamets Hhatuph, characteristic of the Hophal species, suffer no change. The same is true of Hholem in the first syllable of the Kal participle, Hhirik of the Piel preterite, and Kibbuts of the Pual species, for the double reason that these vowels are characteristic of those forms, and that their position after the guttural renders them less liable to mutation, § 60. 1. « (2) ; the second reason ap- phes likewise to the Hhirik of the feminine singular and masculine plural of the Kal imperative, which, as the briefest of the short vowels, is besides best adapted to the quick ut- terance of a command, "^V , *iTny . 2. As the guttural does not stand at the end of the word, there is no occasion for applying the rule respecting Pattahh furtive ; this consequently does not appear except in 'inf' , apocopated future of rnn , and in one other doubtful exam- ple, §114. 3. Wherever the first radical should receive simple Sh'va the guttural takes compound Sh'va instead ; this, if there be no reason for preferring another, and especially if it be pre- ceded by the vowel Pattahh, will be Hhateph Pattahh, whose sound is most consonant with that of the gutturals ; this is the case in the Kal second plural preterite, construct infini- tive, future and imperative with Hholem, and in the Hiphil, 10 146 ETYMOLOGY. §110 infinitives, future, imperative, and participle, Di^7'??> '^'^r- If, however, the guttural be preceded by another vowel than Pattahh the compound Sh'va will generally be conformed to it ; thus, after Seghol it becomes Hhateph Seghol as in the Kal future and imperative a, the Niphal preterite and par- ticiple, and the Hiphil preterite, pTH,% ^'b'ST\^ and after Kamets Hhatuph it becomes Hhateph Kamets as in the Hophal species, To^O- If this compound Sh'va in the course of inflection comes to be followed by a vowelless letter, it is changed to the corresponding short vowel, § 61. 1, thus, {.) becomes (.) in the second feminine singular and the second and third masculine plural of the Kal future ; (.„) be- comes (.,) in the third feminine singular and the third plural of the Niphal preterite ; and (,) becomes (J in the corres- ponding persons of the preterite and future Hophal, "'"iayn , n-iia5>3, niayn. a. The simple Sh'va following a short vowel thus formed, remains vocal as in the corresponding forms of the perfect verb, the new syllable being not mixed but intermediate, and hence a succeeding aspirate will retain its aspiration, thus lia?^ yaam'dliu. not I'^c?^ yaamdu, §22. a. In like manner the Kal imperative has '''yc^,, Iibs not ^^OS, Was, show- ing that even in the perfect verb "'bup, l^Bp were pronounced kit'li, kil'lu, not killl, kitlU. 4. The reduplication of the first radical being impossible in the infinitive, future and imperative Niphal, the preceding vowel, which now stands in a simple syllable, is lengthened in consequence from Hhirik to Tsere, § 60. 4, Ittyn for "rbsry. §110. 1. The verb "Tby to stand, whose inflections are shown in the following paradigm, may serve as a representative of Pe guttural verbs. The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael are omit- ted, as they present no deviation from the regular verbs. The Niphal of TQ^ is not in use, but is here formed from analogy for the sake of giving completeness to the paradigm. Paradigm OF Pe Guttural Verbs. KAL. NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. Peet. 3 m. — T TtSil ^t?c^ . 3/. rriay T : IT n^ass T ; vi-/ HTasn mayri T : T IT 2«. T ; — T T ! — .-.T/ T : — v: IV ^?^?vJ 2/. : : — T i PI7I3?,?. niayn pn^bsn : : — T! IT le. "may ^pnas3 'mayn ^mayn Plur. 3 c. : IT si'iasi : viv dFiiayD V ; -v:iv ' ^-i^a2?0 ^^ayn : T IT 2 m. dFiiayn V : -v.- IV dnTosn V : — T! IT 2/- )P)7'5?> 1 V : — .-.iv ■jp'iayu 'iFiTCSil Ic. 137a?' ; — v: (V siDi^byn Infin. Ahiol, niay T nayn ia:?n "i^^i^ Gonstr. ia? lasn •■ r 1" rtyrt ' -: r layn — i; IT Ftri. 3 TO. lay^ •V2T " Tl" T^7by^ — T-.IT 3,/. nasn " T !•• T'asn • -: 1- i5byn 2 TO. ito "T !■• rasn • -: 1- Tbyn — t: it 2/. ''iajn ""lasn • : IT " • -: 1- "layn • ; r IT Ic. lasK , ^a?S T/bys • -: 1- i7bys — t; IT Plur. 3 TO si'hay^ : —1- : IT" sR^ay" i TIT 3/. ni^asn T : •• T 1" nii7byn T : "-: 1- nj'i7byn T : — t: IT 2 TO. i^asn 1^ayn : IT •• in^asn • -: 1- iiTjyn 2/. npayn r : •• T 1" in377b?':ri nji7byn T : — t: IT la. 'la??. •• Tl" i^5by5 -7by5 — t:pt Impee. 2 TO. ia? " T !•• ■ Tbsn •• -: 1- 2/. •''ias "iayn • ; IT •• "T'W- wanting Ptor. 2 TO. >iia3> iiiasn ; IT ■■ • 7: 1- 2/. niias T ; -: ni^ayn T : ••-: r Paet. Act. TO'y T'laja Pass. liitjy naJD T V.IV n7bya . tt: IT 147 148 ETYMOLOGY. §111 2. The Kal imperative and future of those verbs which have Pattahh in the second syllable may be represented by ^IT} to he strong. Imperative. SlNGCLAK. PlCHAL. mmc. fern. masc. fern. pin 'PJv ^VT^ rai?it^ PUTURE. 3 masc. Zfem. 2 mase. 2 fern. 1 com. Sing. pm^. piriri pinn ^f?Tnn pTuS*' plto. !ij5|n:. ™pi"Pl ^PIO^ •^?l?it?^ Pitir;. 3. Certain verbs, whose first radical is s , receive Hholera in the first syllable of the Kal future after the following, which is distinctively called the Pe Aleph (s's) mode. PuTURE OF Pe Aleph Verbs. 3 masc. Sfem. 2 masc. 2 fern. 1 com. Sing. bi^"' bisn bsxn ^bsjin bii5 : I T : - : I t : - Pive verbs uniformly adopt this mode of inflection, viz. : "liij to perish, niK to he willing, bsx to cat, ^^ to say, "ss to hake ; a few others indifferently follow this or the ordinary Pe guttural mode, sns to love, TH!* to take hold, 51D5J to gather. Remarks on Pe Guttural Verbs. § 111. 1. The preformative of the Kal future a has (.) in one instance, SSSB] Ezek. 23 : 5. That.of the Kal future 6 has (..) in q^iiij; Prov. 10 : 3, Sjiani Ps. 29 : 9. Three verbs with future o, B^n , oifj , lan have Pat- §111 REMARKS ON PE GUTTURAL VERBS. 149 tahh in the first syllable when the Hholem appears, but Seghol in those forms in which the Hholem. is dropped. OinfTi.'];. Job 12:14, 1D'")n^_ 2 Kin. 3:25 but ifaini Ex. 19:21, 24; so with suffixes, ■'i'chn-' Ps. 141:5, aoin'' Isa. 22 : 19, -imans Isa. 53 : 2. lEH has l-iBni but insni . 2. a. If the first radical be N , which has a strong preference for the diphthongal vowels, §60. l.a (5), the preformative takes Seghol in most verbs in the Kal future, whether a or 0, pJS|;, PiO?*!;) "^5?*^, '<^^^ as well as Tas^, V[i»2' ^??!Si ^^513 ; '" ^ ^ew with future a. §110. 3, it takes the other compound vowel Hholem when to complete the diphthongal charac- ter of the word the (.) of the second syllable usually becomes („) in pause, and in a few instances without a pause accent, 13K'', las"", liSN^, ins'', and in two verbs it becomes (..) after Vav conversive, los'i , inx'] . 6. As K is always quiescent after Hholem in this latter form of the future, §57. 2. (2) a, Pe Aleph verbs might be classed among quiescent verbs, and this is in fact done by some grammarians. But as N has the double character of a guttural and a quiescent in difl'erent forms sprung from the same root, and as its quiescence is confined almost entirely to a single tense of a single species, it seems better to avoid sundering what really belongs together, by considering the Pe Aleph as a variety of the Pe guttural verbs. In a few instances K gives up its consonantal charac- ter after (..) which is then lengthened to (.), nrisn Mic. 4:8. When thus quiescent after either Tsere or Hholem, N is always omitted in the first person singular after the preformative N , "ihx Gen. 32 : 5 for "in^S i 2nx Prov. 8: 17 for ansitx, b=X Gen. 24:33 for i=KK, and occasionalTy in" other persons, •'3Tn'''je'r. 2:36 for 'jsTxr] ; so Kn;; Deut. 33:21, sin Prov. 1:10, qfan Ps.' 104:29, *l"ia'n 2 Sam. 19:14, THFil 2 Sam. 20 : 9, insBI 1 Sam. 28 : 24 ; in a few instances the vowel letter 1 is substituted forit,' !:!33ii Ezek. 42 : 5 for >lis^-', laix Neh. 2 : 7, Ps. 42: 10. c. A like quiescence or omission of K occurs in ii3SJi Num. 11:25 Hi. fut. for iii*,!l, i>''i;n Ezek. 21 : 33 Hi. inf for b-iissfl,' '^i^ Job 32: 11 Hi. fut. for vi*?.?, ■p!'? Prov. 17:4 Hi. part, for 'n»a, §53. 2. a, IJsfea Job 35 : U Pi. part, for sisobsta , §53. 3, ■'3-'|iTn 2 Sam. 22: 40 Pi. fut. for ■'JniXn, a'l^l 1 Sam. 15 : 5 Hi. fut! for n'is'l , ii-'no Isa. 2 1 : 14 Hi. pret. for ^fHsri , hrn Isa. 13 : 20 Pi. fut. for blhx'j , and after prefixes ia»b for las^ , the Kal infinitive of lax with the preposition h , Ti'iaiy Ezek. 28 : 16 Pi. fut. with Vav conversive for ^i^aXNI , lijsxi Zech.' 11 : 5 Hi. fut. with Vav conjunctive for "lijssi, Diniion Eccles. 4:14 Kal pass. part, with the article for D'"ilt3!<.fj .' d. The diphthongal Hholem is further assumed by Pe Aleph roots once in the Niphal preterite, linss Num. 32 : 30 for 1''nN3 , and five times in the Hiphil future, n'i"'2X Jer. '46:8for nn-'is^N , bi=i'x Hos. 11:4 for b-iSS^X, nnsisi Neh. 13:'l3 for n'l''S»N, ipi' l Sam. 14:24 abbreviated from nVs'lYor n^xii, ini«i 2Sam.2o'":5 K'ri for nn.S*!. e. K draws the vowel to itself from the preformative in On.Nn Prov. 1:22 Kal fut. for idriyvi in pause >i-^^^fi Zech. 8: 17, Ps. 4 : 3, §60. 3. c. Some so explain In^sxn Job 20 : 26^ regarding it as a Kal future for 150 ETYMOLOGY. §112 iniisKn with the vowel attracted to the X from the preformative ; it is simpler, however, to regard it as a Pual future with Kamets Hhatuph in- stead of Kibbuts, as E^sa Nah. 2:4, ?i"i2n7 Ps. 94 :aO. 3. a. Kamets Hhatuph for the most part remains in the Kal infinitive and imperative with suffixes, as Pi^2S , Tji)' , "'las , being rarely changed to Pattahh, as in iinVan Prov. 20: 16, or Seghol, as -nmtA Num. 11 : 16, fii"ns Job 33 : 5. In the inflected imperative Seghol occurs once instead of Hhirik, ""'Bian Isa. 47 : 2, and Kamets Hhatuph twice in compensation for the omitted Hholem, -'ihs Zeph. 3:14 but >liss Ps. 68:5, sii-in Jer. 2:12 but >li^ri Jer. 50:27, though the o Sound is once retained in the compound Sh'va of a pausal form, "la^jn Isa. 44:27. Ewald explains n-nasn Ex. 20 : 5,. 23 : 24, Deut. 5 : 9, an(l'n''asj Deut. 13 : 3 as Kal futures. " : T IT J • ) J " J »iT the excluded Hholem giving character to the preceding vowels; the forms, however, are properly Hophal futures, and there is no reason why the words may not be translated accordingly be induced to serve. In a few Kal infinitives with a feminine termination n has (^), i^^an Ezek. 16:5, ■insan Hos. 7:4. b. In a very few instances Pattahh is found in the first syllable of the Niphal and of the Hiphil preterite, ynsa Ps. 89 : 8, cn'jnn Judg. 8 : 19. § 112. 1. The guttural invariably receives compound Sh'va in place of simple, where this is vocal in the perfect verb; and as in tliese cases it stands at the beginning of the word, it is more at liberty to follow its na- tive preferences, and therefore usually takes (.,). In cr;''';ri 2 plur. pret., nw inf., n;n imper. of tiyi , the initial n has (,^^) under the influence of the following ''; N receives (..) in the second plural of the Kal preterite, and in the feminine and plural of the passive participle, Dn"i2X, CB^DX, D^DlaX , but commonly (._) in the imperative and infinitive, §60. 3. b, ib'x imper., V6ii and bin^ inf, thx and ihsj, inf, ysx imper., isix inf. and imper. (but ~vtiri Job 34: 18 with n, interrogative), pax, :)0S (with n^ paragogic nEDX), and in a very few instances the long vowel (..). §60. 3. c, IBS Ex. 16 : 23 for 5EX , rrx Isa. 21 : 12. 2. Where the first radical in perfect verbs stands after a short vowel and completes its syllable, the guttural does the same, but mostly admits an echo of the preceding vowel after it, inclining it likewise to begin the syllable which follows. In the intermediate syllable thus formed, §20. 2, the vowel remains short, only being modified agreeably to the rules already given by the proximity of the guttural, which itself receives the corresponding Hhateph. The succession is, therefore, usually (.. ^_), (.^ .) or (,. ). In a very few instances this correspondence is neglected; thus, in 7,Bnn 3 fem. fut. of T\?f} to go (comp. pns|^ from pns to laugh) the Hhirik of the preformative remains and the guttural takes Hhateph Pattahh; in ni>?n (once, viz., Hab. 1 : 15 for fi^»n) and n^sh Hiphil and Hophal preterites of n^S '""^ pecu- liar in having simple vocal Sh'va. §112 REMARKS ON PE GUTTURAL VERBS. 151 3. Where (J or (,^J are proper to the form these are frequently changed to (.,) or (.,^) upon the prolongation of the word or the removal of its accent forward. Thus, in the Kal future, qox'' 2 Kin. 5-3, siBOS'^ Ex. 4 : 29, ''JBDX; Ps. 27 : 10, -listSSB Josh. 2 : 18 ; M^N^ Isa. 59: 5, "-JiVn Judg. 16:13; the Niphal, disi i Kin. 10:3, naW'iVah. 3:11, D-'oby^ Ps.26:4; and especially in the Hiphil preterite' with Vav conversiVe^ ftnagn Job 14:19, tij-iasm Deut. 7:24, Cin"T=sn^ Deut. 9:3 (corap. onlfsxn Ps. 80:6), ''n'lSNni Lev. 23:30; "Fibssinrisa. 49:26; •^f^p'inn Neh. 5:16, ""npinni Ezek. 30:25; ?i^n'iasii'is'a.'43:23, rppnayni' jer! 17:4; •p'lxri Deut.' 1:45, nsixni Ex. 15:26, ■'Finnri; Jer. 49':'37 r'after Vav conjunctive, however, the vowels remain unchanged. "npTni-il 1 Sam. 17:35, "TO-nnni Ps. 50:21. The change from (,„ „) to (.^ j'^aller Vav conversive occurs once in the third person of the Hiphil preterite, "pisril Ps. 77 : 2, but is not usual, e. g. 7i"''isfil . . . 'il'"'cyni Lev. 27 : 8. There is one instance of (^ J instead of (. J in the Hiphil infinitive, 'piinn Jer. 31:32. 4. A vowel which has arisen from Sh'va in consequence of the rejec- tion of the vowel of a following consonant, will be dropped in guttural as in perfect verbs upon the latter vowel being restored by a pause accent, '" "'— - ,^j35 Silas. A ": 5. Sometimes the silent Sh'va of the perfect verb is retained by the guttural instead of being replaced by a compound Sh'va or a subsidiary vowel which has arisen from it. This is mo.st frequent in the Kal future, though it occurs likewise in the Kal infinitive after inseparable preposi- tions, in the Niphal preterite and participle, in the Hiphil species, and also though rarely in the Hophal. There are examples of it with all the gutturals, though these are most numerous in the case of n , which is the strongest of that class of letters. In the majority of roots and forms there is a fixed or at least ^ prevailing usage in favour either of the simple or of the compound Sh'va; in some, however, the use of one or the other ap- pears to be discretionary. a. The following verbs always take simple Sh'va under the first radical in the species whose initial letters are annexed to the root, viz. : Snt* Hi. to be red. hyn K. Hi. to he vain, lin K. to gird. i^i< Ni. Hi. to be illus- Pijn K. Hi. to meditate, b-in K. (not Ho.) to trious. tl^n K. to thrust. cease. Bax Hi. to close. "Tin K. Ni. to honour. sin K. to cut. *iw K.toshul. M^nK. Ni. to6e. n'^n K. (not Hi.) to SjSx K. to learn. *'^^^ K. to injure,wound. live. nsx K. to gird on. sin Ni. Hi. Ho. to hide, oin K. Hi. to be wise. Bia« K. Ni. (not Hi.) ain K. to beat off. *-J^n K. meaning doubt- to be guilty. "^^n Hi. to Join together. ful. 152 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 112 inn K. Ni. to desire. thn K. io dig. rins K. to put on as an iiin K. to spare. isn K. Hi. to blush. ornament. can K. Ni. to do via- issn K. Ki. to search. t^rs Hi. to gather much lenceto. , ^in K. (not Hi.) Jo Aeic. ilS Ni. , restrain. p'm to be strong. r(ijn to be dark. ::ps to supplant. n^n to ie sicfc. ^is to pass ouer. V^^? '" smoke. pbn to divide. "its to Ae/p. "liJS to 6e rich. c. The following have simple Sh'va only in the passages or parts al- leged, but elsewhere always compound Sh'va, viz. : :ns 2 Chr. 19 : 2, Pr. 15 : 9, to love. Tnn Ezek. 26 : 18, to tremble. "lis Ps. 65: 7, to g-ird. nujn Hi. part, to 6e silent. tjDS Ps. 47 : 10, to gather. Pnn Jer. 49 : 37, to 6e dismayed. Tl^n Ps. 109 : 23, to g-o. lis Eccl. 5 : 8, to serve. Z^n Job 39 : 4, Jer. 29 : 8, to nfream. 1?S Jer. 15 : 17, Ps. 149 : 5, and Cjiin Job 20 : 24, to change, pierce. y^S Ps. 5 : 12, to exuZ<. All other Pe guttural verbs, if they occur in forms requiring a Sh'va under the first radical, have invariably compound Sh'va. The use or disuse of simple Sh'va is so uniform and pervading in cer- tain verbs, that it must in all probability be traced to the fixed usage of actual speech. This need not be so in all cases, however, as in other and less common words its occurrence or non-occurrence may be fortuitous; additional examples might have been pointed differently. * StoJ Key6fievoy. ] Except Ps. 44 : 22. §113-116 ATIN GUTTURAL VERBS. 153 §113. 1. The Hhlrik of the prefix is in the Niphal future, imperative and participle, almost invariably lengthened to Tsere upon the omission of Daghesh-forte in the first radical, "iOn;;, isx;; Isa. 23 : 18, IS3n; (the re- trocession of the accent by §35.1) Isa. 28:27, pin;; Job 38:24, yin Num. 32 : 17, P,3n»1 2 Sam. 17 : 23, which is in one instance expressed by the vowel letter i , niL;S''t|! Ex. 25 : 31. The only exception is Jnna (two accents explained by §42. a) Ezek. 26: 15 for 5;;!^J^2 , where the vowel remains short as in an intermediate syllable, only being changed to Seghol before the guttural as in the Niphal and Hiphil preterites. Ac- cording to some copies, which differ in this from the received text, the vowel likewise remains short in n:sH Job 19:7, iniirsn Ezek. 43:18, Cpin>1 1 Chron. 24 : 3, SlMSa Lam.'b' :"ll. 2. The initial n of the Hiphil infinitive is, as in perfect verbs, rarely rejected after prefixed prepositions, as pjsnb Jer. 37: 12 for p^nnb , Kiisfib Eccles. 5:5, i-iilS.b 2 Sam. 19:19, ^iusi Deut. 26:12, liosa Neh. 10: 39^ -i-itsii 2 Sam. 18 : 3 K'thibh ; and still more rarely that of the Niphal infin- itive, qasa Lam. 2 : U for Sioyna, Snna Ezek. 26 : IS. §114. The letter i resembles the other gutturals in not admitting Daghesh-forte, and in requiring the previous vowel to be lengthened in- stead, o]i"i»5 Jon. 1 : 5, 133;;5T Ps. 106 : 25. In other cases, however, it causes no change in an antecedent Hhirik, Ci'!in^ Deut. 19 : 6, ta'^ 2 Sam. 7 : 10, nafe'in Ps. 66 : 12, except in certain forms of the verb n&n to see, viz., KT1 Kal future with Vav conversive, shortened from nil"' , nsif? which alternates with fixin as Hiphil preterite, and once with Vav con- versive preterite, ''n^xnri^ Nah. 3:5. It is in two instances preceded by Hhirik in the Hiphil infinitive, S'-nn, ra-in Jer. 50:34. In the Hophal species the participles Sj^'ip Isa. 14 : 6, ri=a^a Lev. 6: 14 take Kibbuts in the first syllable, but nifT , bs^ have the ordinary Kamets Hhatuph. Resh always retains the simple Sh'va of perfect verbs whether silent or vocal; tl'i^ Gen. 44 : 4, ''^IS^n Ps. 129 : 86, except in one instance, t^f'^'^ Ps. 7 : 6, where it appears to receive Pattahh furtive contrary to the ordi- nary rule which restricts it to the end of the word, §60. 2. a. §115. The verb basj reduplicates its last instead of its second radical in the Pual, ViiZH; "lan reduplicates its last syllable, sinaisn Lam. 2: 11, §92. a. "'B'??^'? Hos. 11:3 has the appearance of a Hiphil preterite with n prefixed instead of n . inn is a secondary root, based upon the Hiphil of bVn. See S3 verbs. For the peculiar forms of CiOX and ^bn see the "B verbs, kjo; and TjrJ- Atin Guttural Verbs. §116. Ayin guttural verbs, or those which have a gut- tural for their second radical, are affected by the peculiarities of these letters, §108, ill the following manner, viz. : 154 ETYMOLOGY. ^117 1. The influence of the guttural upon a following vowel being comparatively slight, this latter is only converted into Pattahh in the future and imperative Kal, and the feminine plural of the future and imperative Niphal, Piel, and Hith- pael, where the like change sometimes occurs even without the presence of a guttural, bxa;i for bSa;' ; wbsan for njbsan . 2. No forms occur which could give rise to Pattahh furtive. 3. When the second radical should receive simple Sh'va, it takes Hhateph Pattahh instead as the compound Sh'va best suited to its nature ; and to this the new vowel, formed from Sh'va in the feminine singular and masculine plural of the Kal imperative, is assimilated, '''M^ for "^Bf ^ . 4. Daghesh-forte is always omitted from the second radi- cal in Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, in which case the preceding vowel may either remain short as in an intermediate syllable, or Hhirik may be lengthened to Tsere, Pattahh to Kamets, and Kibbuts to Hholem, § 60. 4, ins , bxa . §117. The inflections of Ayin guttural verbs may be shown by the example of bi?a , which in some species means to redeem, and in others to pollute. The Hiphil and Hophal are omitted, as the former agrees precisely with that of per- fect verbs, and the latter differs only in the substitution of compound for simple Sh'va in a manner sufficiently illus- trated by the foregoing species, a. The Pual infinitive is omitted from tlie paradigm as it is of rare occurrence, and there is no example of it in this class of verbs. As the absolute infinitive Piel mostly gives up its distinctive form and adopts that of the construct, §92. d, it is printed with Tsere in this and the following nararlifrrn*. Paradigm OF Atin Guttural Verbs • KAL, . NIPHAL. PiEL. PUAL, niTHPAEL. Peet. 3 m. bS5 bitro b!!*a' bsNia lsa'.'45:ll, ••ainxi Ge'n. 29:32. ■ - T virr 4. The feminine plurals of the Niphal and Piel futures have Pattahh with the second radical whether this be i or another guttural, nsbnatn Ezek.7:27, nssnM Prov. 6:27, rijannn Ezek. 16:6, injsxjn Hos.'4:13, but Tsere occasionally in pause, ns'innn Jer. 9 : 17. §119. 1. With these exceptions the vowel accompanying the guttural Is the same as in the perfect verb; thus the Kal preterite mid. e ; 2nst Gen. 27 : 9, Tjanx Deut. 15 : 16; infinitive pST 1 Sam. 7 : 8, Stip Jer. lo-V, with Makkepli, -n-jS 1 Kin. 5:20; Niphal infinitive, ohhn Ex. 17:10, with suffixes, ^\i^y^'^ 2 Chron. 16 : 7, 8, with prefixed 3, oribs Judg. 11 :25, bSEij 1 Sam. 20 : 6, 28, and once anomalously with prefixed 6t , i:JH~X Ezek. 14: 3 (a like substitution of S for n occurring once in the Hiphil preterite, i ■'n?S5>$ Isa. 63 : 3) ; future ohh"^ Ex. 14 : 14, with Vav conversive, :DNH^iJob 7:5, b:i;3«i Ex. 32:1, pyj»i Judg. 6:34. insni Ex. 9:15, 'j'^nsnn Num. 22 : 25, or with the accent on the penult, cn^?] Ex. 17 : 8, csen] Gen. 41:8; imperative, nn|n 1 Sam. 18 : 17, or with the accent thrown back, Tnen Gen. 13:9; Hiphil infinitive, UJXan 1 Sam. 27:12, pn-in Gen. 21: 16, oinn Deut. 7:2, apocopated future, D5"i^ 1 Sam. 2:10, binp:; 1 Kin. 8:1 (in the parallel passage, 2 Chron. 5:2, h-'hp,':), rnian Deut.9:26, nna^ Ps. 12: 4, with Vav conversive, DS=»l IKin. 22:54, nn3!<3 Zech. 11:8; imperative, anpn Ex. 28 : 1, with Maklieph, "annri Ps. 81:11, -psm 2 Sam. 20:4, -bnpn'Deut. 4: 10, with a pause accent the last vowel sometimes becomes Pattahh, pn^ri Job 13:21, i ^SSl^ Ps. 69 : 24 though not always, iifjpfl Lev. 8 : 3. Hophal infinitive, 3'^nn" 2 Kin. 3 : 23. Tsere is commonly retained in the last syllable of the Piel and Hithpael, which upon the retrocession or loss of the accent is shortened to Seghol, irni Lev. 5 : 22, ani'; Hos. 9 : 2, pnih Gen. 39 : 14, "pniab Ps. 104 : 26, Sl'in'i 74 : 10, nnaj^y Gen. 39 : 4, tssBntii Dan. 2 : 1, a"!srn 2 Kin. 18 : 23, and occasionally before suffixes to Hhirik, csio-iB Isa. i : 15, : ?insaB (fera. form for T^nnsaa, §61. 5) 1 Sam. 16 : 15 but C3sn|]b Isa. 30 : 18, csnnaj ^120,121 REMARKS ON AYIN GUTTURAL VERBS. 157 Ezek. 5 : 16; in a few instances, however, as in the perfect verb, Pattahh is taken instead, thus in the preterite, anb Mai. 3:19, nnn Ps. 103:13, pn-1 Isa. 6 : 12, z\x Deut. 20 : 7, ^n^ Gen. 24 : 1 (T^ijZ rarely occurs ex- cept in pause), UJnB Isa. 25:11, and more rarely still in the imperative, anps Ezek. 37 : 17, and future aisn^ Prov. 14:10, i'ssn'; , s isjsn'; Dan. 1 : S. 2. is'a, which has Kamets in pause, lixffl , ibKBJ, but most commonly Tsere before suffixes, ^fl^^lii, '^JiSnbJ, exhibits the peculiar forms, cnbsa 1 Sam. 12:13, tT'ribxiS'l' Sam. l': 20, WnVsfiiJ Judg. 13:6, m-'ri?^^n 1 Sam. 1 : 28. 3. Kamets Hhatuph sometimes remains before the guttural in the Kal imperative and infinitive with suffixes or appended n , oinsj Hos. 9 : 10, T\int Ruth 3: 13, o6s?ri nbniD'fi FUT. 3 TO. nb^-' nbiB^ nb'iD-' ffba" n^d: 3/ nbffln nbiBn nUnrn n^bffin nbnfn 2 m. nbran n3ffin n^tin n^bari rilriBn 2/. "hbiBn "fib'ffin ^ftbtn ''n^bTfln 'nbrnrn 1«. nbiai* nbm " T V n^m ri'byjx nbriTss Pfcr. 3 TO. ^inbTB- : : ■ ^hbt- jiribTZ)"' ii-^bffi-' ^hbnd^ 8/. r : - ; • nribm nsnbTijn renb-fln nanbritEn 2 m. sihbujn : : • iinbisn >iribm sin-bTcn 'fibn^rr 2/ ninbirn T ; "■ : • rijnbiBn nsnlsTD'Pi nsnbffln nrribnisn Ic. nbffl? nbttJ3 nb"iB3 - -i fj'^^j n|nr3 Imfeb. 2 TO. nbd - : nbffin - T • nlffl nb-oJn rCipxin . 2/. ■^nbti • : ■ ^nban ■ ; IT • "nbd ^n^ban ^nbFiian Plur. 2 TO. ^(ib'jj ^nbi^n iihb-a iin^birn iiibmrri 2/. T : - ; nanb^n T : - r ■ T : - mnbT^r? nirilnicn Pabt. Aet. nl?'ii> ' n^sBJj frbti^j nbpTUj-o ^ Pass. T nb^p 160 ^125,126 KEMABKS ON LAMEDH GUTTURAL VERBS. 161 Remarks on Lamedh Guttural Verbs. §125. 1. The Kallliture and imperative have Pattahh without exception; in one instance the K'thibh inserts 1 , mbox Jer. 5 : 7, where the K'ri is -nbDN. The vowel a is retained before suffixes, remaining short in BSsa Am. 9 : 1, but usually lengthened to Kamets, f^li'iSS^ 2 Chron. 21 : 17', i;SBia Gen. 23:11. In the paragogic imperative a may be retained, nnbo, Msaio Dan. 9: 19, or rejected, and Hhiriit given to the first radical, -nsttia Job 32 : 10, nniir Gen. 43 : 8. Hhirik appears in riAsB Gen. 25 : 31, but verbs whose last radical is i commonly take Kamets Hhatuph like perfect verbs both before paragogic n,, and suffixes, "nnod 1 Chron. 29: 18, cnif; Prov. 3:3. 2. The Kal infinitive construct mostly has o, S'Ssb Jon. 2:1, : riJ^ Num. 17:28, — isa Isa. 54:9, rairely a, rijq Isa. 58:9, s'l? Num. 20:'3, tjniaa 1 Sam. 15:1. With a feminine ending, the first syllable takes Kamets Hhatuph, '""l^^a Zeph. 3:11; so sometimes before suffixes, inaj 2 Sam. 15:12, isaia Neh. 1:4, nsjair Josh. 6:5, but more commonly Hhirik. nspa Am.'l': 13, i»aB Num.' 35: 19, inns Neh. 8:5, rarely Pat- tahh, TjSlsV Ezek. 25 : 6. ' 3. Most verbs with final 1 haveHhoIem in the Kal future and impera- tive. But such as have middle e in the preterite take Pattahh, §82. 1. a; and in addition the following, viz. : "it?!} to shut, "lax to say, •nn to honour, lin to grow pale, "iFiJ to shake, "ilDS to be rich, inS to entreat, itsB to slip awa^g, lis to press, ^313 to drink or be drunken. The following have Pattahh or Hholem, IM to decree, "inj to vow, iSjs fut. o, to reap, fut. a, to be short. ^ §126. 1. Tsere is almost alwayschanged to Pattahh before the guttural in the preterite, infinitive construct, future and imperative; but it is re- tain&d and Pattahh-furtive given to tlie guttural in pause, and in the in- finitive absolute and participle wliich partake of the character of nouns and prefer lengthened forms. Thus, Niphal : infin. constr., sairri Esth. 2:8, nnijn Isa. 51: 14, future, niv3-] Ps. 9:19, ! Si^n': Job 17: 3' impera- tive, even in pause, n:Nr). Piel: preterite, nba Lev. 14:8. 5^a 2 Chron. 34:4, infin. constr., S?a Hab. 1: 13, :?|a Lam. 2 : 8, future, n^B^Job 16:13, ; Slgsn 2 Kin. 8 : 12, 'iSi^iiSri Deut. 7 :5,'^imperative, nf d Ex. 4 : 23. Hiphil : apocopated future, roa;^ 2 Kin. 18:30, fut. with Vav conversive, 5:=?] Judg. 4:23, fem. plur..' tiJSan Ps. 119: 171, imperative, rcJin Ps. 86:' 2, and even in pause, n^sn 1 Kin. 22 : 12. Hithpael: rljnn Prov. 17:14, nisn^ Dan. 11:40, nanttJfl Ps. 106:47; this species sometimes has Kamets in its pausal forms,' ^''i^^^'n Josh. 9 : 13, : sfelrri Ps. 107 : 27. On the other hand, the absolute* infinitives: Piel, nScJ Deut. 22:7, Hiphil, ftajrt Isa. 7:11, Hophal, nlian Ezek. 16:4. Participles: Kal, naia Deut. 28: 52, but occasionally in the construct state with Pattahh, r^i Ps. 94: 9, saS Isa. 51:15, Sjj'l Isa. 42:5, roia Lev. 11:7, Piel, nata 1 Kin. 3:3, Hithpael, SJiPl^a 1 Sam. 21 : 15. Tsere is retained before suffixes of the second person instead of being either changed to Pattahh or as in perfect 11 162 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 137, 128 verbs shortened to Seghol, Pi. inf. const. i\nbt Deut. 15 : 18, fut. Jjn.lic^ Gen. 31 : 27. There is one instance of Pattahh in the Hiphil inf. const., rqin Job 6 : 26. 2. In verbs with final t Pattahh takes the place of Tsere for the most part in the Piel preterite (in pause Tsere), and frequently in the Hithpael (in pause Kamets) ; but Tsere (in pause Tsere or Pattahh, §65. a) is com- monly retained elsewhere, laro Ps. 76:4, i^auS Ex. 9:25, "I'nSinPi Prov. 25 : 6, -wxrin Ps. 93 : 1, naj*'' Gen. 22 : 14, laN-i Gen. 10 : 19, ! "iprfn Zeph. 2 : 4. Two verbs have Seghol in the Piel preterite, i^'n (in pause, ^Sfl) and lbs. § 127. 1. The guttural almost always has Pattahh-furtive in the second fem. sing, of the preterite, nraiu Ruth 2:8, inssio Ezek. 16:28, man Esth. 4: 14, nn^an Ezek. 16:4, scarcely ever simple ShVa, Pinji^ 1 Kin. 14:3, nnslO Jer. 13:5, and never Pattahh (which might arise from the concurrence of consonants at the end of a word, §61.2), unless in rnisi Gen. 30: 5, and triHsb Gen. 20: 16, the former of which admits of ready explanation as a construct infinitive, and the latter may be a Niphal par- ticiple in the feminine singular, whether it be understood as in the common English version "she was reproved" or it is atZ/urfg-ed (i. e. justly due as a compensation) to thee ; the latest authorities, however, prefer to render it thou art judged, i. e. justice, is done thee by this indemnification. Pattahh is once inserted before the abbreviated termination of the feminine plural imperative, "iSBB Gen. 4 : 23 for njSSB . 2. The guttural takes compound instead of simple Sh'va before suf- fixes, not only when it stands at the end of the verb, ?j?555, Num. 24: 11, ^iSSia'; Prov. 25 : 17, but also in the first plural of the preterite, "|l3n:ia Ps.'44 : 18 (isnia ver. 21), csiisn-; Isa. 59: 12, iniJJ^a Ps.35: 25, Dfi:Sp;in 2 Sam. 21:6, nsiij^aia Ps. 132:6; -i retains simple'sh'va before all per- sonal terminations and suffixes, Fi"iax Judg. 4:20, ci^iax Mai. 1:7, cinas Josh. 4 : 23. 3. In a few exceptional cases the letter before the guttural receives compound Sh'va, t^StSH Isa. 27:4, "nnisb Gen. 2:23. §128. The Hiphil infinitive construct once has the feminine ending nsi, riisai^fl Ezek. 24:26; ."iS'SnaJFil Ezek. 16:50 for fisnaSBi perhaps owes its anomalous form to its being assimilated in termination to the following word, which is a Lamedh He verb. In npBJJ Am. 8 : 8 K'thibh for nspttJ: the guttural 9 is elided, §53. 3. Pe Nun (fs) Verbs. §129. Nun, as the first radical of verbs, has two pecu- liarities, viz. : 1. At the end of a syllable it is assimilated to the fol- §130 PE NUN VERBS. 163 lowing consonant, the, two letters being writlei as one, and the doubling indicated by Daghesh-forte. This occurs in the Kal future, Niphal preterite and participle, and ia the Hiphil and Hophal species throughout ; thus, ttJi"? becomes vh'; , written ©r, so »^3 for WM, tjiin for V^hf}. In the Hophal, Kamets Hhatuph becomes- Kibbuts before the doubled letter, § 61. 5, ©an for ffiasn . 2. In the Kal imperative with Pattahh, it is frequently dropped, its sound being easily lost from the beginning of a syllable when it is without a vowel, T»a for tjis , § 53. 2. A like rejection occurs in the Kal infinitive construct of a few verbs, the abbreviation being in this case compensated by adding the feminine termination fi; thus, tiffia for Piffia (by § 63. 2. a), the primary form being tJib . a. In the Indo-European languages likewise, n is frequently conformed to or affected by a following consonant, and in certain circumslances it is liable to rejection, e. g. £yypa<^ai, e/u.j8aAA(o, oucTTpe^u). § 130. 1. The inflections of Pe Nan verbs may be repre- sented by ©ij to approach. In the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, they do not differ from perfect verbs. The last column of the paradigm is occupied by the Ke species of lOj to give, which is pecuhar in assimilating its .ast as weU as its first radical, and in having Tsere in the ^.siure. a. The Kal of 1053 is used only in the infinitive, future, and imperative, the preterite and participle being supplied by the Niphal, which has sub- stantially the same sense : the missing parts are in the paradigm supplied from analogy. h. The future of lin; has Pattahh in one Instance before Makkeph, "1<35 Judg. 16 : 5. Paradigm OiP Pe Nun Verbs. KAl. NIPHAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. KAL. Pbet. 3 m. TZJiD TO" 33 ffi^ari TiiaM 1^3 3/ T ;iT Mffi53 T ; • mij'an T • ■ nia?n T :iT 2 m. ¥tl\ T : — • T ; — • rn^an nihD T — T 2/. nrais naaD nttJBn nmar; n^3 : — r Ic. "Ti-isii ■^n-oj'iis ^nisin ^ ^rnuan ^n^3 Plur. 3 c. \ IT ilTD'aS iiTfl^an iiman 13K ;iT 2 m. nnttJM Dn-isas V ; — • Dtiujan V : — • Qrnrian V : — \ Dnn3 2/ 1^^^5 "jl^^'l? li^^iri inman 1 ■.■ : - \ t^\ Ifl. !l3^i5 ^raa?' : — • iiDTu'an : - \ — T IiTFiir. ^Sfo?. Wi3 T TBiSI"! T • laati man lin; Constr. n-jjii ■'2'5?n TO'^an nn FUT. 3 TO. fflr "T - ^'?' IDii'' ,1^: 3/. TB^n ■B'isn "T • ■a^an ■dan - •■. '^ 2 m. Tssn T3'i2n •is^an man '^^ 2/. "icsn ^TD'jsn • :iT " ■'ffl-'ari ^man "srn Ic. 12Jii!!< •■T V TD-'asi mas5 - ■•. •m PZar. 3 m. !lizJ5^ :iT" ra^a:: sima'^ r,in^ 3/. niifl^ri reraisFi rera'an T : ■• — reman T : — •', (renn) 2»ra. ii"ij5n ^iD'asn ;iT • ^la'^an iiman ^3nn 2/. reman T : — • resisn r ; "T • reman T ; •• — ram'an T : - ■.. (renn) Ic. ■;2:35 "T • TD-'a: ' maD -■•. i^;. Impee. 2 m. m3 "T • marj t 2/. ^fea • :iT • ^TD^an wanting ^in Pfer. 2 »». ^to :iT • iiTu'^an ^Dn 2/. re-^'i n?^5?f7 reT?an (™^) Paet. .ict Ts'ib 'd"'M 1^!= Pass. T T • may 1*5 164 §13Z, 132 REMARKS ON PE NUN VERBS. 165 Remarks on Pe Nun Verbs. §131. 1. If the second radical be a guttural or a vowel letter, Nun be- comes strong by contrast and is not liable to rejection or assimilation im Num. 34: 18, Sm 2 Kin. 4:24, "Jn^fi Gen. 24:48, iinisK Ex. 15:2'. It is, however, always assimilated in cnj the Niphal preterite of cfl5 to repent, and occasionally in rn; to descend, e. g. nn'i Jer. 21 : 13, ninn Prov. 17: 10, inn; Ps. 38: 3 but nnjn ibid., nnsn Joel 4: 11." 2. Before other consonants the rule for assimilation is observed with rare exceptions, viz. : i liCMFi Isa. 58 : .3, irj^jn Ps. 68 : 3, lias'i Jer. 3 : 5, : ii's^l' Deut. 33 : 9 (and occasionally elsewhere), -apr Job 40': 24, i la'pj^ Isa. 29:1, rpnifi Ezek. 22:20, biih (for bB:nb) Num. 5:22, jjn-^? (for iin'i5:!]3 with Daghesh-forte separative, §24. 5) Isa. 33:1, sipBJn' Judg. 20:31.' ■■■■r ^ 3. Nun is commonly rejected from the Kal imperative with a, ir? 2 Sam. 1 : 15 (once before Makkeph, "ISJ Gen. 19 : 9, in plural liaa 1 Kin. 18:30 and IBS Josh. 3:9), "blU Ex. 3i5, sj Job ] : 11, Wp Deul. 2:24, "■na Ezek. 37 : 9, 'npt^ Gen. 27 : 26, though it is occasionally retained! WB3 2 Kin. 19 : 29, Kir': Ps. 10 : 12, or by a variant orthography, n6|i Ps. 4 : 7 but always elsewhere NU . In imperatives with o, and in Lamed'h He verbs which have e in the imperative. Nun is invariably retained, laiiss Prov. 17:14, lisj Ps. 24:14, cp; Num. 31:2, yn: Ps. 58:7, iiipj Gen. 30:27, noj Ex. 8:i. 4. The rejection of Nun from the Kal construct infinitive occurs in but few verbs; viz.: Pica j^with suffix, iPiaJa) from Bji;, nne from nos, psa (twice) and ris from «:, nra (once) and sm from raj, Nir; has ri'ia (by §60. ,3. c)i with the preposition i, n.siifb by §57. 2. (3),' once nii: (§53. 3) Job 41 : 17, once without the feminine ending, Nfi Ps. 89: 10, and twice S«l2J5 ; "n; has commonly nn (for n:l?l), with suffixes •'Bn, but ■|n3 Num. 20 :'21, and ",n3 Gen. 38 : 9. " ' 5. The absolute infinitive Niphal appears in the three forms 'nrii Jer. 32 : 4, tf^iri Ps. 68 : 3, and CjiM Judg. 20 : 39. 6. The n of the prefix in the Hithpael species is in a few instances assimilated to the first radical, §82. 5. a, Tiansn Ezek. 5:13, ''nx2|n Ezek. 37 : 10, Jer. 23 : 13, Kiiisn Num. 24 : 7, Dan."! 1:14, .' ysjsa Isa. 52 : 5. § 132. 1. The last radical of 'n As assimilated in the Niphal as well as in the Kal species, Cspna Lev. 26:25. The final Nun of other verbs re- mains without assimilation, Fisss , nsiir , nn:3 . In 2 Sam. 22 : 41 nffn is for nPriJ which is found in the parallel passage Ps. 18:41. "FjPi 1 Kin. 6: 19, 17: 14 K'thibh, is probably, as explained by Ewaid, the Kal con- struct infinitive without the feminine ending ("n) prolonged by reduplica- tion, which is the case with some other short words, e. g. iSHa from 'a. ''a^a for ^a; others regard it as the infinitive npl with the 3 fem. plur. suffix or with "] paragogic ; Gesenius takes it lo be, as always elsewhere, the 166 ETYMOLOGY. §133,134. 2 masc. sing, of the Kal future, fiin Ps. 8:2, is the Kal infin., comp. nnn Gen. 46 : 3, not the 3 fem. sing. pret. for njnj (Nordheimer), nor the imperative with paragogic n^, as nin is always to be explained elsewhere. 2. The peculiarities of Pe Nun verbs are shared by nj?^ to take, whose first radical is assimilated or rejected in the same manner as 3. Kal inf. const, nnp (with prep, b, rili|gb, to be distinguished from PHH^ 2 fem. sing, pret.), once "nnp (by §60. 3. c) 2 Kin. 12:9, with suffixes "'Fin;?, fut. nfsv irriper. ng, •'hp rarely npb, ''hph, Hoph. fut. r4.\, but Nipl?. pret. njsbj. In Hos. 11:3 cnp is the masculine infinitive with the suffix for Bnng ; the same form occurs without a suffix, nj? Ezek. 17: 5, or this may be explained with Gesenius as a preterite for rtpji . 3. In Isa.64: 5 b3S1 hag the form of a Hiphil future from W?i ^JUt the sense shows it to be from baj for bajl , Daghesh-forte being omitted and the previous vowel lengthened in consequence, §59. a. Ayin Doubled (y?) Verbs. §133. The imperfect verbs, thus far considered, differ from the perfect verbs either in the vowels alone or in the consonants alone ; those which follow, differ in both vowels and consonants, § 107, and consequently depart much more seriously from the standard paradigm. The widest diver- gence of all is found in the Ayin doubled and Ayin Vav verbs, in both of which the root gives tip its dissyllabic character and is converted into a monosyllable ; a common feature, which gives rise to many striking resemblances and even to an occasional interchange of forms. §134. 1. In explaining the inflections peculiar to Ayin doubled verbs, it will be most convenient to separate the in- tensive species Piel and Pual with their derivative the Hith- pael from the other four. That which gives rise to all their peculiar forms in the Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, and Hoplial species, is the disposition to avoid the repetition of the same sound by uniting the two similar radicals and giving the iu- tervening vowel to the previous letter, thus, ID for aio , 30 for n!iD§61.3. 3. In the Kal species this contraction is optional in the preterite ; it is rare in the infinitive absolute though usual in §135 ATIN DOUBLED VERBS. 167 the construct, and it never occurs in the participles. With these exceptions, it is universal in the species already named. §135. This contraction produces certain changes both in the vowel, which is thrown back, and in that of the preced- ing syllable. 1. When the first radical has a vowel (pretonic Kamets, §82. 1), as in the Kal preterite and infinitive absolute, and in the Niphal infinitive, future and imperative, this is simply displaced by the vowel thrown back from the second radical, thus nio , ID , aiio , ab ; aasn , aisn ; aisn , aisn . 2. When the first radical ends a mixed syllable as in the Kal future, the Niphal preterite, and throughout the Hiphil and Hophal, this will be converted into a simple syllable by the shifting of the vowel from the second radical to the first, whence arise the following mutations : In the Kal future iio'j becomes ao;* with « in a simple syllable, contrary to §18.2. This may, however, be con- verted into a mixed syllable by means of Daghesh-forte, and the short vowel be retained, thus ai3? ; or the syllable may remain simple and the vowel be lengthened from Hhirik to Tsere, § 59, thus, in verbs fut. a, Ta? for Titt^ ; or as the Hhirik of this tense is not an original vowel but has arisen from Sh'va, § 85. 2. a (l),it may beneglected and a, the simplest of the long vowels, given to the preformative, which is the most common expedient, thlis abj . The three possible forms of this tense are consequently ao^ , ys'j and "la;? . In the Niphal preterite aao? becomes by contraction ao: . In a few verbs beginning with n the short vowel is retained in an intermediate syllable, thus in? for inri? ; in other cases Hhirik is lengthened to Tsere, in? for "1?^? , or as the Hhirik is not essential to the form but has arisen from Sh'va, § 82. 2, it is more frequently neglected, and Kamets, the simplest of the long vowels, substituted in its place, thus ao: . The forms of this tense are, therefore, aoj , "^i , "in? . In the Hiphil and Hophal species the vowels of the pre- 168 ETYMOLOGY. § 136 fixed n are characteristic and essential. They must, there- fore, either be retained by inserting Daghesh-forte in the first radical, or be simply lengthened ; no other vowel can be sub- stituted for them, apn for a^adn , sb"; or no; for yio"!, , non (Kibbuts before the doubled letter by §61. 5) or 2Din for aiaon. -IT 3. The vowel, which is thrown back from the second radi- cal to the first, stands no longer before a single consonant, but before one which, though single in appearance, is in reality equivalent to two. It is consequently subjected to the com- pression which afiects vowels so situated, §61. 4. Thus, in the Niphal future and imperative Tsere is compressed to Pattahh, ais^, sq-} ; adsn, asn (comp. bap. rib^J?) though it remains in the infinitive which, partaking of the character of a noun, prefers longer forms. So in the Hiphil long Hhirik is compressed to Tsere, aiaon, son (comp. bitbjsi) , njbiijpp)). §136. Although the letter, into which the second and third radicals have been contracted, represents two con- sonants, the doubling cannot be made to appear at the end of the word. But 1 . When in the course of inflection a vowel is added, the letter receives Daghesh-forte, and the preceding vowel, even where it would be dropped in perfect verbs, is retained to make the doubling possible, and hence preserves its accent, §33.1, nan, ^lao;'. 2. Upon the addition of a personal ending which begins with a consonant, the utterance of the doubled letter is aided by inserting one of the diphthongal vowels, o (i) in the preterite, and e ( "'..) in the future. By the dissyllabic append- age thus formed the accent is carried forward, § 32, and the previous part of the word is shortened in consequence as much as possible, aon , riiapn ; aop , nji^on . 3. When by the operation of the rules already given, §135. 2, the first radical has been doubled, the reduplica- tion of the last radical is frequently omitted in order to §137,138 AYIN BOUBLED VERBS. 169 relieve the word of too many doubled letters. In this case the retention of the vowel before the last radical, contrary to the analogy of perfect verbs, and the insertion of a vowel after it, are alike unnecessary, and the accent takes its accus- tomed position, lisf , nj^isn . §137. The Piel, Plial, and Hithpael sometimes preserve the regular form, as bin , b^n , bjnnn . The triple repetition of the same letter thus caused is in a few instances avoided, however, by reduplicating the contracted root with appro- priate vowels, as 1\Q'sp , bjibpnin . Or more commonly, the reduplication is given up and the idea of intensity conveyed by the simple prolongation of the root, the long vowel Hholem being inserted after the first radical for this purpose, as adio, bSarin, § 138. In the following paradigm the inflections of Ayin doubled verbs are shown by the example of aio to surround. The Pual is omitted, as this species almost invariably follows the inflections of the perfect verb ; certain persons of the Hophal, of which there is no example, are likewise omitted. An instance of Piel, with the radical syllable reduplicated, is given in SIOM to ewcite. a. The Hithpael of :?0 does not actually occur ; but it is in the para- digm formed from analogy, the initial sibilant being transposed with the n of the prefix, agreeably to §82. 5. ^ b. In- his Manual Lexicon, Gesenius gives to "DSo the meaning to arm, but the best authorities prefer the definition subsequently introduced by him into his Thesaurus, to excite. Paradigm OF Atin VtT.. NIPHAL. PIBL. Peet. 3 m. aid ab aba — T afio 3/. 2/. niao ^ nab T — T — nabi T — : niiiDa naaio Fl^aiD piaalo Ic. ^msio "niio "inias? ^naiis • : — Plur. 3 e. siiao ^ab iiabs — T liaiD : 1 %m. 2/. : Ic. iisaas : — T 1 3MaD iHao dniacs ■tnisDa 1 V -: — : cnaaiD Infiit. Ahtol. alio 30 aibn aaio Comtr. aao ao abn ' abio FcT. 3 m. ab- T as^. ab: ablo" 3/. aon ajsn abri sbion 2 OT. a'DFi T abn abn adicn' 2/. "aon • T ^isn "abn ^ialDFi • : 1 : 1«. aDi< T a&K V ass — V adics* ^fcr. 3 m. !iao'^ T las': Slab: tiaio^ : 1 : 3/. naabn naabn n;aaiDn T : " : 2 m. ^aor, T tibsn !iabn ^daicn 2/. reasn T : ' naabn nsadicn Ic. aos T as? ab? adic3 : Imfee. 2 m. ab abn aaio 2/. ^ao ^abn ^daio ' : 1 Plur. 2 »». ^ab iiabri tialo 2/. j^r^o njabn nsaiio Part. Act. t ^ab aalba Pass. asiiD r ab3 TT 170 Doubled Verbs. HIPHIL. HOPHAI,. mTHPAEt. PIBL. ^cfl nbTi aalFTsn ^i?=o na6n T •• " nabsin naalFibrj fT???0 Wion ' nailncn ' *????? 1 • -; riaaintpn fistio • • -: ^Fiaainpri T^DbiD ' 'istri lafcsirj siialnon • 1 * * ^iDid diii'a&q nfnaaiPiDn V : - , : . dtliDSD inlaDn 1 V • -: ]naa'in?ri li??5?D . isi'iaDq iflailn&n issb^p ii?v ^^?5 ' a6in ailncn ^0^5 a6^ "T ab^"' ailFitp: ^???: abn •■ T ab^Fi aiinpn ^cscn aon- •• T aqiin aiinpri ^fcSDFl • •• T ^absin ^aalncFi ^5&DDn ^^? abiix ailnox ■^c^s^ "T iiabii^ iiaalnc" ^boiD^ T V ■ • ; nsaalnpn reabicn ^abn iab>in iiiainDPi : 1 : ' ^bDiDPi njaiinsn riDSbDcn nb5 "T ansii aalFiM ^5=5? abn '" T aiin&n ^5?5 " •■ T !iabn wanting iiiaipon • : : — T ■/ • -• ' ^ nsaiiTicn nsabic ^053 ab!i5a T aiinpj ^bi07| 171 172 ETYMOLOGY. § 139, 140 Remarks on Ayin Doubled Verbs. § 139. 1. The uncontracted and the contracted forms of the Kal preter- ite are used with perhaps equal frequency in the third person ; the former is rare in the first person, "Tiaaj Zech. 8:14. 15, !i:|T3 Deut. 2:35, and there are no examples of it in the second; 13") Gen. 49:23 and 1H"i Job 24 : 24 are preterites with Hholem, §82. 1. In Ps. ] 18: 11, "'SWaD-oa i:!ia5 the uncontracted is added to the contracted form for the sake of greater emphasis. Compound Sh'va is sometimes used with these verbs instead of simple to make its vocal character more distinct, §16. 1. b, liba Gen. 29 : 3, 8, fii>b.s Ex. 15 : 10, ?]!ii!bn Isa. 64 : 10, •l);, n£;; this occurs once with fut. a, tn'^ Prov. 27: 17. With Vav Conversive'the accent is drawn § 140 REMARKS ON AYIN DOUBLED VERBS. 175 back to the simple penult syllable in this form of the future, and Hholem- is consequently shortened, §64. 1, tjji, la;], TSni, Bnji, "in*!. There are a few examples of u in the future as in Ayin Vav verbs, ll-i; Prov. 29:6, Tin; Isa. 42:4, Eccles. 12:6, onn Ezek. 24: 11 and perhaps ns; Gen. 49 : 19, Hab. 3: 16, liiia; Ps. 91 : 6,' though Gesenius assumes the ex- istence of 11a and ins as distinct roots from Tia and "TiKJ . - ¥ - » 2. The Niphal preterite and participle: (1) With Hhirik under the prefixed 5, ni-ia? Job 20: 28, bnj, im, nnj. (2) With Tsere under the prefix, •'Wm Jer. 22:23, o'^nx: Mai. 3:9, wnm Isa. 57:5. (3) With Kamets under the prefix, SD3, bffi, in;, i;^;; sometimes the repetition of like vowels in successive syllables is avoided by exchanging a of the last syllable for Tsere, bfe; and bgJ, Onj and Da;, nas; Ezek. 26:2, or for Hholem as in Ayin Vav verbs, Ub;, yi; Eccl. 12:6, iVi; Am. 3:11, Hias Nah. 1:12, ifew Isa. 34:4. ' ' ■ ^ 3. The Niphal future preserves the Tsere of perfect verbs in one ex- ample, inn Lev. 21 ; 9, but mostly copipresses it to Pattahh, b^l, W^, nj^, 153'^, T|??7, B!?'^, nis^, tfSli; like the preterite it sometimes has Hholem, tian Isa. 24 : 3, p'ian ibid. If the first radical is a guttural and incapable of receiving Daghesh, the preceding Hhirik is lengthened to Tsere, in;;, inx , l!^2 1 Y'^''''^ ! I'ST • The Kal and Niphal futures, it will be perceived, coincide in some of their forms ; and as the signification of these species is not always clearly distinguishable in intransitive verbs, it is often a matter of doubt or of indifference to which a given form should be referred; Thus, b-!7, ~|J3^, rHE7 are in the Niphal according to Gesenius, while Ewald makes them to be Kal, and Furst the first two Niphal and the third Kal. 4. The Niphal infinitive absolute : nan Isa. 24 : 3, piin ibid., or with Tsere in the last syllable, OHn 2 Sam. 17 : 10. The infinitive construct : eari Ps. 68 : 3, hhn Ezek. 20 : 9, and once with Pattahh before a suffix, ■iSnn Lev. 21 :'l. The imperative: lian Isa. 52: 11, sin^'in Num. 17: 10. 5. In the Hiphil preterite the vowel of the last syllable is compressed to Tsere, aon . nsn (in pause isn , so : iHrn , ! larn), or even to Pat- tahh, pin , ipn , -an , lin , ^^n, snn , nton , iban , laDn . Both infini- tives have Tsere, thus the absolute: pin, lan , nsn , isn, i'nn ; the construct: lan, '^on, "^en (i''En Zecli. 11:10), i4n , h^ri, onn, in pause iiati, pin, with a final guttural, sin, Sin. The imperative: son , ion , ipn , inn , sirn ; siarn Job 21 : 5 is a Hiphil and not a Hophal form as stated by Gesenius, the first vowel being Kamets and not Kamets Hhatuph. Futures with a short vowel before Daghesh-forte in the first radical: as^, oil^, ISB, ina^; with a long vowel, v!!;> '^'57, "^i??! ^^"^ or isn^, iii;, sin and si;, V)Dn, 7«^r (e expressed by the vowe\ letter K, §11. 1. a) Eccles. 12: 5. When in this latter class of futures the accent is removed from the ultimate, whether by Vav Conversive or any other cause, Tsere is shortened to Seghol, ii^^, pi^?, l?'],^ in*!!, Tioi, inn, and in one instance to Hhirik, yiW Judg. 9 : 53 (y-jni would be from pi) before a guttural it becomes Pattahh, sn;i, in;, -nSV Par- ticiples: a^a, Ilia, ina, isa Ezek. 31:3, sia Prov. 17:4. In a very 174 ETYMOLOGY. § 141 few instances the Hhirik of the perfect paradigm ie retained in the last Byllable of this species as in Ayin Vav verbs. T|''6o Judg. 3 : 24, n""^; Jer. 49 : 20, BiffiS] Num. 21 : 30. 6. Hophal preterites : bhw , n^nsin , siian ; futures : cs^ii , ngsi'' , p^!|i, ■jn^ , -len , iIesi'i , :&!)■' , r:?^ , T\kl ; participles : tE^ia , ija or in some copies la's 2 Sam. 23 : 6 ; infinitive with sufRx, nivsn Lev.* 2C : 34, with prep., naidna ver. 43. §141. 1. Upon the addition of a vowel affix and the consequent inser- tion of Daghesh-lbrte in the last radical, the preceding vowel and the position of the accent continue unchanged, isi, >wh;, HHi^J (distinguished from the fem. part. riH'is), ifen; ; if the last radical does not admit Daghesh-lbrte a preceding Pattahh sometimes remains short before n, but it is lengthened to Kamets before other gutturals, fTJH, Wnl (100. 2), iinin, MTO and^Affl. When the first radical is doubled, Daghesh is omitted from the last in the Kal fut. 6, IBfl^, I'lp^j '''-'?'?) and occasionally elsewhere ins^ Hi. fut. ilian Ho. pret. Other cases are exceptional, whether of the shifting of the accent, sian Ps. 3:2. 'sn Ps. 55:22, ^iSp Jer. 4 : 13, and consequent shortening of the vowel. "'■15 Jer. 7 : 29 lor "'•IS , •"In, !ih for ■'Sn, I3"i, I'tic Jer. 49:28 (with the letter repeated instead of being simply doubled by Daghesh, so likewise in C'lniC'^ Jer. 5 : 6, ''3;;n Ps. 9 : 14), for Wffl ; the omission of Daghesh, nja; 1 Sam. 14 : 36, flTSrt Prov. 7: 13, ixsn Cant. 6: II. 7: 13, sftprf Job 19:23, -n=p Num.22:'i'l", 17 (Kal imper. with n^ parag. for "nsf; shortened by Makkeph from nsp, BO -iTjit ora Num. 23 : 7), or in addition, the rejection of the vowel, lat^ K. fut. "Gen. 11:6 for siai;, n^35 Gen. 11:7 K. fut. for nfeij, n^23 Isa. 19:3 Ni. pret. for 0)3=3 or rt'^ii, ."1503 Ezek. 41:7 Ni. fut. for naD3 ; 1J73 Judg. 5 : 5 according to Gesenius for iMj Ni. pret. of bbj to shake, according to others K. pret. of it; to flow; lisBJ Ezek. 36:3 for ifesw (Kwald) from bbs to enter, or for ihsm Ni. fut. of nis to go up. ii'iq; Ezek. 7 : 24 Ni. pret. for sifenj , -nn 3 cTnt. 1 : 6 Ni. pret.' for "sinru . Once instead of doubling the last radical "> is inserted, 1''i^ Prov. 26 : 7 lor 13^ , comp. ISi''-:^ Ezr. 10 : 16 for iaiii'5 . 2. Upon the insertion of a.vowel before affixes beginning with a con- sonant, the accent is shifled and the previous part of the word shortened if possible; thus, with in the preterite, ri'fep, "'^T'SJI (Kamtets before 1 which cannot be doubled), oniss , siJiw , "'nips , cinpa? , nipnn; , ''n'"isn (the vowel remaining long before 1), nhnn (Pattahh instead of compound Sh'va on account of the following guttural, §60. 3. c), ''P'fenn, once with a, iSTisa Mic. 2:4; with e in the future, n;"'sBPi , MS'lsn , rirlnn . If the first radical be doubled, Daghesh is omitted from the last, and the cus- tomary vowel is in consequence not inserted, njpan , njisin ; other cases are rare and exceptional, •"iB'iBn , Bins , ''I?i3^.3 ,, Dinbaj , wail) which is first plur. pret. for 13815 not third plur. for lan (Ewald), §54.3; inisilj Deut. 32:41, ''hian Isa. 44:16, inifeti Ps. 116:6, have the accent upoii the ultimate instead of the penult. 3. Before suffixes the accent is always shifled, and if possible the vowels shortened, ""Sao^, wio^ from 36^, lab';, !;i$B'j from si^ttJ;, 13:&'iri § 141 REMARKS ON AYIN DOUBLED VERBS. 175 from nnn, Dneti from lEfl; in Tjjn^ Gen. 43:29, Isa. 30: 19, from 'jPi;, DS'ien Lev. 26 : 15 from igfj , the original vowels have been not only ab- breviated but rejected, and the requisite short vowel given to the first of the Concurring consonants, §61. 1. In a very few instances a form resembling that of Ayin Vav verbs is assumed, Daghesh being omitted from the last radical and the preceding vowel lengthened in consequence, ip-in Prov. 8:29 for 'iisn ver. 27. 'JB'^nri, Isa. 33: 1 for ijSfrifJ,, sininiailJn Ezek. 14:8 for sinin'iaB:n, m'i-'in Lam. l : 8 for nnSin Hi. pret. of iij,' -(n^n^ Hab. 2 : 17 for inn-; Hi. fut. of nnn with 3 fem. plur. suf , Bgnx/ 2 Sam.' 22 : 43 in a few editions for cjsnsji. . Nun is once inserted, before the suffix in place of doubling the radical, "ijajs Num. 23 : 13 for -iajs . § 141. 1. Of the verbs which occur in Piel, Pual, or Hithpael, the fol- lowing adopt the forms of perfect verbs, viz. : ins to curse. ai?; to cry. ISfj to make a nest. tia to plunder. Pna to smite, break. ysis to cut off. "I'^a to purify. aab to take away the aa^ to be many. lavoa to grope. lieart. T(='7 to be tender, "|5t to refine. pj?^ to lick. Tnia to harrow. nan to warm. ttJiba to feel, to grope. I'iia to rule. ysn to divide. tJB to leap. "ffo to sharpen. nnn to be broken. bSo to judge, to inter- can to be perfect. Vya to cover. cede. 2. The following, which are mostly suggestive of a short, quick, re- peated motion, reduplicate the radical syllable, viz. : "i^n to burn. Bna to linger. SsiB to sport, delight. i-ia to dance. Tp.O to excite. pfys to run. Pini to be mad. C1?S 'o chirp. ssn to mock. 3. The following insert Hholem after the first radical, viz. : ■jSK to complain. i^J tofiy. ssn to break. Viz to mix. 603 to lift up. nha to sink. ppa to empty. !)E0 to occupy the thres- bbo to spoil. *Tia to cut. hold. oair to be desolate or ^Aa to sweep away. i^S to bind,. amazed. cafl to be still. ofci3 to cut off. SlBB to beat. rnn to break loose oi:;; to gather.. 4. The following employ two forms, commonly in different senses, viz.: lisia and b'^'^i to roll. Xl'n to make gracious, ')?.in to be bin to praise, Vim to make mad. gracioits. &|ri to profane, i^in to wound. iVa to speak, Wia to mow. 176 ETYMOLOGY. § 142, 143 230 to change, 5210 to surround. ^^p, to curse, ip^P to whet. )is to gather clouds, IJiS to prac- ys-i and ysii to crush. tise sorcery. I'ji'j and Tiiu to treat with rto. "TiiS to burst,'\^'\^ toshaketopieces. lence. 5. The following use different forms in differentspecies, viz. : PlS'n Pi. to decree, Pu. pjsn . ",5-1 Pi. to shout, Hith. 'ii^rjn .+ i^a Pi. nairiD naizjin nmiiiin m^r Ic. TQii" ^FQTZ5i3 • : — ^na-Jc^n "n:s3^ Plur. 3 c. :iT : 1 ^Q'^Tsin : 1 lion'' 2 TO. V : — : dPMis Dpiffiin V : - I DP.T??: 2/. l^r^^^ 1 •■• : - 1 1 V : - 1 1 ■•• : - 1 "iFlTSn'' 1 V : — : Ic. 13^^; !i3n^i3 r-zimn T.2isV, j : — r Infiit. Aisol. niizj^ sffiin 1 T Constr. V V •■T " a^T?in mij^n iri;' FUT. 3 TO. nij^ n-vjaii :iisv ^5"! 3/ ^■ijp) a'iajFi n^^in 3TD!in Tsi^n 2 TO. ^^P? "T • n^iain 3^^n tsa"'n 2/ ^itan ^i^-in "a^yjin ^nia!in '"in'^n Ic. s"i?i< "T ■ n^isis a'ffl^U^ ran^i? Pfer. 3 TO. : I** :iT- iia^^r : 1 : r 3/. nisicn T ; "T ■ nsai'in ninic^n n;'>:;n"Fi 2 TO. :iT ■ iia-'sin : 1 wn-pi 2/. ninian' riDsij^n T : " T : — nsujn^n Ic. ato "T* n^-^t niD'ilD Tzji'^a Imfeb. 2 TO. ^^ •T • 3^in Tsi? 2/. Plur. 2 TO. • : tip :iT ■ wanljng ■'ica;' iiian'' 2/. T ; " ffi^^.^r' T : " niTfli^ Paet. Act. aij'' 3"'Tai7:D ^4" Pass. n^iis: T T TlJti^ 179 180 ETYMOLOGY. § 147 Remarks on Pe Yodh Verbs. §147. 1. The following verbs retain Yodh in the Kal future, riz. : ttii; lo be dry. 7(0^ to be poured. S'n; to fear. si; to toil. is; to appoint. fin; to cast. "in; to delay. P]?; to be weary. an; to possess. n:; to oppress. ys^ to counsel. nir; to put. pj; to suck. ris; to be beautiful. 'lii; to sleep. The concurrence ofYodhs in the third person of the future is some- times prevented by omitting the quiescent 10=7, ^i^'^^., I"?]?! the long vowel receiving Methegh before vocal Sh'va, and thus distinguishing the last two words from the Lamedh He forms, !lX"i; from nij'; and iliic; Irom nid, §45.2. 2. The following have Tsere under the preformative ; those in which the second vowel is likewise Tsere are distinguished by an asterisk: Sn^ to know. * I'i'^ to bear. Sp"" to be dislocated. In; to be joined. * Ns; to go out. * Ti; to go down. Dn"' to conceive. 13'' to be straitened. * SVU"' to sit, dwell. The second syllable has Pattahh in Inn Jer. 13: 17, Lam. 3:48, and in the feminine plurals, nj"!^!;!, nj'i'iri; njxsn has Seghol after the analogy of Lamedh Aleph verbs; njaia^n (with the vowel-letter ^ for e) occurs only in the K'thibh, Ezek. 35 : 9, and of course has not its proper vowels. In iST''' Ps. 138 :6 the radical Yodh remains and has attracted IT" : to itself the Tsere of the preformative. Comp. § 60. 3. c. 3. The following insert Daghesh-forte in the second radical, viz. : ife; to chastise, instruct, ns; to burn. In V.'fPj Isa. 44 : 8 short Hhirik re- mains before a letter with Sh'va; "'JH'i; Job 16:11 is explained by some as a Kal future, by others as a Piel preterite. 4. The following have more than one form : 2a; to be good fut. SB"'; , once ■'iaiF! Nab. 3:8; pa; to pour ps;, once ps»i 1 Kin. 22:35; "i; iofonn,-^k-] and iT'Ll; "ip; to burn, lp; Isa. 10:16, and ip-n Deu"^ 32:22; 7p; to awake, 'j'p"'; once fp; 1 Kin. 3:15; ip; to be precious. "'P'; and ip; , or with a vowel letter for e, "p^; ; nb; to be desolate, ccn once fi;'3'g"'t^ Ezek. 6:6; lia; to be right. -^b''-), once njnia; (3fem.plur., § 88) 1 Sam. 6 : 12. Some copies have 1?a; Isa. 40 : 30 for >l?5; . 5. In futures having Tsere under the preformative, the accent is shifted to the penult after Vav Con versive in the persons liable to such a change, viz. : 3 sing., 2 masc. sing., and 1 plur., Tsere in the ultimate being in con- sequence shortened to Seghol, ST*; , ibnl , Tns; . Pattahh in the ultimate becomes Seghol in "is;;, "'S'';; (with a postpositive accent) Gen. 2:7, 19, DU!i;i Gen. 50:26; but 2a^;;, CT?5j 1^3"''??, V'fe"'*3 1 o"V once before a § 148-150 REMARKS ON PE YODH VERBS. 181 monosyllable, §35. 1, yg"?! Gen. 9:24. The accent remains on the ulti- mate in the Lamedh Aleph form Kstji , unless the following word begins with an accented syllable, e. g. KSJI Gen. 4 : 16, 8 : 18. The pause re- stores the accent in all these cases to its original position, : :'iJ«i Ruth 4:1, ts-im Ps. 139: 1, nn'l Ps. 18: 10, §35. 2. §148. 1. Kal construct infinitives with Yodh : ca'^ and with a feminine ending nsji': , rti'J , lO'J with suf. "'■id; , once with prep. TiGJib 2 Chron. 31 : 7, Daghesh conservative after «, §14. a; n^n;, §87, once nS; Josh. 22 : 25 and with prep. Kib 1 Sam. 18:29 from K^;;' nin'; once Kin': 2 Chron. 26:15 from fTi; , ■)iu!^ " 2. Infinitives without Yodh : tiS'^ (with suf. ""ns-!), n?!! Ex. 2 : 4, and without the feminine termination S"^, n^l? (with suf. "'Pi'i^) andfrib, once r^ 1 Sam. 4:19, §54. 2, nxs (with suf! "'rss), niss/, nn-j (with Suf ■'Fi']"!) once nnn Gen. 46:3, niB'i (with suf. RnianX'naB (naijj , with suf. ■'FiaiS once "'naui Ps. 23 : 6). Yodh is perhaps dropped from the ab- solute infinitive ailB Jer. 42: 10, which is usually explained to be for aid;; it may, however, be derived from the Ayin Vav verb alia . 3. Imperatives with Yodh: >i'i':, tn"; , nA; . Without Yodh: si (with n parag. ns'n Prov. 24: 14), Z'n (with n parag. nan; for wn Hos. 4:18, see §92. a), ks (nsss, fern. plur. njifes Cant. 3:'ll), aii (-air, n^ia). With both forms : ps and pis-; (sips;), 'n'n (nnn), twice Ti'; Judg. 5:13, lin IB-i and niri'n''. § 149. 1. The Niphal of OJ; has a instead of 0, 'J^ Zeph. 3 : 18, niJ13 Lam. 1:4; >l^*« 1 Chron. 3V5, 20 : 8 has m followed by Daghesh. ns: , which according to Gesenius is from ns; , has i; Ewald assumes the root to be fins , and refers to it likewise the Kal future and the Hiphil ascribed to ns; , §'l47. 3. and § 150. 4. In that case the Daghesh in !|BS; Isa. 33 : 12, Jer. 51 : 58, will not require the explanation suggested in §24. c, but the K'thibh nin-'Sin 2 Sam. 14 : 30 will be unexplained, fflpis Ps. 9 : 17 is not the Niphal preterite or participle of aip; , but the Kal participle of Cpj . 2. Yodh appears in the Niphal future of two verbs instead of Vav, iin''»1 Gen. 8 : 12, 1 Sara. 13: 8 K'ri, n'i;; Ex. 19 : 13. In the first person singularN always has Hhirik,y;js,li;x, i(5;s<, Sinjx, siew, injx. §150. 1. In the Hiphil the following verbs have Yodh preceded by Tsere, viz. : :d; to be good, bS; to howl, "a; to go 'to the right, -i; to change, pi; to "suck. Yodh is likewise found in ^it'o'^n Judg. 16:26 K'thibh, and in the following instances in which the prefix has Pattahh as in perfect verbs, C^-^V'IA Hos. 7 : 12, IT^i?;; Prov. 4 : 25, lh>p. Ps. 5 : 9 K'ri (K'thibh laSin), 'Ns;n Gen. 8 : 17 K'ri (K'thibh KSin), a-^r^y, 1 Chron. 12 : 2. 2. In a-^a;; Job 24 : 21 (elsewhere a'^ai;) and b-i"^'; (once n^ili-'S Mic. 1 : 8), the radical Yodh attracts to itself the vowel of tlie preformative, comp. § 147. 2. He remains after the preformative in 1^''?'''!;; Isa. 52 : 5, nnin; Neh, 11:17, Ps. 28:7, riJin'J 1 Sam. 17:47, Ps. 116:6. , Both Yodh and Vav. quiescing in their appropriate vowels, are liable to omis- sion, T'an, !lp''?n, i4"' '"""in, and once the vowel Tsere is dropped before a suffix, InpiJt? Ex. 2: 9 for inp.Tn. 183 • ETTMOLOGY. §150,151 3. Vav convereive draws the accent back to the penultimate Tsere or Hholem of the Hiphil future in the persons liable to be affected by it, §147.5, and shortens the final vowel, aBi^j P^^'^' ^IBi*! , aiSSI, SSrilj but with a pause accent i irH] Ruth 2 : 14. 4. The following verbs insert Daghesh in the second radical in the Hiphil, viz. : iSJ to set, place, 5S^ to spread, ps^ to pour, except i n;?sia 2 Kin. 4 : 5 K'ri'(K'thibh npsia), ns; to bum, 'except nTiiSin 2 Sam. 14:30K'thibh. 5. In the Hophal a few examples occur of u followed by Daghesh, SSI" Ex. l0:24, sk;; Isa. 14: 11, Esth. 4:3, tkn Isa. 28:16, pka Job 11 : is'j and a few of Ilholem, snin Lev. 4 : 23, 28,' kM"' Prov. 1 1 : 25 for rriii from n'n^ . The construct infinitive : lijin Ezr. 3 : 11, and with the feminine termination T^'J^tn Ezek. 16 : 4, nn|n Gen. 40 : 20, Ezek. 16 : 5. 5150. 1. In the Kal preterite Yodh is once dropped. In Judg. 19 : 11 for 11"' . Hhirik occurs with the second radical of 1^'' and lUi"' in the first and second persons singular with suffixes, and in the second person plural, which is perhaps due to the assimilating power of the antecedent Yodh, e. g. ■'Jnib"', ftnaJT', dphbi''. , 2. In the Piel future the prefix Yodh of the third person is contracted with the radical after Vav conversive, iniua-'i Nah. 1 : 4 for intJa^'jl , na?] Lam. 3 : 33, !|ii?l Lam. 3 : 53, c'iffi'l 2 Chron. 32 : 30 K'ri '(K'thibli o-iiai-'i). 3. Three verbs have Vav in the Hithpael, n^irin , s^inn , ns^rnn ; n is assimilated to the following i and contracted with it in silB^s Ezek. 23 : 48 for I^BIO? a peculiar Niphal formed on the basis of a Hithpael, §83. c. (2). In 'aknn Ex. 2:4 for sk^nn Yodh is rejected and its vowel given to the preceding letter, §53. 3. 6. 9 151. 1. TirT and T|r; . T^fj to go in the Hiphil and for the most part in the infinitive construct, future and imperative Kal follows the analogy of Pe Yodh verbs, as though the root were Ti-'' . Thus. Kal inf const. nsS (nsb , with suf ■'nss) rarely Ti'sn,; fut. '^5^ (once with the vowel letter "' fore, ^■3b^^^ Mic. l : 8, fem. pi. nasbin), occasionally in poetry Tfl'n^ (3 fem. sing. r\Bnpi); imper. t]^ (with n^ parag. fibb, or without the vowel letter J]^, fem. pi. njaiJ and ,133) once 13^n Jer." 51:50. Hiphil: ^"'Sin once in the imper. ''^■')'^'^ Ex. 2:9, and once in the participle Biiljria Zech. 3:7 lor n-i-jibna, §94. e. 2. t]0» to gather and E]o; to add are liable to be confounded in certain forms. In the Hiphil future of 5)d;, is twice represented by the vowel letter K, tjas'l 1 Sam. 18:29. {iSDxn Ex. 5:7; SJON drops its K in the Kal future, when it follows the Pe Aleph inflection, § 110. 3, which it does only in the following instances, Cjb*1 2 Sam. 6 : 1, Clph Ps.l04 : 29, nbpjf Mic. 4 : 6, tjSDX 1 Sam. 15 : 6, where the Hhirik, being abbreviated from Tsere, is short, notwithstanding the Methegh in the intermediate syllable, § 45. 2. a. The apoc. Hiph. fut. of t)b^ when joined with the negative particle ix is accented on the penult, qpin'bx Deut. 3:26, and in one in- stance the vowel of the ultimate is dropped entirely, Ci&in-bs Prov. 30 : 6. $152,153 ATIN VAV AND ATIN YODH VERBS. 183 3. b'^niaaJin Zech. 10 : 6 is probably, as explained by Gesenius and Hengstenberg, for n^naBin from sBj to dwell, though Ewald derives it from aiilj to return, as if for Diniattjn , and Kimchi supposes it to be a combination of both words suggesting the sense of both, in which he is followed by the English translators. I will bring them again to place them. cj^sah Isa. 30: 5 "is regarded by Gesenius as an incorrect orthography for la'^iin ; but Maurer and Knobel read it ©""Hati and assume a root laijB synonymous with laia ". Alexander in loc. tl'^alB Ps. 16:5, see §90. Atin Vav (I'y) AND Ayin Yodh (■^s) Verbs. §152. Yodh and Vav, as the second radical of verbs, have the following peculiarities, viz : 1. They may be converted into their homogeneous vowels i and u. 2. They may be rejected when accompanied by a hetero- geneous vowel, which is characteristic of the form. Yodh forms are confined to the Kal of a few verbs ; in the other species Vav forms are universal. a. Yodh is never found as a quiescent middle radical in any species but Kal: it enters as a consonant into the Piel of two verbs, and the Hifh- pael of two, § 161. l,the Niphal of n^n to be, and the Hiphil of n^ri to live. §153. 1. In the Kal preterite and active participle and in the Hiphil and Hophal species, the quiescent is rejected and its vowel given to the preceding radical. Thus, Kal preterite : D^ for nij? where a, which arises from blending S with the pretonic Kamets, §62.1, is in partial compensation for the contraction, rra for ti]'a, vi for Wia, 3n for 3'i'i . For an exceptional formation, see §158. 1. Active participle : 0)5 for oij? , JiM for nia , T»3 for v'b , sr\ for i^'^ , the ordinary participial form being superseded by that of another Verbal derivative, as is the case in some perfect verbs of a neuter signification, § 90. 184 ETYMOLOGY. §154 Hiphil and Hophal : uj>r\ for B-ii;:!-;, D'^f?;' for Q''i]3^ D^^n for oijpn, the short vowel of the prefix being pro- longed in a simple syllable, § 59. 2. In the Kal construct infinitive, future, imperative and passive participle, the quiescent is softened into its homo- geneous vowel, D'lJ? , ain ; in the future the preformative commonly takes the simplest of the long vowels a, D^p^, ai\i, comp. ao^i. 3. In the Kal absolute infinitive and in the Niphal species a similar softening of 1 occurs, which, with the accompanying or preceding a, forms o, § 57. 2. (5), Qip (kom= kaum) for Di'i)? ; oipD for Dips , the prefix usually taking the simplest of the long vowels u ; Oip;! for ^'^"^ . 4. In the first and second persons of the Niphal and Hiphil preterites o (i) is inserted before the affixed termina- tion in order to preserve the long vowel of the root from the compression incident to standing before two consonants, §61.4; in the feminine plurals of the Kal future c ("'..) is sometimes inserted for a similar reason, this prolongation of the word being attended by a shifting of the accent and a consequent rejection of the pretonic yowel of the first sylla- ble, aniaips, t^rey^n, nranpn. In the Niphal preterite, when the inserted i receives the accent, the preceding i is for euphony changed to 1 , e. g. iniaip3 . 5. In the Kal and Hiphil species the apocopated future takes the diphthongal vowels o and e in distinction from the ordinary future, which has the pure vowels u and i, §65.2.3, thus aiij;" , yo'^ . With Vav Conversive the accent is drawn back to the simple penult, and the vowel of the last syllable is shortened, ai»h , ai?«n . §154. 1. In the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, the form of perfect verbs is rarely adopted, the second radical appearing as 1 , e. g. I!!?, or as "^ , e. g. ni)p , 2. Commonly the third radical is reduplicated instead §155 ATIN VAV AND AYIN YODH VERBS. 185 of the second, which then quiesces in Hholem, Pi. oiaip. Pu. OBip , Hith. oiaiprin . a. In the Pual o is the passive vowel here adopted in preference to u: in the Piel and Hithpael it arises from the combination of u, to which 1 is softened, with the antecedent a, Mip for Daijs , §82. 5. b (3). 3. Sometimes the quiescent letter is omitted from the root, and the resulting biliteral is reduplicated. Pi. ^?^?, Pu. i53b3. a. The two (brtns of the intensive species, which depart from the regu- lar paradigm, precisely resemble in appearance those of Ayin doubled verbs, though constructed \ipon a^different principle, as already explained. ^155. The inflections of Ayin Vav verbs are shown in those of Dip to stand or rise, in the following paradigm ; the divergent forms of Ayin Yodh verbs in the Kal species are exhibited by n^^ to contend. a. Ayin Vav and Ayin Yodh verbs are named not from the Kal preterite, in which the quiescent is rejected, but fi-om the construct infini- tive, the simplest form in which all the radicals appear. h. No Hophal forms occur in those persons in which the inflective ter- minations begin with a consonant. The same is true of the Ayin Yodh imperative. Paradigm of At IN Vav KAL. NIPHAI.. PIEL. PUAL. Pbbt. 3 m. Qfe nips naip n7jip 3/. '^^'4\i n^jips n7b72ij3 rTb7jij5 2ot. tia)2 ni-bip3 p7^7bip i^Tsaip 2/. ^^2 ni52ip2 i^'fbip I?i7;7bip \c. "1717^^ wbip5 -ra7jip "Fl'f^P Plur. 3 c. ^-)? . ii7jipD I7!27jij3 I7b72ip 2 TO. CJI^'fP nW7::ip3 nri7^7jif3 nteip 2/. l^'rE l^^'^^'l?? W"^^, 1W=^"I? Ic. ^:^I2 i;i7bip3 irfbip I37fbip Infist. ^JsoZ. nip nipn Constr. Qilp, niprt n7bip FuT. 3 m. Dip; nip: ci'bip'; n7bip: 3/ nipn nipn n7bipn n7bipn 2 OT Dpn nipn ttbipi^i n7bipn 2/ ''7^iipn ^aipn ^7j53ij:n ^/baipi!! Ic. Qips nip>5 C^'^Ti? nbipK PZur. 3 m. ^'2i>- ii7jip: ^7b7ji|5: '^'^'iV^. 3/. TO-'^^ipn re7^ipn n57j7!2ipn nD737biprp 2ot. ii7c!ipri v-ipri I7j7^ipn !i7baipn 2/. nr^bipip H57^ipn n!7^"bipi;i Hj'J/^lpPl 1 c. ' n^p3 ni]33 Q'^i'P? n7bip3 Impee. 2 wi. Qlp nipn n7aip 2/. "'^^P ''7^ipr! '^?^% wanting P?W. 2 TO. laip ii7jipn i|7J73ij? 2/ ™'?P TO^ipri n37ji2ip Paet. Act. t=R n7bip7j Pans. nip nip; n7bipa 186 AND AtIN YoDH Verbs. HIPHIL. HOPHAT,. H[THPAEL. KAL. Q'pr] dpin d7;5ipirir! T fi'ri?n n7bp5!in na7^ip3inn T T ^■i'^'pn (^'^fe^r!) naaipnn nan mia^n T : — T ni^j^pn (^#^") mbipm i^ii: ^fitrpq (-n^^fe^n) ^r-fblpriri "p::!;! "inii^'n ^"^"l?fl ' iiaj^^n ii^iaipnn T • dinia^jpq (Di^^piiri) dtoiijnri Qiria^ in^a^ipq inm) ■jnaaipriri 1^^^ iisi^i^pq (w^jb^n) 'iDa^Sipm ^:an Dpn ain a^-i Q'PD daipnin a^n qt: dfe^' c^tipri: a'''!" • r D^pn DpW dt:iprn a^'in • T n^n npw daipnn a^nn ■ T ''jj-pn Tbpw ^aaipnn D')?5J D)bn« daipm *i'j-)?: ^7ip^^ ^H-gipi;!': *ia^r ■ T fi^ai^j? (!i;a)b^n) riD^j-biprin roann T : " T rrpn il^pW • ^'i'^ipJnri • T re'9PP) (nr^p^n) np'fbiprin , »^,*^'!!P n-p5 dp^J d^bipw d/jipm • T Di?.0 r "a'lbri wanting ■^aaipriri ^a-i ^7rpn ■ ^iiaipnn ^a^'i ra'^PO nM'bipm (ra^"!) Q'i?'^ dtiptia an T dp^-3 a^T 187 188 ETYMOLOGY. §156,157 Remarks ox Ayin Vav and Ayin Yodh Vbrbs. § 156. 1. Medial Yodh and Vav remain without quiescence or rejection in a few verbs, whose root contains another feeble consonant by contrast with which these letters acquire new strength. This is always the case in Lamedh He verbs, e. g. fi^ti, ni3 ; go likewise in the following guttural verbs and forms, sia to expire, !1";in;; Isa. 29:22, tinJS'? Isa. 42:11, 2|;k to be an enemy, 'iMs 1 Sam. 18:9 K'ri (K'thibh "(is), n^'^3 Jer. 4: 31, which are confined to the Kal species, and in Tfn to be airy or re- freshing, which is besides Ibund in the Pual participle. 2. The Kal preterite has Pattahh in two instances as in Ayin'Vav verbs, ta Zech. 4 : 10, OB Isa. 44 : 18 but na Lev. 14 : 42. It has Tsere in na to die, li Isa. 17 : 11 but 113 Jer. 50 : 3, and Hholem in lix to shine, laia to be ashamed, aia to be good, §82. 1. a, and in !is3 Jer. 27 : 18, else- where ixa, ^iT Isa. 1:6, Ps. 58:4, elsewhere >l"it. Hhirik once occurs instead of Pattahh in the second person plural, ontrB Mai. 3 : 20. The following participles have Tsere, o'^ib , yi , yh, pi, is ; the following have Hholem, n-^Dia, niffi-ia , cinip 2 Kin. 16:7 (comp. cnia-ip Ex. 32:25 in the Samaritan copy), elsewhere D''a|3 . 3. The vowel letter X is written for a, § II. 1. a, once in the preterite, BSjS Hos. 10:14, and occasionally in the participle, I3S^ Judg. 4:21, niaK'l Prov. 24:7, m'n 2 Sam. 12:1, 4, Prov. 10:4, 'l3 : 23, DitJXia despising Ezek. 16 : 57, 28 : 24, 26, to be distinguished from D'lau rowing Ezek. 27 : 8, 26. The consonant St is once introduced in place of the omitted ^, nas'n Zech. 14: 10 for Ma"!: the ancient versions favour the assumption, that "''ixa Ps. 22 : 17 is in like manner for D'^'ia piercing, though the most recent and ablest expositors take it to be a preposition and noun like the lion. Alexander in loc. 4. The accent regularly remains upon the radical syllable before affixes consisting of a vowel or a simple syllable, though with occasional exceptions, e. g. MKi? Lev. 18 : 28, sian Gen. 26 : 22, siaiO Gen. 40 : 15, siin Num. 13 : 32. In a few instances it is shifted by Vav conversive preterite, §100.2, libl Obad.ver. 16, siSOl Am. 3 : 15, nnsi Isa. 11 : 2, !|ri:i Isa. 7: 19 but ^sai ibid., nsasi Zech. 5 : 4, nj^l ibid., where the feminine ending is n_ instead of n ^ ; so in the passive participle, nnit Isa. 59 : 5 for ivw . § 157. 1. Hholem is in a few instances found instead of Shurek in the construct infinitive, sfia , laia Judg. 3:25, Bia, riii and nib, Sii Isa. 7:2, elsewhere 515 , IW Isa. 30 : 2, which is not from ITS, ailj Josh. 2 : 16, else- where aiii, and with suf. nail Ezek. 10 : 17, ■'lia 'Ps. 71 : 6, which is not the participle from fin (Gesenius), "^na my breaking forth, i. e. the cause of it Ps. 22: 10, see Alexander in loc; Gesenius explains this form as a participle, but is obliged in consequence to assume a transitive sense which nowhere else belongs to the verb. 2. The following imperatives have Hholem, "'■nisi Isa. 60 : 1, N3 , isii, § 158 AYIN VAV AND ATIN YODH VERBS, 189 "■na Mic. 4:10, ''laiTi Mic. 4:13. With paragogic n, nwp or rns^p, naiui or naii:;. Examples of the feminine plural, nsaji, njsi'. _ 3. The following futures have Hholem, Kii; , Tii; Gen. 6 : 3, elsewhere V'?; , Sio; Ps. 80 : 19, bin; and Din; , ttJii; where 'the Hhirik of the per- fect paradigm is lengthened to Tsere under the preformative. Examples of the feminine plural : njix'an and n3s:in, nrasian, n;is>iEn and Zech. 1 : 17 nssisn (in some editions without Daghesli), njisiiCFi and niaun, nniipi , nsrnsian Ezek. 13 : 19. The accent is shifted and Kamets rejecte'd from the preformative upon the addition of a suffix or paragogic Nun, the latter of which is particularly frequent in this class of verbs both in the Kal and Hiphil future, "'JBisJ;, ?(iiJaN, n-j-nn, b«d;, l^ilp';, liinsian, fiJaSB Ezek. 4 : 12, with Daghesh euphonic in the S which is omitted in some copies. Apocopated future: na; , aiij; and "3ia;, 1311, Ti^ri. I3an, Dp; with the accent thrown back to the penult Dj5; . Future with Vav conversive: na;i (In pause naj!), a'u;! (ai^J]), ^a*!!) 0!?fi, yf;;!, cisji the last vowel is changed to Pattahh before a final guttural, ssji , n;;i , and sometimes before "i or after an initial guttural "iTJl but "i5;i, C]?;; he was weary, C1?J1 heflew, onni ; the vowel of the preformative is likewise changed to Pattahh in UJrri; Job 31 : 5, a?^l 1 Sam. 14: 32, asn; 1 Sam. 15: 19 but BS^i 1 Sam. 25: 14. §158. 1. The verbs which exhibit peculiar Ayin Yodh forms in Kal, with unimportant exceptions, either do not occur in the Hiphil or retain the same signification in both these species. This has led some gram- marians to entertain the opinion that these are not Kal but abbreviated Hiphil forms, while others suppose that the Hiphil in these verbs is a secondary formation, and has arisen from the Kal future having the form of the Hiiihil. Only three examples occur of quiescent Yodh in the Kal preterite, niai"i Job 33: 13 (Firn Lam. 3:58), ir'aia Dan. 9:2 (nri:a Ps. 139:2) &i^-^ Jer. 16 : 16. " 2. The following verbs have ■> in the Kal future and imperative, V? to understand, ry^i (once "'na Mic. 4: 10) to break forth, b"'? (once biji Prov. 23 : 24 K'thibh) to exult, V^ (once li'i; Gen. 6 : 3) to pdge, y'i to lodge, zr^ to contend, niir to muse, niii; (once Blib; Ex. 4:11) to put, i!;"'ia (once c>ll!)b; Isa. 35 : 1) to rejoice, 1"'UJ (once lir; Job 33 : 27) to sing, tT'U to place ; bin or b"'n to twist, writhe, has both Yodh' and Vav. To these are to be added IT'S Jer. 4 : 3, Hos. 10: 12, na-in Ps. 71 : 12 K'thibh, K'ri nmn as always elsewhere; 'j'''t<; to urge, 7''i; to flourish, Tin; to wander, are in the Hiphil according to Gesenius : but as the corresponding preterites are not Hiphil but Kal, and there are no other forms of the Kal future, they might with equal propriety be regarded as Kal futures of Ayin Yodh roots ; the second of them is so regarded by Ewald. Apoco- pated futures: •;=;. ii; and bj';, s':^;, nib;, ni;;, "i^n and ii>n. With Vav conversive : ia^l , i^.;i , Diufi ,^"i=Fil , ^fm , n»f\ , irinl . With para- gogic Nun and suffixes : "jlS-'J'; ,' '\-^^rvp\ , Caito; . Feminine plural : nj^Fi. 3. The infinitives show a stronger disposition to adopt Vav forms. Yodh is only retained in the following absolute infinitives: y^ Prov. 23: 1, n^a and na, b-'a Prov. 23:24 K'ri (bia K'thibh), 3in Jer. 50:34, else 190 ETYMOLOGY. §159,160 where sS. Construct infinitives: l"!^, -jiS Gen. 24:23, elsewhere "(iiU, =''T once an Judg. 21 : 22 K'tbibh, n-'ib and nsiib, D-'ib Job 20 : 4, 2 Sam. 14:7 K'ri, elsewhere Wir, l-^UJ 1 Sam. 18:6 K'ri (K'tbibh "iW), rT^BJ, also with suf. iuiin Deut. 25:4, elsewhere ISW. In the difficult verse Hos. 7:4 l"'Sa has been variously explained, as the Kal infinitive pre- ceded by the preposition '|0 or as the Hiphil participle. The only certain instance of a Kal passive participle of Ayin Yodh verbs is firra 2 Sam. 13 : 32 K'ri (K'tbibh naiia) ; some explain eiizJ Num. 24 : 21, Obad. ver. 4, as a passive participle, others as an infinitive. 4. Ayin Yodh verbs adopt the Vav forms in afl the derivative species, e.g. "'nib:, •jii;, tnjsia^, isiarn, nir>|i; Ti't; cooAerf, i. e. poHage, is the oniy instance of a Niphal participle with Yodh. §159. 1. Examples of the Niphal preterite: Sia:, Sid;, yiDj, liKjj the accidental Hhirik of the perfect paradigm is preserved in biH3 by means of Daghesh-forte in the first radical ; in 1iJ"2 it is lengthened to Tsere before the guttural; in rirj Jer. 48: 11 the radical 1 is rejected, which gives it the appearance of an Ayin doubled verb. Inflected forms : n5i3:(part. fem. niisj), sis'd:, Mo;, iai«;, liia?, "^rsie;, ""psib;, Dnisie;, cnbpp; . 2. Infinitive absolute: biEti. Construct: bierl, nian, with n re- jected after the preposition ^is<3 Job 33: 30, §91. b; once it has Shurek, Wn Isa. 25: 10. Imperative, 'pin. ilbian . 3. Future: ■,ii'^. Bia^, Visa'?, "(is^ Ps. 72 : 17 K'ri (K'tbibh rr), wi": , Sir, -is::, l^**!); "''i^::- Participle: "p:; , Tii!; , n'^iis; , c-'iio; , nib:;, D"'^iH3 . § 160. 1. The short vowel of the perfect paradigm is in a few instances preserved in the Hiphil by doubling the first radical, thus riW and n"'ir!, n-'en and rffciri , b-'in , v^2 , V^- 1 and ■(■'i:'; , "iin^ and in?5 2 Sam. 22 : 33. 2. Hiphil preterite inflected: n^'^sn, "■'=n, Wi'in and ^s\n, with syllabic affixes : nirs" , niii'^an , nia"''^^; and n'S'in ■ zrbi'^yj^ and crsif?. , crih"'t^fi, ""niS^Bril, or when the first radical is a guttural, ipin^sn, n'lisn and nn'isn, or without the inserted Hholem, RBjn, ■ipirifn "and ■'nii'i''5n. , win and !i3i:"'=n , Dinsan. and ctiN^an^ , Tiar! and DBTitn, §61. 4. a. With suffixes, i^s^, RT'^CJi 'i^'^'^vJ' ■'?.r'^'^^':i 'ir'S^iJ^':- 3. Hiphil future inflected: 13"'='; , 1'^''r'?i feminine plural njaton, njB"'pn, nsai^rin. With Nun paragogic and suffixes: ',iia"'s:';, cn''a^ . Apocopated future : ykl , 2tB^ , OB'; , n-i^ . With Vav ionversive : niQ'l, ClS'l, BR?], "iss*,! and T'SKJ, if the last radical be a guttural, 5'^JI, ns«l, rS'T, or S, NZ^i once S''^?1 and once ifa^l; upon the reception of a suffix the vowel is restored to its original length, ca'^UT], >;riB"'3'^]. 4. Hiphil infinitive absolute: aiiin, nrn, Cfsn once C^n Jer. 44:25; construct, b-'irj , n-'ifi, a-'ijn , ciprj , with suffix ■'iiin, 'Cj^^fH, ^kT'^<^,' cis'^sn. and once with a feminine termination HC:ri Isa. 30 : 23. § 161, 162 LAMEDH ALEPH VERBS, 19J 5. In a few instances u is found in the Hophal before Daghesh-forte or Sh'va, nn-^rn Zech. 5:11, naa Ezeii. 41:9, 11 but nisin Lam. 5:5, and in some editions Dgn 2 Sam' 23:1, ibBlJ Job 41:1, llhan 2 Sam. 21:9, though others read Cjsn , !i»'J, 1t^'?'JJ' §161. 1. The following verbs, which are only found in one or more of the three reduplicated species, double the middle radical either as Vav or as Yodh, viz. : a^n to render liable, bjIS to do wickedly, "ijis to blind, nis to pervert, 's'vo to cry far help, WTf-^'s.T] Josh. 9:12, !n«BS7 Josh. 9:4; so also d|;p fut. 0*15'? and cfeip^, nns fut. "i^SI, which have quiescent Vav in other species, and Dji , which has consonantal Vav likewise in the Kal. 2. The following omit the quiescent in the Piel and double the result- ing biliteral, bisbs to sustain, n-'fixtsxa Isa. 14:23, ijio^oa Isa. 22:17, T???!'? Hab. 2:7, "'SSBSB^ Job 16: 12 but yi'S'^ Jer. 23:29,' ip-ip Num. 24:' 17 and ifenpa Isa. '22:5, ''aipaian Isa. 17:11; lliSS^ Isa. 15:5 is for ! 'nsns7 , § 57. i ; lil'?'; Job 39 : 3 is perhaps for ^iSsbs^ from bw , comp. "DK Ps. 139:8 for pi'Of*, §88, though Gesenius conjectures that it is an erroneous reading for isbsb from Sib . The only Hithpael formed by a like reduplication is bn^l^nP) Esth. 4:4, elsewhere ibinnn. 3. Other verbs double the third radical in the Piel and Hithpael. Ex- amples of the feminine plural : nnnisn, nsiipn, snjMiann, nsBisic'nsi. Hholem is changed to H before the doubled letter in the contracted form, siSSIs:] Job 31:15 for 1S3;i=";i, §61. 3. Furst explains «MW Isa.. 64:6 as jn like manner for IJaJIBFl] , while Gesenius makes it a Kal future, used in this single instance in a transitive sense. CDbl^ia Am. 5 : 11 is probably a variant orthography for DsCOia, §92. &. 4# The following are the only examples of the Pual in Ayin Vav verbs, viz.: With 1 doubled, njsa Eccles. 1: 15,-o''nj-ia Jer. 22: 14. Redupli- cated biliteral, iVabs 1 Km. 20:27. The third radical reduplicated, Win to be born, !!i33i3 Ezek. 28 : 13, Ps. 37 : 23, nsaarn Ps. 75: 1 1 and oaina Neh. 9 : 5, SS'^? Isa. 16 : 10, IBSi-r; Job 26 : 1 1, nsijiBJa Ezek. 38 : 8. 5. oi'nisiBn Jer. 25 : 34 is an anomalous preterite from y^B to scatter, with n prefixed and inflected after the analogy of Niphal ; some copies have the noun ciinisien your dispersions. In "'KaBni Ezek. 36: 11 lor ^naafij from aia, Tsere is retained unde? the prefix as though the word were from the related Pe Yodh verb aa;, e. g. inaaini . On the other hand, in infe'^stnl Ex. 2 : 9 from pi; , Tsere is rejected as though it were from an Ayin Vav verb. Lamedh Aleph (sb) Verbs. § 162. 1. Aleph, as the third radical of verbs, retains its coBsonantal character only when it stands at the beginnmg of a syllable, nifStt, ^s^Spn. 192 ETYMOLOGY. ^163 2. At the end of the word it invariably quiesces in the preceding vowel, ^57.2. (2), s'iia, »tQ, s^ittn . If this vowel be Pattahh, as in the Kal and Niphal preterites and in the Pual and Hophal species, it is in the simple syllable lengthened into Kamets, § 59, siti for «ia , sitt? for »ii35 ; so likewise in the Kal future and imperative, where ^5 as a guttural requires a, sitt? for si'a:' , »?■!? for sia . A like prolongation of Pattahh to Kamets occurs before medial 8 in the first and second persons of the Kal preterite, insia, 3. With the single exception just stated, medial 8 quiesces in the diphthongal vowel e before syllabic affixes ; thus, in the first and second persons of the preterites of the derivative species in Tsere, C"^'?? . "^isian , in the feminine plurals of all the futures and imperatives in Seghol, njsittn , npssia . a. This e mayarise from the diphthongal preferences of X , §60. l.a(5), or it may be borrowed from the corresponding forms of fih verbs, between which and Nb verbs there is a close affinity and a strong tendency to mutual assimilation. In Chaldee and Syriac no distinction is made be- tween them. §163. This class of verbs is represented in the follow- ing paradigm by siia to/nd; the Piel and Hithpael, though wanting in this verb, are supphed from analogy. The Pual and Hophal are omitted because they are of rare occurrence, and they present no peculiarities but such as are common to the other species. a. In their ordinary inflection Lamedh Aleph verbs differ from the perfect paradigm in the vowels only. Paradigm op Lamedh Aleph Verbs. KAt. 3SIPHAL. PIEL. HIPHIL. EI-mPAEL. Pekt. 3 m. T T T ; • ssa • : ' ^ss'^t^ri 8f. fl«?a HKizaa T ; : • riNsa nj!<^k7^ri ni«2ann T ; - : ' 2 TO. T T T iQ^S'J? ini^sa ^^S'^n nss'^rtn 2/. T T r.s]|7j3 msa nskan nssann Ic. T T "r^'^^'r? •rii!«|7j 't}'».^2r] 'rN27;i;iri Flnr. 3 c. ^«^^ ^it^a is-isan ^isaainri 2 m. T : Dr!K27^3 niHssa n^sr^ri Dfjsaanti 2/. ) V T ; ■|ihssa3 ife^aa 1 V ■■ : . ■jmsanr; 1 c. ^3Kra T T ^3xr^3 scska i^ssian iDi^sanr; Infin. Aisol ii:XB"i, "Saa; Job 39:24 for -sa37. tCisri Deut. 28:59 Hiph. pret. for K'''^srt , Nsia' Ps. 135:7 Hiph. part, const, for N'^iia from xs; ; to which may be added nps'iSn Ezek. 23 : 49. ri:''StXBn Jer. 50 : 20, with 1 inserted as in rib verbs. § 166-168 LAMEDH HE VERBS. 195 3. Sometimes the nb form is adopted both in consonants and vowels. ^iis Ezek. 28:16 for ixba, !|S3 1 Sam. 6:10, >rh Ezek. 39:26, ■'snis 1 Sam. 25:33 for i3nKb3,''nas'Ruth 2:9for rsas, n^s-; Gen. 23:6Voi- xbs'i, n3"iB"iri Job 5: 18 for njSE-in comp. Jer. 8: 11, 51:9, 2 Kin. 2:22, i!|'rJ Ps. 32:1 for KTO3 , n'^as Jer. 26 : 9 for nxa?, n-'ssnn 1 Sam. 10:6, nisinn 1 Sam. 10:13, ^iVsan 2 Sam. 3:8', ni3i:'lsa.'29: 7 for fi"'X3S; njpa Ezek. 8 : 3 is by some interpreters thought to be lor Sfipa provok- ing to jealousy, and by others explained in the sense of the rfb yevh selling (Israel to their foes). §166. 1. The 3 fem. preterite has the old ending n^, 586. b, in nsan Ex. 5 : 16 for nxon, nxii? Deut. 31 : 29, Isa. 7:14, Jer. 44 : 23, nsirj Gen' 33:11 Hoph./from Nia' 'nxbe? Ps. 118:23 (rsSB; Deut. 30:ll"is the feminine participle), to which the customary ending ri_^ is further added in nnsbs: 2 Sam. 1 : 26. nnkann Josh. 6 : 17 for nx"'ann. 2. A feminine termination H^, n, or as in nb verbs m", is occasionally added to the construct infinitive, e. g. Kal, fiKSB, nx'i';, nislu, nx'ip from Sni3 to meet, distinguished from K'^is and mxnp Judg. 8 : 1 from Nnj? to call, TivA-a and n'iNba never xba, nxbiu Prov. 8: 13, with suf. "ihxtin Ezek. 33': 12. Niphal, 'vksin Zech. 13 : 4. Piel, nixJia and N.f a ', •inxSR 2 Sam. 21:2; nikiaa Ezek. 17 : 9 is a Kal inf. const, formed as in Chaldee by prefixing a. 3. There are two examples of the Niphal infinitive absolute, sSpS 2 Sam. 1 : 6 and KSan Ex. 22 : 3 : the analogy of the former has been re- tained in the paradigm for the sake of distinction from the construct. Piel infinitive absolute: ikip_, Ksn, x^a. Hiphil inf. abs.: X^sn , Xirn. 4. The Hiphil future witli Vav conversive commonly has Tsere in the ultimate, though Hhirik also occurs X^pni , Kg*!, xan'T , XanFil, xsi'l and xiw, xajl, once Xia;l Ezek. 40:3, and once X^iij] Neh.'8:2. ' 5. Kamets sometimes occurs in the ultimate of the Hithpael future, xtoni Num. 23:24 but XTSsnn Ezek. 29: 15, so xanni, XHBi, x^Dnn, ; ^ixfean^ ; more rarely in the preterite, nxaan . § 167. 1. The following are the only Pual forms which occur, Pret. : 1x3^ , iixan , xVp . Fut. : xsi't' . Part. : xsna , nxaaa , o'sbaa , oikfeoa , nixsaa , with suf. "'Xipa . 2. The following are the only Hophal forms: Pret. ixann, nxiin, xa>in, nxan, nnxan, sixain. Fut.: xa>ii, wai''. Part.: xaia, nxi>ia. 3. For the anomalous forms, nnxian Deut. 33:16, ^inx-ian Job 22: 21, nxan l Sam. 25 : 34 (K'thibh inxan), see §88 (sing. 3 fern.) ' Lamedh He (rtl5) Verbs. § 168. In these verbs the third radical, which is Yodh or Vav, does not appear at the end of the word except in the 196 ETYMOLOGY. § 169 Kal passive participle, e. g. ""i^a ; in all other cases it is re- jected or softened, the resulting vowel termination being usually expressed by the letter n , §11.1.«. In the various preterites n stands for the vowel a, and is hence pointed n , . In the futures and participles it stands for e, and is pointed n.. . In the imperatives it stands for e, and is pointed n „ . In the absolute infinitives it stands for o or e ; in the Kal it is pointed ri , in the Hiphil and Hophal n .. , in the Niphal and Piel n' or ri. . There are no examples in Pual and Hithpael. The construct infinitives have the feminine ending ni . a. In this class of verbs the Yodh forms have altpost entirely super- seded those with Vav. The latter are confined to the construct infinitive where ni, occurring in all the species, is best explained by assuming 1 to be radical (comp. fiis^i Ezek. 28 : 17 as an alternate of riiiT) and to afew other sporadic cases, viz. : a single Kal preterite, '^ri'i^i^ Job 3 : 25, the reduplicated forms of three verbs, njS3, ^jinaa, njnnian, and the pecu- liar form, r|.;f':», Isa. 16:9. 6. In the Kal preterite, Yodh is rejected after the heterogeneous vowel Pattahh, §57. 2. (5), which is then prolonged to Kaniets in the sim- ple syllable, ~b3 for ^bj. As Pattahh is likewise the regular vowel of the ultimate in the preterites of Niphal and Hophal, and occasionally appears in Pie!, §92. c, and Hithpael, §96. 6, the final Kamets of these species may be similarly explained. The ending, thus made uniform in the other species, passed over likewise into the Hiphil preterite, which it did the more readily since a belongs at least to some of its persons in the perfect verb. Yodh is in like manner rejected after the heterogeneous Hholem of certain infinitives, while it leaves the homogeneous Tsere of others un- modified. c. The futures, imperatives, and participles of certain of the species have e as the normal vowel of their ultimate ; in this Yodh can quiesce, leaving it unchanged. Those of the other species (except the Hiphil, which is once more attracted into conformity with the rest) have or may have a in the ultimate ; this, combined with the i latent in "', will again form e. In the future this becomes e (..) in distinction from the ending e(„) of the more energetic imperative ; and the absolute is distinguished from the construct state of the participle in the same way. §169. 1. Before personal endings beginning with a /owel the last radical is occasionally retained as "^ , particu- §170 LAMEDH HE VERBS. 197 larly in prolonged or pausal forms, n^''on , Ton , : )'^'>on) ; it is, however, commonly rejected and its vowel given to the antecedent consonant, ^^5 for I'^ba , lian for "''^ban ; in like manner the preterite 3 fern., which in these verbs retains the primary characteristic n, , § 86. 3, ii% for n^b!| , to which is further appended the softened ending n ^ , thus nnba , in pause nnba , a. The n^ of the 3 fem. pret. is frequently explained as a second fem- inine ending added after the first had lost its significance in the popular consciousness. It might, perhaps with equal propriety, he regarded as paragogically appended, §61.6, comp. such nouns as nnsvij';, fiH^iS , Finals, in order to produce a softer termination and one more conlbrmed to that which obtains in the generality of verbs. Nordheimer's explanation of the n as hardened from n, nnia for nnia, labours under the double difficulty that there is neither proof nor probability for the assumption that the consonant n could be exchanged for n , and that fi in the preterite of these verbs is not a radical nor even a consonant, but simply the represen- tative of the vowel a. 2. Before personal endings beginning with a consonant the third radical "^ remains but is softened to a vowel, so that in the Kal preterite it quiesces in Hhirik, in the Pual and Hophal preterites in Tsere, in the Niphal, Piel, Hiphil, and Hithpael preterites in either Hhirik or Tsere, and in the futures and imperatives of all the species in Seghol, tr'^ , S. Forms not augmented by personal endings lose their final vowel before suffixes, e. g. ""S^a , Tiba from n'ia , '7\by from 'ri^ii'! , i\)yn from tipsn . The preterite 3 fem. takes its simple form, e. g. innba or in^a , and in pause ^nba . ^170. The Lamedh He verbs will be represented by nSa to uncover, reveal, which is used in all the species. Paradigm OF Lamedh EAL. NIPHAL. PIEL. Peet. 3 m. n35 nbai nba' 3/. 2/. T : IT T • T nhbai n^b'as n^b'ai nnba T ; • n"^a n"ba Ic. -n^b5 "Ji^b'aa "n"ba Plur. 3 c. ^3a T : • tiba 2 m. Dh^br. Dh"b53 nf^"ba 2/. 'ih^ba 1 V ■ : l-b^^f? Ic. iirba ■ T ^T% Infin. ^J«oZ. rrba nba2 nba Constr. • nib's niban T • niba Fnr. 3 m. -br nb'a" nba" 3/. nban nb'an nb'an 2w. nban nban V T • nb'an 2/. "ban "ban ' "ban Ic ri-iax nb'ai< nbas P^Mr. 3 m. •^T ^ba" ^ba" 3/. nrban nrb'an n:"ban 2ot. iiban ^ban iiban 2/. ra^ban nrb'an n3"b'an Ic. nba? nbas V T ^^l^ Impee. 2 TO. n'3a niiiM nba 2/. ^?a "ban "3a Plur. 2 m. ^ba 6an iba 2/ nrba nrb'an T V T • nrb'a T V — Part. Act. nba nb'aa Pass. r m 198 He Verbs. PUAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAET.. T : • nb^M T : T nhban ^i^. n^b'jH n^ban f\''2'SriM r^^ ri^y^n ri^bjn m^b'snn ^^^% ^n^HjH ■n^b'sn "tT'^arn ^ ^5:3n &n ^Hzttn D^-bsn cijh^bsn Dh'-banri 1^'^? ^r^? tirb'^n !i3^bbn (n-Ha) (nib'-in) (n'lrarn) •^.V?■! -b':^ n.V?ri nb'^n nb':in nb'arn nsjn nb^n fi^fP nb'ariFi ^>'?n "bjn ^b'sn ^b'ann n3?S nb'js ">'?? nb'anN ^"iT ^br ^b3^ : T — : ■ nr^pn- ns^bbn -r^?i? ni^b'ann T V — : • ii!55n iiiJjn ^brin ^^jarn inrVan riD^Ssn ™'?vP) ns^b'ann !^S? ^ ••■•r nb'an? nb':n nVann. wanting -b'sn wanting ^b'anri • — : ■ ii^arin nrb'nn T :• : - ns'^bam nb'M V : T nb'ari?j 199 200 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 71, 172 SHOETKNED FUTTJEB AND IMPERATIVE. § 171. 1. The final vowel n.. is rejected from the futures when apocopated or when preceded by Vav conversive. The concurrence of final consonants thence resulting in the Kal and Hiphil is commonly relieved by inserting an unaccented Seghol between them, § 61. 2, to which the preceding Pat- tahh is assimilated in the Hiphil, § 63. 2. «, the Hhirik of the Kal either remaining unchanged or being lengthened to Tsere in the simple syllable. KAL. NIPHAL. PIEL. Hipmu HITHPAEL. Future. ^i^^"! n'^a-^ niv V ! ^ "|af?? Apoo. Fnt. ^5^ or bail ^^ ^3? ba-i ■ ban? Vav. Conv. b?^T <>■• ^ib H^^i W^T ^S'T bansi 2. The final vowel n .. is sometimes rejected from the im- perative in the Piel, Hiphil, and Hithpael species, e. g. Pi. ba for r\%, Hiph. ban for nb.;^n, Hith. bann for ri|anri. Remakks on Lamedh He Verbs. §172. 1. Kal preterite : The third person feminine rarply occurs with the simple ending n, , nibs Lev. 25 : 21, nin 2 Kin. 9 : 37 K'thibh ; so in the Hiphil, inKbn Ezek. 24 : 12, ni'in Lev. 26 : 31, and Hophal, nyjrt Jer. 13 : 19. Yodh is occasionally retained before asyllabic affixes, n^bn Ps. 57 : 2, the only instance in which the feminine has the ending usual in other verbs, ron Deut. 32 : 37, !|ia; Ps. 73 : 2 K'ri ; so in the imperative, iiinx, rra Isa. 21:12; future, "ii^B:? , ','\^)?') , ?\'n;;, 'fl'-^^T]''. . ■,i^ntt:'' , ■("•^sa^ ,1^''=!^'?; V,a"??, l';^^ ''^l^^ 'i';nN?,Nipharpreterite"rK:, Vlel future, ll'iB-iFi, iia'jos^, Hiphil future, ",l'-'ari", imperative, ^^hn forViisn. 2. Infinitive: Vav is someUmes written for the final vowel of the infini- tive absolute instead of rt lis Tsa iin, -inn, "ina, itus, -iin, iiti, -iriaj. and m a tew instances the femmme termination is added, mix, mxi, ninia. There are also examples of the omission of this termination from the construct infinitive, nio? and iia?. , nsp,, nxi, irittj; once it has the form nisn Ezek. 28 : 17. " 3. Future : There are a very few examples of Tsere as the last vowel of the future, fiinn Dan. 1 : 13, nibsn Josh. 7 : 9, fi'issi Josh. 9 : 24, >n::nFi Jer. 17: 17^ so in the Piel, nbsn Lev. 18:7 AT.; and", on the other §173 REMARKS ON LAMEDH HE VERBS. ' 201 hand, there is one instance of an imperative ending in Seghol, viz., the Piel, ng'i Judg. 9 : 29. The radical •> remains and rests in Hhirik in i3Tril (3 fern.) Jer. 3 : 6, in the Hiphil, TiaB (2 masc.) Jer. 18 : 23, and in the Kal imperative, '':n (2 masc.) Isa. 26 : 20, Yodh appears once as a consonant before a suffix, "'J^n^^p Job 3 : 25, and once before n paragogic, n^anx Ps. 77 : 4, which is very rare in these verbs, but perhaps displaces ttie final vowel in ni'u5s Ps. 119 : 117,and the Hithpael, nsind? Isa. 41: 23. In a few instances "^ is restored as a quiescent before suffixes, ^r»ni Hos. 6:2, iJign l Kin. 20:35, iaiS5^-Ps. 140:10K'ri, ayxSK Deut. 32:26. Examples of the feminine plural: nrsan , ti:i:nn, rnr.m , nrSsm, nj-issn and Pis3?n. 4. The future of a few verbs when apocopated or preceded by Vav con- versive simply drops its last vowel, either retaining Hhirik under the per- sonal prefix or lengthening it to Tsere, PiD^i , airi^i , "ja^i , V)'^'\ , ato|| , Bdjv; so in the Pe Nun forms, 1^1 and W, a|; , and Pe Yodh ':ii*il , with Pattahh-furtive under the first radical of the Pe guttural, ^n*;, §17. , or the vowel of the personal prefix changed to Pattahh, §60. 1, riK^l, S<1»1 but K^.l; , X'liil • Most commonly Seghol is inserted between the concur- ring consonants, la.'Ji, '1=':, bl^, ni»i, ia^ and isn, y-a«], "B^i and 'ispn, ^'^h; "ii^^Ji "'i;'!'!!) 1J'I?'T3) ^TlVand a'Jtjiij'i^'i'fi, V'?.i\'I!i s*'!!!) ^k^"^, ^^^fi or Pattahh if one of the consonants is a guttural, §61. 2; thus, in Ayin gut- tural verbs, SB«n, n=Fii, S'l'i , rnn, in Pe guttural ",n'|ii from r\hn^, §60. 1. a. (3), "in'^ from fT^i^lJ , or with the additional change of the vowel of the prefix to Pattahh, inni , inn from njnBjyn^i from fisn;; , ^rri] , as?1 Isa. 59: 17 (in 1 Sam. 15:19, 14:32 K'ri, this same form is from aw or aij;, §157. 3), i?^5 , ';s'»l, iar^i. The rejection of the final vowel takes place frequently even in the first person singular, which in other verbs is commonly exempt from shortening, §99. 3. a, "lEXT. K^SJ and rtxixv B^iki, inM, bss«v •jsiti, bsiki and nibssi. In a few instances the final vowel is retained in other persons after Vav conversive, e. g. fiii;?,!;!! 1 Kin. 16 : 25, n.:S*1 2 Kin. 1 : 10, nb«] Josh. 19 : 50. nsani 1 Sam. 1 : 9, "^?^5 ^ Kin. 16:17, iij;-!*] 1 Sam. 17: 42, fris^l 2 Kin. 6: 23, ■'rn Deut. 32*7 18 is fut. apoc. of n^id as Ti'; or •'h'^ ofh^rj. 5. The passive participle drops the final "^ in IBS Job 15 : 22 for ""IBS, !|ibs Job 41:25 for "'Slibs, and fern. plur. nilB3 Isa.' 3:16 K'thibh (K'ri ni''B3), miias l Sam. 25': 18 K'thibh. § 173. 1. In the Niphal preterite Yodh may quiesce in either Tsere or Hhirik, though the former is more frequent, H"'^? and "'n'^js; , ri"'^53 and !i3i^S3 . cnsKS and W-'aas , "in'^^E3, and ^''^ss . 2. .Examples of the infinitive absolute : !TSm , nJ3'i3 ,^^5^1 . Construct : nS^jn and rri^j? , niian , nixnn and nsinn ; with suffixes, inton , ihiiasn , once as though it were a plural noun, DD''ni'ljn Ezek, 6:8, so the Kal infin., T)'^n'i33 Ezek. 16: 31, once with a preposition, rissb Ex. 10: 3. 3. Future apocopated and with Vav conversive: bsn, nbsni, nexj, ynn, irsn, x^)"], "{s'l, and in one verb with Pattahh before n, na«1 Gen. 7:23, Ps. 109: 13, though some editions omit the Daghesh-forte in tiie former passage, thus making it a Kal future. 202 ETYMOLOGY. §174,175 § 174. 1. Piel : Two verbs, HNJ to be becoming and nna to draw (the bow), having a guttural for their second radical, double the third instead, which in the reduplication appears as Vav, though the general law is ad- hered to requiring its rejection from the end of the word and the substiUi- tion of the vowel letter fl . The only forms which occur are, of the former, the preterite n'lSS Ps. 93:5, 1iX3 Cant. 1:10, Isa. 52:7, and of the latter the participle plur. constr. ""intSTa Gen. 21 : 16. There are three examples of Hholem inserted after the first radical, §92. 6, Ti'lSIKJ Isa. 10: 13 from fifatu, the U being an orthographic equivalent for D, §3. 1. a, and in the infinitive, iah, inn Isa. 59: 13. 2. In the first person singular of the Piel preterite ^ sometimes quiesces in Tsere; in all the other persons, however, and even in the first singu- lar, when a suffix is added, it invariably quiesces in Hhirik, Ti^'ba and T!''!? , ■'niipj , once "'n^'ip , in-'^s and TiiSs , sj^'nife^ , cinifcs . 3. Infinitive absolute: ri^g and n?5, n^S, n{33 , nb, iah, inh . The construct always ends in ni with the exception of nSg also nibs , and i3n Hos. 6i.9. 4. Future: in TO'^s? Isa. 16 : 9 from fT'i , the second radical is doubled lengthened to Kamets, in";! 1 Sam. 21:14; so in pause, : bm Prov. 25 : 9. 5. The imperative has Seghol in a single instance, MaT Judg. 9 : 29 and sometimes drops its final vowel ba , in , la , 03 , is ahd rijs . 6. Pual infinitive construct with suffix : ini39 Ps. 132:1. §175. 1. Hiphil preterite: The prefixed Pr has occasionally Seghol, ri^iT} and nHan, riAri, fl^sn, nx-in, ^jinix-in. Yodh may quiesce in Hhirik or Tsere, Tj-'^ri, ^D"'^?'?, ^''^.]h, T^'^H ■ Yodh once remains as a quiescent in the 3 masc. sing., i|!nn Isa. 53: 10, and once in the 3 masc. plur., liDsn Josh. 14:8 for roan , '§62. 2. 2. The infinitive absolute has Kamets in "la"!!! by way of distinction from na'if] and n?'in Jer. 42:2, which are always used adverbially. Construct: The prefixed tn has Hhirik in one instance, nis;?n Lev. 14 : 43 ; nirib 2 Kin. 19: 25 K'lhibh is for miuirils . 3. The future, when apocopated or preceded by Vav conversive, some- times simply rejects its final vowel, PS'i , N'ljii, :i-i;;, psJ'^, -li'l from nn;, pi from nj;, ay from no;, T];; from n'ij; commonly, however, Seghol is inserted between the concurring consonants, bx'T from fl5x, §111.2. a, bay, ij';:], S'3^.\ ■'««], iB^i,a-!%i, onri, or Pattahh if one of the consonants is a guttural, "^nf], napi, ir»i , sn^i . Occasionally the final vowel remains, fiis^l i Kin. 16:17. 18:42, i^3"ini Ezek. 23:19-, once the radical "i appears quiescing in Hhirik, Tian (2 masc. apoc. for nan) Jer. 18:23. The retention or rejection of the vowel is optional in the first person singular, na-nsi , fijsBKJ , nisHJ and Tfi) from nb;, bsxi, BK from nb3. ' " . " ' $ 176, 177 REMARKS ON LAMEDH HE VERBS. 203 4. The imperative is sometimes abbreviated, nk-in and S^ti , nb^n and q"jn , bsn for nJJJ.n , nbn and an , nisn and Tin ; sin (accent on the ultimate) Ps. 39:14 is for nscti, the same word Isa. 6 : 9 is from »5tB, § 140. 5. 5. Hophal infinitive absolute : trjiBn Lev. 19:20. §176. 1. Hithpael: One verb nniD reduplicates its third radical, which appears as 1, n'jnnajn to worship, fat. nnnftia^ with Vav conv. !inr]ii;'».i for inn'.:;!'!, §61^ 2, piur- li"^?!!:*] , infin.' rl'ipinan , and once with suf. ''^^3n|?'J|\! 2 Kin. 5:18, the accent being thrown back by a following monosyllable. For the inflected participle, nn"'innBJa Ezek. 8:16, see S90, page 120. 2. In the preterite '' mostly quiesces in Tsere in the first person singu- lar, and in Hhirik in the other persons, "'n-'lispn, "'n'^'innton, n-i^nnicn, envnnun, niisnn, niBinn, n^'nann, nisnujn. 3. The future apocopated and with Vav conversive : isn*!! , ^k^^l , 'innPi, isni, J'nnsi, sni^Jn, or with Kamets in the accented syllable, 1^f;ib , 1-jfJP , so always in pause, inn*! , : t)3rni Gen. 24 : 65. 4. The shortened imperative: lann, tnrn. § 177. 1. n^n io be, Put. fi^.n|^ , Hhirik being retained before the guttural under the influence of the following Yodh, whence the Sh'va, though vocal, remains simple ; so in the inf const, with prep, ril^na, fli^■75J, ni'ina, though without a prefix it is ni^n, once fi^T^ Ezek. 21: 15. The apoco- pated future ''ni (in pause ''ff^) and with Vav conversive "'n^'t, is ibr •jnii , the vowel of the prefix returning to the Sh'va from which it arose, §85. 2. a (1), page 116, when the quiescence of the middle radical gives a vowel to the first. The same thing occurs in the peculiar form of the future 8«*in7 Eccl. 11 : 3, where the second radical appears as 1, which it sometimes does in the imperative, n|;n and nih Gen. 27 : 29 or Kin Job 37:6, and in the participle n'in Neh. 6'-6, Eccl. 2:22, fem. n;in Ex. 9:3. 2. il^n to live. The root i''n is usually inflected as a Lamedh He verb pret. n^^, fut. n^in^, apoc. "'ti'^, with Vav conversive "'n'Jl, though in the preterite 3 masc. it occasionally takes an Ayin doubled form, "'n, e. g. Gen. 3: 22, 5: 5, and once in the 3 fem. an Ayin Yodh form : rv^n Ex. 1 : 16) or it may be explained as an Ayin doubled form with Daghesh-forte omitted, §25. 3. In a few instances N is substituted for the third radical in Lamedh He v^rbs, iPKSn Ezek. 43:27, Nnsj Isa. 21:12, Nib; Jer. 23:39, N'in'i 2 Chron. 26 : 15, iih Prov. 1 : 10 from ni;!< , XP*1 Deut. 33 : 21 from nPN ' »]?n?.5 2 Chron. 16:12, Wffi'^ Lam. 4:1, K|12J 2 Kin. 25:29, N3l3';i Eccl. 8:l',"'c!ixbn 2 Sam. 21:^12 K'ri for aiSn, Dixilbn Hos. 11:7, Deut.' 28:66 for Di'iilinj §56. 4, D^xniBn, !|.«l3inS{ , nHsn 1 Kin. 17 : 14 for riisp) , nnp'i Dan. 10 : 14 for nnps'i ; and the full Lamedh Aleph form is adopted in N'^he;: Hos. 13 : 15 for n'lS'; . 204 etymology. §178,179 Doubly Imperfect Verbs. § 178. Verbs which have two weak letters in the root, oi which are so constituted as to belong to two different classes of imperfect verbs, commonly exhibit the pecuharities of both, unless they interfere with or limit one another. Thus, a verb which is both «s and n"b wiU follow the analogy of both paradigms, the former in its initial and the latter in its second syllable. But in verbs which are both I'i? and His the 1 is invariably treated as a perfect consonant, and the n is peculiarities alone preserved. AU such cases have been re- marked upon individually under the several classes of verbs to which they respectively belong. Defective Verbs. §179. 1. It has been seen in repeated instances in the foregoing pages that verbs belonging to one class of imper- fect verbs may occasionally adopt forms from another and closely related class. Thus a s'b verb may appear with a rib form, or an I'y verb with an 'S'S form or vice versa. The occurrence of an individual example, or of a few examples of such divergent forms, may be explained in the manner just suggested without the assiimption of an additional verb as their source. Sometimes, however, the number of diver- gent forms is so considerable, or the divergence itself so wide, that it is simpler to assume two co-existent roots of the same signification, and differing only in the weak letter which they contain, than to refer all to a single root. a. Thus, sbs means to shut up or restrain, and n^3 to he finished,! yet a few fii forms occur in the sense not of Ihe latter but of the former verb. They are accordingly held to be from K^3, but assimilated in inflec- tion to the nb paradigm. On the other hand, Nn;5 means to caZi, and Pini5 to meet; but so many xb forms are found with this latter significa- tion that it seems necessary to assume a second root K"ip having that ^180 QUADRILITERAL VERBS, 205 meaning. The verb to run is ordinarily 'j'ri ; but it'ik'i Elzelc. 1: 14 is too remote from an IS form to be referred to that root ; hence it is traced to another verb xsn of the same sense. No clear line of distinction can be drawn between the cases in which divergent forms are to be traced to a singl* root, and those in whicii the assumption of a second is admissible or necessary. This must be decided in detail, and the best authorities nol inii-equently differ in their judgment of particular examples. 2. Where two verbs exist which are thus radically con- nected and identical in signification, it not infrequently hap- pens that they are defective or mutually supplementary, that is to say, that one of them is in usage restricted to certain parts or species, the remainder being supphed by the other. a. The following are exiimi)les of defective verbs : 211: to be good, used in the Kal species only in the preterite, the corresponding future is from -^7 ; ^^^ Kal pret. to fear, the fut. and imper. from ili ; p'l^ Kal pret. and inf. to spit, fut. from ppT ; yti Kal pret. and inf to break or disperse, fut. and imp. from ytti ; ypj Kal pret. to be alienated, fut. from S"]?^ ; fTib K. pret. to be a prince, fut. from ^I'u ; si'n Kal pret. and inf to be many, fut. from n"} which is used throughout the species; Dn^ Kal fut. to be hot, pret. and inf. from can , which is also used in the future ; ys'^ to counsel, borrows its Kal imper. (i-om y>\S ; yfelj Kal fut. to awake, pret. from the Hiphil of yijii, which is also used in inf imper. and fut.; 3S3 to place, the reflexive is expressed by ^S^nH from 3S^ ; nnia to drink, the causative is npan from npiij; UJ^iin from laii is used as the causative of dia to be ashamed, as well as l^'^ari ; Ti?" to go, derives many of its forms from 7^1 ; rri'i to give, is only used in the Kal imperative, it is supplemented by 'fhi of totally distinct radicals. QUADRILITERAL VeEBS. §180. Quadrihteral verbs are either primitives formed from quadrihteral roots, whose origin is explained, § 68, a, or denominatives, the formative letter of the noun or adjective being admitted into the stem along with the three origmal radicals. The former class adopt the vowels and inflections of the Piel and Pual species, while the latter follow the Hiphil. a. ,The only examples of quadriliteral verbs are the following, viz. : Piel pret. "lii;"iS he spread. Job 26 : 9, where the original Pattahh of the initial syllable of the Piel, §82. 5. b (3), is preserved; fut. with suf njsO';?': *« 206 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 181 shall waste it, Ps. 80 : 14. Pual pret. lUDBT it freshened, Job 33 : 25, the Methegh and the Hhateph Pattahh being used to indicate that the Sh'va is vocal, and tha* the form is equivalent to iDEa"! ; part. &BOHa scaled off or resembling' scales, Ex. 16: 14, ^^1^0 clothed, 1 Chron. 15:27. Hiphil pret. in'^Jmn they stank, Isa. 19:6'tbr -"iniSTSin as riaSJ for I'iaS?, de- rived from nilK putrescent, which is simpler than to make it with Gesenius a double or anomalous Hiphil from nst , §94. a, comp. Alexander in loc; fut. nbixaiax I will turn to the left, Gen. 13 : 9; ib-'itaiBn Isa. 30 : 21, part. D''J5S{aiaa l Chron. 12 : 2 from hiUhvi the left hand, elsewhere reduced to a triiiteral by the rejection ofx, ^'^»Oti^ 2 Sam. 14:19, liia'yUn Ezek. 21 : 21. To these may be added the form, which occurs several times in the K'thibh Diissna 1 Chron. 15 : 24, etc., and Bi-insna 2 Chron. 5 : 12, for which the K'ri substitutes n''nsna or O^nsna . As it is a denomina- tive from fins'sn a trumpet, it has been suspected that the form first men- tioned should be pointed 0"'"ia'sria ; the other, if a genuine reading, is probably to be read D^nnsna . Nouns. THEIE FOEMATION. §181. Nouns, embracing adjectives and participles as well as substantives, may be primitive, i. e. formed directly from their ultimate roots, or derivative, i. e. formed from pre- existing words. Those which are derived from verbs are called verbals; those which are derived from nouns are called denominatives. The vast multiplicity of objects to which names were to be applied and the diversity of aspects under which they are capable of being contemplated, have led to a variety in the constitution of nouns greatly exceeding that of verbs, and also to considerable laxity in the significa- tions attached to individual forms. But whatever complexity may beset the details of this subject, its main outlines are sufficiently plain. AU nouns are, in respect to their forma- tion, reducible to certain leading types or classes of forms, each having a primary arid proper import of its own. The derivation of nouns, as of the verbal species, from their respective roots and themes calls into requisition all the expe- dients, whether of internal or external changes, known to the language, ^ 69. Hence arise four classes of nouns accowiing as they are formed by internal chjtnges, viz. : § 182, 183 FORMATION OF NOUNS, 207 1. The introduction of one or more vowels. 2. The reduplication of one or more of the letters of the root. Or by external changes, viz. : 3. The prefixing of vowels or consonants at the begin- ning of the root. 4. The affixing of vowels or consonants at the end. a. The mass of nouns are to be regarded as primitives and not as de- rived from their cognate verbs. Many roots are represented by nouns alone, without any verbs from which they could have sprung, e. g. 3!< father, 'J^'^st earth. And where verbs of kindred meaning do exist, it is probable that they are not the source or theme of the nouns, but that both spring alike directly from their common root, as '^ba to reign, and T\>'0 king from the root "^bis . Since, however, these roots or elemental themes are destitute of vowels, and consequently are incapable of being pronounced in their primitive or abstract state, it is customary and con- venient in referring to them to name the verb which though a derivative form has the advantage of simplicity and regularity of structure, and is often the best representative of the radical signification. Accordingly, T\>'0 king may be said to be derived from the root T[?'0 to reign, that is, it is derived from the root "jba of which that verbal form is the conven- tional designation, §68. 6. Infinitives, participles, nouns which follow the forms of the secondary or derived species, § 187. 2. a, and some others, are evidently verbals. Most nouns of the fourth class, as well as some others, are denominatives. Class I. — Nouns formed ty the insertion of vowels. §182. The first class of nouns, or those which are formed by means of vowels given to the root, embraces three distinct forms, viz. : 1. Monosyllables, or those in which the trihteral root receives but one vowel. 2. Dissyllables, in which the second is the principal vowel and the first a pretonic Kamets or Tsere. 3. Dissyllables, in which the first is the principal vowel and the second a mutable Kamets or Tsere. 1. Triliteral Monosyllables. §183. The formative vowel may be given either to the second radical >'J13 , b-ii?]? , l:it2i: , biisj? , or to the first, btjj? , 208 ETYMOLOGY. § X84 ^^fe?, r'tpp; in the latter case an unaceented Seghol is com- monly interposed between the concurring consonants, ^61. 2, to which a preceding Pattahh is assimilated, §63. 2. a, ^'ofi , b"j^ , bap . Forms thus augmented by the introduction of an auxiliary vowel are termed Segholates. I a. In this and the following sections iap is vised as a representative root in order more conveniently to indicate to the eye the formation of the different classes of nouns. No root could be selected which would afford examples in actual use of the entire series of derivative forms; bap has but one derivative bap slaughter, and this only occurs in Obad. ver. 9. b. As i, 6. and it rarely or never occur in mixed accented syllables, § 19, they are excluded from monosyllabic nouns. Every other vowel is, how- ever, found with the second radical, thus a, BSO a little prop, paucity, 1132^ honey, '^SS man; a, b'^^' strength, snB writing, iNia residue j e, D3e3 shoulder, njo bvshj e, iB^ howling, 5i*3 grief, SXt a wolf; especially?, 0, and u, which occur with greater frequency than any others. When the first radical receives the vowel, i and ft are likevfise excluded, inasmuch as they rarely or never stanjl before concurrent consonants, §61. 4. Few of these nouns remain without the auxiliary Seghol N'^S a valley, Nvij vanity. Nan sin, flTJ spikenard, aiap truth. Kamels is only found belbre Vav, §63. 2. a, nia,' and in pause, §65, irs, nng. c. When the second radical receives the vowel, there is a concurrence of consonants at the beginning of the word, which is sometimes relieved by prefixing K, §53. 1. a, with a short vowel, mostly e, §60. 1. a (5), but occasionally (i, s'z3!< finger for 53S, 23UX lattice, B.33N belt, Si'i^X and Sl'-iT arm, iiferis and biapi yesterday. §184. These nouns, standing at the first remove from the root, express as nearly as possible its simple idea either abstractly, e. g. biHs emptiness, biati bereavement, TiW strength, p'lS righteousness, "iTi? help, ^"(i greatness, or as it is realized in some person or object which may be regarded as its embodiment or representative, l''ia lord from 135 to be mighty, TOiDS man from 1»3» to be sick, biia boundary, ^I?? libation -^yo^. pouring out, pia? valley p]!'op. depth, fan vine- gar prop, sourness. a. That the position of the formative vowel before or after the second radical does not materially affect the character of the form, appears from the following considerations: (1.) The sameness of signification already exhibited, and which may be verified in detail. (2.) The occasional ap- pearance of the same word in both forms, e. g. lia and "i35 man, saj §185 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 209 and sb; plant, xb^ and .S'^jS? prison, 'fni and '|il73 thumb, Pi:'3 and nni;? brightness. (3.) The concurrence of both forms in the Kal construct inli- nitive VJjs and ny-jps, §87, ■'St:j5 and BsijaiS . (4.) The fact that Segho- lates may arise alike from iisis and ^B|?, §61. 1.6. (5.) The cognate languages ; monosyllables in Arabic, whose vowel precedes the second radi- cal, answer to those whose vowel succeeds the same radical in Aramasan, and both to the Hebrew Segholates, e. g. 135 servant, Aram. Has , Arab. 6 awrf ■'S rooZs. In Segholates 1 is preceded by Kamets b"» (accord- ing to Kimchi ilS in Ezelc. 28 : 18) wickedness, ".in midst, unless the last radical is a guttural, nin space; "^ is preceded by Pattahh and followed byHhirik, b';^ night, "|";s ei/e. These letters frequently give up their con- sonantal character and become quiescent, §57. 2. Vav is rejected in a few words as "'B brand for "'13 , ^N island for "'^X , "'"] watering for ''I'l , § 53. 3. nb roots. In a very few instances the proper final radical is rejected, as it is in verbs, and the final vowel written n, as riSD bush, 033 weep- ing, nan thought. When "^ appears as the radical, it prefers the form ■■aa weeping, -"^l^ fruit, ""^B vessel; 1 retains its consonantal character in ino winter, ibia quail, or it may be changed to its cognate 'vowel U, which combines with the preceding a to form o, §62. 1, T^'!) (for d'yau) ink, isn antelope. In Segholates 1 quiesoes in Shurek, §57.2. (4), inb swimming for into, sina emptiness; the lexicon of Gesenius contains the forms Tia garment, "ixp. e?ic/, ibttj security, but these words only occur in the plural or with suflixes, and the absolute singular is quite as likely to have been >na, isf;, iibu. 2. 7%e J»am bom^Z in the ultimate. §185. 1. The second form of this class is a dissyllable vdth one of the long vowels in the second which is its prin- 14 210 ETYMOLOGY. §185 cipal syllable, and in the first a pretonic Kamets, for which Tsere is occasionally substituted when the second vowel is Kamets, thus bb]? or btjj? , bbj? , bib|? , bibjs , bibj? . 2. These are properly adjectives, and have for the most part an intransitive signification when the vowel of the ultimate is «, e, or u, and a passive signification when it is i or u, •jb)? and "i'bj? small, ^^"^/al, ©inj made of brass, 'T'ha chosen. Those with a and i in the ultimate are, however, prevailingly and the others occasionally used as substantives, and designate objects distinguished by the quality which they primarily denote, Y)"l herbs prop, r/reen, lii? strong drink prop, intoxicating, "ibs leopard prop, spotted, Sl"'i2i and C11522 turban prop, wound around, Tii? glory, that which is glorious. a. The intransitive adjectives supply the place of Kal active partici- ples to neuter verbs, §90, and in IS verbs they have superseded the regu- lar formation, § 153. 1, cjis for Difj . Kal passive participles are verbals with u. This formation with I in the ultimate is adopted in several names of seasons. 3"'28< Abib, the time of ears of corn, t^'DS ingathering prop. the being gathered, i^S3 vintage, 'I'^hl pruning-time, 10''^n ploughing- time, "i"'Si5 harvest, Comp. § 201. 1. 5. b. Adjectives with o commonly express permanent qualities, those with e variable ones, biia great, b'la growing great ; pjn strong, pTn be- coming strong ; 31^15 near, anp approaching; pini remote, pnT receding. Hence the former are used of those physical and moral conditions which are fi.xed and constant, such as figure, colour, character, etc., T)"iS long, h'j.'S round, paS deep, nha high ; c'is red, I'la spotted, ip3 speckled, pin; green, ip3 striped, n'ris white, p'"iiu bay, itii^J black; pina sweet, lina pure, iciilj holy. And the latter are employed of shifting and evanescent states of body and of mind, Nas thirsty, ZS"^ hungry, Szv: sated, C|?; weary, i:st grieving, ysn desiring, ^"^T^ fearing, Jbs exulting. c. The active signification asserted for the form iiafj in a few instances cannot be certainly established; i^ip^ or vitp"^ fowler, is intransitive in Hebrew conception as is shown by the construction of the corresponding verb, comp. Lat. aucupari, aucupatus. Other alleged cases are probably not nouns but absolute infinitives of Kal, 'pna Jer. 6 : 27 may as well be rendered 1 have set thee to try as for a trier (of metals) ; Tian Isa. 1 : 17 is not oppressor nor oppressed but wrong-doing, to dSiKtiv, see Alexander in loc. ; and even pitlJS Jer. 22 : 3 may in like manner be oppression instead of oppressor. d. n? roots are restricted to forms with i, in which the radical ■• quiesces, in'J /resA, ^:s affiicted, '■'^'i^ or K''p3 with otiant N, §16. ],/)«« ^186 FORMATION OP NOUNS. 211 or with a which combines with it to form e, n . , I'lto and frniu Jield, ns'; fair, nxa high; in a few nouns this final vowel is dropped, V^jish for ni'n , IP. mark for fiin , ys tree for niss , ",3 sore for nia , nfe mow^A for n';;s , unless, indeed, these and the like are to be regarded as primitive bilit- erals. Vav, as a final radical, may be preceded by a, 13S meek, or e, iSlo secure. 3. 77ie mam vowel in the penult. ^186. 1. The third form, of this class is a dissyllable having an immutable vowel, mostly Hholem, though occa- sionally Shurek or Tsere in the first, which is its principal syllable, and a mutable Kamets or Tsere in the second, thus buip, bbip, bbip, ba^p, btj^p. 2. These indicate the agent, and are either active par- ticiples, bpip hilliing, or substantives, Ohin signet-ring prop. sealer, sHs enemy, one practising hostility; ^byt- fox prop. digger, f|^''| hammer prop, pounder, b?'^!!)5£) seeing prop, (having eyes) wide open, yh% righteous, Tiaa miglity man, "i^sn full of grace, Q'ltiT merciful. jiuuii» vvitii tt 111 LUC tecuuiiu Kyiiauie are uesuripLive oi occupaiions 01 modes of life, comp. §186. 2. a, iSN husbandman, i'^'^ Jishe/inan, ^^"^ judge ilj'in (= B-'^n) workman, naa cook, nfea seaman (from fiVna salt), bic a. As a general though not an invariable rule, the first syllable has Pattahh when a pure vowel a, i, or fi stands in the ultimate, but Hhirik when the ultimate has one of the diphthongal vowels e or o. Several nouns with a in the second syllable are descriptive of occupations or bearer of burdens, I'S hunter, rii'p bowman. Uti thief, not a mere equiva- lent to 2315 one who steals, but one who steals habitually, who makes steal- ing his occupation. b. Since the idea of intensity easily passes into that of excess, the form bap is applied to deformities and defects, physical or moral, c|x dumb, )ki hump-backed, la'iri (=:\r'|in) deaf, "iSs blind, tlBS lame, rn\3 bald, 'iJibs perverse. c. In a few instances instead of doubling the second radical, the pre- vious Hhirik is prolonged, §59. a, laiap and laiaip nettle prop, badly pricking, ■na-'p snoke, niniu the Nile prop, very black, pi'rs prison, Ti-1^3 spark, -nil? battle, I'li"'? spark. d. The following double the third radical in place of the second, nri"iD brood, -ij?! green, IJX/J quiet, ni.s; comely from ns;, the last radical appearing as 1 , s 169. bbae*. feeble, where the long Vowel Tsere is in- serted to prevent the concurrence of consonants. e. SS and more rarely n"s roots reduplicate the biliteral formed by their contraction, babs and babs wheel prop, roller, nnnn frightful, l"'nT girt, ijjnp crownofihe head prop, dividing (the hair) ; so fern, nbnbn severepain, hbaba casting down, nbaba skull, and plur. ni^obD baskets, csis turning § 188 FORMATION OP NOUNS. 213 upside do-wn from filS = lis, nixbills (sing. "'Bib) loops and w'^^h (sing, probably nblb = iSib) winding stairs from nib = lib ; a root bli! is need- lessly assumed by Gesenius. Sometimes the harsh concurrence of con- sonants is prevented by the insertion of a long vowel, bibx (const, bsbs) cymbal prop, tinkling, li-iS and "liiiS stark naked, totally destitute, bjjbp despicable, or the softening of the former of the two consonants to a vovi^el, j57. 1, :3i3 star for 3333, nisaia bands worn on the forehead for niBBBB , "(ib)?"^ (with the ending "p added) ignominy for "(ilii^bp , b33 Babylon for bsba, or its assimilation to the succeeding' consonant, '^23 something circular, a circuit for "I3'i3. The second member of the redu- plication suffers contraction or change in niania chain for rrilli'iD and ^blli floor for ife-ii; . 2. Abstracts are formed with a doubled middle radical by giving ■« to the second syllable and i to the first, pin folding the hands, nijj'ic retribution, fi)?® abomination, and in the plural C'lBS atonement, D^i^pB commandments, D"'ni^iB a. These may be regarded as verbals formed from the Piel. A like formation is in a few instances based upon other species, e. g. Hiphil ~1Rn melting {com T\b^ , niiBfJ cessation from the is root MS, Niphal taibiinss wrestlings ; D"ia>in3 when derived from the Niphal means repentings, when from the Piel consolations. c. S3 roots reduplicate the biliteral to which they are contracted, ifrin inflammation, ci'iiirej delight. c. A few roots, which are either 12 or S guttural, or have a liquid for their third letter, double the last radical with u in the final syllable, ]"ISS3 thorn-hedge, iinxQ (=nin!<.B) ruddy glow, C'n'nan upright cohtmns designed for way-marks, nnlissj horror, Ci"'B1BS.3 adulteries, dsasa ridges, also with or i in the last syllable, nrT'J acquiescence, bbri3_ pasture, 11'nlt? shower, "'"'■'las obscuration, ii"iBl!J (K'thibh "n^BCJ) tapestry, ^"'^^n whence ''b'^bsn dark. The concurrence of consonants is relieved in b>ibaUJ (in some editions) snail by Daghesh-forte separative. §188. A few words reduplicate the two last radicals. These may express intensity in general, tiip"ni?B; complete opening, n«B"ns^ very beautiful, or more particularly repeti- tion, ^BDSn twisted prop, turning again and again, pr'p^t! slippery, ^j?^)?? crooked, \>'Tbt]'^ perverse, 510505? mixed multi- tude prop, gathered here and there, ninanan spots or stripes, rinS'isn moles prop, incessant diggers. As energy is con- sumed by repeated acts or exhibitions and so gradually 214 ETYMOLOGY. §189,190 weakened, this form becomes a diminutive when applied to adjectives of colour, Di^l'5 reddish, p'bl?'^!' greenish, iri^fio blackish. a. The first of two concurring consonants is softened to a vowel in nnssn trumpet for Irisnan , and probably Kl"!?, Lev. 16 : 8 lor ijil?. . 6. ■'B roots drop their initial radical, 0''3f;3h gifts from zh"^, E-^NSSi offspring, issue from- KS^ . Class III. — Nouns formed hy prefixes. §189. The third class of nouns is formed by prefixing either a vowel or a consonant to the root. In the following instances the vowel a is prefixed with a in the ultimate to form adjectives of an intensive signification, 2T3S utterly de- ceitful., i'tss violent, irpi^ ( = ]n^5«) perennial, nSTS (only represented by a derivative, § 94. a) very foul, fetid, 'J'ats exceedingly gross or thick (applied to darkness, Isa. 59 : 10), or verbal nouns borrowing their meaning from the HiphU species, nnsTX memorial, "ins declaration. a. This form corresponds with Axsl the Arabic comparative or super- lative. Its adoption for Hiphil derivatives corroborates the suggestion, §82. 5. h (2), respecting the formation of the Hiphil species and the origin of its causal idea. 6. The letter X is merely the bearer of the initial vowel and has no significance of its own in these forms; fi is substituted for it in ^'O (=i>i'^i«) palace., temple prop, very capacious fi'om Vi;^ in the sense of its cognate bis to contain. So, likewise, in a few verbals with feminine ter- minations, Wsaiaf^ Ezek. 24 : 26 pausing to hear used for the Hiph. infin., §128, nSah deliverance from bsJ, finjn grant of rest (= nhi:n) from mi. ' c. The short vowel prefixed with ^ to monosyllables of the first species, as explained § 183. c, has no effect upon the meaning, and does not properly enter into the constitution of the Ibrra. §190. The consonants prefixed in the formation of nouns are 'a , n , and "' . They are sometimes prefixed without a vowel, the stem letters constituting a dissyllable of them- selves, i5C)j5'a , ^'ica , !:^3P\ , nii?SP\ ; more commonly they receive a or * followed by a long vowel in the ultimate, e. g. §191 FORMATION OF NOUNS. 215 a. Pattahh commonly stands before e, I, and S, and Hhirik before a and 0, unless the first radical is a guttural or an assimilated Nun, when Pattahb is again preferred, isx?? food, SB7? planting, "liia'a saw, oann a species of bird, B'lsn]; a kind of gem. Seghol is occasionally employed before a guttural or liquid followed by a, §63.1.6, "'f?'?^ deplhyi'S'm chariot, nTijj^a pair of tongs. These rules are not invariable, however, as will appe'ar from such forms as naiB , ')'3p73 , nspTD , iiiipbi: , rjipiaa . A few words have d in the ultimate, nVna harp, psna strangling. The inser- tion of Daghesh-forte separative in the first radical is exceptional, 1^71^'? Ex. 15 : 17, o-iV-iaa Job 9 : 18, ninaaa Joel 1:17. 6. ■'B mots. The first radical appears as ^ resting in Hhirik or Tsere, "li'j'^a and "li^""? rectitude, iTii^n neiv wine, "la'^ri south, or as l resting in Hholeni or Shurek, 1?ia appointed time, "p!ia correction, SlTin sojourner, ilJin sorrow. In a few instances it is rejected, Viila world, or assimilated to the following radical, J"2a bed, S^a knowledge. '.3 and ■'S roois. The root is reduced to a monosyllabic biliteral by the quiescence or rejection of the second radical, the prefix receiving Sh'va, isa citadel, Dha sound place, mViFi ocean, filp^ living thing, or more commonly a pretonio Kamets or Tsere, lixa luminary, 'J'na , '\y)'Q and l^a strife, yiia race, a""*!; adversary. The feminine form is almost always adopted after T\ , nsiCJn salvation, nwt'n oblation. SS roots. The root is mostly contracted to a biliteral and the vowel compressed to a, a, e or 0, §61. 4, the prefix sometimes receiving Sh'va whicii gives rise to a Segholate form, §61. 1. 6, D3a tribute for Osa, laTa bitterness for laa, ian defilement for bsn, Tp.a year for Tpa, "inpi mas< for 1"lPi ; more frequently it receives a pretonic Kamets or Tsere, T)pa covering, 'iJa shield, tisa fortress, isa anguish. In piEa running, the short vowel of the perfect root is preserved by means of Daghesh-fbrte in the first radical, n is almost always followed by the feminine ending, nbriB folly, ninn beginning, nbsn prayer. fi"b roots. The ultimate has n. , fvrm disease, f^s^a pasture, which is apocopated in a few words, bsa lifting up, 'b'Sjn higher part, "jsa and 1?^ 0)1 accoMJii q/J and always disappears before the feminine ending n^ , 562. 2. c, fibsa ascent, maa commandment, ti'pn Aope, fixbn weariless. Before the feminine termination n the final radical appears as quie^^/ent "' or 1 , rTi3"in) interest, risTtj whoredom, Hiann encamping, riis'na pasture. Yodh is retained as a consonant after 0, ni^bna diseases. , §191. The letter a is a fragment of the pronoun "''n who or fresh oil prop, that {which) shines. §193 FORMATION OP NOUNS. 217 2. n , probably the same with the prefix of the 3 fern, future of verbs, which is here used in a neuter sense, is em- ployed in the formation of a few concrete nouns, in^n oak prop, that {wJiich) endures, iT^'^r^ cloak prop, thqt {wJdch) wraps up, lisn furnace prop, that {which) burns, n^Sn apple prop, that {which) exhales fragrance. But it more frequently appears in abstract terms like the feminine ending in other forms, I^Pi understanding, I^SttPi bitterness, S'lijn delight. It is very rarely found in designations of persons, and only when they occupy a relation of dependence and subordina- tion, and may consequently be viewed as things, "Vr^'^ learner, SiBin one dwelling on another's lands, tenant, vassal. I a. The great majority of nouns with n prefixed have likewise a feminine ending, na^'iri deej) sleep, fisliri salvation, ITikSFl beauty, nia-iB fraud. Class IV. — Nouns formed ly affixes. §193. The nouns formed by means of an affixed letter or vowel are chiefly denominatives. The consonant 1 ap- pended by means of the vowel b, or'less frequently a, forms 1. Adjectives, li^nx lasthova. "lf^^? after, 'iiffiSiy^rsHrom CST head, 'i'ii"'ri middle from Xh midst, IPiiBfi? brazen from nish; brass. A very few are formed directly from the root, "ji''?N poor, li'"'b? most high, "i^bs widowed. 2. Abstract substantives, the most common form of which is Ti^EJp , e. g. linj? blindness, ,lin!?3 confidence, Tii=|? pain, 'jip'n,!! paleness, though various other forms likewise occur, e. g. Ti^?^ and 173^ destruction, '|'iT'i& dominion, in©? success, 'ja'^l' offering. a. In a few words the termination 'i has been thought to be intensive, P2a sabbath, vnaia a great sabbath, IT proud. 'i'i'i"'.1 exceedingly proud, and once diminutive Bis inan, "'iiJ'X little man, i. e. the pupil of the eye, so called .from the image reflected in it. The word ■I'lffl^ Jeshurun from lis; upright, is by some explained as a diminutive or term of endearment, while others think that the termination ll has no further meaning than to, make of the word a proper name, comp. "(iSaj . See Alexander on Isaiah 44 : 2. 218 ETYMOLOGY. § 194, 195 6. "I is occasionally affixed with the vowel e, 'jns are, 'j'iBS nail. c. A few words are formed by appending D, e. g. ni—is and ')i"JQ ran- som, D^O ladder from Wo to lift up, CB-in sacred scribe from a'ln stylus, nn^ soMiA from Ti^ to shin^ ; or b , e. g. ba^a garden from nns rine- j^orrf, bsna calyx or cup of a flower from ?"'ij cap, ibnp anWe from S;;;?. joint, bj-in ZocMSf from 5'in indicative of tremulous motion, is'is thick darkness from r|"''ns ciowd, ina irora probably from t^a to pierce. §194. The vowel ''. forms adjectives indicating relation or derivation. 1. It is added to proper names to denote nationality or family descent, "'^^? Hebrew, "'pii!' Jehusite, ''riTB^f PJiilistine, iB'iK Aramean, "h'^l^ Egyptian, "'5*?'ii0? Israelitish, an Israel- ite, ■'3'^ Danite, "''hnjp Kohathite, "^Ji^-ia GersJionite. 2. It is also added to other substantives, ''Jiss northerner, "'^^^ foreigner, "'Hb villager, "'piT footman, ''PSS timely, ''P''?S e;?Ker from the plural D'^is ; to a few adjectives, "''!iT3S and "IT3S violent', "'^^s and ^"^"y^. foolish, and even to prepositions, ipinn /oMJesHrom nnn, ■'?Bb/ro;^;f from ibsb + \ , §62.2. (7. The feminine ending n^ is dropped before this ending, '^■11^7 J^'^ from iTiiin^, ''S"'"i3 Beiiite from nyina, or the old ending n^ takes its place, '^n3?.a Maachathile from nssa , or 3 is inserted between the vowels, ijbm Shelanile from nbio. Final "' . combines with the appended "'. into I, § 62. 2, ''''^h Levite and Lewi, iJld Shunife and Shuni. b. In a very few instances "i. takes the place of "^ . , e. g. '•yn while stuffs, ■'■iW basket, 'h'h /oop, and perhaps ""Jliin, in a collective sense windows, "'EWn. uncovered, ''^■'3 which Gesenius derives from bsj and takes to mean cunning ; ifj however, it is derived from nVs , § 187. 1. c, and means spendthrift, the final Yodh will be a radical. MXTLTILITERALS. §195. 1. Quadriliteral nouns are for the most part evenly divided into two syllables, a'i|3? scorpion, "laT? treas- urer, ownn sickle, 'ITOba barren. Sometimes the second rad- ical receives a vowel, tliat of the first radical being either rejected, p'OB'7 damask, ^W frost, "li^D vine blossom, or pre- served by the insertion of Daghesh-forte, ©"'aln fint, ©"'is? §196 GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 219 spider, ©sIs? and ©abiB concubine. Occasionally the third radical has Daghesh-forte, qlu? bat, yhiojn. 3. Words of five or more letters are of rare occurrence and appear to be chiefly of foreign origin, 'Jtta'ii? purple, ^t"??^ /roy, T?tp?i? clot/i, T^Piisns mule, 'jsn'nffinx sairap. 3. Compound words are few and of doubtful character, '^!!^'?¥ shadow of death, (Tarsia anything prop, what and what, naiba nothing prop. n6 what, i?!l^2i worthlessness prop, no profit, n^bss'a darkness of Jehovah, Thr\^Xpi: flame of Jeho- vah, except in proper names, p'li'isba MelcMzedek, king of righteousness, I'TJ'i?^ Obadiah, serving Jehovah, B'^pl'ini jg. hoiakim, Jehovah shall establish. Gender and Number. §196. There are in Hebrew, as in the other Semitic languages, but two genders, the masculine ("i?t) and the feminine (ni)33). The masculine, as the primary form, has no characteristic termination ; the feminine ends in fi, or fi , e. g. 55t:p masc, tiSisj? or riboj? fern. a. The only trace of the neuter in Hebrew is in the interrogative, fia ■MiAai being used of things as "'a te/io of persons. The function assigned to tlie neuter in other languages is divided between the masculine and the feminine, being principally committed to the latter. b. The original feminine ending in nouns as in verbs, §85. 1. a (1), ap- pears to have been n, which was either attached directly to the word, nba'p which, by §61. 2, becomes fiba'p, or added by means of the vowel a. nSa'p or n^Bp, which by the rejection of the consonant from the end of the word, §55. 2. c, becomes fiiJa'p. The termination n or n is still found in a very few words, np^a emerald, nxj? pelican, rrSU company 2 Kin. 9 : 17, nnPia morrow, nia portion, ri;? end, nisa Josh. 13 : 13, and the poetic forms, nnat song, nSn3 inheritance, fi"^!' help, nn's fruitful, nii2J sleep. Two other words, n;n Ps. 74:19 and In3i;3 Ps. 61:1, have been cited as additional examples, but these are in the construct state, which always preserves the original n final ; it is likewise always re- tained before suffixes and paragogic lettei-s, §61. 6. a, ?]nSTi2'J, nnsW^i, in"'n. c. The feminine ending n^ receives the accent and is thus readily dis- 220 ETYMOLOGY. § 197 tinguished from the unaccented paragogic n^ . In a few instances gram- marians have suspected that forms may perhaps he feminine, though the punctuators have decided otherwise hy placing the accent on the penult, e. g. rrnja hurtling Hos. 7 : 4, n^''l'a Galilee 2 Kin. 15 : 29, fTiBp destruction Ezeic. 7 : 25, nan'J vulture Deut. 14 : 17, fibblH Zow Ezek. 21:31. d. The vowel letter x, which is the usual sign of the feminine in Chaldee and Syriao, takes the place of n in xcj'n threshing Jer. 50 : 11, Nan terror Isa. 19: 17, Kan wrath Dan. 11 :44, n;=V liotiess Ezek. 19:2, N^Ba warfc Lam. 3 : 12,' K^a bitter Ruth 1 : 20, xn";;5 baldness Ezek. 27 : 31, Stild sZeep Ps. 127 : 2. No such form is found in the Pentateuch unless it he xnj loathing Num. 11:20, where, however, as Evvald sug- gests, X may be a radical since it is easy to assume a root S'lJ cognate to • ^11. The feminine ending in pronouns of tlie second and tliird persons, and in verbal futures is e "^ . ; an intermediate form in e appears in nijit Isa. 59 ; 5 and nnbs the numeral ten, or rather teen, as it only occurs in num- bers compounded with the units. For like unusual forms in verbs see §86. 6. and §156. 4. e. The sign of the feminine in the Indo-European languages is a final vowel, corresponding to the vowel-ending in Hebrew; the Latin has a, the Greek a or rj, the Sanskrit t. And inasmuch as the feminine in Hebrew covers, in part at least, the territory of the neuter, its consonantal ending n may be compared with t, the sign of the neuter in certain Sanskrit pro- nouns, represented by d in Latin, id, illud, istud, quid; in English it, what, that. This distinctive neuter sign has, however, been largely super- seded in Indo-European tongues by m or v, which is properly the sign of the accusative, bonum, KaXov, the passivity of the personal object being allied to the lifeless non-personality of the neuter, Bopp Vergleich. Gramm. §152. In curious coincidence with this, the Hebrew sign of the definite object is nx prefixed to nouns; and its principal consonant is affixed to form the inferior gender, the neuter being comprehended in the feminine. §197. It is obvious that this transfer to all existing things, and even to abstract ideas, of the distinction of sex found in living beings, must often be purely arbitrary. Por although some things have marked characteristics or associa- tions in virtue of which they might readily be classed with a particular sex, a far greater number hold an indeterminate position, and might with quite as much or quite as little reason be assigned to either. It hence happens that there is no general rule other than usage for the gender of Hebrew words, and that there is a great want of uniformity in usage itself. §197 GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 221 a. The following names of females are without the proper distinctive feminine termination : nx mother.- linx she-ass. BJjlp'^B concubine. i>}ia queen. So the names of double members of the body, whether of men or ani- mals, which are feminine with rare exceptions : •|!tJ!t ear. sasx finger. ■jni thumb. T)'^3 knee. STiT arm. 1"' hand. rp; thigh. tlJB wing. C|3 palm. 5|n3 shoulder. iisn foot, •(a tooth. nx brazier. "lilirx footstep. nit? iceZZ. ■jBa fteZty. 31 n sword. The following nouns are also feminine : bis cup. ty_ Great Bear, ins light. •133 circuit. 'zrys couch. vi'S. side. R5b brightness. nt^S workmanship. Kii"i myriad. 'bsi shoe. tiB morsel. bin world. 6. The following nouns are of doubtful gender, being sometimes con- strued as masculine and sometimes as feminine. Those which are com- monly masculine are distinguished thus (*) ; those which are commonly feminine are distinguished thus (f). t 'j5S stone. Tj"!!^ way. * iS2a fortress. t ''5? '*"'"? {repe- * nix light. *b3'^r! temple. * H3la altar. tition). * 'jiBil multitude. fi.?ri.a camp. "|iss north. "liST beard. * naa rod. ■psn window. * oipa place. isn court. niljnj brass, bzv jubilee. -f viti soul. in^ peg-. f nbb_^oMr. * nia3 glory. 3S cloud. ig pai7. * CS people. * 013 vineyard, f ^^? fitwie. nx S2g-n. ■jinx arA-. nix /jaiW1 the being saved from Sltu^ , Vils-'bB ^Wjce from b^bs judge. The following nouns, descriptive of the station or func- tions of a particular class, follow this form, 7\>'k king, nsiiba kingly office or sway, X-iis prophet, nifWs prophecy, •^'ra priest, njns priesthood or priestly duty, bzr\ merchant, nbsT traffic. §198 GENDER AND NUMBER OP NOTJNS. 223 (3) The feminine ending occasionally gives an abstract signification to reduplicated forms, 1W blind, n^.^.? blindness, naa having a bald fore- head, nnaa baldness in front. Nan sinner, rstisn and nkan sin, nfi^a terror, nosp scoffing; fiJHin anguish, or to those which have a prefixed letter a, nisno overthrow, nbirra dominion, ifhm'o confusion, or particu- larly n, njsiian salvation, trnflsn testimony, fiifsn Ao^je, nijbFi weariness. (4) It is likewise added to forms in "i,, n^bilsB judgment, !n>'p''hy work- ing, n^iaxn beginning, ri^nnst end, n'^'ixid remnant, the termination M being often found in place of n"'., n-^iaBn 2 Chron. 26:21 K'ri, iTiffiSn K'thibh. disease prop, freedom from duty, "'lUsn _/ree, W^ibsn redness, i3''b3n rerf, nuni-ia bitterness, i-i^-ia bitter, Th'SS heaviness, rva-chtu • [- ' -I ..r** .\ '^ I * - - widowhood, and occasionally ni , ma^n wisdom, nissin ybZi^, though the latter may perhaps be a plural as it is explained by Gesenius. Ewald suggests a connection between the final ">_ of the relative adjective, which thus passes into 1 and even to i in this abstract formation, and the old construct ending ^. and i. The further suggestion is here offered that both may not improbably be derived from the pronoun Ksin, which was originally of common gender, §71. a (3). Thus, |''^5«"in';n Gen. 1:24 beast of earth is equivalent to 7'iK Kin njn beast viz. that of earth, and p1S"'i3ba (which may be for isba as the plural ending D^. for M, §199. e), is equivalent to p'ls Kin T|^a king viz. that of righteousness. The ap- pended pronominal vowel thus became indicative of the genitive relation; and its employment in adjectives, involving this relation, is but an exten- sion of this same use,,''ix"iia7 of or belonging to Israel, hraelitish. The further addition of the feminine ending in its abstract sense, has mostly preserved the vowel from that attenuation to i which it has experienced at the end of the word, comp. §101. 1. a. niijabs widowhood prop, the state of a widow "(abs , niasn wisdom prop, the quality belonging to the wise Dsri. The rare instances in which tlie termination ni is superimposed upon 1. viz.: nsi'i'iTSX , n>i'aaip, may belong to a time when the origin of the ending was no longer retained in the popular consciousness. The termination ni_ or Pil in abstracts derived from fib roots is of a different origin from that just explained and must not be confounded with it; "^ or l is there the final radical softened to a vowel, §168, as rT'S'd or niab cap- tivity from nilO to lead captive. b. In Arabic, nouns of unity, or those which designate an individual, are often formed by appending the feminine termination to masculines which have a generic or collective signification. This has been thought to be the case in a hw words iti Hebrew, "^ilA fleet, fij?*? ship, "isb J>^ii', iTis'25 a hair, _3i> swarm, mi'^'n a bee. c. Some names of inanimate objects are formed from those of ani- mated beings or parts of living bodies, which they werb conceived to resemble, by means of the feminine ending, taken in a neuter sense, CN mother, rvBtA metropolis, "^"y^, thigh, ns'^^ hinder part, extremity, i\'S palm of the hand, fibs palm-branch, nsa forehead, nnsa greave, ng mouth, n^B edge. 224 ETYMOLOGY. § 199 §199. There are three numbers in Hebrew, the singular (TH: lifcb), dual (D^?« liisb), and plural (D-'in ■jilcb). The plural of masculine nouns is formed by adding D''. , or de- fectively written D . , to the singular, Oi6 horse, D'lpiD horses, pi'Hs righteous {man), t3''p'''ia or Dp^S righteous {men). The plural of feminine nouns is formed by the addition of tii , also written ri', the feminine ending of the singular, if it has one, being dropped as superfluous, since the plural ter- mination of itself distinguishes the gender, ois cup, MM cuj)s, n^ina virgin, ni^ina and ti'b^na virgins, nssn sin, nisan sins; in two instances the vowel-letter 8 takes the place of 1 , §11. 1. a, nsnjj Ezek. 31 : 8, nsaa Ezek. 47 : 11. a. The masculine plural sometimes has "p. instead of Q^., e. g. "pjia oftener than Qipa in the book of Job, V=^'? Prov. 31 : 3, T'sn 2 Kin. 11 : is, "pb Mic. 3:12, raiaiiri Lam. 1:4, 'phW Kzek. 4:9, "iiaf Dan. 12:13. This ending, which is the common one in Chaldee, is chiefly found in poetry or in the later books of the Bible. 6. Some grammarians have contended for the existence of a few plurals in "^ without the final D, but the instances alleged are capable of another and more satisfactory explanation. Thus, "'"iB 2 Kin. 11:4, "'n^B, Tfaa 2 Sam. 8: 18, "'iJ'l'a 2 Sam. 23:8, and ''sn 1 Sam. 20: 38 K'thibli (K'ri D^sn), are singulars used collectively; "iB? 2 Sam. 22:44, Ps. 144:2, Lam. 3 : 14, and 'V!sr\ Cant. 8 : 2, are in the singular with the suffix of the first person ; "'Sa Ps. 45 : 9 is not for csa stringed instruments, but is the poetic form of the preposition '{Qfron; ■'^^S^ Ps. 22:17 is not for nins piercing, but is the noun """IS;, with the preposition 3 like the lion, §156. 3. c. There are also a few words which have been regarded as plurals in ^ . But "itn Zech. U : 5 and inia Judg. 5 : 15, are plurals with the suffix of the first person. In ; Min 2 Chron. 33 : 19, which is probably a proper name, and '^?a Am. 7: 1, Nah. 3: 17, which is a singular used collectively, final ■< is a radical as in "''ib = rrib . ; "inin Isa. 19 : 9 is a singular with the formative ending ^_, §194.6; "'sibn Jer. 22: 14 and "is^bn Isa. 20:4, might be e.xplained in the same way, though Ewald prefers to regard the former as an abbreviated dual lor D^sifen double (i. e, large and showyy windows, and the latter as a construct plural for "'Sliun , the diphthongal i being resolved into ay, comp. §57. 2 (5). in; Ezek, 13: 18 is probably a " dual for O^n;, though it might be for the unabridged singular nnv which, however, never occurs. The divine name I'n'i: 4imig-/id. •nis bundle. iip roice. i"'P waW. *m'ni s^r-tiei. pini chain. CIS name. IBIBJ trumpet. n!U pillar. * Dinn deep. 6. The following feminine nouns form their plural by adding fi'^. : those marked thus (f) are sometimes masculine : t "(SS stone. t Tjii way. nbst terebinth. n'n Zaw. ri!i3abx widowhood. Mn'al branch. fwv. woman. rina cooZ. 1 135 vine. nba'n fig-cake. niiai 6ee. nisi whoredom. nan wheat. nsisrj darkness. fl31^ doBe. 1 13 pitcher. nsB3 speii. njsb brick. fiba word. T • fixp measure. ts she-goat. 1^5 clVi/. ttJsfes concubine. nh-mflax. riB morsel. bhi «Aeep. nisia barley. nbaia ear of com. nailj acacia. Also E"is''3 eg-g'S which is not found in the singular. c. The following nouns form their plural by adding either C or Hi: MABCULINE NOTTNS. D^'iK porch. ■■is; Kora. I'i':! generation. n2T sacrifice. ■jTiBT memorial. Oi^ day. is^ forest. li'3 ?ayer. 1153 Aarp. ihb heart. biM tower. loia foundation. iDia 6ond. a'^ia sea<. pita 6oii)?. iBOa Mai7. "(IS a delicacy. '{"yS/O fountain. S3isa 6ed. "(3Ba dwelling. Iil3 river. C)D basin. "(is iniquity. aps Aeei. FEMININE NOTJNS. na"'X terror. filB"'2J!t grape-cake, bsi sAoe. nsbx «Ae' of rivers, i. e. the Tigris and Euphrates viewed in combination. 4. The numerals D'^ilC two, D'^^M double, B'?!]"'? two hun- dred, D^i^s tivo thousand, 'OVfsr) two mgriads, D'??]?^© seven- fold, D?!!?^? of two sorts. 5. A few abstracts, in which it expresses intensity, D?n^:?? double-slothfulness, vh'yo double-rebellion, D?^na double-light, i. e. noon, D!'P?iBn double-wiclcedness. a. Names of objects occurring in pairs take the dual form even when a higher number than two is spoken of, D-^ilEn i^SkJ 1 Sam. 2 : 13 the three teeth, 6':e53 sa-is Ezek. 1 : 6 four wings, d-BW 'tb Isa. 6 : 2 six wings, 230 ETYMOLOGY. § 204, 205 niJiS fiyauJ Zech. 3 : 9 seven eyes, B'^B'na-^si D'rijn'i? all 'Ae hands and all knees Ezek. 7 : 17. Several names of double organs of the human or animal body have a plural form likewise, which is used of artificial imita- tions or of inanimate objects, to which these names are applied by a figure of speech, § 198. c, n'^3^5 horns, nii^i? horns of the altar, D'^EJS wings, ms:3 extremities, D'JEnb shoulders, riiBns shoulder-pieces of a gai-ment, Cii/S eyes, nirs fountains, n'^^an /ee«, D"'i'J") ib boards, o^nhb double boarding of a ship, O'JpHnj name of a town in Judah, Josh. 15 :' 36. c. The words o'^h water and D^aia heaven have the appearance of dual forms, and might possibly be so explained by the conception of the element of water as existing in two localities, viz. under and above the firmament, Gen. 1 : 7, and heaven as consisting of two hemispheres. They are, however, commonly regarded as plurals, and compared with such plural forms in Chaldee as ■|';;a Dan. 5:9 from the singular Kia. In d'^Btot; Jerusalem, or as it is commonly written without the Yodh nbi'l^7 1 the final Mem is not a dual ending but a radical, and the pronunciation is simply prolonged from Dbdin^ , comp. Gen. 14 : 18, Ps. 76 : 3, though in this assimilation to a dual form some have suspected an allusion to the current division into the upper and the lower city. § 204. It remains to consider the changes in the nouns themselves, which result from attaching to them the various endings for gender and number that have now been recited. These depend upon the structure of the nouns, that is to say, upon the character of their letters and syllables, and are gov- erned by the laws of Hebrew orthography already unfolded. These endings may be divided into two classes, viz. : 1. The feminine n , which, consisting of a single con- sonant, causes no removal of the accent and produces changes in the ultimate only. 2. The feminine r.^ , the plural D"i. and f"ii, and the dual Q\ , which remove the accent to their own initial vowel, and may occasion changes in both the ultimate and the penult. § 205. Nouns which terminate in a vowel undergo no change on receiving the feminine characteristic n , ''is™ § 206 GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 231 Moabite, tT'isia Moabitess, n^sS'a Jindin(/ fem. nssb, mn sinner, tisbn sin, § 198. Nouns which terminate in a con- sonant experience a compression of their final syllable, which, upon the addition of fi , ends in two consonants instead of one, ^6G. 2, and an auxiliary Seghol is introduced to relieve the harshness of the combination, §61. 2. In consequence of this the vowel of the ultimate is changed from a or cJ to c, §63. 2. a, from e or f to c, or in a few words to E, and from o or M to o, §61. 4. "laos broken fem. fi"j|i!J:, D^B'is reddish fem. nia'^tt'jN , ?f'?n (j/oinff fem. re^h , liia master, nnaa mistress, UJian Jive fem. noiari , ©■'S man, riffis woman, § 214. 1. 3, yisj scattered fem. misi , nicinj and nigns brass. When the fi,nal consonant is a guttural, there is the usual substitution of Pattahh for Seghol, ?Mi2J hearing fem. n?ai» , T^i'a touching fem. reaa . a. In many cases the feminine is formed indifferently by H or by fi^ ; in otliers usage inclines in favor of one or of the other ending, though no absolute rule can be given upon the subject. It may be said, however, that adjectives in "i. almost always receive n; active participles, except those of S3, 1" and Mb verbs, oftener take n than n^ ; n is also found, though less fi-equently, with the passive participles except that of Kal, from which it is excluded. 6. A final ■! , 1 or n is sometimes assimilated to the feminine charac- teristic n and contracted with it, §54, 03 for r33 daughter, Tvm for ri:nH gift, nax for psrx truth, nnx for nnns one, rn&i ] Kin. 1 : 15 for nnnaa ministering, nnua Mai. 1 : 14 for nnrj'ra corrupt, nana for nnirja pan. The changes of the ultimate vowel are due to its compres- sion before concurring consonants. c. The vowel u remains in nalicn Lev. 5 : 21 deposit, and the proper name nrnan Tanhumeth. From nx brother, t.n father-in-law are formed ninx sister, nian mother-in-law, the radical 1, which has been dropped from the, masculine, retaining its place before the sign of the feminine, comp. §101. 1. a; ns^B? difficult Deut. 30: 11 is for ns^EJ from KysJ. §206. The changes which result from appending the feminine termination n, , the pkiral terminations Qi and fii , and the dual termination D';'. , are of three sorts, viz. : 1. Those which take place in the ultimate, when it is a mixed syllable. 232 ETYMOLOGY. § 207 2. Those which take place in the ultimate, when it is a simple syllable. 3. Those which take place in the penult. § 207. When the ultimate is a mixed syllable bearing the accent, it is affected as follows, viz. : 1 . Tsere remaias unchanged, if the word is a monosylla- ble or the preceding vowel is Kamets, otherwise it is rejected; other vowels suffer no change, ni? dead fern, "h'a , pi. D'^lhig ; ltl thi(/h du. ^^yyi, o!?iV complete fern. !"«!?i», pi. n"'^!?©, f. pi. niiab» ; l(yn going fem. nibh , pi. niibn , f. pi. niibii . a. The rejection of Tsere is due to the tendency to abbreviate words which are increased by additions at the end, §66. 1. It is only retained as a pretonic vowel, §64. 2, when the word is otherwise sufficiently abbre- viated, or its rejection would shorten the word unduly. Tsere is retained contrary to the rule by cui^id, n^ys") children of I he third and fourth generations, by a few exceptional forms, e.g. nx2 Jer. 3:8, 11, nbsrs Ex. 23 : 26, nnab Cant. 1 : 6, fiaailU Isa. 54 : 1. and frequently with the pause accents, §65, e. g. fi^^i^ Isa. 21 : 3, C^sriD Lam. 1 : 16, sniaaia Isa. 49:8, casax Ex. 28:40, b''';5:d Gen. 19 : 11, 2 Kin. 6: 18 (once with Tiphhha), ! C5''d|b5; Isa. 2:20, Q-^D^-iQ Eccles."2:5, ninata Isa. 2 : 4. It also appears in sever.il feminine substantives, both singular and plural, e. g. nbsna overthrow, nissia counsels, nrsipi abomination, fi:si2;a staff. riEiEDa wilch. On the other hand, the following feminines reject it though pre- ceded by Kamets, is; wild-goat, fem. fi^?." , "js; ostrich, fem. fiss^ , Tfy^ thigh, fem. fii'J^. It is also dropped from the plural of the monosyllable "|2 son, and its place supplied by a pretonic Kamets, D'':3 sons, nsS daugh- ters, the singular of the feminine being na for Ji??! §205.6,- so jSta fork pi. nisiia . 6. Kamets in the ultimate is retained as a pretonic vowel, 'fdb white, fem. iibb, pi. C'bsb, f. pi. ni's:^; liziri fortress, pi. ni"is2a and niisaa, only disappearing in a few exceptional cases, isia hair, fem. fi^S'iB, ibia quail, pi. Qiibiu, cnsa pasture, pi. dbnaa once niia-iJa, ninasa and ninasa fords, "133 talent du. c^'ilBS but in pause D7]];33 , "f^J river du. B';'^^^.5 . The Kb participles, X23 prophesying pi. Dii<35 , xaas polluted pi. D"'KaB3 , ssas found pi. n''N2IC3 adopt the vowels of ni forma, § 165. 2 ; but with the pause accents Kamets returns, D"'X33 Ezek. 13:2, i n^Ssa: Ezr. 8:25. The foreign word ia"is suburbs forms its plural irregularly D'^'lllB. c. Hholem and Hhirik commonly suffer no change; but in a few words Shurek takes the place of the former, and in one Tsere is substituted for the latter, § 66. 2 (3), lija terror pi. D-''i«a , liia habitation pi. CiiJwa , pina sweet km. nfima pi. oijijfina, pis distress ihm. !if?1S, "jilsa lodging fem.'njiiba, tsiia /ig-fti fem. nfaisa, niia rest fem. nn«a , -\ii-a foHifica- tion fem. rrisisa , pas deep fem. >i{;!ia3 Prov. 23:27 and riJBas , pinn ^207 GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 233 chain pi. nipinn 1 Kin. 6 : 21 K'ri ; □"'Vb escaped pi. 6''b"'^s or o-^abB fem. nb"'iB or MlsbB . d. Hholera is dropped from the plural of IIBS bird pi. D'^'^BS, as well as from the plural of nouns having the feminine characteristic n in the singular; thus nbabs akull, by the substitution of the plural ending ni for n,, §199, becomes ni^aba, nrs'^na course, pi. nijsbrja , or with Hhateph-Kamets under a doubled letter, §16. 3.6, n!&3 coat pi. niiPjS, rtiiuJ ear of corn, Tg]. n^baiB; in two instances a pretonio Karoets is inserted, nnsa drought pi. ninsa,' nntrics Astarfe -pi. hi-iriuis. e. Seghol in nouns with the feminine characteristic n affixed mostly fol- lows the law of the vowel from which it has sprung, §205; if it has been derived from Tsere it is rejected, if from any other vowel it is still in some instances rejected, though more commonly it reverts to its original form and is retained, n]33ii sucker (from pji"') pi. nip:iii, nnax epistle (from 15N) pi. niias, niixa knife (from tixB) pi. mVsNa, na^anx reddish (from D'5«"i8,) pi. niHiial!*, np.i-'a nurse (from p''jia)pl. rrip'^ra, niajitop scale pi. D^iapiUp and niiapiap. Pattahh, which has arisen from a Seghol so situated under the influence of a guttural, follows the same rule, PISSB n'n^ pi. nisaa, nsis (from Vii) touching -pi r^sa'p. f. A few nouns with quiescents in the ultimate present apparent ex- ceptions, which are, however, readily explained by the contractions which they have undergone. Thus nin for riin, §57.2(5), thorn, has its plural Difii'n or DiniPi; ei'i (d;;) day, pi. ci; (niri";) ; "|i-Ta ("li"!'?) strife, pi. Qiil-ia; liia (lid) ox, pi. e''''i;ia; ll'i Ibr'-ii'n or'niil, §186.2.'c, po«, pi. n-'n!!':! 'or n^'iW, §'208. 3; pw (pTO or pjib) street, pi.' U-p^vi ; l'>b ("I'JS or l^.S) city, pi. once c^"!^?. Judg. 10 : 4 usually contracted to C'lS ; ttJNI CdiT^) head, pi. Bii:5K"i'(n"'li'Ni). So nXD measure becomes in the dual DTiXO for CinNb and fixa one hundred, du. DTsa for DTisa ; nsssa (nsxsa , §57.2(3)), wor/i;, probably had in the absolute plural nisssa , whence the construct is nisxia . 2. The final consonant sometimes receives Daghesli-forte before the added termination, causing the preceding vowel to be shortened from u to a, from e or f to t, and from u or II to ii, §G1. 5. This takes place regularly in nouns which are derived from contracted VV roots, Dn perfect fem. sran , n; sea pi. ^Ml; 13''? (from I'sa) shield, pi. ciaa and tiisSM, fem. !"i35tt ; pri statute pi. n'ljjn , fem. n^n , pi. ni;pn , or in whose final letter two consonants have coalesced, ?|i? for ?12S du. D^'fiS nose; T? for T3? slie-goat^. D"'-7»; n? for tHs time pi. n''f?S' and miPW ; ©"'X for TC;i« man, nm woman, and it not infreqwently occurs in other cases. a. Nouns with Pattahh in the ultimate with few exceptions double their final letter; being either contracted forms, \k weak pi. D'^V^ fem. n|^ pi. 234 ETYMOLOGY. § 207 rife^, or receiving Daghesh-forte conservative in order to preserve the short vowel, BJX pool pi. B''»S?J. ; so 'jSix wheel, Onn myrtle, asa_/ew, nnrn friehlful, P'b|517 greenish, "'iSO desire. Before gutturals Pattahh may- be retained in an intermediate syllable, nV/resA. pi. B''n^, or lengthened to Kamets, §60.4, lli prince pi. ni"iia fem. nVffl ; so nisaiSX _y?ng-era, nraix /bwr, n^sais helmets, ninsa straits and BiNiifl baskets, rsibb foops, TTJ--/ ' "Tl ' •»; *T1 ' J \\ ^ J I which do not occur in the singular, but are commonly referred to "''iW, ■'^ilb, 5194. b, 1 being changed to S as in §208. 3. d; also IB breast, which omits Daghesh du. CliniS . Pattahh is in the fidlowing examples changed to Hhirik before the doubled letter, §58. 2, t3 prey fem. nj3, nn /ear fem. nnn, pa wine-press pi. ripia, 15a garment pi. C^o and 0'''na, Oa tribute, Cib ftasira, nb morsel, "IS sirfe, ia^a wAeeZ, m'feobo baskets, 0''Sp:o palm-branches, a^iia threshing-sledge pi. D^ania or by the resolu- tion of Daghesh-forte, §59. a, DV"iia . It is rejected from is^S cymbal pi. Bilr'sbs, "iT sort pi. Bijt, Bi'na-na, terries, probably from na-JJ and B-ina men, from the obsdiete singular, na . The plural of cs people is D'^ES and in a very few instances with the doubled letter repeated, D^aaS ; so ih mountain pi. B^nn and d'S'in. Deut. 8:9, is shadow pi. B''Sbs , pn statute pi. Bipn, and twice in tlie construct, ""'(5i^H Judg. 5 : 15, Isa. 10: 1, which implies the absolute form B^jbisn . 6. The final letter is doubled after Kamets in the following words be- sides those from s's roots, B^lx porch pi. B^Bbx ; so "(irx hire, baa camel, ',ai time, Ti^l'? darkness, pn"ia distance, IB)? small, "iSSl green, "|3Si!fJ gttiei, 'Jlbi'i Zi/j/, 'JSia coney, to which should perhaps be added 3^p? Deut. 8 : 15 scorpion, though as it has a pause accent in this place which is the only one where it is found with Kamets, its proper form may perhaps have been a-i;?S, §65. The Niphal participle 1233 honored has in the plural both B''"7335 and Bi^ssj . Several other words, which only occur in the plural, are in the lexicons referred to singulars with Kamets in the ulti- mate i but the vowel may, with equal if not greater probability, be sup- ,posed to have been Pattahh. Kamets is shortened to Pattahh before n , which does not admit Daghesh-forte, in the plurals of nx brother pi. DTiS , nn hx)ok, nana confidence, § 60. 4. a. c. The fuliowing nouns with Hholem in the ultimate fall under this rule, in addition to those derived from ss roots, 'fiZlpeak pi. CMaa, ca^n sacred scribe, -S"in band, cssb nation, Bl^S naked, and several adjectives of tiie form -^15, which are mostly written without the vowel-letter 1, § 14. 3, e. g. Bl!} red fem. nilN^ , ■ B^ans^ , B^'x terrible, Tpx long, etc. ; r'BBJK dunghill takes the form niFiQirx in the plural. d. There are only two examples of doubling when the vowel of the ultimate is Shurek, B^'fenri Prov. 24:31 nettles or brambles from il"in, niss-i Esth. 2 : 9 from "'Sixn Kal pass, part of nxn . e. aJ^K (lasx) man is not contracted in the plural B^fax men; in the feminine, for the sake of distinction, the initial weak letter is dropped, B^iaj women, which is used as the plural of niEX woman; B'^ia^X ihen and nffiS women are rare and poetic, nx ploughshare has either E^nst or E'^ns in the plural. §208 GENDER AND NUMBER OF NOUNS. 235 §208. 1. Segholate nouns, or those which have an unac- cented vowel in the ultimate, drop it when any addition is made to them, §66. 2. (1). As this vowel arose from the concurrence of vowelless consonants at the end of the word, the necessity for its presence ceases when that condition no longer exists. Segholates thus revert to their original form of a monosyllable ending in concurrent consonants, §183. 2. Monosyllables of this description receive the feminine ending with no further change than the shortening due to the removal of the accent, in consequence of which 6 becomes u or more rarely u, B becomes i or more rarely c; e may be restored to a from which it has commonly arisen, §183, or like t it may become i or e, DS» (p^y) strength fem. niasy, ©srt (TBSn) fem. twsn freedom, "^^ C?'?^) saying fem. •T^'oi? and fT^ttS , jI^M ( ^"k ) king nsbtt queen, TOO slaughter fem. nhata. a. Nouns having either of the forms fi^ai;, f^^'^Jf?., '^^'?P; '^^^i^, nbap , are consequently to be regarded as sprung from monosyllables with the vowel given to the first radical. 3. Before the plural terminations a pretonic Kamets is inserted, and the original vowel of the monosyllable falls away, tfb'ia ( ^bi? ) king pi. niibtt , nsba queen pi. niib^ , itts (-itii?) saying pi. 'crn:a&, , inntiN id. pi. nina^ , b?a (b?B) work, pi. n-iVys , vfdn sin pi. n-'kan . a. Pretonic Kamets is not admitted by the numerals D''nios twenli/ from lias /era, B-isad seventy from ysia seven, D'^sicn vineti/ from srn nine. The words o'^iaa pistachio-nuts, oii^n ebony, niVsts Job 40:21,22, n^ann mercies, B''5:r?a5 and niajJO sycamores, which do not occur in the singular, have been regarded as examples of a like omission. But there need be no assumption of irregularity if the first is taken with Fiirst from njBa , the second with Gesenius from "ijan , and the others are explained after a like analogy, duadriliteral Segholates also receive pretonic Ka- mets in the plural isis pi. n''.3S33 merchants, unless the new letter creates an additional syllable, in which case the introduction of Karnets would prolong the word too much, l3?Vs concubine pi. O^BjIq , 'J'lBS nail D'^i^BS . 6. The superior tenacity of Hholem, §60. 1. a (4), is shown by the occa- sional retention of o, not only as a compound Sh'va under gutturals, nnii way pi. nin-jx , so Bin month, UJ'jn thicket, "iss sheaf, "i^S fawn ; but as 236 ETYMOLOGY. § 209 Kamets-Hhatuph in IB'ip holiness pi. n^ii'iis and CW'?!', tSib rooi pi. ni'^'ia , § 19. 2, or as a long vowel in inii ^er pi. ninij and ni'^nx for niinx, 131 and sian myriad pi. rrii"), msa-i and nisa-i; the dual D'tnai inserts the sign of the feminine. a. ni'sjn or Hi"':n. Jer. 37 : 16 cells is referred to the assumed singular win ; miaj Isa. 3 :' 16 K'thibh and miBS 1 Sam. 25 : 18 K'thibh are formed from 1tS3 , 1'iJS abbreviated Kal passive participles, § 172. 5, but in the absence of the appropriate vowel points their precise pronunciation cannot be determined. 6. Nouns ending in a quiescent radical K may be regarded as termina- ting in a consonant, since this letter resumes its consonantal power upon an addition being made to the word. Comp. §162. Nsaj found feia nxsa: , k-ib wild ass pi. d'^x'^b . 238 ETYMOLOGY. §210 §210. The changes, which occur in the penult, arise from the disposition to shorten the former part of a word, when its accent has been carried forward by accessions at the end, § 66. 1. They consist in the rejection of Kamets or Tsere, Wia great fem. npil? pi. QilsiTii f. pi. triSi-ia, ni^ word pi. D'n2'7 , fiisT memorial pi. nii'lST , tija winy du. D^ifew, 'y^ restoring pi. 0"'i"'C'a fem. fa"''?''?, i?'i? distress pi. ui\Tq , lib Levite pi. CT'ib , except from nouns in n.. in which the place of the accent is not changed by the addition of the terminations for gender and number, §209. 1, nfc^ beautiful fem. ns;! pi. niE^^ , rrtte Jield pi. niite , nfc^ hard pi. n^iD]?, nil? pi. w^-Q and nw'a ^o?i;e/s, ni; smitten pi. D'^D? . Other penultimate vowels are mostly exempt from change. a. Kamets, which has arisen Irom Pattahh in consequence of the suc- ceeding letter not being able to receive Daghesh-ibrte, as the form properly requires, is incapable of rejection. Such a Kamets is accordingly retained without change before "i, e. g. lann for n'jin, § 187. 1, icorkman pi. D'^ui'jn, so tI3"iQ horseman, Hi?a fugitive, Ci^D (const. 6'''^D) eunuch, 'J'^'iS ierri- hle, y^lS violent, 7I1H diligent, or shortened to Pattahh before n, §60. 1. a (4), "iina young 7nan p\. D^'iiria. Kamets is also retained in certain ss and fib derivatives as a sort of compensation for the reduction of the root by contraction or quiescence, e. g. "iSa shield pi. CSW and m'ba , TWO fortress pi. b"'Jsh , ni):^ branch pi. ni'sb^ , niij comer pi. ni'lT . Other instances of its retention are rare and exceptional, iiJ3 treacherous fem. nnija, red (const, sad) weefc pi. B-'raui and miau: but du. niyaia, a;-'b-c) -warrior pi. CiUJiilB . • T r • • IT 6. When Kamets following a doubled letter is rejected, and Daghesh- forte is omitted in consequence, §25, the antepenultimate vowel is in a few instances changed from Hhirik to Seghol, §61. 5, 'p'^jn wston pi. nij^irn, "(i-iias a tenth pi. D^i'liss , but fAs) memorial pi. niinat . c. Tsere is not rejected if it has arisen from Hhirik before a guttural in a form which properly requires Daghesh-forte, lann for ffi^in, § 187. 1. 6 deafp\. d"'b"in , or if it is commonly represented by '', §14.3, Sj^^S 01 P)B"'3, §186, hammer pi. niobia, or a radical '' quiesces in it, ')n''K or •jDM c. Tsere is not rejected if it has arisen from Hhirik before a guttural in a form which properly requires Daghesh-forte, lann for ffi^in, § 187. 1. 6, or (from "07, i 189) perennial pi. cin'^X or D''3rN, bh'^f] temple pi. B'^Ss'^n and nii'3"'n , oinm-'a and n"''ie|« rectitude, n'^iTi't (from 1!ii or T^l) proud. Other cases are rare and exceptional, e. g. B"<^bBK Neh. 3 : 3i feeble. d. Hholem is almost invariably retained in the penult, yet it yields to the strong tendency to abbreviation in the following trisyllables : rT'^ifllix Ashdoditess pi. ni'-iJBK Neh. 13 : 23 K'ri (K'thibh miTi-iirK), TTiVSS Arti- monitess pi. ni'JBS id. (K'thibh nT'Siar, 1 Kin. 11: 1 ni'Sias), "inis § 211 GENDER AND NUMBER OP NOUNS. 239 Sidonian f. pi. ri^s'is where long Hhirik becomes Tsere before concurrent consonants, §61. 4. e. When the penult is a mixed syllable containing a short vowel, it is ordinarily not subject to change, §58. 2. The tendency to the greatest possible abbreviation is betrayed, however, in a few examples by the re- duction of the diphthongal Seghol to Pattahh, comp. §60. 3. 6, Vsttjs cluster pi. niSbiax Cant. 7 : 8. =fe-ia chariot fem. nsBia pi. nits-na , pfria distance pi. B"'^n-ia and D"'pnna, or of Pattahh to the briefest of the short vowels Hhirik, comp. §207. 2. a, nsstt /wry pi. m'BSiT , i&tTifork pi. niiifa, §190. a, nn^S dish pi. ninbs'by the resolution of Da'ghesh- forte lor nin^S, §59.a; i!is« for 1^^« o«Aer' has in the plural D^"?™; , mnnx. as if from inx , rtm coal has pi. nijJm by §63. 1. §211. In forming the plural of nouns, which have a feminine ending in the singular, the latter must first be omitted before the rules already given are applied. Thus, nib'a'a kingdom by the omission of the feminine ending be- comes ifyq'a , hence, by § 207. l.its plural is tta^rpi ; so niba queen becomes tr'si? , and by § 208. 3. its plural is fiiibp ; ^iV^ epistle becomes las, and by §207.1. its plural is fiiias . "As precisely the same changes result from append- ing the feminine n, and the plural endings, except in the single case of Segholate nouns or monosyllables terminating in concurrent consonants, § 208, nouns in n^ become plural with no further change than that of their termination ; only in the exceptional case referred to a pretonic Kamets must be inserted. Nouns in n , after omitting the feminine end- ing, are liable to the rejection or modification of the vowel of the ultimate in forming the plural, as explained § 207. 1. d. and e. On the other hand, as the dual ending is not substi- tuted for that of the feminine singular, but added to it, no such omission is necessary in applying the rules for the formation of the dual, it being simply necessary to observe that the old ending ri^ takes the place of n^ , §202. Thus nio {T^zia) year, by §210, becomes in the dual n":ti3TC, tbh door, by § 208. 4, du. n-nb^ , ntchs brass du. n:'non3 , a. In the following examples a radical, which has been rejected from the singular, is restored in the plural, nax (for nnax) maid-servant pi. 240 ETYMOLOGY. § 212-214 ninas, n:a (for n^ja from nia) portion pi. nrja and r^ixsa, comp. ^208. 3. d, nsp (for riisp from nsj?) pi. ni'ap; in like manner nVj? co^ Zerag-aes is referred to the assumed singular n33. niiS (nins) governor has in the plural both riiins (const, niins) and rrins . The Constuuct State. §212. When one noun stands in a relation of depend- ence on another, the second or specifying noun is, in occi- dental languages, put in the genitive case ; in Hebrew, on the other hand, the second noun undergoes no change, but the first is put into what is commonly called the construct state ( •ji'ao or tJiaDD sttpjported). A noun which is not so related to a following one is said to be in the absolute state (fT^?'''° cut off). Thus, "li'i word is in the absolute state ; but in the expression tj^ijln ni'^ verbum regis, the word of the king, 13'7 is in the construct state. By the juxtaposition of the two nouns a sort of compound expression is formed, and the speaker hastens forward from the first noun to the second, which is necessary to complete the idea. Hence results the abbreviation, which characterizes the construct state. a. The term absolute state was introduced by Reuchlin; he called the construct the state of regimen. §213. The changes, which take place in the formation of the construct, affect 1. The endings for gender and number. 2. The final syllable of nouns, which are without these endings. 3. The syllable preceding the accent. § 214. The following changes occur in the endings for gender and number, viz. : 1. The feminine ending n, is changed to in_ , nns© handmaid const, nnst); the ending n remains unchanged, triBiB^ observance const, fi'ittir'a . §215 THE CONSTKUCT STATE OF NOUNS. 241 a. The explanation of this appears to be that the construct state re- tains the old consonantal ending n_ , the close connection with the follow- ing noun preserving, it as if in the centre of a compound word, §55. 2. c; whereas in the isolation of the absolute state, the end of the word is more liable to attrition and the consonant falls away. . b. Some nouns in n^ preceded by Kamets adopt a Seeholate form in the construct, nsbaa kingdom const, nsbaa instead of nsiaa, §61. 1. 6, n^rra dominion const. ribvUBa , nixba work const. n=x^a , •iis'ia chariot const, nasia, nnas crown const, triis? , ninb ^ame const, nanb , n-iius ten const, n'lia?., or with the Seghols changed to Pattahhs under the influ- ence of a guttural, nrjBira/amjVy const. riHBisa , nbyy^fcmr const. nsi'^N ; so fiba'n fig-cake const, nbi'n ; nax woman, though it occurs in the abso- lute, Deut 21 : 11, 1 Sam. 28 : 7, Ps. 58 ; 0, is mostly used as the construct of nisx . On the other hand, nan bottle has in the construct nan Gen. 21 : 14 (the accent thrown back by §35. 1) as if from fian. 2. The ending D^. of the mascuhne plural and n;". of the dual are ahke changed to ■•. , die? nations const. ^B? , Q!'?^!? /lorns const. "'S'')? ; ni of the feminine plural suffers no change tiilip voices const. fTi'p , a. The compression of ? to e regularly takes place upon its being fol- lowed by concurrent consonants, §61. 4. This is here suggested as the explanation of the change of vowel in the plural. It results from the close connection of the construct state, which as it were, unites the two words into one compound term ; thus, B"'na houses joined to n"'tj hewn stone would become niTSB'^na, and by the dropping of the nasal, accord- ing to §55. 2. 6, n'^fa "ina houses of hewn stone. Comp. §199. e. In the dual the final nasal is likewise rejected, and ay combines to form the diph- thongal e, 1 57. 2 (5). 6. In a very few instances the vowel ending of the masculine plural construct is added to feminine nouns "'naa (the accent invariably thrown, back by §35. 1), commonly in the K'thibh "'maa const, of niaa high- places, iniUX^na 1 Sam. 26:12; this takes place regularly before suf- fi.Kes, §220.2.' §215. 1. In a mixed final syllable Kamets is commonly shortened to Pattahh : so is Tsere when preceded by Kamets ; other vowels remain without change, 1!) /land const. Til , 3©iH seat const, aoiw, isja necA const. is^2, -jpT o/«? const. I^T , 25? /leart const. 3l? , TiSia mighty man const. Tilali . a. Kamets remains in the construct of cbsix porch, an? writing, 'na gift. :i' cloud (once const, a? Ex. 19:9), Bsns decree and c^ sea, e. g. nban-c^ sea of salt, except in the phrase t)10 c^ sea of weed, i. e. Red Sea; abn 7«/V/t becomes abn, and "lib white "ab Gen. 49 : 12 in the con- struct. 16 242 ETYMOLOGY. ^315 b. Tsere remains in tin Jive const, thn, )\'^ mire const. •,1':, nfc; breathing const, no'; , ajjS Aeei const. 31?S, in the SS derivative "(ia sAteW const, 'ffi and in iix found in several proper names. It is occa- sionally shortened to Seghol before Makkeph in bis mourning const. -b:^., ns /ime const, ns, -ns and -ns, na wowe const. oi5, -biu and "oc; ^3 sore, which in the absolute retains Tsere before Makkeph, Gen. 30: 19, Ezek. 18: 10, has in the construct ',3, -j3 or "2. Tsere is shortened to Pattahh in a few cases not embraced in the rule, viz. : "(i; nesl const. "■|p , h^-a rod const, bisa and i>13a , list Deut. 32 : 28 perishing const, of lis , the Kal participles of Lamedh guttural verbs, §126. 1, and the following nouns with prefixed a in several of which a preceding Pattahh is likewise changed to Hhirik, § 190. a, lisa tithe const, "lisa , IBDO mourning const. "ispa, nnEa key const, nnsa and nrsa, 'J'3'na lair const, "^sna, nna clamour const, nna , ^3ira' matrix const. "i3iaa , nniaa corruption const, nnuia, nsja ai!/ar- const. n3]a. - c. Hholem is shortened to Karaets-Hhatuph before Makkeph in the construct of monosyllables from SS roots, pn statute const, pn and "pn , rarely in other words "b'la Prov. 19 : 19, Ps. 145 : 8, Nah. 1 : 3 (in the last two passages the K'thibh has htii), -nna Job 17 : 10, Prov. 22 : 11, "lasp Ex. 30 : 23. "irbaJ Ex. 21 : 11 ; this becomes Pattahh before the guttural in -p!3a for n35 construct of Pihi high, bs kol construct of Vs all occurs twice, viz. : Ps. 35 : 10, Prov. 19:7, without a Makkeph following, § 19. 2. a; it must not be confounded with bs kal Isa. 40 : 12 he comprehended pret. ofbMB. d. The termination ^_ becomes "'. in the construct, §57.2(5), "^^ enough const. ''M , "n hje const. T\ . e. Three monosyllabic nouns form the construct by adding a vowel, 3S father const. 5X Gen. 17 : 4, 5, elsewhere ■'3X, nx 6ro//ter const, "^nx , ST friend const, nil 2 Sam. 15 : 37, 1 Kin. 4 : 5," or nsn 2 Sam. 16 : 16, Prov! 27 :]0 K'thibh. These may be relics of the archaic form of the construct, §218, or the monosyllables may be abridged from'fi'b roots, &185. 2. c. 2. In a simple final syllable rt.. is changed to n„ , lib sheep const, "fe ^ n?n shepherd const. !^?^ , TniOJield const. nii» ; other vowels remain unchanged. a. This is an exception to the general law of shortening, which obtains in the construct. It has, perhaps, arisen from the increased emphasis thrown upon the end of the word, as the voice hastens forward to that which is to follow. In like manner the brief and energetic imperative ends in Tsere in n"b verbs, while the future has Seghol, § 168. c. An analogous iact is found in the Sanskrit vocative. The language of address calls for a quick and emphatic utterance ; and this end is sometimes at- tained by shortening the final vowel, and sometimes by the directly oppo- site method of lengthening it. Bopp Vergleich. Gramm. §205. b. no mouth has "iB in the construct. c. Nouns ending in quiescent N preserve their final vowel unchanged in the construct, XT' /earino- const. N'i"', xis host const. K3S, §216 THE CONSTRUCT STATE OF NOUNS. 243 §216. 1. Kamets and Tsere are commonly rejected from the syllable preceding the accent, Dijj'a place const. Dipa , t\yt year const, niic, Q'^b'S years const. "'JTS, riinsiS! ^rms- Mre5 const, ninsis , o'lV /ia?2<5fe const, "'i^ , Mb /iga?-^ const. aib . TOn w/-«^^ const, rifin , a. Kamets preceding the accented syllable is retained (1) when it has arisen from Pattahh before a guttural in consequence of the omission of Daghesh-forte, ann (for B'^n) workman const, lo'in, IuAb (lii^B) horse- man const. ISiB , riD'lB (ns'Tie) vail const. nsiB, h"ia frrris) distress const. nns ; (2) in words from IS and ''S roots, D''ns (from I^S) ciijes const. inS, D^Sta (from Kia) coming const. ""K?; (3) under a prefixed to SS roots, Tjtjo (from fi^tj) covering const. 'ijO^, ")5i3 (from "(53) shield const. 'jSO, Tisa (from tTS) fortress const, tisa ; (4) in rib derivatives of the form ■niya (from ribs) fia7i7e const, n^b a , ni5fi meditation const, nwn . (5) in the construct dual and plural of triliteral monosyllables or Segholates from Nb and ri'b roots, D':!;n> (from "'nb) cAeeArs const. ''^nb, n''';'ia (from I'na) fcjrfs const, "'^'la , ckan" (from san) sms const, "'ian'; (6) in the follow- ing nouns in most of which it stands immediately before or after a guttural, §60. 3. c, nil* curse, nnsa cave, i^Jisn conduit, and the plurals, "'X'lW, itoin, ■'3a"i;3 Lev. 7:38,' ^NSxs, "'Stsia, ''iB'iia, "'saa, insa 2 Kin. 12': 8, infe'a Ezek.'27:9, i-iasa iob'34:25' •'K-ina' ''''n2?'Eccles'. 9: 1, ''SBJ'itn. 6. Tsere is retained in words in which it is commonly represented by the vowel-letter "<, or has "^ quiescing in it, ib^fi temple const, bs"'!!, and in addition in the following, DSiis crib const, oris , so iItn girdle, "(lisx thread, ^il foreign land const. "135 , frljas. loss const, riax. , so ribES, Isa. 58 : 10 rfavAness, nin3 pooi, nija Ex.' 22: 2 a DECLENSION OF NOUNS. iii. With Kamets in the ultimate. SlTO. Abs. y^ fish tt5'^p?3 sanctuary '^'y^ "word T T 11)^ cloud Const. y^_ 15? nib PL. Ahs. Sitl"! * T ti-iinb Fern. n)25n T T -: iib heart T •• Masc, Q5n wise T T btpfsi Niph. part. nbp|3iorri_b^j55 tj-'b^pi iv. With final Ti... • 11 Snra. Abs. Ti^'lTO appearance Const. ns%*l?a I^ -46«. D'li^lTa Const l^'^ ■i:ib JIfosc. QiJaDh Fern. nlJssf!! nibtJP? rtsp reed Mase. !T(31 fair Const I5<\>a I tSINO. ^&& ?jb^ king I IflQ covert . , I t3!2y strougth b?a lord tn?a death V T I ■115? eye b^T foot lis* ear . I I Fern. !^Si Jlfose. QiS"' T T " T V. Segholates. cotist. 'nb^ Pt ^i«. tDiiba co»sf. i^b^o •• : T '?"? ^?1P DS3^ * T t; b?a ni>3 d^rii?3 ■^15 Ddal ti'.j"'?. ^i) filial It?* d^5Ti% * ~ : T II. Noum lohich doiMe tlieir final consommt. Sao. Abs. b^H camel Const. b>2a Pi. -46s. QiJ)J3'3 Co«sfc ib?35 \\ d^sa % '^'[B Dual. tli-i^ •rO ^"iss PL. d^'i"i5»ordinss i^-^ny "15 garden pn statute I* niD tooth I "^IS^ Hebrew DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Mase. "Ittj? small Fern. ttSpp Pl. ifaw. t]''Spj5 i^«n. fllSOja j?!Q:pdeep njiti^ D'^j^'a?, t^ij^'a?, intj fresh ri'i'i'D Qi'iits Jnl'i'it: III. Othei' nouns svffer qio change. SCJQ. .i6s. ID'^lib^a gannent Cons*, ffi^iab)? Pi^ ^6«- d^ffl^ab?? Const. iffi^SbJ? I I I Mase. laiti good few. niltj -Sfa*"- Q"'ait2 -^s"'- Snlnlt: bit)]?73 Hiph. part, nb^p]??? or fibtip)? fi^^ipj??? tiii"^pj?)3 Nouns loitli the feminine ending n^- i. With Kamets or Tsere in the penult. Sing. Alt. t\y^ Ash Const. Jl':^'^ Pl. Ahs. tr\-ir\ Const t\yy'^ T T *■ : T •- n?aj?5 vengeance fltopS ^"i'^l^? n:2? counsel ^5?. fllS? nstn lip nsb ^"^-^ n^nsffi XT - : • - T : - i ii. Fi'om Segholates. Sin.. Abs. nisb^ qoeen Co»«*. iTlSba !*■ ^6«. illDbtt Const. niDb?? rrifip covert tiifip fiiirio niifip naSS strength tlttl^^ »^"i'a?? illtt!??' iii. All others. Smo. ^Js. (lS5 garden Cores/. flSS JPi" Als. tllBS Coxs^ fnj^ nJw'l salvation ' t1?=lffi\ tllS^'O""'. fllJ^^tll'i. Nouns with the feminine ending fi. Sis'?. AU.T^.'C^y^ observance Cojisi. ri"].??'©?? Pl. ^6s. ini"l?2ffl?a Consi n1-|7;tp?2 Y V : • ... ^ ■ ^ I ^ npsii sucker np.p.i'' ^ip5T', ^■'pr''. nbsba stun nbsba f^"i^?^5 ^'^'•'^5r5 V : i ■ , ■ ^ . ' ' ' . ' n-i-i;i3| Hebrew-woman iT'l^J? fn*""!.^? rTi";?? niibTa kingdom tiqib?? £^1^3^72 nl'sb?? I 247 248 ETYMOLOGY. §218,219 Paragogic Vowels. §218. The termination "'.or i is sometimes added to nouns in the construct singular, §61. 6, ''?3 Gen. 49 : 11 for ■jl, inxbtt Isa. 1 : 21 for ri?bx!, ^na-n Lam. 1:1 for nan, ■'SiBiBia Ps. 113:6 for i^BiCB, in^'n Gen. 1:24 for njin. This occurs chiefly in poetry and is regarded as an archaism. These vowels for the most part receive the accent, and com- monly occasion the rejection of Pattahh or Tsere from the ultimate. a. Examples of this antique formation of tlie construct are likewise preserved in proper names, as pns-^3^a Melchizedek, Pibbiina Methuselah. Respecting the origin of these vowel endings, see § 198. a (4). §219. 1. The unaccented vowel fi, added to nouns in- dicates motion or direction towards a place, Sijisa northward, nasb. southward, irnfo© heavenward, •^^i^'an to the house, oiKovSe, iT^nn to the mountain, whence it is called He directive or He local. The subsidiary vowel of Segholates is rejected before this ending, §66. 2 (1), but other vowels are mostly unaffected, nnil from X., which belongs to the full form of the pronoun, §71. a (2), is sometimes added lo the suffix, "'sri^ Jer. 11:15, "3=ipa Ps. 116:19, ''S-'ti 2 Kin. 4 : 7 K'thibh, where the K''ri has Tj'iffi; . Sometimes the distinction of gender is neglected in the plural and D3 is used in place of the feminine "(3, oi"'3J«. Gen. 31:9, osMSj, ESTnia Jer. 9: 19; fi, is sometimes added to the feminine suffix as to the full pronoun, HfiPHt Ezek. 23:49. 250 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 220 Third person. The connecting vowel before 1fi and fl is occasionally », in'jiab Gen. 1:12, inicsi-'B Judg. 9:24, ^^ab Nah. l': 13, sin^ix Job 25:3, so V\'S'\ from Sn and insna from sna and frequently with nouns in "..) I"*!"?'? and njj'ia from f^ifp^o, sirrib from nnia, >iri3na, ins;?; e does not occur before the plural D unless it is represented by the vowel-letter 1 in c-imnata 2 Chron. 34 : 5 K'thibh, where the K'ri has cHnata ; it is once ibund in the fern, plural nja'ip Gen. 41:21. The form n' in the masc. sing, is commonly reckoned an archaism, fT^njf Gen. 12:8, M'"!"'1B Ps. 42: 9, nSs Jer. 2:21, so several times in the K'thibh n-fS, nmts Gen. 49:11, nns'ian Ex. 22:4, nnxios Ex. 22:26, nstJS Lev. 23:13, ruabttj 2 Kin. 9:25, nnsirn Ezek. 48: 18, where the K'ri in each instance sub- stitutes 1. In a few instances the consonant is rejected from the femi- nine, n being retained simply as a vowel-letter; where this occurs it is commonly indicated in modern editions of the Bible by Raphe, fi'jsiu Lev. 13:4, ftian Num. 15:28, or by a Masoretic note in the margin, fis:rx Isa. 23:17. 18 for ajJnN; once X is substituted for fi, nSs Ezek. 36:5. The longer forms of the plural suffixes cfi, "in are rarely affixed to nouns in the singular, '\Tmh Gen. 21:28, "na^a Ezek. 13:17, inrnsiaffi Ezek. 16:53, or with the connecting vowel Kamets, cnfes 2 Sam. 23:6, or with n appended, n:n^3 1 Kin. 7:37, mniin Ezek. 'l6: 53. The vowel n is also sometimes added to the briefer ibrm of the fem. plural, Diiab Gen. 21:29, nrSs Gen. 42:36. The distinction of gender is sometimes ne- glected in the plural, D or tti being used for the feminine, cba Cant 4: 2, 6 : 6 for ife's , trrrni Job 1 : 14 for ■ifT'Ti . c. The nouns ax father, nx brother, ns mouth take the ending "'. be- fore suffixes, as they do likewise in the construct state, ?1''3K , CD'^as. ; ^. of the first person coalesces with this vowel, 'ax, Tix, "iB and in of the third person, commonly becomes 1 §62. 2, 'fax, vnx, 1"B more frequent than in^ax, inifix, iniis. In Ma Zeph. 2:9 the vowel-letter '' of the first person suffix is dropped after the final i of the noun. 2. The masculine plural termination D'^. and the dual 0\ are changed to "'.. before suffixes as in the construct state ; the same vowel is likewise inserted as a connective between suffixes and feminine plural nouns, ^214. 2. b. This i„ re- mains unchanged before the plural suffixes ; but before '^ the second masc. singular and t^ third fem. singular it becomes ">.. , and before the remaining suffixes the diphthoilgal vowel is resolved into ''. , which combined with ''. the first singular forms ■'. , with If the second feminine tf?. , and with in the third mascuhne 1'',, ^62.2. a. In a very few instances suffixes are appended to feminine plurals without the vowel "'..or its modifications, ''rbnn 2 Kin. 6:8 lor irbnp), ■'pSs Ps. 132: 12 for ''rhy, Tjn'aa Deut. 28:59 for Tj-'naa , Tinrnx Ezek. § 221 NOUJIS WITH SUFFIXES. 251 16 :52 for 'n^'lrirns , Bnins: and Dninias , srhix Ps. 74:4, nfixan , onia-in, tnnaia , nnhso ■ On the oiher hand, suffixes proper to plural nouns are occasionally appended to feminine nouns in the singular, perhaps to indi- cate that they are used in a plural or collective sense, Tinisan Lev. 5: 24, iqiribnp Ps. 9:15, l-insJio Ezek. 35:11, TC^^^?, Isa. 47:13.' b. The vowel-letter "' is not infrequently omitted after plural and dual nouns, r\-r\'r] Ex. 33:13 for f\''k-}'^,, os^, Ps- 134:2 for ciin-;, Ilia Ex. 32:19 K''thibh (K'ri T''i;a), "=5 1 Sam. 18:22 K'thibh (K'ri I'^'ias), cn:;i3 Gen. 10:5 for fiin"v:ia, 'inabn Gen. 4:4 for ")in''g^n, c. Second person. The vowel \ remains unchanged before the fern. B'mg. "^ in Ti^'^i^X Eccl. 10 : 17 and with n. appended ! n23!{ia Nah. 2: 14. Sometimes, as in the full pronoun, "i. is appended to the fem. sing, suffix and n to the plural, •.•'3''X!ibnn Ps. 103:3, jiaiin ver. 4, n5="'nirit53 Ezek. 13:20. Third person. The uncontracted form of the masc. sing. in"'_ occurs in wnias Nah. 2:4 for Tinias, >ini'|i; Hab. 3:10, m^is Job 24: 23; ehu. = aihu by transposition of the vowels becomes auM = ohl ^Tn which is found once Tli^iiaJB Ps. 116: 12, and is the ordinary form of this suffix in Chaldee. The final a of the fem. sing, is once represented by X , Nn^p.''nx Ezek. 41 : 15. In a few instances fi^ is appended to the plural of'either gender, nainibx Ezek. 40:16, nan-'njina Ezek. Is 11, and i to the abbreviated masc. D, ia^'n^x Deut. 32 :'37, 'ia"'nai ver. 38, ia''B3 Job 27:23. laiJB Ps. 11:7. 3. The suffixes thus modified are as follows, viz. : Appended to singtjlae. Ic. 2 m. 3/. Zm. 3/. Sing. Nouns "'^ S tj.. 1 f^ Dual and ) ^ y,, ,_., ^, *_, Plur. Nouns | - 1 ... M-- ' t 'r' -.• § 221. Certain changes likewise take place in nouns re- ceiving suffixes, which arise from the disposition to shorten words, which are increased at the end, § 66. 1. These are as follows, viz. : 1. The grave suffixes, §72, 03, "i?, Q0> 10 shorten the nouns, to which they are attached, to the greatest possible extent. Before them, therefore, nouns of both genders and all numbers take the form of the construct, aib heart, Q???^ your heart, "iO?-?!? ^■^^^^ hearts; "TSi? lip du. QniJi?to pi. DH'^lninBto their lips. a, D'n &Zooc2 becomes Disa^ and 1^ hand Bs"}!;. PttrUAL. Ic. 2 w. 2/. 3 m. 8/. ^5.. ^^... 1?: "=. X ^3^. l^!^. 252 ETYMOLOGY. ^221 2. Feminine nouns, both singular and plural, take the construct form before the light suffixes likewise, with the ex- ception that in the singular the ending fi. becomes n, in consequence of the change from a mixed to a simple syllable, § 59, nsto lip, ih&iri Us Up, ninBiti their Up, Tfjiristo % Ups, WinBiB his Ups. a. If the construct has a Segholate form it will experience the change indicated in 5, nl>iaaa const, ni^aa suf. iPibicaa . If two consonants have coalesced in the final letter, it will receive Daghesh-forte agreeably to 6, ins from na, inax from nax, !?in;f3a l Sam. 16:15 from the fem. of n^na', §205.6" b. In a few exceptional instances the absolute form is preserved before suffixes, ■'nbaa Isa. 26:19 from n^25 but fjnia?, in^??; "'tis; Cant. 2:10 from rib; const. HE'; ; so "'nbs , T'n'ip.a , i"'n^r;^ , tsb-insaia but const, nsailJ, comp. nn-'sa const, "lia . I \ (t 1\!'5^'9 (( ■jH^nibb^j (( iti^-r 254 §223 NUMERALS. 255 Numerals. §223. 1. The Hebrew numerals (iBDian ni'bi») are of two kinds, cardinals and ordinals. The cardinals from one to ten are as follows, viz. : ■ MASOirtlNB. Aisol, Constr One T V n)ix Two bi-iifl '?.T? Three ' T J s Four T T : — nyins rive rr&jn ^m^ Six T • Seven n?n;a — : • Eight niaifl riiaa Nine nytan nyon Ten nniE? n"iib:> Femiitine, Aisol. Constr. tins n)ix n^^t ^riTB T iflS^a y|'n» 3'i'?i< '^ ■• T ^'^d •Xis ■iij'iB — V J'iTB : rvpth 5T2Jn — : "■iw ^iry a. nnx is for nnx, §63. \.a; the Seghol returns to Pattahh from which it has arisen, upon the shortening of the following Kamets in the construct and in the feminine, nnx for nTnx, §54. 2, but in pause rnx; inx occurs in the absolute in Gen. 48 -'22, 2 Sam. 17:22, Isa. 27:''']2, Ezek. 33 : 30, Zech. 11 : 7, and once "in Ezek. 33 : 30. The plural C'inx is also in use in the sense of one, Gen. 11 : 1, Ezek. 37 : 17, or some. Gen. 27 : 44, 29 : 20. Comp. Span. unos. C^nttj is for BT;^ ; for the Daghesh in n see §22. 6 y this is once omitted after Daghesh-fortc, "'r'SB Judg. 16 : 28. A dual form is piven to some of the units to denote repetition, C'^nsa'nx fourfold, D^nsaid sevenfold. nsaiT occurs once with a paragogic syllable, ^55212 Job 42: 13, and once with a suffix in the form cnsaa 2 Sam. 21 : 9 k'ri. 2. In all the Semitic languages the cardinals from three to ten are in form of the singular number, and have a femi- nine termination when joined to masculine nouns, but omit it when joined to feminine nouns. %e explanation of this 256 ETYMOLOGY. ^ 224, 225 curious phenomenon appears to be that they are properly col- lective nouns like triad, decad, and as such of the feminine gender. With masculine nouns they appear in their primary form, with feminine nouns, for the sake of distinction, they undergo a change of termination. a. An analogous anomaly meets us in this same class of words in Indo- European tongues. Tlie Sanskrit cardinals from_^»e to ten, though they agree in case with the nouns to which they belong, are in form of the neuter gender and in the nominative, accusative and vocative they are of the singular number. In Greek and Latin they are not declined. §224. The cardinals from eleven to nineteen are formed by combining lfc» or STitey modifications of the numeral ten with the several units, those which end in fi^ preserving the absolute form and the remainder the construct. Thus, Masottline. Eleven T r V T T Twelve f nibs T T T r Thirteen "libs r r Fourteen T r nyaiN Fifteen T T T • -: Sixteen T r m^TD" Seventeen "nb:? T r ni>:2T2J T : ■ Eighteen -lib:? T T T : Nineteen lib:? ni'Tbn Feminine. rrix t^l'W ^PTES n'nic? U'Fm nnizjy "P!^ S^^'W inBia si")^ .. . ... u;75ri yjij nSizjy .. . .. rid niara niiny yiiin a. The origin of ''ri'a? , the alternate of Inst in- the number eleven is obscure. R. Jona thinks it to be an abbreviation for lias liittj is next to twelve. Comp. Lat. vndeviginti, nineteen. Kimchi derives it from ribs to think, ten being reckoned upon the fingers, and eleven the first number which is mentally conceived beyond. "i!J? riliin fifteen occurs Judg. 8 : 10, 2 Sam. 19 : 18, and llbs njbllj eighteen Judg. 20 : 25. • ' - i §225. 1. The tens are formed by adding the masculine ^226, 227 NUMERALS. 257 plural termination to the units, Q'''lto? twenty being, however, derived not ixova.two but from ten itos . Twenty Sixty Q-^ils-ia Thirty n^T?b\a Seventy ■ : • Forty D'ya-ps Eiglity Q-'iair Fifty CJ'^'jl! • Ninety n^yan a. These numbers have no distinct form for the feminine, and are used intliflerently with noutis ofeither gender. nHla?. Ex. 18 : 21, 25, Dent. 1 : 15 means not twenty but tens. 2. The units are added to the tens by means of the con- junction ) and; the order of precedence is not invariable, though it has been remarked that the earliest writers of the Old Testament commonly place the units first, e. g. D'^no cfetJI two and sixty Gen. 5:18, while the latest writers as commonly place the tens first, n^'i'O^ n^i*© sixty and two Dan. 9:25. § 226. Numerals of a higher grade are nkia one hundred, S|b« one thousand, nilT , ia"\ or sii^ ten thousand. These are duplicated by affixing the dual termination Q?!]*'''? two hundred, d^b^s two thousand, Clnia"! or triST ''ni^ twenty thousand. Higher multiples are formed by prefixing the appropriate units rii&M iclsaj three hundred, nisbs!: neb© three tjiousand, msan -©is sixty thousand, D^Bf!|i> a^s one million. §227. 1. The ordinals are formed by adding ''. to the corresponding cardinals, the same vowel being likewise in- serted in several instances before the final consonant ; "jiffiST first is derived from tBk't head. First liyjNi Sixth '''iSTp Second ^DTH Seventh ''jJi^TB Third ■-TB^bffi Eighth "raiD Fourth Ninth •^■^^^pi Fifth "TDTjn or ''IBBrt Tenth "Vby 17 258 ETYMOLOGY. § 228, 229 The feminine commonly ends in rr^ . , occasionally in n^ . a. There are two examples of the orthography "plZJ'^X'l Josh. 21 : 10, Job 15 : 7, and one of ')l'ib'''i Job 8 : 8, in all of which the K'ri restores the customary form. 2. There are no distinct forms for ordinals above ten, the cardinal numbers being used instead. 3. Fractional numbers are expressed by the feminine ordinals, nifcibo one third, t^''TT^ one fourth, etc., and by the following additional terms, ""in one half, y?T and y?'"i one quarter, vrdn one fifth, I'i'ife? one tenth. Prefixed Particles. §228. The remaining parts of speech are indeclinable, and may be comprehended under the general name of par- ticles. These may be divided into 1. Prefixed particles, which are only found in combina- tion with a following word, viz. the article, He interrogative, the inseparable prepositions, and Vav conjunctive. 2. Those particles, which are written as separate words, and which comprise the great majority of adverbs, preposi- tions, conjunctions, and interjections. a. No word in Hebrew has less than two letters; all particles of one letter are consequently prefixes. There is one example of two prefixes combined constituting a word bn Deut. 32 : 6, though editions vary. The Article. §229. 1. The Definite Article (TO''i;'n sn) consists of n with Pattahh followed by Daghesh-forte in the first letter of the word to which it is prefixed, ^ba a king, ?fbBn the king. a. As the Arabic article Jl is in certain cases followed by a like doubling of the initial letter, some have imagined that the original form of §229 THE ARTICLE. 259 the Hebrew article was itn and that the Daghesh-forte has arisen from the assimilation of^ and its contraction witli the succeeding letter. Since, however, there is no trace of such a form, it seems better to acquiesce in the old opinion, which has in its favour the analogy of other languages, that the article n is related to the personal pronoun Nin, whose principal consonant it retains, and that the following Daghesh is conservative, §24. 3 ; comp. the demonstrative particle NH and Kri behold! In ST^in Jer. 29:23 K'thibh (if read ?t!'"'") tbe article may perhaps be found in an unabridged form ; the K'ri has sni'ti . The Arabic article is supposed to be found in the proper name iMabx Gen. 10 : 26, '^''ij^K hail, the equivalent of ia"'is, and possibly in DSipbx'Prov. 30:31. 6. There is, properly speaking, no indefinite article in Hebrew, al- though the numeral "irjx one is so employed in a few instances, as S'^ij ins a prophet I Kin. 20:13. 2. If the first letter of the word have Sh'va, Daghesh- forte may be omitted except from the aspirates, §25, "iJA|'«!i, 'li'i'jan but s^i'^ao, wfisf?. 3. Before gutturals, which cannot receive Daghesh-forte, § 60. 4, Pattahh is lengthened to Kamets ; the short vowel Pattahh is, however, commonly retained before n and M , and sometimes before S , the syllable being converted into an inter- mediate, §20. 2. '}^ for Tp'}^ , ^i»a^ for Vicpb , 1373 for id^si . 3. Before gutturals with compound Sh'va it is changed to the corresponding short vowel, '''^S? , ^3i«^ , "^y^ . a. Initial N quiesces in the following words after the inseparable pre- positions, §57. 2. (2) a, ■|i^^5 master when connected with singular suffixes, ■'JHs Lord, D'^n'ix God, and also in the inf const, "iax to say after i, linxa, TpSB, tj-'i'is'^, "'pxb, n^Wxa for nin''bs3 the S'eghol lengthened to Tsere in the simple syllable, in'ix^ but WiixlJ laxl? but "laxa, "lass. Before the divine name mn^ the inseparable prepositions are pointed as they would be before ''J'iS. or C't-'S , whose vowels it receives, §47, fijn^b Gen. 4:3, nwb Ps. 68 : 21. 6. In a very tew instances X with Pattahh and "^ with Hhirik give up their vowel to the preposition and become quiescent, "i^25<3 Isa. 10 : 13 for niasB , Ti-in^B Eccles. 2 : 13 for ■)i"in':3 . 4. Before monosyllables and before dissyllables, accented upon the penult, these prepositions frequently receive a pre- tonic Kamets, § 64. 2, n^ica , nsTS , »B:b . a. This regularly occurs with the Kal construct infinitive of "iS , ''B , SSi IS and ■'S verbs when preceded byb, e.g. ntiiib, rir^, Trnh, a'l^, a'^'i^ ; also with different forms of the demonstrative fit and with personal suf- fixes; and with monosyllabic or Segholate nouns when accompanied by disjunctive and especially pause accents. Before the pronoun tia what they are commonly pointed fiaa , T\1SS , nab or followed by a guttural, nab . 5. Before the article its H is rejected and the vowel given to the preposition, li^? for li^ns . fisb for f "ilifnb , oi-ina for n'^nnna . a. fi not infrequently remains after a , Bi'tna Gen. 39 : 11, more rarely after the other prepositions, ni'nb 2 Chron. 10:7. The initial n of the Hiphil and Niphal infinitives is occasionally rejected in like manner, rr^kth Am. 8 : 4 for niatanb, iSiaaa Prov. 24 : 17 for iSslana. §232. The preposition yofrom, though used in its sep- arate form, may also be abbreviated to a prefix by the assim- ilation and contraction of its final Nun with the initial letter of the following word, which accordingly receives Daghesh- forte, ffp^ for %")% "ji? . Before n Hhirik is commonly re- 262 ETYMOLOGY. , ^ 233, 234 tained in an intermediate syllable, but before other gutturals it is lengthened to Tsere, 'j'lria for l^Ti )iz , fnsa , Sliyna , d?m . a. "B is sometimes poetically lengthened to "'Sa, and once has the form ol" a construct plural, ''Sa Isa. 30 : 11. § 233. These prepositions are combined with the pro- nominal suffixes in the following manner : SiNGTIL AE. Ic. '5 2»i. ^s. H^ 2/. ^^ S TO. iii 3/. tq^ Ti/.JU Plxteal. T T T V • / 2 TO. Dips Dbb cii3,nsia| DSv^ 3 TO. Qd.Q^a i7bb,D!ib Dn3,nfiia3 d^Da.DSia T ' V T T ' V X V T ' V ; V : • ' V " 3/. -j^a, -(ina -i^b — "ina a. The syllable ia inserted between 5 and the suffixes, and Tvhich is in poetry sometimes added to a, 3 and h without suffixes to conve"t them into independent words, iaa, ia^. iab , is commonly thought to be re- lated in its origin to the pronoun na what, so that "'Jias would in strict- ness denote like what I am, i. e. like me. The preposition "ja, w'th the exception of some poetical forms, reduplicates itself befipre the ligSt suf- fixes, ""Saa = ''Sasa . Comp. a similar reduplication of a short worci, la^a or ""a construct of B^a water. Vav Conjunctive. ^ 234. The conjunction and is expressed by 1 prefi \ed with Sh'va, 1\lBm , f'^^n'i . Before one of the labials a , ^ , 6, § 57. 2 (1), or before a voweUess letter Vav quiesce? in ^235 SEPARATE PARTICLES. 263 Shurek, fi'l, 1\)h^, diis^, H^O^i. Before a vowelless Yodh it receives Hliirik, in which the Yodh quipsces, Di:ij5r,i , ■'n"'T • Before a guttural with compound Sh'va it receives the corresponding short vowel, ''3^|1, '^^TSfi?,, ''■'03 • Before mono- syllables and dissyllables accented on the penult it frequently receives a pretonic Kamets, iniil , <^)'!^) , 5ni . a. After Vav with Shurek, compound Sh'va is sometimes substi- tuted for simple Sh'va in order to indicate more distinctly its vocal character, 3Jnn Gen. 2:12, "lijpansi Ezek. 26:21, msDii 1 Kin. 13:7, •'■pyi^ Jer. 22:20. b. Vav receives Hhirik before He followed by Yodh in the forms cn"'^n'i, 1T11, Dn'^'^ni, VXy\ 2 plur. preterite and imperative of the verba n^n to be and tTiri to live ; before the 2 masc. sing, imperative of the same verbs it has Seshol, n'ri'i, nTil for n'lni, n'rn. c. K quiesces after Vav conjunctive as after the inseparable preposi- tions, §231. 3. a. in Tntt master when connected with singular suffixes, •'pH; Lord and o'^Hbvi God, "'i^Ni , ''pX5 , "'b^S] , 13"'r!'^s<.1 the Seghol being lengthened to Tsere in the simple syllable. Hence also nJiHil when nnrr' has the vowels of "iJlN . A very few instances occur in which X with Pattahh and '' with Hhirik give up their vowel to Vav conjunctive and become quiescent, "liuSKi Zech. 11:5 for li?S!<1, H^i"') Jer. 25 : 36 for Pb'b-'l. Separate Particles. AD VEEBS. § 235. 1. A few adverbs of negation, place and time, are commonly classed as primitive, although they are probably related to pronominal roots, as bs and si noi, Qi» t/iere, TS t/ien. a. It is natural to suspect that the pronominal root i, which gave rise to the near demonstrative bx , n^K these and to the prepositions indicative of nearness or approach, b to, bx unto, and which has a remote deraon- strative force in nsin yonder, beyond, may also be the basis of N'i and bx the idea of remoteness taken absolutely lurming a negation. The same idea, in a less absolute sense, may be traced in the conditional conjunction 'h if. The pronoun nj , of which probably ID is originally only a modi- fication (comp. the relative use of IT , §73. 1), is plainly connected with TX at that time and Dia in that place. 264 ETYMOLOGY, § 236 2. Derivative adverbs are formed (1.) -By affixing the terminations D, or n*. ditts and obttS truly from 'J'as truth, Q2t7 gratuitously from ip. grace, Diai"! by day from ni^ day, Dji'^'n in vain from p'^'] empty, DsriB suddenly from yri| moment, OizJbo ;^^e cfe^ before yesterday from ffiiiC ^^ree. (2.) By abbreviation, as 5is? surely, only from fis. (3.) By composition, as ?'!"'» w>^^ .'^ from H^T, "T? 2'K«b in conjunction with, lytr" and S^i?"b? on account of, ''E3, i^b and ''i?"^? according to prop, a^ ^^e mouth of. (3.) A preposition and an infinitive, fiS'i)?!? toward prop. (4.) A preposition and an adverb, ""^S!^? and "'isbaw without from iia ko^ 1? 2<;«fo, \ •^^I'O'? beyond, ""^S? without. ^238. 1. The prepositions take suffixes in the same manner as singular nouns, e. g. ''^ss beside me, ''n^iT , "^iM , ■'By. except "ins after, "bs ^o, 1? 2<»/o, b? ?^o;« and riJif^ K;2^(?r, which before suffixes assume the form of nouns in the masculine plural, e. g. ''inx , ?1''^):!X , 1'''i)'1¥ ; V^ between adopts sometimes a singular, sometimes a masculine plural, and sometimes a feminine plural form, e. g. ''i''5 , 'iJ"'? and I'lji? , *i3''iia and I3ini3ia . a. The plural form "''7'!!*$ occurs without suffixes more frequently than iris ; lbs , ■'n?. , "'bs also occur in poetry. b. finri in a very kvf instances takes a verbal suffix, ''Wntn 2 Sam. 22 : 37, 40, 48 ; with the 3 masc. plur. suffix it ia nrntn oftener than nH"'F;nB . 2. The preposition US with is to be distinguished from MS the sign of the definite object, which is prefixed to a pro- noun or definite noun, to indicate that it is the object of an active verb. With pronominal suffixes the M of the prepo- sition is doubled and its vowel shortened to Hhirik, thus "ViA , ^n« , Dins ; the sign of the accusative becomes rils before suffixes or before grave suffixes commonly MS , thus, ins , irins , nini? rarely tibnisj! , nn's rarely Dnnis and obMs. a. Sometimes, particularly in the books of Kings, Jeremiah, and Eze- kiel, the preposition takes the form inix , Tjnix . Conjunctions. ^ 239. 1. In addition to the prefixed copulative ') , ^234, the following are the simple conjunctions in most common §240 INTEEJECTIONS. 267 use, i« or, S|S also, tJS! and 1^ if, lios and ''3 that, because, ^B lest. 2. Compound conjunctions are formed lay combining (1.) Two conjunctions DS "^3 but, "''2 tis? how much more prop, also that. (2.) The conjunction "i? or "nos with a preposition, as li»»!3 a*. IWS ly^^ «■» order that, iffiij 'j?'; and 108 3)5? (f5e- cflMse, ''I '1? w«^27, "I? nnf5 because. (3.) An adverb with a preposition or conjunction, d'ltia iij/'ore, pb or 13"^? therefore, "'jib K»/egs from lb j/' sb not. Interjections. § 240. The Hebrew interjections, like those of other lan- guages, are of two sorts, viz. : 1. Natural sounds expressive of various emotions, as ns, rtn, WTis ah! oh! ri»r^ aha! '''mho! woe!'>iiX, n^is, liasc, •'i? woe! ''^bs? alas! en hush! 2. Words originally belonging to other parts of speech, which by frequent use were converted into interjections, •nsfi come! prop, ^ive, nib come! prop, yo, Min behold! prop, a demonstrative adverb, nbijin /ar 3e it! "% pray] from "lya entreaty, KJ ?20w./ I pray thee! PAET THIRD. SYNTAX. §241, 1. Syntax treats of sentences or of the manner in which words are employed in the utterance of thought. Its office, therefore, is to exhibit the several functions of the different parts of speech in the mechanism of the sentence, the relations which they sustain to each other, and how those relations are outwardly expressed. 2. Every sentence must embrace first a subject or the thing spoken of, and secondly, a predicate or that which is said about it. Upon these two simple elements is built the entire structure of human speech. The Subject. § 242. The subject of every sentence must be either a noun, as D'^n'bs sna God created Gen. 1 : 1, or a pronoun, as ''5S tbii|3 /(am) holi/ Lev. 11 : 44. This includes infihi- tives, which are verbal nouns, aitb'Sb p"''nsb lai;? to punish the just is not good Prov. 17 : 26, and adjectives and partici- ples when used substantively, Stttj sii^'sb an unclean (per- son) shall not enter 2 Chron. 23 : 19, f^ri'^n;" O-in^n sb the dead shall not praise the Lord Vs. 115 : 17. a. The subject of a sentence may be a noun preceded by the preposition ■ja in a partitive sense, orri-ja ^sa^ there went out (some) of the people Ex. 16:27, or by the particle of comparison 3, nsf^J SijiS (something) like a plague has appeared Lev. 14 : 35. ^ 243 THE SUBJECT. 2C9 6. When the subject is an infinitive, it is mostly, as in English, pre- ceded by the preposition b to, miini: aia (it is) good to give thanks Ps. 92:2, unless it is in the construct before a following noun ni'^n ""a-iii ■jiisb ^7^0 wa«'s being alone (is) noi good Gen. 2:18. c. The subject is very rarely an adverb, Bsn-'|B liSi fi|"in many (prop, much) of the people have fallen 2 Sam. 1:4. § 243. The subject may be omitted in the following cases, viz. : 1. When it is sufficiently plain from the connection, ^3? Tiyn is t/iere yet loitli thee (a corpse) ? Am. 6 : 10, or is obvious in itself, Sinb;; itii* (his mother) bare him 1 Kin. 1:6. The personal pronouns are for this reason rarely used before verbal forms, vrhich of themselves indicate the person, ""nnias I said, t?'!!'^? thou saidst, unless with the view of expressing emphasis or opposition, laipj? i^nisi ibspT iyn3 rran they are brought down and fallen, hut we are risen Ps. 20 : 9. 2. When it is indefinite ; thus, if an action is spoken of and it is not known or is not stated by whom it is performed. The third person plural may be so employed, b^isiDb "H^T^ and they told Saul 1 Sam. 18 : 20, or third person singular, comp. the French on and German man, iiia «^5?l» sn)? one called its name Babel i. e. its name was called Babel, or the second person singular, particularly in laws or in proverbs, the lan- guage of direct address being employed while every one who hears is intended, bos Jib"ntosri"sb thou shall not make unto thee a graven image Ex. 20 : 4, ^|b iM'ab nsiin apply thine heart unto instruction Prov. 23 :12. a. Sometimes the word tt3"'X man is used as an indefinite subject, *15i ipisia SJ^Xfi ""is fi's a man said thus, when he went, etc. 1 Sam. 9:9, and sometimes the participle of the following verb, SMfi J'iiSi and the hearer shall hear 2 Sam. 17 : 9, B-'UJ-ih TO>in ploughers ploughed Ps. 129 : 3. b. The third person plural indefinite seems to be used sometimes with- out any thought of the real agency concerned in the action spoken of, and where the English would require a passive construction, "'^'"'Ba i'SS rn"b''i wearisome nights are appointed to me lit. they have appointed Job 7 : 3. ' ISI is an abbreviation for "laisi et comptetio, and so forth, § 9. 1 270 SYNTAX. ^244,245 3. When the construction is impersonal; in this case the third person singular masculine is the form commonly adopted, 'T^.''?? ^1!?"^^ let it not be grievous in thy sight Gen. 21 : 12, bnin ts then it was begun i. e. men began, though the feminine is also employed on account of its special affinity with the neuter, ^i^nto^b "isni and Israel was distressed ht. it was strait to Israel Judg. 10:9. ^244. 1. The subject maybe extended by connecting two or more nouns or pronouns and thus forming what is called a compound subject, okas-bDi T'lSjni D^ttiBn l^D^'i and the heavens and the earth and all their host were finished Gen. 2:1, nibs l?im ''\'&^ and I and the lad will go Gen. 22:5. 2. Or it may be extended by adding to the noun an article, adjective, demonstrative pronoun, pronominal suffix, or another noun with which it may be either in apposition or in construction. When thus united with other quahfying words the noun alone is called the grammatical subject, the noun, together with its adjuncts, is called the logical subject. The Auticle, % 245. The definite article is used in Hebrew as in other languages to particularize the object spoken of, and distin- guish it from all others. It is accordingly prefixed in the following cases, viz. : 1. When the thing referred to is one which has been mentioned before, and God said. Let there be ?"'{?'^ a firma- ment, etc., and God made T^y^ the firmament Gen. 1 : 6, 7. 2. When it is defined by accompanying words, as a rela- tive clause, la'i ^^n sli l©s? trky) in«8 blessed is the man who has not walked, etc., Ps. 1 : 1, an adjective, Wan lis'art the greater light, fajsn Tisiari the lesser light Gen. 1 : 16, or a demonstrative pronoun, lln a mountain, n|n nnn this moun- tain, S'lnn inn that mountain, or by being directly ad- §245 THE ARTICLE. 271 dressed, ^bisn king 1 Sam. 17:55, n'?'aiBn heavens, n^r? earth Deut. 32 : 1. 3. When it is obviously suggested by the circumstances, or may be presumed to be well known : she emptied her pitcher into mjPtb'n the trough Gen 24 : 20, viz., the one which must have been by a well used for watering cattle ; Abime- lech looked through li^inn the window Gen. 26 : 8, i. e. of the house in which it is taken for granted that he was ; let us go to iiiiiO the (well-known) seer 1 Sam. 9 : 9. a. The article is accordingly used as in Greek and in some modern lan- guages in place of an unemphatic possessive pronoun : she took Sl^SSn the veil Gen. 24f 65, i. e. the one which she had, or, according to the English idiom, her veil; David took lissn the harp i. e. his harp 1 Sam. 16 : 23, so the LXX. iXajj-Pavi AamS ttjv Kivvpav. b. With words denoting time it expresses the present as that which would most readily occur to the mind, Ciin the day i. e. that which is now passing, to-day Gen. 4 ; 14, fib'^Sn the night i. e. to-night Gen. 30 : 15, fijirn the year i. e. this year Jer. 28 : 16, cssn the time i. e. this time Gen. 29 : 35, unless another idea is more naturally suggested by the context, Di»n ifi'Jl and it came to pass on the day i. e. at the period before spoken of at that time 1 Sam. 1 : 4, Job 1:6. / 4. When it is distinguished above all others of like kind or is the only one of its class, n!'3n the house viz. of God, the temple Mic. 3:12, 'ji'isn the Lord Isa. 1 : 24, O-'h'bsin the (true) God, Dfai^n the heavens, Hsn the earth Gen. 1:1, ffiiafn the sun Gen. 15:12. 5. When it is an appellative noun used in a generic or universal sense, 'SrH^ the sword devoureth one as well as another 2 Sam. 11 : 25 ; they shall mount up with wings D"''ii»33 as the eagles Isa. 40 : 31, and sometimes when it is a material or abstract noun, in which case the English idiom does not admit the article, W^ere there is anjriyo/^^ Gen. 2:11 LXX. TO xpva-iov; thy wine mixed D?^? with water Isa. 1 : 22, where shall fTJsPOv wisdom be found? Job 28 : 12 LXX. ^ Se ao^ia ktX; they smote the men D'''il3Sa with blindness Gen. 19:11. 272 SYNTAX. §24G a. The article is thus used with adjectives to denote the class, which they describe, God shall judge SlSTfiTiSI p^'nSrtTix the righteous and the wicked Eccl. 3:17; the proverb of "^ihipji the ancients 1 Sam. 24 : 14 ; and with Gentile nouns, which are properly adjectives, §194. 1, "'nbsfi the Amorite, I'i'Sysn the Canaanite, Gen. 13:21. b. The Hebrew infinitive does not receive the article; nS'n, which is the only exception, see Gen. 2 : 9 and elsewhere, may be regarded as a noun. In a very few instances the article is prefixed to finite tenses of the verb with the force of a relative pronoun, Xlsbinn who went Josh. 10:24, n^^H*."! that shall be born Judg. 13: 8, U^^pfiri which he sanctified 1 Chron. 26:28, ^SSesn who are present 1 Chron. 29:17, 'pina into (the place) which he prepared 2 Chron. 1:4; so also 2 Chron. 29:36, Ezr. 8:25, 10 : 14, 17, Isa. 56 : 3, Jer. 5 : 13, Dan. 8:1. It is once prefixed to a prepo- sition, •i''|?si^ what (was) i(pon it 1 Sam. 9 : 24. c. In the uses of the article, as stated above, Nos. 4 and 5 are really varieties of No. 3, since the prominent member of a class is the best known and most readily suggested, and when a word is used generically it designates a definite and well-known class of objects which is to be distin- guished from every other class. d. The Hebrew article is sometimes found where the English requires the indefinite article or none at all ; but it must not on that account be sup- posed that it ever loses its proper force or becomes equivalent to an in- definite article. The difference of idiom is due to a difference in the mode of conception. Thus, in comparisons the Hebrew commonly conceived of the whole class of objects of which he spoke, while we mostly think of one. or more individuals belonging to the class, "ifsB as (the) a nest, Isa. 10:14, "IBB3 as (the) a scroll Isa. 34 : 4, like rending "''isn (the) a kid Judg. 14: 6, as DiVa?in (the) bees do Deut. 1 : 44, D-iiia? as (the) scarlet, 5b^3 as (the) snow, sjiins as (the) crimson, iaS3 as (the) wool Isa. 1 : 18. Cases also not infrequently occur in which the article may either be in- serted or omitted with equal propriety and without any material change of sense, according as the noun is to the mind of the speaker definite or indefinite. In speaking of the invasion of his father's flocks, David says, ins.n the lion and awri the bear came 1 Sam. 17 : 34, because he thinks of these as the enemies to be expected under the circumstances; had he thought of them indefinitely as beasts of .prey he would have said, without the article, a lion and a bear. It is said. Gen. 13:2, that Abram was very rich anja>l SJOM nspaa in (the) cattle, in (the) silver, and in (the) gold, since these are viewed as definite and well-known species of property; but in Gen. 24 : 35 he hath given him anji C)Ddi "i^ai "|KS flocks and herds and silver and gold, these are viewed indefinitely in Hebrew as in English. ^246. Nouns are definite without the article in the fol- lowing cases, viz. : 1. Proper nouns, which are definite by signification, orcias Abraham, "i?"?! Canaan, D.^TBIl)' Jerusalem. §24G THE ARTICLE. 273 a. Proper names, originally applied in an appellative sense, sometimes retain the definite article, i?in the lord, Baal, "jis'iatl the adversary, Salan, "inirt the river, the Euphrates, 'i'n^?^ Ihe descending (stream), the Jor- dan, "jlJaln the while (mountain), Lebanon, ia^sn the garden, Carmel. "i33f] the circuit of the Jordan, nssafl the watch-tower, Mizpah, CJ-JFJ and cnx the (first) man, Adam, n-^iib^ti and D''n'i>X the (true) God. In nfessn caii ■^kn rte half tribe of Manasseh Dent. 3: 13 and often else- where, the article makes more prominent the definiteness of the entire ex- pression : it also occurs without the article, e. g. Num. 32 : 33. 2. Nouns with suffixes, which are rendered definite by the appended pronoun, ^5"'is our father, iatD his name, but in Greek o irarrjp TjiiSiv, to ovo/j,a avTov. a. There are a few instances in which, for special reasons, the article is prefixed to nouns having suffixes. It is emphatic in i^snin the (other) half of them Josh. 8: 33, opposed to a preceding i^sn one half cf them ; bo in Wn"iaa3 Isa. 24:2. In ?)S"??f3 nosa Ihe worth of thy estimation Lev. 27 : 23, it serves to indicate more clearly the definiteness of the entire ex- pression ; so ■'J'HSfi Tiina in the midst of my- tent Josh. 7 : 21, Tn2^r! 'H'ina in the midst of ijsfold Mic. 2 : 12, fj"'ni-infi-b3 the whole of the women with child 2 Kin. 15 : 16 ; in inis.ab Prov. 16 : 4 it distinguishes the noun niso from the preposition l?5sb. b. A suffix which is the direct object of a participle does not supersede ihe necessity of the article, insjan the (one) smiling him Isa. 9 : 12, ijbsBr! the (one) bringing thee up Ps. 81 : 11, "'snissan the (one) crowning thee Ps. 103 : 4. 3. Nouns in the construct state before a definite noun, whether this has the article oriaiBn ■'isis the stars of heaven Gen. 26 : 4, Q-'Dnipn iS?n the feet of the priests Josh. 3:13, is a proper name, is'^^^ ''''??^ ^■^'^^ tribes of Israel Ex. 24 : 4, nin^ -li'^ the word of Jehovah Gen. 15 : 1, has a pronominal suffix, iiT'toB ■''i^sa the first fruits of thy labours, T'in-'WS the . wives of his sons Gen. 7 : 13, or is itself definite by construc- tion, f^^BSian "ite f^'b?'? the cave of the field of Machpelah Gen. 23 : 19, nin':-r'''n3 f^'S^ f^t^ ^'^^ ^f ^^^ covenant of Je- hovah Josh. 3:3. a. Nouns in the construct are occasionally found with the article, nnia rhnkn to the tent of^ Sarah Gen. 24 : 67, bN-n-3 bxtn the God of Bethel Gen.' 31 : 13, 5"!Xf7 in'^n the pin of the web Judg. 16: 14, rssinn 53 n'-ian all the abominations of the nations 1 Kin. 14 : 24, n-^fi^sn-U-'X •^^isn the grave of the man of God 2 Kin. 23 : 17, y-^kn nisbsBn-bS all the kmg- 18 274 SYNTAX. ^U7 248 doms of the earth Jer. 25 : 26, fispsn "iBBrt the bill of the purchase, Jer. 32:12, naaia )sin Jer. 48:32; see Josh. 3:11, 8:11, 1 Chron. 15:27, 2 Chron. 8 : ie. 15 : 8, Ezr. 8 : 29, Isa.' 36 : S, Ezek. 45 : 16, 47 : 15, Zeph. 3:19, Zech. 4:7, Ps. 123:4; also 1 Sam. 26:22 K'thibh, 2 Kin. 7:13 K'thibh, where the K'ri omits ihe article. b. Gentile nouns, derived from a compound proper name, frequently re- ceive the article before the second member of the compound, ''?"'H';r!"3 ihe Denjamile Judg. 3 : 15, ''c5airr!-n''3 ihe Bethshemiie 1 Sam. 6 : 14, •lanfen n-'S the Belhlehemite l' Sam. 16 : 18, '"'itsn iSN the Abiezrile Judg. 6:11, though this last woTd. also appears in the abbreviated form intSiNn Num. 26 : 30. § 247. The article is frequently omitted in the brief and emphatic language of poetry, where it would be required in prose, T'lX""'?':^ Hn^s of (the) eart/i Ps. 2 : 2, iBiai? ''isb in the presence of (the) sun Ps. 72:17, il?ii snx li?^ ^iy& (the) watchman says, (the) morning comes Isa. 21 : 12 ; to give shST ©"p) loth sanctuary and host to he trampled Dan. 8 :13. a. Occasional instances occur of its being dropped from familiar or fre- quently repeated expressions in prose, fiiV ri^'inx is to year's end Deut. 11:12, ISia inxa in (the) tabernacle of (the) congregation Ex. 27 : 21 (comp. English in church), X3S"iia (the) captain of (the) host 1 Kin. 16:16, T(^o iix'ab king Lemuel Prov. 31:1; also in geographical and architectural details, such technical terms as bl-SI and (the) border Josh. 13 : 23, anni and (the) breadth 2 Chron. 3:3. 6. When two definite nouns are connected by and the article is com- monly repeated ; it may, however, particularly in poetry, stand only before the first and be understood with the second, icoe unto t3''I?pnrt ihe (persons) decreeing unrighteous decrees Diariaal and writing, etc. Isa. 10 : 1, bajn 1i3:i O psaltery and harp Ps. 57 : 9. Still more rarely a pronominal suffix may be attached to the first only of two words to which it belongSj MS rrnan my strength and song Ex. 15:2. § 248. There is no indefinite article in Hebrew ; indefinite nouns are sufficiently characterized as such by the absence of the article. Thus, nha a river Gen. 2:10, t3''tinB-na as^Da both chariots and horsemen Gen. 50 : 9, ©57'' ^^0 i^^^^ O'^^ honey Ex. 3 : 8, nii?;! ^W an infant of days Isa. 65 : 20. a. The numeral IHN one is occasionally employed in the sense of an indefinite article, inx VO a basket Ex. 29:3, nnx iflix a man Judg. 13:2. or in the construct before a plural noun, nibasrt nnx one of the foolish •women i. e. a foolish woman Job 2 i 10. §349 ADJECTIVES AND DEMONSTRATIVES. 275 Adjectives and Demonstratives. §249. 1. Adjectives and participles, qualifying a noun, are commonly placed after it and agree with it not only in gender and number but in definiteness, that is to say, if the noun is indefinite they remain without the article, but if the noun is made definite, whether by the article or in any of the ways specified in § 246, they receive the article. Din '|3 a wise son Prov. 10 : 11, i^i'' ihti a hridegroom jgoing out Ps. 19 : 6, niitan y-jsn the good land H&xi. 1 :35, D-'inn '^rrs thy manifold mercies Neh. 9:19. If more than one adjec- tive accompany a definite noun, the article is repeated before each of them, snisni isssn Bi?n the glorious and fearful name Deut. 28 : 58. a. The adjective D^a'n many is in a few instances, for the sake pf greater emphasis, prefixed to the noun which it qualifies, D''33 D'^a'n many sons 1 Chron. 28 : 5,'Q''nS rriaT many times Neh. 9 : 28, so Ps. 32 : 10, 89 : 51, Jer. 16: 16. Other ihstances are rare, intoSa nj his strange work, •^J'^^J irribs. Ms strange task Isa. 28:21, ""^a? P^"'!? ^y righteous servant Isa.. 53:11, shi'nx nnija her treacheroics sister Jer. 3:7, 10. ' 6. Some exceptional cases occur, in which an adjective qualifying a definite noun does not receive the article, ■""ij'in iihiVti the new carl 2 Sara. 6:3, nj-i33 issn the strange vine Jer. 2:21, Ezek. 39:27, Dan. 8:13, 11:31, or when the noun is made definite by a suffix, "inx C3''n& yoii/r other brother Gen. 43 : 14, ifis iaasfl the one lamb Num. 28 : 4, Ezek. 34 : 12, Hag. 1 : 4. In riST DPa^ an evil report respecting them Gen. 37 : 2, the suffix denotes tiae object and the noun is really indefinite. Comp. § 246. 2. b. c. On the other hand, the article is sometimes dropped from the noun, but retained before the adjective, rtV''"'?*t! ''k^ 'A« great court 1 Kin. 7: 12, -iiiusn IB-iif the rich m,an 2 Sam. 12 : 4, "ii'ian lia the great well 1 Sam. 19: 22, Neh. 9: 35, Ps. 104: 38, Jer. 27:3, 32': 14, 40:3 K'thibh, Ezek. 9:2, Zech. 4:7; so with the ordinal numbers, "'lEffirt OV the sixth day Gen. 1 : 31, 2 : 3, Ex. 20 : 10, Deut. 5 : 14, Judg. C ': 25J Jer. 38 : 14. 2. Demonstrative pronouns follow the same rule of posi- tion and agreement, only the nouns which they qualify are invariably definite, §245. 2, nfn nifln this day Gen. 7 : 13, n|sn Dininn these things Gen. 15:1, narin .0''C5sn those men Num. 9:7. If both an adjective and a demonstrative 276 SYNTAX. ^250 qualify the same noun, the demonstrative is placed last, X'y^i} rsin niiian Deut. 9 : 6, n|sn nibn niibn u^h^n tkese (/ood years that (are) earning Gen. 41 : 35. a. The demonstrative fij occasionally stands emphatically before its noun, TV&Q nt this Moses Ex. 32: 1, where it is probably contemptuous like the Latin iste, ISSPlb nj this our bread Josh. 9: 12, Judg. 5:5, 1 Sam. 17:55, 56, nrn nt this people Isa. 23: 13, Hab. 1 : 11. The demonstrative both follows the noun and is repeated after the adjective in n|»tn n-jlan nssn n"''nxcJ|."! these nations these that remain Josh. 23 : 7, 12. 6. The article is sometimes omitted from the demonstrative, It ^Wn this generation Ps. 12:8. Nlfi rh^s'^, in that night Gen. 19:33, 30:16, 32:23, 1 Sam. 19:10, particularly if the noun is made definite by means of a suffix, rxi ■'nspiIJ this my oath Gen. 24:8, nfex "'nhx these my signs Ex. 10:1, 11:8, Deut. 11:18, .Tosh. 2:14, 20, Judg. 6:14, 1 Kin. 22:23, 2 Chron. 18:22, 24:18, Jer. 3i:21. c. The article is still more rarely dropped from the noun, njtl uis'i Bsa this small quantity of honey 1 Sam. 14: 29, ntii Ti'iS!* a^X that Ephrathite 17 : 12, ni •i»i-i;in the one curtain Ex. 26 : 2. a. In a very few instances the noun is in the construct before the nu- meral one, ins* BBBJJa one law Lev. 24 : 22, ins "(iis^ a chest 2 Kin. 12 : 10, ■^nx nng one governor Isa. 36 : 9, comp. §254. 6. &. 2. The other cardinal numbers are joined to nouns as follows, viz. : (1.) They commonly stand before the noun to which they belong and in the absolute state, ci^'n W^ns four kings Gen. 14 : 9, "i"'? QiffiiD siwtg cities Deut. 3 : 4, nsB n"'j>!i'BS a hundred cakes of raisins 2 Sam. 16 : 1, O'^s^s fiiBin C'TD'nB six thousand horsemen 1 Sam.. 13:5. (2.) Such as have a distinct form for the construct (^^z. § 251 NUMERALS. 277 2-10, nxtt hundred, ''Sbs thousands) may also stand before the noun in the construct state, DiJn ''b© two sons prop, two of sons Gen. 10 : 25, D-'i?,'' nyans /o?^r j^^^ Judg. n . 40^ n-ib'^s'nis'n a hundred sockets 'Ex. 38:27, n-iSoa ijcbs ni?!:© three thousand camels Job 1 : 3. a. The numbers two, three, four, and sewra, occur with the suffixes of pronouns which are in apposition with theni, -"unis. sirjs; v^e, both of us 1 Sam. 20 : 42. •(H-'nii: tAey too or both of them 1 Sam. 25 : 43, DaniaVd j(e Mree, tanoicj «Aej/ ZAree Num. 12 : 4, ensans< they four Dan. 1 : 17, cnsaij they seven 2 Sam. 21:9 K'ri. The following numerals occur with'pro- nominal suffixes having a possessive sense, ?i''iaan thy fifty, li&Jan his fifty 2 Kin. 1 : 10, nrjilEan their fifties ver. 14, ijabx' my thousand Judg. 6:15, cbisbx your thousands 1 Sam. 10:19, T^nhni his ten thousands 1 Sam. 18 : 7. • ^ "' (3.) Less frequently the numerals stand after the noun in the absolute state, S^is rii!ii?a seven steps Ezek. 40 : 22, ni-ito? rinx twenty she-asses Gen. 32:16, fi^x-nx'a n-''i33 a hundred thousand talents 1 Chron. 22 : 14. §251. 1. The units (including ten), whether they stand singly or are compounded with other numbers, agree with their nouns in gender, mnb'7 1IJ5» three leaves Jer. 36 : 23, ■inn ■'fc nisbti three baskets of bread Gen. 40:16, n»ais niibns "hl^ fourteen lambs Num. 29 : 15 ; the other numerals observe no distinction of gender. a. When the units qualify tlisia hundreds or Cie^X thousands, their genderisdeterminedbythatof these words respectively. In T'sa'^'Cis nidiuj the three wives of his sons Gen. 7 : 1,S, the masculine adjective is probably to be explained by the fact that the noun, though in reality feminine, has a masculine termination. 2. Nouns accompanied by the units (2-10) are almost invariably plural, while those which are preceded by the tens (20-90) or numbers compounded with them (21, etc.), are commonly putin the singular, Th'f^ Dii'3'iX'i Di^ vb'S^» forti;. days and forty nights Gen. 7 :4, nb© Difcbioi 'S'^yAfour and thirty years Gen. 11 : 16, n'^biB yaioi nbis □I'lto? twenty years and seven years Gen. 23 : 1. 278 SYNTAX. § 251 a. This phenomenon is probably to be accounted for upon a principle analogous to that by which the anomalous terminations for gender in the numerals has been explained, §223. 2. When the numeral has itself a plural form, as it has in the tens, the plurality of the entire expression is sufficiently indicated without giving a plural ending to the noun likewise. But with the units which have a singular termination, the noun must take a plural form. It may be observed, however, that this peculiarity chiefly affects a certain class of nouns, viz. those which are most frequently numbered, and in which, consequently, the tendency to abbreviate the expression by retrenching the plural ending is most strongly manifested. These are such as d^x man, and various measures of time, space, weight, etc., e. g. ri3ia year, oi"' day, nsN cubit, ^'^Vi shekel. These nouns are also found, though less constantly, in the singular with hundreds and thousands, flia nisla sen nine hundred years Gen. 5:5, nfax C)^X a thousand cubits Num. 35 : 4, and with the numbers from 11 to 19, flfean ii)?B libs Jifleen shekels Lev. 27 : 7. Comp. in German hundert Fuss lang, fwnfzig Pfund schwer, and in English twenty head of cattle, a ten foot pole. b. The numbers from 2 to 10 are very rarely found with singular nouns. niv niaij eight years 2 Kin. 22: 1, nax labis three cubits 25: 17 K'thibh where the K'ri has nias . The tens are occasionally followed by the plural nisna oiiba thirty companions Judg. 14:11, i?n""'5a Diiiau eighty sons of valour 2 Chron. 26:17, D"'i^'? ■'jici 0^y2-\K forty-two chil- dren 2 Kin. 2: 24. When the noun precedes the numeral it is always put in the plural. c. In enumerations of familiar objects the noun is sometimes omitted, when the meaning is sufficiently plain from the connection, zhi >TWV ten (shekels) of gold Gen. 24 : 22, r|&^ nisa irjisia three hundred (shekels') of silver Gen. 45:22, nnS"'nia two (loaves) of bread 1 Sam. 10:4, Di'lSiS-BJU six (ephahs) of barley Ruth 3: 15. In measurements, the word fiBS cubit is occasionally preceded by the preposition 3 , thus iTDNa Sa"i!< four by the cubit i. e. four cubits. 3. Compound numbers may either proceed from the higher to the lower denomination, fiyaisi Difen D^inN'a ^)k a thousand two hundred fifty and four Neh. 7 : 34, or the re- verse, nbio m»i D''i»bffii sntD seven and thirty and a hundred years Ex. 6 : 16. The noun sometimes stands at the begin- ning or end of the entire series as in preceding examples, and sometimes it is repeated after each numeral, nio nsM QiitO yaT?! nb» o^'ite?) « hundred years and twenty years and seven years Gen. 23 : 1. 4. Numeral adjectives may receive the article when they represent an absolute number, or the noun is not expressed ; §252 ORDINAL NUMBEES, ETC. 279 but when they are joined to a definite noun the latter alone receives the article, n^iffln ifhe) two are better than it'?^ {the) one Eccles. 4 : 9, niya-isn the forty Gen. 18 : 29, DiffiKiri D)?'''7?'3 the fifty righteous ver. 28, 1"'ri3a ''no his two daugh- ters 19 : 30, ni«n Diya-is? the forty days Deut. 9 : 25. a. When compound numbers 11, 12, etc., receive the article, it maybe given to the first member of the compound, liZJS n''3isn the twelve 1 Chron. 25:19.27:15, 1 Kin. 6:38, or to the second, vi^ii "lirri ciu the twelve men Josh. 4:4, 1 Kin. 19: 19. In the example just cited the article is given to the numeral instead of to the noun, but in "liCS'c^Iir "ii?an the twelve oxen 1 Kin. 7:44, the general rule is observed. In cnsanN nhivn Binb';n tJiese four children Dan. 1 : 17, the numeral following a definite noun re- ceives a pronominal suffix referring to it. Ordinal Hiimbers, etc. § 252. 1. The ordinal numbers follow the general law of adjectives in position and agreement with the substantive, to which they belong, ■'ii?? "i? « second son Gen. 30 :7, nbisa n^tDibiiSn in the third year 1 Kin. 18 : 1. 2. The lack of ordinals above ten is supplied by using the cardinals instead, which are then commonly preceded by the noun in the construct state, yai^l ^''T'to? riio the twenty- seventh year 1 Kin. 16:10, although this order is not always observed, niia rriffi^-iBbffl thirteenth year Gen. 14 : 4. a. A fuller form of expression is sometimes employed, e. g. rjSJa rijB ii3JaO!| n"'UJbia in the thirty-eighth year prop, in the year of thirty-eight years 1 Kin. 16:29, 2 Kin. 15: 1. b. In dates the cardinals are used for the day of the month and some- times for the year, even though the number is below ten; the words day and month are also frequently omitted, S3'ij nsia the seventh year 2 Kin. 12:1, '^Sianr! la'iHb ni-a'ix the fourth (day) of the ninth month Zech. T : l, ij^aiaa in the seventh (month) ver. 5. 3. When the ordinals are used to express fractional parts, , § 227. 3, they stand before the noun, rnn niffibw the third of a hin Num. 15:6. 4. Distributive numbers are formed by repeating the car- dinals, ^1\t D?30 two by two Gen. 7 : 9, fi?30 nysffi by 280 SYNTAX. § 253 sevens ver. 2. The numeral adverbs once, twice, etc., are ex- pressed by the feminine of the cardinals, nns once^ d;'!?© twice 2 Kin. 6:10, Ps. 62:12, or by means of the noun oys stroke or beat, trasii twice Gen. 27 : 36, D-'iayB -licy i'e^ times Job 19:3 or n'^^S'i steps, Q''??'!i ©'O ^/^ree ^raes Ex. 23 : 14. a. This use of these nouns has arisen from the method of counting by beats or taps with the hand or foot. Apposition. ^253. When one noun serves to define or to describe another it may be put in apposition with it. This construc- tion, of which a more extended use is made in Hebrew than in occidental languages, may be employed in the following cases, viz. : 1. When both nouns denote the same person or thing, Ti'7 >fb'an 2 Sam. 6:16, or less commonly, trbian nin 13 : 39 icinff David, nb»bN SiffiS a woman (who was) a widow 1 Kin. 7 : 14. 2. Wlien the second specifies the- first by stating the material of which it consists, its quantity, character or the like, niDn?n l|?3ln the oxen the brass i. e. the brazen oxen 2 Kin. 16 :17, nujb n'^so ©l:© three measures (coiisisting of ) meal Gen. 18 : 6, ajn ciiS'yiia seven years (of) famine 2 Sam. 24 : 13, vm; n-^yno nfflSo three weeks (of) days Dan. 10:3, "ISM Qitt^ days (which are) a number, i. e. SHch as can be readily numbered, a few Num. 9 : 20, fTMK n''nrs| words (which are) truth Prov. 22 : 21. a. In this latter case the closer connection of the construct state might, with equal propriety, be employed, §254. 4, etc. The follq,wing examples will show with what latitude ihe rule of apposition is occasion-- ally applied, yn's tiyo water (which is) affiiclion i. e. identified with it or characterized by it 1 Kin. 82: 27, n^s^n "i^^ wine (which is) intoxication 1. e. produces it Ps. 60:5, '■'S'l "jra pasture-cattle i. e. those whose charac- teristic it is that they have been in the pastures 1 Kin. 5:3; bearing §254 THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND SUFFIXES. 281 rc^SM "livsn the ark viz. the covenant, which was the thina: of chief con- sequence about the ark Josh. 3 : 14, a hundred thousand i»S o'^pix 2 Kin. 3:4, which is by some understood to mean wool-bearing rams i. e. charac- terized by the production of wool ; according to others, the first word de- notes the quantity and the second the material, rams (of) wool i. e. aa much as rams have,Jleeces. b. Proper nouns, which have no construct state, may be followed by qualifying nouns in a loose sort of apposition, fTiln'^ onb n^a Bethlehem (in) Judah 1 Sam. 17:12, compare in English, Princeton, New Jersey; c^nns onx^ lira Pelhor{\a) Mesopotamia Deut. 23 : 5, B''i!iBJ?JB-ra Galh (of) the Philistines Am. 6:2; the destined possessor of my house is pli-lHIi iTS/'bx Damascus (in the person of its citizen) Eliezer Gen. 15:2, B"'n'ix nixns God (of) Hosts Ps. 80 : 5, 8, 15, 20 ; when Cinbi* is regarded as an appellative noun instead of a proper name, this divine title becomes nixaa ^irris Ps. 89:9. The Construct State and Suffixes. §254. When one noun is limited or restricted in its meaning by another, the first is put in the construct state ; if the Hmiting word be a personal pronoun it is suffixed to the noun. The relation thus expressed corresponds, for the most part, to the occidental genitive or to that denoted in English by the preposition of. The primary notion of the grammatical form is simply the juxtaposition of two nouns, or the union of a noun and a pronoun, to represent the sub- ordination of one to the other in the expression of a single idea, §212. The particular relation, which it suggests, is consequently dependent on the meanings of the words them- selves, and is in each case that which is most naturally sug- gested by their combination. Thus, the second noun or the pronominal suffix may denote 1. T\\Q 2^ossessor of that which is represented by the pre- ceding noun, nihil iiin fjie temjjle of Jehovah 1 Sam. 1 : 9, DiSl3-i their substance Gen. 12:5. This embraces the various degrees of relationship, Drfias-a son of Abraham Gen. 25 : 1-2, tines thy wife Gen. 12 : 5. 2. The whole, of which the preceding word denotes a part. 282 SYNTAX. § 254 ^B? la'ias the poor of thy people Ex. 23 : 11, y^»-''^3M the. honourable of the earth Isa. 23 : 9. a. The construct relation, when thus employed, indicates that the part singled out from the whole possesses the quality referred to in an eminent degree. The first word is sometimes an abstract noun, VTns; nsip the height of his cedars i. e. his highest cedars 2 Kin. 19:23. Here too be- long the superlative expressions, C3"'ttJ'J5 'U'^JP holy of holies, fiin'^isri liEi the song of songs, O^nn?, las servant of servants, one that is a servant by way of eminence when compared with all others. 3. An individual of the class denoted by the preceding noun, thus serving the purpose of a more exact designation, IsfsV^. T"!? the land of Egypt Gen. 41 : 19, nns-nns the river (of) Euphrates Gen. 15 : 18, n-trnsi! "^i? cedar trees, 2 Chron. 2 : 7, ap?;2 TO^in worm (of) Jacob Isa. 41 : 14, ninnn itJ5« men (who are) merchants 1 Kin. 10 : 15. 4. The material of vi^hich the preceding noun is com- posed, anr ori a ring of gold Gen. 24 : 22, V?""'"?? vessel of wood Lev. 11 : 32, D"'-iyv3 i"i? the flock of goats Cant. 4:1. 5. The measure of its extent, value, duration, etc., tf^n'? V^yy^ rii»Si» a journey of three days Jon. 3 : 3, ""i33 bjjffitt ^/^e weight of a talent 1 Chron. 20 : 2, istpa '^n^ men of number i. e. readily numbered, few. Gen. 34 : 30, DJiy M-ins a pos- session of perpetuity Gen. 17:8. 6. An attribute, by which it is characterized, b^n niaa mighty man of valour Judg. 11 : 1, '^'iS f^. tree of fruit Gen. 1 : 11, 'ji^jn S^a t7a//e5/ of vision i. e. distinguished as the one where visions are received Isa. 22 : 1, •^j'^riv! l!*^ the flock of slaughter i. e. which is to be slaughtered Zech. 11:4. a. It will be observed that the Hebrew uses nouns to express many of the ideas for which adjectives are employed in other languages ; thus, in the examples under Nos. 4, 5, and 6, vessel of wood for -wooden vessel, posses- sion of perpetuity for perpetual possession, mighty man of valour for valiant mighty man, flock of slaughter for grex maclanda. This both arises from and explains the comparative paucity of adjectives in Hebrew: though even where corresponding adjectives exist the other construction is fre- quently preferred, lE'ip "insa garments of holiness Ex. 2S : 2, pls—'n3> sacrifices of righteousness, ttJ'ilf; holy and p'''=;s righteous being used with ^254 THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND SUFFIXES. 283 less latitude and with a stricter regard to the ethical idea which they in- volve. Attributives are frequently formed by prefixing such words as U3''X man, hsz lord, '3 son, ra daughter, to abstract nouns or other sub- stantives, thus, 1S& ttJii< a man of form i. e. comely 1 Sam. 16 : 18, ttJ'X t3"'~a'n man of words i. e. eloquent Ex. 4 : 10. nia'inn bsa the possessor of dreams i. e. dreamer Gen. 37 : 19, 6''nj n5bsJ""|S son of eight days i.e. eight days old Gen. 17:12, ri.'i'a",3 son of death \. e. deserving to die 1 Sam. 20 : 31, bsjba-'^ja sons of worthlessness i. e. wicked Deut. 13 : 14, B-iSirR-na nbiB daughter of ninety years i. e. ninety years old Gen. 17 : 17. 6. Occasionally in poetry an adjective instead of agreeing with its sub- stantive is treated as though it were an abstract noun, ")B|3fi ''^3 vessels of small (capacity) Isa. 22 : 24, N^a ia waters of fulness Ps. 73 : 10,' nia-ba iilsn perhaps every house of great (size), though others render every great (man's) house Jer. 52 : 13. So sometimes an adverb, asa ''na few men Deut. 26:5, Tian r&S continual bumi-offering Num. 28:6, nsn'-'a'n blood (shed) causelessly 1 Kin. 2:31, fiai"' "'"is enemies in the day time Ezek. 30 : 16, naW -jais dumb stone Hab. 2 : 19, or adverbial phrase, a"i;3a "'^'ix a God nigh at hand, pn";a "iirilss a God afar of Jer. 23 : 23. 7. The source from which the preceding noun is derived, nih;! nnin ^/^e /aw of Jehovah Ex. 13 : 9, nistt l?6 ^/^e ^oo>?; of Moses 2 Chron. 25:4, nans nSin side from love Cant. 2 : 5. 8. The subject by which an action is performed, or in which an attribute inheres, StJiH^ ^^O? ^^'^ ^ove of God i. e. exercised by him 1 Kin. 10:9, rra^is f^'^P'7 the wisdom of Solomon 1 Kin. 5 :10. 9. The object, upon which an action is directed, tky) D^n'bs the fear of God Gen. 20 : 11, Di«n nbfcatt the rule of the day Gen. 1:16. a. After nouns, which express or imply action, the following noun or suffix denotes the subject or the object as the sense or the connection may demand, ^'^\1^'\ nS3p the zeal of Jehovah,-which he feels Isa. 37:32, dS'nSJp me Gen. 16:5; n'^JTi"!;! the way of the sea i.e. leading to it 1 Kin. 18:43, DSaTi rp'h the way of Jeroboam i. e. in which he walked 1 Kin. 16: 26. b. Active participles are frequently put in the construct state before their object, 12333 na'^UJa restoring the sold Ps. 19:8, ^aiB "an/x loving thy name Ps. 5 : 12,'-i?ia "'Sta entering the gale Gen. 23 : 10. So even before an infinitive which they govern, nip "aiaaia being early to rise Ps. 127 : 2. Passive participles may be in the construct before the subject of the ac- tion, D-'nis fiaa smitten of God Isa. 53 : 4, nfet? *i>i^ bom of a woman 284 SYNTAX, ^255 Job 14: 1, or before the eecondary object, if the verb is capable in the active of having a double object, piSTi'ian girded mth sackcloth Joel 1:8, D''^3n laiab clothed with linen Ezek. 9:11. When a noun follows the in- finitive it may be in construction with it as its subject, "H^.^ SIRS on the king's reading 2 Kin. 5 : 7, 'iu:''-i'in his driving out Num. 32 : 21, or be gov- erned by it as its object, i>x>iauJ-Nnp to call Samuel 1 Sam. 3:8, cvj'^'iin to drive them out Deut. 7 : 17. 10. The respect in which a preceding attribute holds, so that it answers the purpose of specification, D';ri6iD"Stt'D un- clean as to lips Isa. 6 : 5, ^^""'O)? hard hearted Ezek. 3 : 7, aiiaa "b^^ rent as to garments, 2 Sam. 13 : 31. a. This answers to what is known as the Greek accusative, irdSas wkv's ; the English has in certain cases adopted the Hebrew idiom, so that we can say swift of foot, blind of an eye, etc. § 255. 1. When the relation between two nouns is ex- pressed by an intervening preposition, the first commonly remains in the absolute state : it may, however, particularly in poetry, be put in the construct, ?2iba3 inn mountains in Gilboa 2 Sam. 1 : 21, Da^tt "'i^'^yi prophets out of their own heart Ezek. 13 : 2, ^133 lis according to the ability in us Neh. 5:8. ' . 2. A noun is sometimes put in the construct before a succeeding clause with which it is closely connected : thus, before a relative clause, lT?s: nipB the place where, etc., Gen. 39 : 20, ni?s« liT'^/or the reason that Deut. 22 : 24, par- ticularly when the relative is itself omitted, nbwn-'iijsi bg the hand of (him whom) thou wilt send Ex. 4:13, nih^-ll^ tiSfiR the beginning of (what) Jehovah spake Hos. 1 : 2, or before the conjunction 1 and, ln?^1 fi''??^ wisdom and knowledge Isa. 33 : 6, X^'^^ sBt nSaiB drunken and not with wine Isa. 51 : 21. 3. Three, four, or even five nouns are sometimes joined topjether in the relation of the construct state, Dhhs«-nia liJsn the heads of the houses of their fathers Ex. 6 : 14, "^DaTB iBp'a bi«'itet'""';2 the number of the tribes of the children of Israel Josh. 4 : 5, n^^-n^)? a?b b'^i-i'is the fruit of the greatness of heart of the king of Assyria Isa. 10 : 12. § 256 THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND SUFFIXES. 285 a. In a very few instances, only occurring in poetry, two words of like meaning are united in the construct before the same noun, UJ2^ '"'^nj "''1(13 rivers, brooks of honey Job 20 : 17, nir;? -'ain ■'(Jiaip Ps. 78 : 9,' if rendered as it is by some armed with, shooting ike bow, though ''fecJis may be in con- struction not with na^^ but with ''»1i armed ones of those who shoot the. bow, armed bowmen. See Alexander in loc §256. When two words are in the construct relation they must stand in immediate conjunction, and no other word can be suffered to come between them as it would ob- scure the sense. Hence an adjective, participle or demon- strative, qualifying a noun in the construct state, cannot stand immediately after it, but must be placed after the gov- erned noun, bi'ian nin;! ni©?ia the great work of Jehovah Judg. 2 : 7, nSiia ant rrit:? « great crown of gold Esth. 8:15. So an article or suffix, belonging to a noun in the construct, must be attached not to it but to the governed noun, b^inn iniaa the mighty men of valour Josh. 1 : 14, ''^ibs ■iifiT his idols of gold Isa. 2 : 20, ''^'71? '^ '"^y name of holi' ness i. e. mg holy name Lev. 20 : 3. a. When the governing and the governed noun are of the same gender and number it may be doubtful to which of them the following adjective is t'o be referred, thus ii'isn PS7. ^nx Gen. 10:21 may either mean xirin nbl^a in the fifth year of the king 1 Kin. 14 : 25, SDijb ob'o thm. in the third year of Asa 1 Kin. 15 : 33. 4. When several genitives are connected together, 1?D 'TfW) ''s'p'ab Di'bjn I'ln'i the hook of the Chronicles of the kings o//2<^«/^l Kin. 15:23. The Peedicate. § 258. 1. The predicate of a sentence, if a substantive, adjective, or pronoun, may be connected with its subject without an intervening copula, their mutual relation being §259 THE PKEDICATB. 287 sufficiently suggested by simply placing them together, 061? ninia-ini-bs all her paths (are) peace Prov. 3 : 17, nit: V?fi the tree (was) good Gen. 3 : 6, Th^ *^t this (is) the way Isa. 30 : 21. 2. Or the pronoun i5in of the third person may be used as a copula, inns sin ''^''^'in inan the fourth river is Eu- phrates prop, it (is) Euphrates Gen. 2 : 14, n|k rrafi-jra «(?^(a!# are these ? Zeeh. 4 : 5, "isbtt Sisrnns #^02^ art my king Ps. 44 : 5, Qn niMb© nlbxri Q'^iDSKn these men are peaceable Gen. 34:21. 3. Or the verb njin to he may be employed for a hke purpose, particularly if the idea of past or future time is in- volved, inn nni'n 1>"isn the earth was desolate Gen. 1 : 2, niio'in I'^n "i^^an the oxen were ploughing Job 1 : 14. a. Verbs which denote some modification of being are sometimes em- ployed in the same way; thus, his eyes nins ifenn began (to be) dim 1 Sara. 3:2; •ra'iyifj i^J^^. nb bn^l arecZ iVbaA began (to be) a husbandman Gen. 9 : 30 ; iji^ZJ i^a'^nns ic/jen thou ceasest spoiling Isa. 33 : 1, the hair ■ji^ Tjat^ Aas turned white Lev. 13 : 3 ; so he was to die 2 Kin. 13 : 14; or conditionally, (would that I had died) for I would have laint down (pret.) and liipcx would be at rest Job 3:13; but (if it were my case) / iB'i'is ivould seek unto God Job 5:8; or optatively in the various grades of desire, determination, permission, or command, so I'ilS"' may all thine enemies perish Judg. 5:31; that my grief ^p'fi^ might be weighed Job 6:2; all that thou com- mandest us . 51 : 6. a. "When employed in requests, the future is frequently accompanied by the particle N3, thus, K:"-ig'i^ let thy servant speak, 1 pray thee Gen. 44: 18, K5""ia5^ let the wickedness of the wicked cease, I pray Ps. 7: 10. b. The future is idiomatically used with D'la and CibS not yet, before, whether the period referred to is past or iuture, the time denoted by the particle being antecedent to the action of the verb. Thus, referring to the past, / ate of all Nian D^B3 before thou earnest Gen. 27 : 33, the lamp of God HM^ n'jC! had not yet gone out 1 Sam. 3:4; to the future, that my soul may bless thee rsiix n^aa before I die Gen. 27 : 4, is'ip^ CiB before they call, I will answer Isa. 65: 24. There are three examples of the use of the preterite with these particles, the reference being to past time, 1 Sam. 3 : 7, Ps. 90 : 2, Prov. 8 : 25. § 263 THE PRIMAUT TENSES. 293 2. The present, when it is conceived of as extending into the future, comfort my people "lias"' saith your God Isa. 40 : 1, the divine utterance though begun is not yet finished ; W'7in ssn dot ye not know? ver. 21, are you ignorant, and is this ignorance to continue? why ''San weepest thou? 1 Sam. 1:8. 3. General truths or permanent facts, when the attention is directed to their validity for all time to come, righteousness Dttiin ewalteth a nation Prov. 14 : 34, it does so now and always will ; a son 13i^ Jwnoureth Ms father Mai. 1:0. 4. Constant or habitual acts or states viewed as con- tinuing for an indefinite period from the time spoken of, even though they may have ceased at the time of speaking, and so belong entirely to the past, a mist to$|2 used to go up from the earth Gen. 2 : 6, i. e. not only at the moment of time previously referred to but from that onward ; thus Job nib?;; did continually Job 1:5; the daughters of Israel wspri were in the habit of going from time to time Judg. 11 : 40 ; so Gen. 29 : 2, Ex. 13 : 22, Num. 11 : 5, 1 Sam. 2 : 19. 5. The past, when the speaker or writer assumes an ideal point of vision prior to its occurrence, and so regards it as future. Thus, a historian in animated description, as we might use the present, ni?jtt"'T'i»;' TS then sings Moses Ex. 15 : 1, Balak ^in'-l brings me from Aram Num. 23 : 7 ; or a poet, who lives in the midst of that of which he sings, lis"' ii ibis u^^ let the day perish on which I am to be born Job 3 : 3, where the speaker, by a bold figure, places himself be- fore his birth, and prays that the day which was to give him existence might be annihilated, so that he might be saved from the misery of living ; rnrs nnSa S3 nisb why may I not die from the womb ? ver. 11, where his position is shifted to the time immediately after his birth ; nfeb '\'o'n T^y' he makes known his ways unto Moses Ps. 103 : 7. a. The intermingling of different tenses in relation to the same sub- ject, which is so frequent in poetry, foreign as it may be to our modes of 294 SYNTAX. §264,265 thought, does not justify the conclusion that they are used prpmiscuously or without regard to their distinctive signification. Thus the preterite and the future are frequently combined in order to give greater emphasis and compass to the statement made, by asserting it at once of both the grand divisions of time, the wicked who ^Viva have wasted me, my deadly enemies IS"';?!; ■will surround me Vs. 17:9, Jire Hbsx devoured before them, and after them aflame onin shall consume Joel 2:3. Or the writer may place himself in the midst of an event, and regard part as h.aving already taken place and part as yet to be performed; thus, in Ex. 15:14,15, the nations Wap have heard ^ITJ"!? they will be afraid; pangs TntJ have seized upon the inhabitants of Philistia ; then the dukes of Edom lbfJ23 were troubled, the mighty men ofMoab trembling i'OITJ^'^ shall seize them, all the inhabitants of Canaan Mas have melted. Or a verb may be put in the future to show that the action which it denotes, though in reality past, is subsequent to, .or a consequence of, a preceding preterite, they were both naked fiaJiBsn'; k5i and were not ashamed Gen. 2: 25, Deut. 2: 12. § 264. The apocopated and paragogic forms of the future are mostly used in their respective persons, § 97, to express its optative, conditional, or subjunctive senses, §263. 1. The negative imperative is made by prefixing bs not to the apoco- pated future, wHn-bs harm not Vs. 105 : 15 ; wri sS would mean t/ou shall not harm. a. These modified forms of the future, although they give a more dis- tinct expression to the modal senses just indicated, are not essential to that end, since the same shades of meaning may be and often are suggested by the simple future. Instances are more rare, and only found in poetry, in which the apocopated or paragogic forms iire used, when simple futurity is intended, Job 1 3 : 27. 24 : 25. The Secondabt Tenses. §265. The secondary tenses agree in signification with their respective primaries. The future with Vav conversive, forming a secondary preterite, § 99. 1, has the same variety of senses with the primary or proper preterite, and is in fact a simple substitute for it. In like manner, the secondary future or the preterite with Vav conversive, §100. 1, is a substitute for the primary future. A narrative or a para- graph, which begins with one of the primary tenses, is mostly continued by means of the corresponding secondary §265 THE SECONDARY TENSES. 295 tense, provided the verb stands at the beginning of its clause, so that it can be attached to the conjunction, which is an essential part of the secondary formation. If, for any reason, this order of the words is interrupted or prevented, the primary tense must again be used. Thus, Gen. 22 : 1, God nB5 teinpted Abraham "ias«1 and said . . . Tas^l and he said. . . ver. 3, Di««5 and he rose up early . . . ffiin^T and saddled . . . . n^«T and took — ^^3^1 and clave . . . DU'l and rose up I^^Sl and went unto the place iS-Tas-noS! of which God had told him. Gen. 17:5, thy name ^^T^, shall not he called Abram n;0? and it shall he . . . ver. 6, ''ii'^sn'i and I will make thee fruitful . . . Ti''Plnai and I will make nations of thee Q'^i^'ai *"'?.'? ^^''? and kinys shall come out of thee. a. The future with Vav conversive describes an act subsequent to or contemporary with the time denoted by the words with which it is con- nected. It can, therefore, only relate to the past when it is preceded by a preterite with a past signification, or by some other word or phrase which refers to past time, in the year of king Uzziah's death ni"iKj (and) I saw Isa. 6 : 1. But if it be preceded by a future tense, it has a future significa- tion, pnb;i he shall deride every stronghold "^as*^ and shall heap up earth '^721^!'!! and take it Hab. 1 : 10, who nirs^. shall do evil . . . l'is*1 ~\:,J^ and shall go and serve other gods Deut. 17:2, 3 ; unless a pause intervenes in which a pretefite is to be supplied, as in Hab. 2: 1, 2, / will watch to see what he will say to me . .. nih^ 15:5*5 ond (after I had thus watched) the Lord answered me. The future with Vav conversive occurs in a preterite sense at the beginning of certain books, because they were regarded by their authors as supplements or continuations of preceding histories. %'i''1 And it came to pass Josh. 1 : 1, Judg. 1 : 1, 1 Sam. 1 : 1, etc., etc. 6. The preterite with Vav has a future signification only after a future tense or an expression suggestive of futurity, e. g. in thy distress tjlssai when there shall come upon thee all these things Deut. 4:30; or as ilie initial word of a prophecy, which is regarded as linked with other dis- closures of the future previously made, 'T^fjl and it shall come to pass Isa. 2:2. After an imperative it commonly has an imperative sense, this being one of the significations of the future, §263. 1, go unto Pharaoh Pi'iaxn nnd say to him prop, and thou shall say Ex. 7:26. When a preterite precedes, the Vav is not conversive, thy servant was keeping his father^s sheep Nil and there came . . . Nibr and took . . . ""nNS^l and I went out-.-Vhsm and smote him, etc., 1 Sam. 17: 34, 35, unless it involves a reference to what is to take place hereafter, / have blessed him (the blessing is of course prospective), "'n'l'nBPji and I will make him fruitful, ^nia-ini and I will multiply him Gen. 17 : 20. 296 SYNTAX. ^ 266 Participles. § 266. The participles being properly verbal nouns, do not in strictness involve any definite notion of time, and the connection must decide whether they are to be referred to the past, present, or future, thus Ije: means falling Num. 24 : A,, fallen Judg. 4 : 22, or about to fall Jer. 37 : 14. Their principal uses are the following, viz. : 1 . They express what is permanent or habitual, § 1 86. 2. «, (the Lord) ans loveth righteousness and justice Ps. 33 : 5, a generation Sll?n goeth, and a generation i I know not (how) I shall flatter i. e. how to flatter, Job 32 : 22'; 6 that 'sinxsasi ''Fis'i;; I knew and might flnd him i. e. how to find him, Job 23 : 3. Object of Vekbs. ^270. The object of a transitive verb ordinarily stands after both the verb and its subject, and if it is an indefinite noun is distinguished simply by its position or by its rela- tion to the verb as determined by its meaning ; if a definite noun, or a demonstrative, relative, or interrogative pronoun, it may, at the pleasure of the writer, be further distinguished by prefixing to it ris the sjgn of the definite object ; if a personal pronoun, it is suffixed either to fis? or to the govern- ing verb. a. Considerable liberty is allowed in respect to the position of words, particularly in poetry; although, according to the natural order in Hebrew, the verb stands first, its subject next, and its object last, nst D^nbiJ X'na 0";Hiari Gnd created the heavens Gen. 1 : 1, this is liable to any alteration that emphasis may require: the subject may precede the verb, and ths ob- ject may stand between them or before them both. b. A noun, which is the direct object of a verb, may receive nx , whether it is definite by signification, as a proper noun, God tempted Dn"iaX"nX Abraham Gen. 22:1, or is made so by the article, God saw "nsrj-nx the light Gen. 1 : 4, a pronominal suffix, take, now, "'ri3'ia"ns my blessing Gen. 33:11, or construction with a definite noun, Jacob called nipan D^B■n^5 the name of the place Gen. 35:15. The particle nx is not essential in any of these cases and is often omitted, particularly in poetry. If several definite nouns are connected together as the object of a verb, or if a verb has more than one definite object, ns may be repeated before each of them, / have given nxin T'nxn-rK this torad... ij^isn-ntj the Kenite •'JSisri-nKi and the Kenizzite, etc., etc., Gen. 15: 18-21 ; they stripped P)fa'i''-nx Joseph inspia-n^ of his coat Bifcsn nsn^-nx the full-length coat 300 SYNTAX. §27i Gen. 37: 23; or it may stand before a part of them only. Deut. 12: 6, or it may be omitted altogether, Deut. 11:14. In a very kw instances the article is dropped after fix, which of itself indicates the definiteness of the noun, he reared up for himself rizk'a-Di< the pillar 2 Sam. 18:18; and carver strengthened fi^STiS gilder Isa. 41:7, where the omission of the article is poelic, §247. c. Pronouns with ns: fij'nK this ye shall eat her. 11:9; put fij."nx this (fellbw) in the prison 1 Kin. 22:27; "iliJst Hx whom they have cast into the prison Jer. 38 : 9 ; he knew niDS'iirx nx what his youngest son had done to him Gen. 9:24; SD^H "'STiX whom hast thou reproached? Isa. 37:23; it does not occur before the neuter na . It is also extended sometimes to the following words, which partake to a certain degree of the pronominal character, h'3 all, every, Gen. 1:29, 13^X any one, each Ex. 21:28, inx one 1 Sam. 9:3. With personal pronouns, Ctins T|'^2'?5 Gen. 32:1, or n3ia''1 Gen. i8 : 20 and he blessed them. > •■ -:(T :- § 271. Many verbs, which are not properly transitive, are nevertheless capable of a transitive construction ; thus 1. Verbs signifying plenty or want : D'^ipr^O K^tt n;>an the house was full (of) men Judg. 16 : 27, Q"'^"'!!? rrBn ""nyii? I am sated (with) burnt-offerinffs of rams Isa. 1:11, -i) xrhn we lacked every thing i^\. ^^■.\'^. Here belongs that pecuhar Hebrew idiom, which expresses abundance by such phrases as the following : the hills i^n npD^n shall run (with) milk Joel 4:18, mine eye D^'B '^'T I'unncth down (with) water Lam. 1 : 16 ; D'^bitD'sp i53 n^y it had all come up (with) thorns i. e. was overgrown with them, Prov. 24 : 31. 2. Verbs signifying motion may have for their object the place which it immediately concerns, whether it be directed upon it, to it, or from it, l3'i'Bn-b3 ri? ^fbh and we went (through) all the wilderness Deut. 1:19, and figuratively, nip'72 5jbn walking (in) righteousness Isa. 33:15, 'T'i'n isn*l and they came into the city Josh. 8 : 19, Tiyrrnx ^s^i; they went out (of) the city Gen. 44 : 4. 3. Intransitive verbs may, as in other languages, govern then- cognate noun, DiSn ''ntiSn / have dreamed a dream Gen. 37:9; *1£013 oic-TiSOi'T and they lamented there a lamen- tation Gen. 60 : 10 ; 'lb^f^^ bnih ye will he vain a vanity i. e. utterly vain Job 27 : 12 ; or even one from a different root if ^272 OBJECT OF VERBS. 301 it be related or analogous in signification, "Tii^il? s^^il? nan I have been zealous a (jreat fury Ti^ck. 8:2, tn^fen ']i»is I shall sleep death i. e. the sleep of death, Ps. 13 : 4. 4. Any verb may take as its object a noun which defines the extent of its application, T'b'^'i-ni} nSn he was diseased in his feet 1 Kin. 15 : 23 ; only b'^as xissn in the throne will I he greater than thou Gen. 44 :40; Xt) '^'^'SiP^ ye perish as to the way \. e. lose the way Ps. 2:12. a. By an impersonal construction of passive verbs tlieir subject is some- times converted into the object, whicii in fact it logically is, y^xriTlx ^ni dandum est terram, let the land be given Num. 33 : 5, ''•jia^-nN Hija'nb 15«1 WS and it was told to Rebekah (i. e. some one told her) the words of Esau Gen. 27:42, so Gen. 17:5, Ex. 10:8, Lev. 10: 18, 2 Sam. 21: 11, etc. This construction ia sometimes extended to neuter verbs in familiar phrases, which have become associated with an active idea, I2'nrt"nx ^''s'^sa S'i'' is ' T T - ■-•1 ■■• " 1 let not be evil in thine eyes (i. e. do not regard as evil) the thing 2 Sam. 11 : 25, 1 Sam. 20 : 13, Josh. 22 : 17, Neh. 9 : 32. In 2 Kin. 18 : 30 -i^ifl-nK injn the city shall be given, the verb agrees with "i^S notwithstanding its re- ception of the sign of the object: nx is omitted in the parallel passage, Isa. 36 : 15. b. A noun, about which a statement is to be made, sometimes stands absolutely and is preceded by the sign of the object, bsj i'nafiTN as for the iron, it fell 2 Kin. 6:5; b^n itisx nbis-ba-nx as for all these (they were) menqf valour 3u(ig.2Q:4i; "iniprrnx as for my statutes they did not walk in them Ezek. 20: 16. Some regard riN as the sign of the object in such passages as ailfiTiNI ''^S.vJ K3 1 Sam. 17:34, and refer to the fact that the Arabic conjunction is followed by the accusative when it is used in the sense of together with ; more probably, however, rs* is the preposi- tion with, 5238. 2, and the passage is to be rendered the lion came and (that too) with the bear, so Num. 3:26, 1 Sam. 26: 16, 1 Kin. 11:25, etc. ^272. 1. When a noun or pronoun is regarded as the indirect object of a verb, the relation is indicated by means of the appropriate preposition. 2. Many verbs vary their construction without any ma- terial difference of meaning according to the form of the con- ception in the mind of the speaker, or writer, being followed by one preposition or by another or by none at all, as he views the relation as direct or indirect, and if the latter, under one aspect or another : thus, they went out from the city may be expressed by the direct relation, n'^i'nTN ixs|; Gen. 44 : 4, 302 SYNTAX. §273 or by the indirect, T'yn-jtt iks;; Josh. 8 : 22 ; finb? to fight is followed by Dy with Josh. 10:29, by a in (^la in earn) ver. 31, by ^? against ver. 38, by riS Judg. 12 : 4. a. A number of verbs are indifferently construed with a direct object or with i to. in reference to, thus, ansj to love any one and to have love to any one, NS"} to cure and to perform a cure for any one, SiUJin to saue and to grant salvation to any one, rihio to destroy and to firing- destruction to any one. 6. As the object of an action may, in certain cases, be regarded as the instrument with which it i^ performed, some transitive verbs also admit a construction with 3 with, thus ibid iirpn blow the trumpet Hos. 5 : 8, "IDTO3 sfiP'^'] and he blew with the trumpet Judg. 3:27; D^'i^n iUnQ to spread forth the hands Ps. 143 : 6, but followed by 3 to spread forth with the hands Lam. 1 : 17. 3. By a condensed style of expression {construdio praeg- nans) prepositions are sometimes connected with verbs, to whose meaning they are not strictly conformed ; thus, motion may be suggested by the preposition though the verb of it- self implies no such idea, ynsb nb^ri thou hast profaned to the ground i. e. profaned by casting to the ground, Ps. 89 : 40, ^~?'D"''? i^''i? ^"^tis theg trembled one unto another i. e. one turned tremblingly to another, Jer. 36:16, "'ini?? C'b'i ''?-i]?» thou hast answered (by saving) me from the horns of the uni- corns Ps. 22 : 22. § 273. Some verbs have more than one object, viz. : 1. The causatives of transitive verbs: ^^liiia-ns ipibssiini DntoSTis and I will make thy oppressors eat their own flesh Isa. 49:26; n|s"b2-nx ^isifiii S3 he would not have caused us to see all these things Judg. 13 : 23 ; bsnto^-ns* ns^rii;? he shall cause Israel to inherit it Deut. 1 : 38. 2. Verbs whose action may be regarded under different aspects as terminating upon different objects, or which, under the rules already given, may take a direct object of more than one kind, all iPii* ri^S *i©!!? which God commanded him Gen. 6 : 22 ; D-^^nn-bl ns bfe'itei •'b-nx nninb to teach the chil- dren of Israel all the statutes Lev. 10:11: iiiis-53-ric tr^sn ''nb thou hast smitten all my enemies on the cheek Ps. 3:8; §273 OBJECT OF VEEBS. 303 O^P oi'ir'"'^ lift up your hands to the sanctuary Ps. 134 : 2 ; sraina obri'i and he shall discomfit them a discomfiture Deut. 7 : 23. 3. The instrument of an action, the material used in its performance, its design, or its result, is often regarded as its secondary or remote object, l^s itis Ittan^l and they over- whelmed him with stones Lev, 24 : 23 ; BJjai? DrJS Pi'isn'i and thou shall gird them with a belt Ex. 29 : 9 ; thy seed 3>'Ht^"'^i?^ niansn-ns with which thou shall sow the ground Isa. 30:23; nB» DnsH'ns nsi»5 and he formed the man of dust Gen. 2:7; rrinbiB ifei* for which I have sent it Isa. 55:11; nn';^ naria DiiaSinTi!* and he built the stones into an altar 1 Kin. 18:32. a. The person affected by an action, of which he is not the immediate object, is occasionally regarded as its remote object, though not so fre- quently as in English, '^Jnn; 3Mn y^N thou hast given me the land of the south Judg. 1 :15, comp. in the same verse, "'^ finnsi; TlilbcJ ns^ they did i"i3\U*1 u;''St rjbx and they hired of the king of Maacah a thoicsand men 1 Sam. 10:6. The same thins occurs in a few instances after intransitive verbs, ""sViia he grew up to me as to a father Job 31 : 18; "'SFias did ye fast unto me Zech. 7:5. 4. Some verbs may govern the subject and predicate of a subordinate clause, ios y©"; t^sib to know wickedness (to ho) folly Eccl. 7 : 25, the latter, if it be an adjective or par- ticiple, virill remain without the article, § 259.^2, Dfisx ''ri?^?!? Tjistiia Thave heard Ephraim bemoaning himself ier. 31 : 18, pi'JiS ''ti"'ST ^TjA thee have I seen righteous Gen. 7:1. 5. If an active verb is capable of governing a double object, its passive may govern the more remote of them, D?r'^"'? "li^S fiii? DJ!)r'''??^ cind ye shall be circumcised in thefiesh of your foreskin Gen. 17 : 11, ons T"!'?0 '^'^'^ and the land was filled with them Ex. 1 : 7, ii^pM ?^'^|5 rent as to his coat i. e. with Ms coat rent 2 Sam. 15 : 32, nirj? n^iiia sent (or charged) with a painful message 1 Kin. 14 : 6. 304 SYNTAX. § 274 Adverbial Expressions. §274. The predicate of a proposition may be further quahfied 1. By adverbs, which commonly stand after the words to which .they refer, 1's'm 'aitsTisn^ and behold (it was) very good Gen. 1 : 31 ; MS'in oypt'^ and he was greatly provoked '^^. 3 : 33 J I am ISM oiinn i^isiB thy exceeding great reward prop, thy reward very much Gen. 15:1. a. Adjectives belonging to the subject may of course be qualified in the same manner as though they were found in the predicate. 2. By nouns used absolutely to express the relations of time, place, measure, number, or manner. a. Thus, time when : D'^nnsl ^jjbj 2~S evenrng and morning and noon will I pray Ps. o5:18; tarry here nb'^|n lo-night Num. 22:8; Gideon came rrinaxn iukt at the beginning of the watch. Time how long: and he shall shut up the house D"'B^ n?3C? seven c/ai/s Lev. 14:38; the land rested niuJ Cijiaia eighty years iuAg.Z-.^Q. b. The place where : the absolute use of nouns in this sense is confined almost entirely to the familiar words, nns at the door n/Gen. 18: 1. Judg. 9:35, n^3 at the house of Gen. 38:11, Num. 30: 11, and a few proper names, onb n^a at Bethlehem 2 Sam. 2:32, bK-n-ia at Bethel Hos. 12:4. c. Measures of space: ftij niSN lliisd three cubits high Ezek. 41:22; he went Dli Tj'i^ a day^s journey 1 Kin. 19 : 4. d. Number: S"'OSB Vzii 210 return seven times 1 Kin. 18:43; he of- fered sacrifices obs "Bpa according to the number of them all Job 1 : 5. e. Manner, answering to the Greek adverbial accusative : ye shall dwell naa in security Deut. 12:10; ye shall not go nai-i loftily Mic. 2:3; the tribes went up bs'niUTis nils according to a law of Israel Ps. 122 : 4 ; thou shall not go there T^O'^ f^*?'?'? for fear of briers Isa. 7 : 25 ; to serve him inx oiia with one consent prop, shoulder Zeph. 3 : 9. 3. By nouns preceded by a preposition forming a qualify- ing phrase. a. For the meanings and usage of the several prepositions see the lexicon. §275 NKGLECT OF AGREEMENT. 305 Neglect of Ageeement. § 275. The general rule that verbs, adjectives, and pro- nouns agree in gender and number with the noun to which they respectively relate, is subject to some remarkable excep- tions ; the principal of which are the foUpwing, viz. : 1. When the predicate adjective or verb precedes the noun it often prefers a primary to a secondary form, that is to say, the mascuhne may be used instead of the feminine and the singular instead of the plural. The reason of this is that the attention is not so particularly drawn to the acci- dents of gender and number in the subject until it is uttered, and consequently the predicate is not required to conform so precisely to it. a. Thus, the masculine for the feminine: 1''^Nrt tnx Ktoj'xb the land could not bear them Gen. 13:6, nsia}"; •D'^sO'ia piHT salvation is far from the wicked Pa. 119:155, ni338.a li^n tremble ye careless women lea. 32:11. The singular for the plural: ?)"'?.3'i N3^ let thy words come to pass Judg. 13 : 12, ti-^BBUJa l^J upright are thy judgments Ps. 119: 137, n''ni3a ni3!i;x her wounds are incurable,or the singular maybe understood distributively, each of her wounds is incurable Mic. 1 : 9. The masculine singular for the feminine plural : fTisabs as'^ itb reproaches cease not Mic. 2 : 6, ^'ds*— is min until calamities be overpast Pa. 57 : 2, DifcJJ 'ii"T!';1 and there were to him wiiies 1 Kin. 11:3. 6. When the predicate consists of several verbs or adjectives, one of which precedes and the rest follow the noun, the latter must agree with it, while the first may be put in its primary form, niKa in^ let there be lights . . . nnkb fl-'n'J and let them, be for signs Gen. 1 : 14, niis,' D-'liJJSt ih^l cxao ''OTi and there were men who were defiled Num. 9:6. In 1 Kin. 10 : 12 two verbs are put in the masc. sing, with a plural subject. c. The predicate, even when it follows the subject, occasionally departs from it in gender or number, retaining its primary form ; this takes place with passive or neuter verbs of familiar occurrence, and which are proba- bly used impersonally as the same verbs are elsewhere, §271.4. a, the sons of Jacob ii'lh"' "lius. whom (his wives) 'AacZ born to him prop, there had been born to him Gen. 35:26, comp. Gen. 4: 18, 46:22, 27, ''? n\n n^;•2"'?^ there was to me (i. e. I had) house-born servants Eccles. 2:7, comp. Gen. 47:24, Ex. 12:49, 28:7, Num. 9:14, 15:29, Deut. 18:2, 1 Chron. 24:28, 2 Chron. 17: 13, nJjn nbbs it was dark prop, darkness Gen. 15: 17. The disposition to recur to their primary form discovers itself in a very Cew instances in qualifying adjectives when separated from the noun to which 20 306 SYNTAX. § 275 they belong, pjni fibina mn a great and strong wind 1 Kin. 19:11 ; in Ps. 63:2, qsjl njs-'j'nsjta quoted by Nortlheimer as an additional exam- ple the second adjective may agree not witli y^lK but with the pre- ceding noun, '''yO'2 for thee lon^s my Jiesh, in a dry land, and weary. Alex, in loc. 2. Collective nouns may have verbs, adjectives, and pro- nouns agreeing Avith them in the plural, li^'?!^'^ °?'7 ^'^'^'?!'5 and the people hasted and passed over Josh. 4:10, rriinbf 'jsjir lost sheep Jer. 50 : 6, Q'''01J5 D#i3 vHsyfiQ all the congregation, all of them are holy Num. 16:3. a. When a predicate consists of more than one verb or adjective, the first sometimes agrees witli it formally in the singular and the rest logically in the plural, nBip-n!* siin'J !Tiyri"i3 sian^ and all the congre- gation lifted up and uttered their voice Num. 14:1; IsaOfl DrfJ 'jK^Jl and the people believed and they heard Ex. 4:31. 6. The noun yii* land, earth, -which, is properly a feminine singular, may, when it is put for its inhabitants, be construed with the masculine plural, 2 Sam. 15:23, Ps. 66:4. Names of nations borrowed from those of their progenitors, as Israel, Edom, Amalek, may be strictly construed in the masculine singular, Ex. 17 : 11, Am. 1 : 11, or as a collective in the mas- culine plural, Hos. 8:2, Ob. ver. 6, 2 Sam. 10: 17, or again in the feminine singular, whether this arises from a prominent reference to the land or from the frequent personification of a people as a maiden, 2 Sam. 10: 11, Jer. 13 : 19, 49 : 17 ; so DS people in the following examples, T|BS nxon thy people has done wrong Ex. 5: 16, naiiii csn the people dwelling Judg. 18:7. Different constructions may be united in the same passage, Jer. 48:15, Hos. 14:1. 3. Nouns, which are plural in form but singular in sig- nification, commonly have verbs, adjectives, and pronouns agreeing with them in the singular, cn'bK sna God created Gen. 1:1, ira^i 1ib':?a its owner shall he put to death Ex. 21:29, nicj? t!<-y^'&, a hard master \?,^. 19:4, "^a^W? la-innn thy youth is renewed Ps. 103 : 5. a. When the word Gin'Vs refers to false deities, the sense is plural and it is construed accordingly, 'TTl^^ f^ls these are thy gods Ex. 32 : 4, 8, nin'bx llirsi^-n's so may the gods do 1 Kin. 19:2; but where it refers to the true God, it is with few exceptions construed in the singular. Yet see Gen. 20:13, 35:7, Ex. 22:8, Josh. 24:19, 1 Sam. 17:26, 2 Sara. 7:23. The exceptional construction in these and similar passages may have arisen from the attention being directed to the Supreme Being in general, and to the fulness or variety of his manifestations without spe- ^376 NEGLECT OF AGREEMENT. 307 cific reference to the divine unity, and may, besides, involve an allusion to tlie personal distinction in the Godhead. See Alexander on Ps. 11 : 7 and 58:12. 4. Plural names of inanimate or irrational objects of either gender are occasionally joined with the feminine singu- lar, iri"'^'»? ai'^SR ""ito iTiisn? Hi''i ieasts of the field pant for thee Joel 1 -. 20, n-iniSD. jriiicn its floods wash away Job 14 : 19, nnrn^ '^i^.. pangs have taken her Jer. 49 : 24, fiSS'i n''in wild leasts, their lair Isa. 35 : 7. a. In objects devoid of personality the individual is of small account, and may be easily sunk in the mass. A pluralis inhumanus may conse- quently be regarded as equivalent to a collective, the proper form of vyhich is the feminine singular, § 198, and words belonging to it may be dealt writh accordingly. The same principle prevails in the construction of neu- ter plurals in Greek, ra ^Sa Tpi\a. 5. Masculine verbs, adjectives,- and pronouns are some- times used when females are spoken of from a neglect to note the gender, if no stress is laid upon it, O^^'^v!'?!^ (^nd they (queens and concubines) praised her Cant. 6:9; the Lord deal kindly oiiaS' with you (Ruth and Orpah) as Qfi''to? ye have dealt Ruth 1:8; ''lb*? my dead (Sarah) Gen. 23:4; "vrm ^m thou art destroyed Jer. 4:30; this last passage may, however, be rendered thou, it is destroyed, what wilt thou do ? 6. Singular predicates and pronouns are sometimes em- ployed in a distributive sense of plural subjects, tf^Sa ^^"s^^ they that bless thee shall each be blessed Num. 24 : 9 ; Tpf^jy^ trar niia they who profane it shall every one be put to death Ex. 31 : 14 ; isiap ^T^P;;' 'O'^pyi'^ ni?7? they take away the right- eousness of the righteous from each of them Isa. 5 : 23. §276. 1. When the subject consists of two or more words connected by the conjunction and, the predicate, if it precedes its subject, may be put in the masculine singular as its primary form, ^ip) nnin on'a i52^n and from them shall proceed thanksgiving and a voice Jer. 30 : 19, or it may be put in the plural, referring to them all, T^O?) '^^'^ 'i®?^^ 308 SYNTAX. § 277-279 and Moses and Aaron did so Ex. 7:20, or it may agree with the nearest word, pni*'? n'j'ip iij!?5 and Miriam and Aaron spake Num. 12 : 1 ; Tt^^^?- f^J?*? W^^, ^"^ f^to"' and thj fathers have not Jcnoton Deut. 13:7. 2. If the predicate follows a compound subject it is conjmonly put in the plural, though it may agree with the principal word to which the others are subordinate, '^^'^^) ''?» aiis / luith my maidens will fast prop, and my maidens Est. 4:16, S3 ai!ibi? ni© i/ear hy year Deut. 14 : 23, "1)533 1)735 in the morning, in the morning i. e. every morning 2 Sam. 13 : 4, as'iSb im-tjix "im-ffl-'X one man for each tribe Josh. 3:12; so with numeral adjectives, ^ 252. 4, T^yit n?3ia by sevens Gen. 7 : 2, and adverbs, Wa 'dTQ little by little Ex. 23 : 30. 2. Plurality, "I'ivi'n generation and generation i. e. many generations Deut. 82 : 7, lj?^ ijj lj?^ ij? lib li lib li pre- cept upon precept, precept upon precept, line upon line, line upon line Isa. 28:10, 13, fin5«a n'isa pits on pits Gen. 14:10; or with the implication of diversity, pisi '(3^ a weight and a weight- i. e. weights of two sorts Deut. 25 : 13, al?J al? a double heart Ps. 12 : 3. 3. Emphasis or_ intensity, p'lS p"S justice, justice i. e. nothing but justice Deut. 16 : 20, pb» pb» exceeding deep Eccl. 7 : 24 ; so with adverbs, ISM 'i&'q mightily, mightily Gen. 7:19, and even a conjunction, l^iisi 1?^! because even because. a. Sometimes the second word is put in a different gender from the first, n':S(2ia!i isioa all kinds of support Isa. 3:1, comp. Jer. 48:19, or a different number, D';irj'ian niari a. heap, tiro heaps Judg. 15:16, ir^i:? nl'iill-l Eccl. 2:8. Or a cognate word may be employed, nHfflal niaia ica«/e and desolate Ezek. 6 : 14, pnaa rici Lev. 23 : 3. 310 SYNTAX. §281,282 6. Instances occur of triple repetition, ttil^i? IJJiTf; llJi"li3 holy, holy, holy. Isa. 6 : 3, '}''is y-ii I'-iX O earth, earth, earth, Jer. 22 : 29' Jer. 7 : 4, Ezek. 21 : 32, Ex. 25 : 35.' §281. A separate pronoun may be added to a pro- nominal sufBx for the sake of emphasis, ''5S« inTO my dying, mine 2 Sam. 19:1, ^'ini"' 'iT lilJN oblique case of the relative pronoun, §74, §285. 1; the preposition a with a pronominal suffix, §283. VERSE 12. «aiin5 Hiphil future of ^s and sb verb, §144. 1, §162, with Vav Conversive, the accent remaining on the ultimate, §147.5, §166.4. insiab suffix of third person, §220. 1. d, singular in dis- tributive sense referring to the preceding collective, §275. 6. VERSE 13. !ii»ibT» ordinal number, §227. 1, §252. 1. 320 GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS VERSE 14. ''n;i lack of agreement with subject, ^275. 1. tins'!? masculine noun in the plural, §200. c, class III. from an lb root, §190. 3. bi^anb the construct form of the infinitive used with pre- positions, § 267. h. "^yTi preterite with Vav Conversive, §100. 1, §265, in the plural because following the noun, § 275. 1. 3. VERSE 15. Tisn!: Hiphil infinitive construct of iy verb, §153. 1. VERSE 16. ''^ti cardinal number, §223. 1, joined with noun, §250. 2 (2), without the article, §251. 4. D''b':^n qualifying adjective with the article after the noun, §249.1. fajsn . . . li'iiin class I. form 2, §185. 1, emphatic use of the positive degree, §260. 2 (2). nbffi'a'a noun of class III., §190, in the construct state, §214. 1. h, the following noun denoting the object, §254. 9. iDiaaisn noun of class II. from a,n »'» root, §187. 1. e. VERSE 17. in^i from is verb inp, §129.1. Qln'S sign of the definite object with a pronominal suffix, §238'. 2. VERSE 18. bi v3nb|i . . . life'ab'i construct infinitive with the preposi- tion, §267.3; Metheghwith 1, §45. 2.fl;. GENESIS CHAPTER I, 321 VERSE 20. tl6i»: Piel future of l'» verb, §154. 2. VERSE 21. D5''|Fin plural of lit? , §199; the Hhirik of the ultimate is long, §19. 1. nteann Kal feminine partiqiple, §205, with the article, §249.1. "iiBS the object of the verb li^^ though without the ap- propriate pronominal suffix, §285. l.«. nnJi'ab plural noun with plural suffix, § 220. 2. ^. VERSE 22. T)T'^ Piel future of ^ Guttural verb, §116.4, §121. 1, with Vav conversive, § 99. 3. a, no Daghesh-lene in a since the preceding Sh'va is vocal, §25. lasb the preposition with Tsere, §231. 3. «, so as to say i. e. in saying. lin, T^^ Kal imperatives of nh'i, nn&, §169.1. a'l,'? Kal apocopated future, §171.1, Hhirik short though accented, §19. 1. VERSE 24. -wm construct of nfn, §214.1, with i paragogic, § 218. Methegh, § 45. 2, Daghesh-forte omitted, § 25. VERSE 26. nipw Kal future of nir», §109.1, §168, in the plural number, §275.3. a. iSttbaa preposition, §231.1, Segholate noun, class I., §183, and pronominal suffix, §221.5. 21 322 GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS. ?R-i:) from n-in, §169.1. ninn preposition, §231.2, construct of the collective nouii nin, §198, §214.1, §216.1; no Daghesh-lene in 5, §22. « (5). TERSE 2'7. na|75i IST predicates, §273.4, and consequently in- definite. : DfiS pronoun, referring to both genders put in the mas- culine, § 276. 3. VERSE 28. nffiSDl conjunction T, §234, imperative Kal of OM, §84.4, and pronominal suffix, §101. Kibbuts is long, §19.1. VERSE 29. ""STifij from 'jns , §130.1, preterite in the sense of the present, §262. 1. h. n^in,'? singular, referring formally to the nearest collective subject, §276. 1, or taken distributively, § 275. 6. VERSE 30. p^733-ni; , ns before is without the article, § 270. c. VERSE 31. "IS^ position of adverb, §274. 1. • iiBiBn Di,"' article omitted before the noun, §249. 1. c. II^DEX I. SUBJECTS TREATED FULLY OR INCIDENTALLY. The numbers in this and the following Indexes refer to the Sections of the Ch'ammar. Abbreviations 9. 1. Absolute infinitive. See Infinitive abso- lute. Abstract nouns, feminine 198, plural 201. 1. a, c. Accents 28, use in cantillation 28. J, forms and classes 29, meaning of names 29. 6, like forms distinguished 30, position of 32-35, aid in distinguishing words 34, change of position 35, effect of Vav conversive 33. 4, 99. 3, 100. 2, in place of Methegh 89. 3. 6, 45. 6, give sta- bility to vowels 60. 1. a, vowel changes produced by 64. Accents, consecution of in prose 36-39, poetic 31, consecution of 40-42. Accents pause 37. 2. a, position of 35. 2. Accentuation double 39. 4. a, 42. a. Addition of letters 50. 3. Adjectives in place of participles of neuter verbs 90, 185. 1. a, formation of 185. 2, expressing permanent or variable quali- ties 185. 2. a, intensity 187. 1, 189, defects 18Y. 1. 6, diminutives of color's 188, declension of 217, qualifying nouns 249. 1, qualifying nouns in the con- struct 286, predicate 259. 2, compari- son of 260, emphatic use with verbs 282. c. Adjectives numeral 223-227, 250-252. Adverbial idea expressed by a verb 269. a. Adverbial expressions 274. Adverbs 235, with suffixes 236, as the sub- ject 242. c, numeral 252. 4, position of 274. Affixes 33. Agreement neglected 275-279. Aleph, sound of 3. 4, used as a vowel-letter 11. 1, in a few verbal forms 120. 2, 122. 2, 156. 3, once in 3 f. s. suffix 220. 2. 6, otiant 16. 1, with Mappik 26, with Daghesh forte (?) 121. 1, substituted for He in Chaldee 51. 3, in Niphal infini- tive 91. 6, in Hiphil 94. o, 6, in Hith- pael 96. a, in feminine ending of verbs 86. 6, and nouns 196. ...106. a ...111.3. o ...38. 1. a ...216. 2. a ...260. 2(2) ...106. d ...166.4 LEVITICUS. 2; 16.... §71. a (3) 4: 13. ...60. 3. a 23, 28.... 160. 5 6: 21. ...61. 4. a, 206. c 22.... 119. 1 24.... 220. 2. a 6: 14.... 114 16.... 96. a 7: 38.... 216. 1. a 8: 3....119. 1 9 : 7. . . .98. 1. a 10: 4....39. 4. u 11.... 273. 2 12.... 39. 3. b 18.... 271. 4. a 19.... 230. 2. 6 11: 7....126. 1 9.... 270. c 18.... 229. 4. 6 32.... 38.1. a, 264. 4 39.... 71. oC3) 42.... 4. a 43.... 164. 2 44. . . .96. 6, 242 13: 3....268. 3. a 4.... 27, 67. 2 (2) A, 220. 1. b 10,21....71. n(3) 61, 62.... 139. 3 65, 66 96. a 14: S....126. 1 13.... 176. 2 36.... 242. a 38.... 274. 2. o 42.... 156. 2 43.... 92. d, 94. 6 16: 24.. ..87 29.... 100. 2. a (2) 32.... 87 16: 4.... 104. ft 8.... 11. 1.0,188.0 31.... 71. a(3; 18: 4....263. 1 7ff....l72. 3 28. ...166. 4 19: 20.... 175. 6,282.0 20: 3.... 256 7. ...96. 6 21: 1....96. o 4. ...140. 4 6. ...97.1. a 9....71. a(3), 140.3 23: 3....280. 3. o 13....220. 1. 4 23 17.. ..5 26 1S....216. 2. a 22 106. a 30.... 112. 3 39. ...22. o 6. ...100. 2. o(l) 22.... 260. 1. a 23.... 273, 3 6.... 216. 2. o 21.... 172. 1 46.... 39. 3. A 9.... 100. 2. a (1) bis. 16. ...141. 3 18.... 92. d 25.... 132. 1 S3.... 92. e 34.... 172. 1 34, 36 66. a 34, 43. ...140. 6 7.... 251. 2. a 8.... 112. 3 23.... 246. 2. a NUMBERS. 10.. ..§13. A 47.... 96. o 33 96. a 26....271. 4. 6 49. ...65.1 23....22. o 13, 14.... 71. o (3) 22.... 131. 2 : 23 120. 3 7.... 121. 3 24.... 22. a : e....276. 1. A 7.... 249. 2 14.... 276. 1.^ 20 253. 2 23.... 45. 5 29....21. 1 35 4. a 4.... 67. 2 (2) o, 229. 3. o 6. ...263. 4 11. ...164. 2 16.... 71. o(2) 16.... 111. 3. a 20.... 196. d 26. ...111. 2. c 1....276. 1 4.... 260. 2(2)0 18. ...283. 2. o 32.... 166. 4 1....275. 2. u 2 262. 1 6 262.3 21. ...39. 3. A- 28.... 27, 220. 1. A 29.... 276. 1. c 3.... 276. 2 8, 4.... 104. ^ 10 140.4 28.... 125. 2 3.... 126. 2 6....104. « 8. ...276. S 14.... 104. t 21. ...131. 4 6....104. i 30 106. 0,140. 5 33, 36. ...44. a 6.... 269. A 8.... 274. 2. a 11. ...19. 2, 141.1, 267. A 25.... 119. 1 29.... 262. 1 22: 33....§106. a 87.... 141. 1 23: 7.... 19. 2, 119,8, 141. 1, 263. 5 13.... 141. 3 18. ...61. 6. a 19.... 121. 3 24.... 166. 5 26....139. 1, 2 27.... 104. J 24; 3....61. 6. o 4.... 266 7.'... 19. 2. A, 131. 8 9.... 276. 6 11.... 127. 2 15.... 61. 6. a 17.... 161. 2 21.... 168. 3 22....36. 1 26: 13....24. o 26: 30.... 246. 3. * 62....96. o 28: 4....a49. 1. A 6.... 264. 6. A 8.... 104. d 26.... 39. 3. A 29: 15.... 261. 1 30: 11.... 274. 2. A 31: 2.... 131. 3 12.... 46. 6. a 32: 5....271. 4. o 7. ...113.1 21.... 264. 9. A 33... .71.0(1), 246. 1. o 42.... 27 33: 30.... 111. 2. d 34: 6....61. 6. o 6, 7,9 24. a 18.... 131. 1 28. ...67. 2(2)A 35: 4....261. 2. o 19.... 125. 2 20.... 106. d DEUTERONOMY. 1: 2....§38.1.u 14.... 259. 2 16.... 226. 1. o 19 271, 2 22 99. 3. o 28 38. 1. o 36 38.1.0,249.1 38. ...273. 1 44. ...245. 6,(2 45.... 112, 3 2: 9 60,4,0 .12 203. 6, a 24,... LSI, 3 36 139,1 3: 4,... 260, 2(1) 13 246,1,0 17 216, 2, o 26....21. 1, 151. 2 4: 10.... 119, 1 11. ...99, 8. o 26,...44. A, 91, J 30.... 266. A 33....35. 1 41. ...219. 1. J, 266, d 6: 6-21.... 39, 4, u 8.... 27 9.... HI, 3. o 14.... 249. 1, c 17. ...27 24....71, a(2) 6: 4 4. o 26. ...45, 1 7: 2....§119, 1 5. ...126,1 10....92, c 13.... 104. h 16.... 106. o 17.... 264. 9. A 23.... 273, 2 24.. ..94, A, 112, 3 8: 8.... 86, 6 (3 pi,) 9,... 207, 2, o 16,... 66, 2, a, 86, A (3 pi,) 9: 3. ...112, 3 6.... 38, 4. 0,249, 2 14,... 98, 2 25.... 261, 4 26. ...119,1 10: 16.... 119, 3 17.... 80. 2 11: 12.... 247, o 14.... 270. A 18. ...249. 2. A 22..., 87. 88 (pi,) 12: 6,... 270. A 10.... 274. 2. e 31. ...45, 6 13: 3....111, 3, a 4. ...283,1 6.,., 66. A 7. ...276, 1 14.... 264, 6, a 14: 6....67, 2(3)o 7.... 196. c 17.... 229. 4. 5 22. ...280.1 16: 16. ...119. 1 18.... 126. 1 16: 1,...22. A 3.... 30, 2 20,... 280. 3 17: 2, 3,... 266. o 18: 2....275, 1, c 19: 6.,.. 114 15,... 43 20: 2,.., 19. 2, 119, 3 7....119, 1 21: 7..,. 13, A, 86, A (3 pi.) 8. ...83, c,(2) 11.... 214, 1, A 22: 7. ...126.1 24.... 265. 2 23: 6. ...263. 2. A 11. ...24. A 24: ,3, ...104. A 4.... 96. o 26: 4.... 168. 3 7 60 3. a 13.... 280. 2 26: 2, ...39, 4 5.... 264. 6. A 12.... 94. A, 113. 2 27: 4 106. o 7. ...24. o 28: 24.... 104. A 46.... 104. A 48.... 94. A 52.... 126, 1 67.... 164. 2 68.... 249. 1 69,... 165, 2, 226. 2. a 66 177.3 29: 11 108. o 80: 8 92. c 8, 4.... 104. h 11,... 166,1,205.0 20....39. 4, 87 31: 28.... 22, A 29 166, 1 82: 1....245. 2 334 INDEX II. S2: 6....5 228. 2. a 12: 21....5 65. 2. a 9:11....! 63. 2. 6, 2: 8....588,88(2f.> 7.... 104. A, 280, 2 13: 13.... 196. ft 95. ft 127. 1 8.... 11. 1. i, 94. 6 23.... 247. a 12.... 89 (f. ». & 9....88(pl.), 165, 10.... 63. c, 105. ft 14: 8....62. 2, 175. 1 m. pi.) 3 13.... 13. a 15: 36....203. 5. ft 13.... 96. ft 14.... 150. 3 .15.... 286. 3 38.... 22. a 14.... 89 16.... 139. 2 18.... 172. 4 66.... 22. a 24.... 220. 1, ft 3: 3.... 86. 6(2 f.) 21.... 111. 2. b 17: 1....30. 2 26. ...174, 6 4.... 16. 1,56. 2. a, 22.... 147. 4 18: 12, 14.... 86. ft (3 29....164. 6, 172.3 88 (2 f.), 106. a 26.... 104. /■,172. 3 pi.) 36.... 274. 2. ft 12....258. 3. 6 28....216.i. ft 20.... 88 38.... 91. 6 13.... 119. 3 29.... 262.1 19: 43.... 61. 6. a 48....75. 1 16. ...60. 3. 6 (2), 32.. ..24. ft, 67. 2 60.... 172. 4 63.... 140. 5 120. 1, 164. 2, (2)ffi 61.... 39. 1. a 10: 2....60. 3. ft(l) 251. 2. c 34 90 (pass.) 21: 10....227. 1. a 4.... 207. 1./ 20....220. 1. 6 36.... 35. 1, 86. ft 22: 5. ...87 9.... 243. 3 4: 1....147. 5 37.... 172. 1 12.... 45. 5 14.... 119. 4 15.... 104. c,! 37, 38.... 220. 2. c 16.... 119. 3 11: 1....254. 6 41.... 141. 2 17....271. 4. a 18.... 99. 3. a 33: 16.... 61. 6. a, 88 25.... 148. 1 25.... 91. 6,119.1 1 SAMUEL. (3 f.), 167. 3 27.... 44. 6 37.... 98, 2 21.... 177. 3 23: 7, 12.... 249, 2, a 40.... 260, 2 (2), 1: 1....5 285. o 24: 10.... 92, d, 282, a 203,4 3....219. 1. a 16.... 88 (pi,) 12: 4.... 272, 2 4.... 245. 3. 6 JOSHUA. 19....275. 3, a 6,,.. 230. 3. a 6....24. 6, 104. J 6.... 3. 1. a 8.... 263. 2 1: 1....I265. a 13: 2.... 248. a 9.... 104. d, 172. 4, 8. ...36. 2 JUDGES. 3....16. 1 254. 1 14.... 256 6, 7.... 90 (2f. B.) 14.... 88 (2 f.) 16. ...263 1 1: l....§265.re 6.... 119, 2 17.... 53. 2. a 2: 8.... 88 (pi.) 15.... 273. 3. a 8.... 93. ft, 246.5. 20. ...119. 3 14.... 249. 2. 6 2: 7.... 256 ft, 266, 3 24....104. i 16.... 157. 1, 164. 2 3: 15. ...246. 3. ft 12.... 275. 1, u. 28.... 119. 3 17, 18, 20.... 104. k 24.... 140. 6 23.... 273. 1 2: 5....24. c 18.... 112. 3 25.... 157. 1 14: 1....61. 6. a 10.... 119. 1 20.... 249. 2. ft 27.... 272. 2. ft 6. ...245. 5. d 13.... 203. 6. a 3: 3. ...246. 3 30....274. 2. a 11.... 261. 2. ft 22.... 88 (pi.) 9.... 131. 3 4: 19.,.. 164. 2, 262. 2 16....283. 2. a 27.... 91. 6 H....246. 3. u 20.... 104. a, 127. 2 18.... 61. 6. a 3: 2....268. 3. o 12.... 280. 1 21. ...11. 1.0,156.3 15: 16.... 280, 3, a 4....263. 1. 6 13.... 246. 3 22.... 266 16: 6....130. 1. ft 7....263. 1. A 14.... 263. 2. a 23.... 126. 1 13.... 112. 3 8....254. 9. 6 4: 4....251. 4. a 24.... 282. c 14.... 246. 3. a 19.... 263. 4 6.... 255. 3 5: 6....86. o, 141.1, 16.... 27 4: 8....266. 2. o a.... 88 (pi.) 249. 2. a 26.... 51. 2 12.... 268. 3 S....Wt.ff 7.... 24. c, 74, 74. a 26.... 160. 1 14...»75. 1 10.... 275. 2 8.... 92. d, 121. 1 27. ...271.1 19. ...148. 2 13.... 45. 5. a 12.... 46. 2. a 28.... 22. ft, 27, 223. 6: 10....104,?, 165. 3 23.... 127. 2 13.... 148. 3 1. a 12.... 88 (3f. pi,), 24.... 262. 1 15.... 199. c, 207. 17: 2....71.a.2 147. 4, 282 6. 5.... 125. 2 2. a 18: 7.... 94. a, 275. 14....246. 3. 6 7.... 40 26.... 88 (3 f. pi.). 2. ft 15.... 119. 1 13.... 282. c 105.6 29.... 93. ft 7: 8. ...119.1 17.... 166. 1 28.... 60. 3. ft (2), 30.... 4. a 8: 19.... 24. a 7; 7.... 60. 3. ft (2), 121.2 19: 6. ...19. 2. a, 89 0: 3....270. c 94. ft, 112. 2 31. ...263. 1 11.... 150. 1(2) 9.... 243. 2. a, 9.... 172. 3 a: 9....99. 3. 8 22.... 82. 6. a 246.3 21.... 246. 2. a 11.... 246. 3. 6 20: 13.... 46 24. ...245. 6. 6 8: 11.... 246. 3. a 14.... 249. 2. ft 15, 17.... 96. u 10: 1-8.... 100. 1 19. ...271. 2 15....250. 2(2)o ,26.... 224. a 4.... 251. 2. c 22.... 272. 2 17....74, 74. a 31.... 131. 2 6.... 266. 3 24.... 22. 6 20....73. 2. a 32.... 24. ft 6.... 165. 3, 273. 33.... 246. 2. o 25. ...249. 1. c 39.... 131. 6 3. a 9: 4....161. 1 31.... 230. 3. a 43.... 24. ft 13.... 165. 3 6. ...119. 4 34.... 119. 1 44....271. 4. 6 19.... 250. 2 (2) a 8. ...262. 2. a 36.... 268. 3. ft 21; 9.... 96. a 24.. '..24. 6 12.... 161. 1, 249. 7: 6. ...22. a 21.... 39. 3. 6 12: 3....38. 1. c 2. a 12.... 74. a 22.... 158. 3 7.... 91, c 13.... 126. 1 19.... 268. 1 25....258. 3. 6 13.... 119. 2 24....95. c, 172. 3 8: 1....166. 2 24 94. o 10: 11.... 38. 4. a, 39. 2. ...25 13: 6. ...260. 2(1) 1. a 10.... 224. a EUTH. S....149. 2 20.... 22, ft 11.... 229. 4. ft 19.... 86. 6 (3 pi.) 21....19. 2. 6, 65.0 24.... 86. ft (3 pi.), 19....111. 3. ft 1: 8. ...5 275. 6 245. 6. 6 26. ...74. a 9....89(f. pi.) 14: 1....73. 2. a 26.... 56. 4 9: 2....230. 2. o 11. ...46.4 22....94. c 29.... 272. 2 8.... 98. 1. a 13.... 25, 71. o(3). 24.... 111. 2. d 30.... 21. 1 9....63.2.ft,63.1. 88 (f, pi.), 91. c 19....10£/ 29.... 249. 2. c 31, 38.... 272. 2 a, 95. 6 32....167. 3, 172 4 11: 8....21. 1 10.... 89 (f. 0. & 20.... 60. 3. c, 196. 33.... 67. 2 (3) a, 14.... 94. ft m. pi.) d 164.3 INDEX II. 38c 14: S6....5141. 1 r 28 . 24... .§111. 2. b 21:11....§271. 4. a 16 : 28.. ..§264. 9. o 40.... 276. 3 80: 1....14. a 12.... 177. 3 29 262. 2. a 15: 1....126. 2 81: 2....94. c 22: 7.... 142, 2 17: 3....100. 1 5. ...111. 2. c 24....46. 1 14 177. 3 6.... 161. 2 83.... 160. 1 21 43 9.... 91. e 2 SAMUEL. 37, 40.... 238. 1. 6 IS : 1 262 1 19.... 157. 3, 172.4 40.... 53, 3. a. 111. 12....100. 2.0(1) 13....104. ff 80 181. 3 S0....100.2. a(l) 1: 4....5242. c ,2. c 16 : 4.... 284 6.... 91. 6,166.3 41....53, 2. 6, 132. 12.... 214. 2. b 9....256. c 1 32. ...273. 3 15....221. 2. a 10.... 99. 3. 6, 106.0 43....118. 3, 141. 3 42 175. 3 18....248. 8. 6,264. 15. ...131. 3 44.... 199. b 43 254. 9. o, 6. a, 257, 2 21.... 265. 1 48....238. 1. 6 274. 2 d 23....245. 3. a 26.... 166. 1 23: 1....160. 5 44 104. 6 17 :12....249. 2. c, 253. 2: 19. ...13. 6 6.... 33. 3, 140. 6, 19: 2.... 275. 3. a 2. b 27....66. o 221.6 4 274. 2 c 25....24. 6,104, A 32....274. 2. 6 8.... 199. 6 7 38. 1. o 26.... 73. 2. a, 275, 3: 2.. ..267. 1 27.... 24. 6 10.... 92. d 3. o 8.... 165. 3 24: 12.... 268. 2 11 276. 1. c S4....245.5.rf,265. 22.... 276. 2 13.... 253. 2 15.... 86. 2(2)6, 219.1 A, 271. 4. 6 4: 6....71. a(3) 85.... 14. a, 112.3, 6: 2.. ..164. 2 19.... 251. 4. a 265. b 6: 1....161. 2 1 KINGS. 20.... 9S. 1. o 42.... 172. 4 3....249. 1. 6 20; 9.... 39. 4 47. ...150. 2 6....16. 3. 6 1: 6. ...§243.1 13.... 229. 1. 6 65.... 245. 2, 249. 13.... 282. c 14.... -269, 2, a 27.... 96. o. 161. 4 2. o 16.... 263. 1 16....54. 1, 206. 6 86. ...172. 3 S6....249. 2. a 20.... 282. 6 21.... 87 89.... 91. 6 18: 1....105. a 23.... 66. 2 27....283. 2. 6 21: 1 46,1 0....168. 3 7 : 10.... 114 2 : 24. . . .106. a 8.... 48 7.... 260. 2 (2) a 8: 18.... 190. h 31.... 264. 6. 6 29.... 164. 2 9....15a. 1 10: 3. ...253. 2 3: 3....126. 1 22: 12.... 126. 1 17.... 119. 1 11,17....276. 2. 6 7.... 267. b 23.... 249. 2. 6 26.... 165. 1 ^ 20.... 243. 2 11: 1....11. 1. 6 15.... 147. 4 22.... 220. 2. b 24.... 177. 3 4: 6.... 160. 4, 215. 27.... 253. 2. a, 28.... 104. i 25.... 245. 6, 271. 1. « 270. c 29. ...148.1, 151.2 4. a 6: 3....253. 2. u 35.... 147. 4 19: 10.... 249. 2. b 12: 1,4.... 166. 3 10.... 264. 8 64.... 119. 1 13, 16.... 201. 2 4....249. l.c 11....260. 2(2)a 17.... 104. A 14.... 92. d 20.... 119. 1 21. ...269. a 13: 4....280. 1 25.... 63. 2. a 2 KINGS. 22.... 249. 1. c 31. ...264. 10 6: 16. ...10. a 20: 6....119. 1 32.... 168. 3 19. . . .132. 1 1: 2.... §249. 2. u, 13....271. 4. a 39.... 253. 1 21.... 207. 1. c 283.1 21.... 39. 4 14: 2, 3....16. 1 88.... 261. 4. a 6.... 36. 2,89.4 28.... 119. 1 7.... 38. 4. a, 158. 3 7 : 12. . . .249. 1. c 7..:.76. 1 81.... 254. 6. a 10.... 104. A 14.... 132. 1, 263. 1 10.... 172. 4 38.... 199. 6 19.... 57. 2(1), 87.... 220. 1. 6 10, 14.... 250. 2 42.... 260. 2 (2) a 180. a 44....251. 4. a (2)o 21: 2.... 219. 1.6 30....149. 1, 160. 4 8: 1. ...119.1 18.... 39. 4 3. ...92.6,221.3.0 15: 8. ...282. 6 48.... 86. 6(lc.) 2: 1....16. 3. 6 7. ...44 12.... 125. 2 9: 11. ...165. 2 10....93. c 12.... 44. a 23....275. 2. 6 10: 8.... 112. 3 11.... 18. 3. 4 14.... 66. 1(1), 106. 30.... 282. c 9.... 254. 8 16.... 208. 8. c a, 174. 4 82. . . .273. 6 12.... 275. 1. 6 21.... 166. 2 16.... 126. 1 34.... 287. 3 16.... 254. 3 , 22.... 165. 3 22: 2.... 165. 2 37....216. 1. e 11: 1....210. (J 24....261. 2. 6 23 : 11.... 94. d 16: 1.... 260. 2(1) 3.... 275. 1. u. 3: 4....268. 2. a 22.... 282. a 18.... 215. 1. 6 13....16. 1 23. ...119.1 24:14....245. 6. a 17: 9....248. 2. a 22.... 24. a 25....66. 4,111. 1 17.... 260. 1 10.... 140. 4 26....271. 4. J 27.... 263. 1 19.... 71. a (2) 12.... 71. ad) 39.... 57. 2 (2) a 4; 7....220. 1. 4 25: 7....94.a 22....223. 1. a 12:10....221. 5. a 16, 23.... 71. o. 2 8.... 164. 2 23.... 113. 1, 275. 12.... 164. 2 24.... 131. 1 14.... 157. 3 3. a '32.... 257. 3 26.... 73. 2. o 18.... 172. 5, 209. 18: 3.... 113. 2 13: 7. ...234. a 82.... 95. o 3. a IS. ...270. 6 12. ...75. 2 6: 1....39. 1. o 33.... 165. 3 19: 1....281 20.... 60. 3. 4(2) 8.... 112. 3 34....88(3f.), 167. 14....111. 2. 6 14: 2....71. o(2) 6....104.i 3 18.... 224. a 3.... 60.2.0,127.1 7....2a4. 9. 6 43.... 260. 2 (2) a 19.... 113. 2 6.... 278. 5 9.... 257 26:16....271. 4. 6 20: 1....267. 2 24....246. 3. a 18....46, 178. 1 22....246.3. a 4....119. 1 25.... 267. 3 6: 5....271. 4. 4 27 : 12.... 119. 1 6....1U. 2. ...161. 4, 199. c ....94. a ...234. a ...61. 6. a, 86. 6 (2 f.) 90 (2 f. 8.), 140. 2 . . .105. 6 ...104. t ...280, 3. ft ...131. 6 ...264. 6.6 ...161. 2 . . .104. ft ...177.3 ...91. c . . .94. ft . . .96. a . . .246. 3. a ...161. 5 ...57. 2 (3) li, 234. c . . .165. 3 . . .44. ft ...249. 1. c ...156.2 ...13. a ...245.3. 6 ...94. e, 112.5. c ...229.1. a . . .220. 1. 6 ...24. 6 ...139.3 ...278. 1 ...87,119.3 ...273.4 ...249. 2.4 . . .112. 3 ...16. 3. 6, 105. d ...46 . .91. 6, 131. 6 ...98.1. a ...246. 3. a ...249.1. t ...92. d ...164. 2 ...10. a ...268. 1 . . .13. a . . Ah. 1 . . .11. 1. ft ...44. a ...272. 3 . . .251. 1 ...113.2 ...266 ...209. 3. a . . .270. c ...56.4 ...249. l.c . . .92. d ...57. 2(2)0 . . .249. 1. c ...282, c ...175. 2 ...46,71.0(1) ...63.2.6,148.2 44: 46: 48: 82. 18.... §271.1 19 104. e 23.... 166. 1 25 160.4 7, 8. ...122. 2 8....96.a,111.2.(i 11.... 86. 6(2. f.) 20 43. 6 11.... 169. 1 19. ...280. 3. a 32.... 246. 3. o 49: 3 64. 4. o, 5. a 8. ...95. d 10.... 165. 1, 262. 4 11.... 88 (3 f. pi.), 98. 1 15, 17. ...275. 2. ft 18.... 45. 4 20.... 140. 24.... 104. 1,275.4 28.... 141. 1 37 86. ft (2 m.), 112. 3, 5. 0, 139. 3 60: 3.... 156. 2 6.. ..71. o 91. rf 6.... 275. 2 11. ...196. d 20 105. 2 23 9L a 27 111. 3. a 34.... 94. 6, 114, 158. 3 44.... 105. ft 61: 3. ...46 9.... 165. 2,3 13.... 90 (2 f. 8.) 30.. ..24. c 33.... 94. b 34 165. 2 50.... 151. 1 68.... 24. c, 149. 1 52: 13.... 254. 6. 6 LAMENTATIONS. (3), 1....33. 1,61. 6.0, 218 4.... 149. 1,199. a 8.... 141. 3 12.... 142. 1 16....207. 1.0,209. 1. o, 271. 1 17.... 272. 2. 6 20?... 60. 3. 6 (2), 92. a 6 8. ...126.1 11....92. o, 113.1, 2, 115 15, 16.... 74. a ....6 12.... 196. d 14.... 199. ft 22.... 64. 3, 216. 2. a 33....160. 2(p.l82) 42.... 71. ad) 45.../267. c 48.... 147. 2 53.... 53. 3. o, 160. 2 (p. 182) 58.... 168. 1 6 1....96. 6,177.3 3. ...43. 6 9. ...39.3. 6,45.5.0 4:14....§83.c.2, 123. 2 17.... 236. 2 5: 5.... 160. 5 EZBKIEL. 1: 4 6 11 14 2:10 3: 7 15 20 4: 3, 9, 12, 6:12, 13, 16, 6: 3. 10 10 : 17, 13: 2. 15: 5 16: 4, ..§53. 2. o 203. 5. a ..220. 2. c ....179.1.0,268. 1. a ...53.2.0,63.3.0 ...254. 10 ....139.8 ....88(f. pi.) ....54.1 ....199. a ....167. 3 ....220.1. 6 ...121. 3, 131.6 ....119. 1 ,...208. 3. c ....147. 4 ....173. 2 , . . .24. c ....93. 2 ,...280.3. o ,...118.4 . . .203. 6. o ...141. 1, 216. 2. a ,...196. c ...118.4 . . .66. 2 (2) a . . .165. 3 ...76. 1,119.3' ...90, (2 m. pi.), 176.1 ...249. 1. i; ...120. 2 ...264. 9. 6 ...167. 1 ...207.1.6,255. 1 ...199. . . .71. a (2) ...220. 1. 6 ...157. 3 ...24. ft, 71. a (2), 220. 2. c ...63. 1. o, 91. 6, c, 119. 1 . . .141. 3 ...104. i ...60. 4. a, 93. o, 95. c, 121. 1, 126. 1, 127. 1, 150. 5, 221. 6. 6, 282. a . . . .87, 96. o, 111. 3. o, 150. 5 10.... 99. 3. 6 ...86. 6(2f.) . . .256. 6 ...127. 1 ...173. 2 . . .60. 3. 6 (2), 120.1 ...14. o, 19. ft ...91. ft ...128 ...92. d. 220. 2. a . . .220. 1. ft . . .166. 3 ...86. 6 do.) . . .132. 2 . . .166. 2, 191. 4, 216. 2. a 17 18 15. ...§65. ft 23....88(f. pi.) 28.... 221. 6. ft 32.... 287. 1 19: 2.... 196. a! 20: 9 140.4 16.... 271. 4. 6 21. ...65. 6 27. ...119. 3 36 91. e 37 53. 2. a 21:16....24c, 177. 1 15,18 93. e 18.... 121. 1 19....219. l.o 21.... 180. a 26, 28. ...87 29.... 91. 6, 106. a 31.... 94. 6,196. c 32 280. 3. 6 33.... 111. 2. c 34.... 87 22:20 131.2 23: 6. ...111.1 18. 20. . . .97. 1. a 19.... 176. 3 42.... 21. 1 48....83. (;(2),16a 3 (p. 182) 49.... 166. 2, 220. 1. 6 10.... 197. A 11.... 140. 1 12.... 172. 1 28.... 128, 189. 6 6. ...57. 2 (3) a, 106. a, 126. 2 13. ...219. 1. ft 15. ...67. 2(3)o 2. . . .140. 2 9.... 19. 2. C, 221. 5. a 16....113. 1, 2 18.... 112. 6. c 21. ...234. o 27 : 3.... 90 (2. f. 8.) 8. ...156. 3 9.... 24.0,216.1. a 12.... 22. a 16 13. a 19.... 93. ft 23.... 64. 2 26.... 156. 3 ,96. 6 ,11. l.o,196.|l 60. 3. h (1), 221. 2. a ^nntiasi 99. 3. 6 ?ianDS 101. 3. a n3S"i njs 63. 1. c r T T ■.■ T 12^8 71. a (1) i^JS 46 imiS 131. 1 tJiDS 184 •lis 197. & i;s 71 "IDS 65, 71. a (1) "^SS 65. & - JT n^SS 198. 6 T • t: iDbS 71 ^5S 141. 3 (p. 175) Cl?S 84. 3. a (2) pis 112. 1 p;S 50. 1 D'''p:s 207. 2. e t|iDS 185. 2. a -nibDS 125. 1 nn^CNT 60. 3. c, 92. e !:|CS 110. 3, 112. 5. c, 115, 151. 2 qbs 112. 1 n£CS 111. 3. a, 112. 1 nSDS 151. 2 iSltpS 89 (f. s.) ^I^SpS 151. 2 tlDBDS 188 irises 104. y pBS 53. 3. b, 88 (1 c.) 10s 112. 5. 6 - T ncs 60. 3. c 'IBS 60. 3. c I'lCS 61. 6. a Q'leS 105. d nysn, Tiysi 160. 3 bysi 172. 4, 175. 3 1?!*;) 172. 4 INDEX III. 347 nws 113. 1 n|?sn 57. 2 (2) a iriysn 172. 4 ntoysi 172. 4 ■ll»:?551 57. 2 (3) a, 111. 2. f, 234. c qS (n.) 184. h, 207. 2 qS (conj.) 239. 1 D^1SS^? 104. f., 172. 3 TSS 112. '5. a nSi} 110. 3 ^SS 112. 1 0:'Si{ 203. 1 niBS'1 100. 2. a (1) "13 qi? 239. 2 (1) nbSS 198. a (2), 216. 1. 6 ISST 172. 4 DSS 235. 3 (1) TOtoSS 127. 3 niBSI 173. 3 T V T nsas 164. 5 yaas i83. c, i97. a niS'SSS 207. 2. a ISST 174. 4 Tl'liaS 105. d bSS 237. 1 nas 50. 3 ?i-lSS 101. 3. a nsnss 105. rf T V t: ■-■ 5^Sl|5S 105. h nipNI 99. 3. a BttipK 66. 3 D1J58) 99. 3. a DJJ3SI 56. 3 Dp«1 99. 3. a nS'lpXI 63. 1. c, 97. 1. b, 164. 5 SnSI 99. 3. a, 172. 4 ns-lSI 172. 4 D^S'li* 24. a na'isj 175. 3 OaiX 22. a T : T TO5118 207. 2. a, 214, » T : - ' 1. h, 223. 1 n-iya-is 225. 1 D^wans 223. 1 Dpyans 250. 2 (2) a Xi^yi 61. 4 l^a'IS? 61. 4, 196. 2 -nns 141. 1 ib-nns 19. 2 r\yy& 208. 3. 6 DttilS 82. 6. a iTlTatti-lS! 104. h ■\'r\'& 197. 6 niisf 139. 2 ini-isT 141. 2 nns 197. *, 200. a, 208. 3. h mi* 198 nms 198 iiinnni« eo. 3. c 1"IX 200. c. 208. 3. d V/n<^, 56. 3. a, 168. a, 174. 4 tflS 79. 2, 118. 1 •I'-IS 185.2.6,207.2.0 216. 1. e ■jians 200. a i^nS 194. 1 nimS! 235. 3 (3) inSar'-lS 56. 1, 105. b nijia-is 216. 1. c nii-is 197. c y"nS 51. 3, 63. 2. a, 197. b T"?^ 65 na-li? 61. 6. a, 219. 1 1i»a ns-is 22. 6 1?;3 nsns 22. & nni* 141. 1 (p. 175) ©■IS? 119. 1 nbiStttoS 180. a ©K 197. b, 201. 1 ffiS 67. 2 (1) inbsiBS 101. 3. a ai»S51 99. 3. a ni^inCS 210. c^ mO!* 216. 2. a niBS 200. 6, e, 207. 3 nilBK 197. a DpnO!^ 118. 3 ni»''iiii« 200 c B131?!!? 94. 6 bblBS 200. a, 210. e ni!53ffi« 216. 1. c nib?m 216. 1. c rtlBS 60. 2. a ! n^ffiS 60. 2. a ?inbTB!!i! 126. 1 •fiblCS;) 99. 3 348 INDEX III. ra-'ViaKT 99. 3 atS 82. 1. a (2), 112. 5. a TipffiXI 99. 3 yni^ 189 n2?BtiX1 98. 1. a Tvrawii 97. 1 aSffiS 183. c, 221. 6. a nyics 172. 3 UBISS 91. c rkm 207. 2. c n)51»i« 98. 1. a nplBSI 175. 3 naipllJX 98. 1. a nblj?CS1 98. 1. a nbplCST ,98. 1. a niZJS 74, 285 "I1BS{ (conj.) 239. 1 rViVs 200. c ' "T^nfflS 221. 5. d ^JiniBS 220. 2. c ?Ti"ltJS 221. 5. c? PffiX 205, 214. 1. 6 niCNT 172. 4 ^bbinffix 96. a yiB^PlBS 141. 6 m (n.) 207. 2. e nX, nS 58. 2. a, 238. 2, 270 -n« 43. a nS 43. a m (prep.) 287. 1, 238. 2 -nX 61. 5 FiS, nX 71. a (2) PN 71. a (2) snx 177. 3 nnx 11. 1. a nns? 71 nn«, nns 71. a (2) ■(ins 197. a, c lanns 96. a ipiS 71. a (2) ■inS! 61. 5 WS 112. 1, 172. 1 i'r?"'i?^J?^ 220. 2. c tfni? 65. a nsnS 65. a T AT bians 53. 1. cs, 183. c ■jtlX 210. c )m, ]ri« 71. a (2) nsnx , n-riK 71. « (2) ^;ns 177. 3 IjriS 207. 2. 6 niins 220. 1. b, 221. 6 55)5nS 105. 6 a 231. 1, 233, 267. b, 272. 2. 6 Sa 157. 2 n&a 34 nx*i 34 T T nsit 156. 4 D'lbnsa 229. 4. 6 • T t; T ^S3 156. 2 1S3 (pret.) 156. 2 isil 166. 4 D'^JJTSa 57. 2 (2) a •iSa 216. 1. a. D^Stpxa 22. a nSS 121. 1 ISa 60. 3. c, 197. a ffisa 60. 3. c nsai, nsa^i i6. i , : T ' T TlSil, flSail 100. 2. T ' T T a(l) bna 57. 1, 187. 1. e V T ' ■^brja 237. 2 (4) ISa 84. 3. a (3) n?a 90 15ia 22. a, 197. 6, 200. e^ 221. 5. a 153 87 fTlSa 207. 1. a nn'152 86. 6 (2 m.) niSa 87, 210. a bbaa 237. 2 (2) na'ia ei. i b'la 80. 2. a (3) nsnana 4. a ina 57. 2 (4), 184. 6 nrna i77. i •jiara 245. 5. 6 Dbfflsna 91. 6 T : IT • : bna 121. 1 nwna 21 6. 2 triana 201. 2 ■jnia 61. 2. a, 184. a, 197. a, 208. 3. 6 a'ina 113. 1, 2 natna 140. 6 Nia 79. 1, 157. 1 INDEX III. 349 njsia 104. g Ilia 90 V&yfS. 57. 2 (3) a, 164. 3 n«3i3 209. 1. a b3 53. 2. a, 184. 6 D-ipia 156. 2 -I]?i3 186. 2. a -1^3 139. 2 "lia 200. a iriisnia 201. 2 tJia 82. 1. a (3), 156. 2, 157. 1, 2. OilBia 156. 2 DSDOia 92. h, 161. 3 ra (n.) 207. 2. a ra (from Tia) i56. 2 T'a 139. 2 18T3 139. 3 : IT isi-ta 141. 2 na 141. 1 (p. 175) isna 139. 1 ■jina 185. 2. c nina 210. « n^nma eo.' 3. c mpn^ 27 Tina 185.2 ■jna 50. 1 ■jna 121. 1 ina 50. 1 nnina ina 43. 5 ■''ina 19. 2 n^ina 201. 1. b nitaa 90. ^a«s. niaa i84. 6 nm 126. 1 pnm 193. 2 Itja 197. a QiSUa 208. 3. a nntja 239. 2 (3), 263. 1.6 •la (for iJ?a) 63. 3. a, 240. 2 n::a 237. 2 (2) Ta 16. 2. a nninia 57. 2 (2) l^a 158. 2, 3 ■j^a 237. 1, 238. 1 ^T^'^ 4. a inbia 158. 1 aj3s::a 16. 2. a Di^ia 200. 6 !riirii-|]?ia 14. a, 24. 6 n;i3 61. 2, 63. 2. a, 197. 5, 208. 3. c n^a 57. 2 (6), 62. 1, 216. 1. d lansn-tr'a 246. 3. b ^l»ttlBn-ni3 246. 3. b ^'^''^ 65 ?ia 65. a nsa 184. J iaa 172. 2 iaa (for i3?a?) 53. 3. a iiba 50. 1 1133 50. 1 ■iSa 184. 6 ibt533 91. 6, 231. 5. a 3in33 22. a, 101. 2. 6 bS 53. 3. a nn'^a 19 8. a (3) ■isiba 56. 4 "ia«i»t:ba 18. 2. c naiba 195. 3 b?;;b3 195. 3 bba 141. 3 (p. 175) yba, ?^3 126. 1 ■'ISba 237. 2 (4) inw|a 127. 2 •pa 80. 2. a (4) D»pa 125. 2 ppa 141. 3 (p. 175) 1|ja 197. c, 201. 1 npia 50. 1, 208. 3. b ■13186. 2. c sna 78. 1 sna 166. 8 titfl'ia 164. 4 ina 185. 2. 6 5lina 92. d ©i-ia 61. 1 ni-ia 61. 1 bna 193. 2. c rrna 60. 1 n'^'ia 210. a •'S'l'ia 194. 2. a •yna so. 2. « (1), so. 2. a (2), 120. 3 ^tia, tj-ia 119. 1 ^-ja 197. a nana le. 2. « nana 21 6. 1. 6 iana 60. 3. a, 120. 3 "lana 22. a, 216. 2. a nn^aia 22. « n^'sna 208. 4 Dna 139.2 npia 19. 2. b, 196. 6 nna 141. 1 (p. 176) Oai?a 74. a, 139. 2 ■"saiuja 102. 3. a bm 80. 2. a (1) naaica 220. 1. 5 nimpiBa 45. 2 na 205. 6 ina 221. 2. a ''aaina 220. 1. 6 nibina 201. 1. 6 ipa 68. 2 nipa 208. 3. c Dana 221. 6 nsa ni^a 22, 6 T T T ns5a 185. 2. d cbisa 201. 1. a niisa 208. 3. c - bsa 117 bsa 116. 4 n^sa 201. 1. a tfbsa 119. 3 oabKa 221. 3. a aa 200. c naa 143. a -naa 216. 1. c naa i85. 2. 6 naa is4. j snaa 11. 1. a snaa se. 6 nnaa 125. 2 nnaa 60. 3. a D'^niaa 201. 2 b^iaa 184 ni-iiaa 201. 1. c nnaa 198. « (3) ?iaa 50. 1 liaa 187. 1, 215. 1 ^niniaa 220. 2. c •laa 199. c Taa 184 baa 60. 1 nbaa 11. 1. b laa 187. 1. b ■ ■jbaa 207. 2. c Qispaa 187. 2. c b»aa 193. 2. c na? i.a(2) INDEX III. 351 naa 183. h, 184. a nna i84. a bsi-iaa 61. 6. a .nnaa 205 M 200. a ^na 141. 3 (p. 176) biia 68. 1, 186. 2. 6, 210, 217 -bina 216. 1. c nb-bi^Sii 13. a in? 208. 3. d ni^a 209. 2. b ''.'ina 216. 1. a bna 82. 1. a (2) bna (v.) 58. 1 bna (adj.) 185. 2. b bia 68. 1, 184 -bna 215. 1. c b'na, bia 92. c y^a 126. 1 - A" ■ I'ja 197. 6, 216. 1. e, 217 ITl'^? 217 rri'Tia 221. 2. 6 Dip'lia 203. 6. 6 Tia 60. 3, 68. & •ir'a 157. 1 iia 221. 3. a •pia 220. 1. c oni^ia 220. 2 6 nsn'^Jii'''?^ 220. 2. c ?(ia 221. 3. a bia 168. 3 bbia 141. 4 l^'aia 186. 2. b »ia 126. 2, 166. 1 ■Tia (v.) 179. 2. a bnia 200. a ra 139. 2 lata 195. 1 nta 68. b T T m 60. 3, 68. b TTa 139. 2 ''•13 141. 1 niTa 60. 3 bra 50. 3, 68. b bra 216. 1. e "ira 50. 1, 3, 68. h, 84. 3. a (3), 125. 3 m 158. 3 ■jina 4. a ■iha 167. 1 ■iria 157. 2, 158. 2 Qibna 216. 2. 6 nbna 200. 6, 210. e S;"? 183. 5, 197. b, 208. 3. c N^a 216. 1. d n"'a'i58. 2, 3 bia 158. 2, 3 ba (rib) 98. 2, 174. 5 ba, ba (»») 139. 2 baba 187. 1. e, 207. 2. a baba 187. 1. e babji 141. 4 nbaba i87. 1. e, 207. 1. c?, 217 nba 11. 1. a nba 67. 2 (6), 80. 2. a (4), 143. a, 170 triba 216. La rtba 126. 1 Slb'ib? 196. c nib*!)? 16. 2. a •'n^ba, in^^ii 174. 2 ^bba 139. 1 nittba 196. 1 nnba 61. 6 T ; IT baa 197. c, 207. 2. 6 ?ibioa 101. 3. a innbaa 104. i inbaa 104. i ^a 197. b, 217 a?a. 77. 1 asa 187. 1. a 3:a Q3. d na?a 216. 1. 6 ma;? 104. i ipasa 66. a ■^riaja'ei. 6. a onnpa 104. » nsa 217 ■jl'Sa 139. 2 D''«a 60. 1 »a 131. 3 iya 172. 2 "lya 126. 2 nya 131. 4 isa 197. b. 200. 6 nana 207. 2. « na 50. 3, 68. b ■jna 193. 2. 5 352 INDEX III. pa 197. b, 200. a, 208. 3.6 nj^a 219. 1 ni3'na'2i6. 2 Tia 141. 3 (p. 175) ■iSlB-ia 194. 1 ianicna 104./. ©a, -tea 131. 3 !i^a, wa 131. 3 lOa 65. s s WOa 141. 1 (p. 175) ntoa 131. 4 iniaa i3i. 4 na 207. 2. a nax'i 87, 119. 3 aSI 11. 1. a im 51. 4 niian 198. h, 200. J nbnn 200. 6, 214. 1. 6 pl'1 82. 1. a (2) njjnn 87 ll'l 10. a la'l 210 -la"^ 80. 2. a (2) -13^ 92. c? 13^ ,' 13'^ 92. c, 126. 2 1-121 65 i^a'l 61. 1, 216. 2 n-iai 65. a Final) 100. 2. a (1) •'n'lan 86. h (2 f.) ■'in'na'i 6I. 6. a •aV\ 183. b "ito 221. 5. c W 186. 2. c?, 198, nW 198, 217 n5'^'^ 219. 1. 6 Tl'l 207. 1. /. isni'^ 216. 1. a n-'sni'n 56. 4, 207. ^^•n 194. 2. 6 a.'^i'n 51. 4 Tin 11. 1. 6 tm 139. 2 li'n 200. c 'D''rii-ii'7 44. 5 ©IT 158. 3 •m^ 157. 2 >rh 121. 1 I'n 215. 1. d ■ is'l 187. 1. a D^Ji'l 158. 1 i'l'^ 184. b y^'l 168. 2, 3 ■J^'l 187. 1. a i©i'l 158. 3 S3';I 1«5. 2 1S2'n 167. 1 b'l 207. 2. a nb'i 50. 1 "'n'i^'i 141. 2 iibn 141. 1 l^b'^ 19. 2. 5 ni''b'n 209. 2. a n-ib'^ 210. a rb^ 197. 6, 199. £?, mrh'n 216. 2. a liib'n 216. 2 217 n^rib^ 203. 2, 208. 4 QT 139. 2 ''IQ^ 57. 2 (4) QDtt'l 68. 2, 221. 1. a nm 141. 3 (p. 176) '2. a pto'S'n 61. 2 pi»m 196. 1 I?'! 194. 1 ''35'n 104. a • - T »'!! 148. 3 ?'! 148. 2 ny^! 53. 2. a, 148. 2 n?'7,ny'7 97. 1.6, 148.3 W? 16. 2. a iSSny^ 45. 4 ?f?'l 50. 1 ny'i 148. 2 ■'n:?'! 148. 2 la'l'n 19.2.6, 65. a, 200. a niDhni 19. 2. 6, 65. a : IT ' nrn 193. 2. c ffiii-i'i 122. 2, 141. 1 *I'1'^ 197. 6, 200. 6 ^■:?5. ^^:i 65. a n'i'a'n'i 203. 3, 208. 4 irian'i 220. 2. 6 pto'1'1 51. 2, 54. 3 ITOffi'l'n 104. ^ SlB'n 196. d XTD';? 18. 2. c ITS'! (v.) 82. 1. a (2) 211 im (adj.) 185. 2 m 200. 6 INDEX III. 353 .n, n, n 229, 245 n, n, n 230, 283 mnsn 112. 3 nnnxni 112. 3 imnxn 60. 3. 6 (1) "'p'^astni 60. 3. h (1) n"7Sin 246. 1. a ibnxn 246. 2. a. * Tl t T ^iTSn 80. 2. b, 112. 3 liTSin-l 112. 3 ™T^n 88 (pi. f.) !|m5T8n 94. a, 180. a nsTsnn 112. 3- - nsn 240. 1 os'^nsn 60. 3. c i-ITSiSn 246. 3. 6 ffliSn 230. 3. a ''PbDXni 112. 3 Dribaxn 112. 3 D-'n'SSn 246. 1. a •ybsn 60. 3. c TlHSn 229. 4. a "ib!«n 112. 1 tmV) 126. 1 qOBOXn 57. 2 (2) a, 229. 3. a ''MlSSn 230. 3. a yy^r\ 63. 2. 6, 229. 4. & nniJn 230. 3. « an 148. 3 ffiisan 151. 3 iSsan 119. 1 nxan 166. 1, lev. 2 risam 100. 2. a (1) ■ 23 nnsan i67. 2 insan 104. a DJixan 160. 2 nbi-rian) 100. 2. « (2) bnan 94. J nan i48. 3, 240. 2 Dianan 188. 6 lan 148. 3 Tian 140. 4 pian 140. 4 -taan 94. d ' ■lan (from sia) i64. 2 »ian (imp.) 94. c? nsci^n'^ 100. 2. a (2) nini«ian 160. 2 tjian 179. 2. a 'iffliah 150. 2 nioian 160. 2 nin;ian 219. 1 ban 84. 3. a (2), 112. 5. a ban 216. 1. e !inban 111. 3. « nisan 173. 2 byan 246. 1. a i'lan 140. 5 ssian 104. h ' /i* : IT ■ ?i!*")an 164. 4 ™n 140. 4, 141. 1 naianie. s. J, 230.2. « cnan 45. 2 niasn 126. 1 -'lan 94. £^ nan 95. c bnan 94. a nan 112. 5, a nSin 18. 2. c, 184. i ian 172. 2 iah 92. 6, 174. 1, 3 niSn 216. 1. a nbsn, nban 175. 1 niban 173. 2 nibsn 175. 1. Wbsn 175. 1 nbsn 172. 1 ■» : T nyan 127. 1 pann 82. 5 inann 246. 2. « ©iin 159. 2 'is'ann 141. 3 onn, 207. 2. a nynn 245. 5. b spn 112. 5. a 'py} 140. 5 pnn (pret.) 140. 5 'p'yn (inf.) 140. 5 nipnn ui. 2 -Iin 112. 5. a, 125. 3 nai-inn (inf.) 94. b npSJnn 96. a nn 240. 1 swbnn 245. 5. 5 : IT V ®"'?|?r'^! 245. 5. b "^r^n 63. 2. 6, 229. 4. J T T ' ninn 219. i T T T n'^ninnn 246. 2. a Qi-inn 63. 1. n. 229. 4 iJin 177. 1 . 354 INDEX III. Sin 47, 71. a (3) S^n 58. 1, 71, 73. 3, 258. 2 S^n 30. 2 Slin 167. 2 nsn'in 167. 2 IB^nin 179. 2. a Dipain 13. a, 208. 3. a yiin 150. 5 mn 57.2 (5) a, 177. 1 njn 177. 1 n'inin i4o. 6 bnin 140. 6 lin 240. 1 y'l'iin 229. 1. a in;in 177. i nsin (inf.) 126. 1 nipi- (imp.) 94. c? m|in 150. 5 tjibin 151. 1 bbin 141. 4 ^bjW 93. h nibbin i98. a (4) abin 90 n:in leo. 5 npiri 95. c, 150. 5 niD^n 27, 104. e iy-iSin (imp.) 94. d KSin 150. 1 ns2in 167. 2 nssin le. i Si^in (imp. ?) 94. cf n-iniain 149. 1, 150. 4 pa^n 57. 2. (5) npin 153. 1 mD?)5in 60. 3. a, 127. 2 inin 67. 2. (2) ^ismnin 104. a atpin 66. 1 (2) 6 niniaoin 151. 3 niiairi 57. 2 (5) laiijjin 61. 6. a Sffiin 126. 1 "llBin 150. 1 Qina-TH 24. 6 bi-Tn 160. 1 nibi-7n 141. 3 ism 54. 2, 4. a, 82. 5. a DD'ISyn 91. 6, 106. a rfDrn 175. 1 -p?Tn 119. 1 DSininjn 173. 2 'ixsnn 167. 2 hT : T nnsann 166. 1 nnnn i65. 1 ann 63. 1. «, 229. 4 *'J?^1flO 53. 2. 6, 63. 1. a, 95. J Qiffi'irin 63. 1. a, 229. 4 ■'pimn (inf.) 112. 3 "•Pii^inni 112. 3 ippTrim 112. 3 ■'prin 164. 2 itinn 164. 2 inn 229. 3. a Dn':nn iii. 3. 5 DDnn 63. 1. a, 229. 4 nMnn 229. 4. a bnn 140. 5 bnn 140. 4 ■ibnn 140. 4 ibnn 175. 1 in'^nn 141. 2 D'^piann 229. 3. a iiSnn 246. 2. a annn 119. 1 Q"inn 119. 1 "inannn 60. 3. h (1) "'J^'isf'nn'J 60. 3. h (1) inicnn™ 112. 3 bptin 95. c nhnn :^4i. 2 irnnnni 86. 6 (2 m.), 112. 3, 139. 3 nn 175. 4 ''nht;ni 161. 5 ntsn 175. 4 nn^n 82. 5 ^nnsin 63. 1. a, 121. 3 njEjn 159. 2 "libitsn 160. 2 ■'niBn 175. 1 nSBBn 96. a, 166. 5 ■in 53. 2. a, 184. S Sin 71. a (3) ■Dri»'j;'n 230. 2. « n^n 11. 1. a n^n 50. 1, 77. 3, 112. 5. a, 152. 2. a, 156. 1, 177. 1, 258. 2 n^n 86. 6 (3 pi.) INDEX III. 355 n:n(itnp.) 112.1, 177.1 n^n (inf.) 177. 1 n'lni 61. 1. a, 234. b VTVi 61. 1. a, 234. b inilin 245. 6. 6 ni^n 245. 3. b niin 112. 1, 177. 1 na-in 235. 3 (2) i-ipin 145. 2 aTOii^n 230. 2. 6 niim, niini le. i nni;in eo. 3. b ' (1), 112. 1 oni^ri'i 112. 2, 234. 6 i\-'n 51. 2 bDin 189. b, 197. 6, 200. c, 210. c, 216. 1. 6 ipibin 151. 1 b-'!:-'!! 57. 2 (5) bb''n 186. 2 T)ain 11. 1. 6 ■ijiBain 150. 1 sa?';in 150. 1 nbs'lin 65. b nn^n 246. 1. a ■iic;in 150. 1 n-in 172. 1 nri;in 246. 3. a 5in 98. 2, 175. 4 i3Dn 94. 6 oasn 96. a nan 175. 4 pn 159. 2 b-'Sn (l'3>) 160. 4 biDn (5i3t?n) 111. 2.C iran leo. 2 sflisn 160. 2 isiDisn 160. 2 nirDn 160. 2 "iSSn 246. 1. a T • - labsn 95. a tmii^T} 94. a issn 160. 2 nnjjsjssn 24. 6, 230. 2. a "isn 112. 6. a -nsn 94. 6 bmsn 246. 1. a WhSn 24. 6 ■J- 1 - nsbn 172. 1, 175. 1 )^^n 24. 6, 230. 2. a •JlW^n 246. 1. a ©abn 94. 6 ri^bn 150. 5 i^n 139. 2 nj-Kibn 44. a l)r\ 58. 1, 73. 2 nr^n 58. 1, 73. 2 ... T - ' ^T|n 58. 1, 73. 2 onbn 119. 1 onlfen 91. b thh 150. 2 nb^^n 246. 3. 6 •fbri 84. 3. a (3), 112. 5. c, 115, 151. 1,179. 2. a 151. 1 13bn 151. 1 SWbn 86. .6 (3 pi.) nzsbn) 100. 2. a (1) Mbm 100. 2. a (!) nsbh 205 bbn 137, 141. 4 b>n 137 'jbbn 20. 2, 45. 2 nibbn 139. 1 Dbn 111. 1 ttn 4. a an, tran ei. 6 ■jiiari 197. b bifin 159. 2. bis ibinn 159. 2 n^sii'sn 177. 3 ■ji^n 150. 2 nittn 160. 4 rFli»n5 14. a iqriirn 160. 2 insian 246. 2. 6 w'an 140. 6, 141. 1 nbttn 126. 1 nban 80. 2. 6 rinbton 127. 1 ?fbttn 95. a nisbtt'sn 246. 3. a nfflST^n 246. 1. a can 140. 4 IBWn 140. 5 rp'an 62. 2, 175. 1 nyan 119.1 ''3'ntsyan 104. c, 246.2. 356 INDEX III. iribyBn 246. 2. 5 SSan 166. 3 '7^ir■Tar}, i65. 3 nsaan 246. 1. a nian i4o. 5 Tian 140. 5 nniTsn 24. b bten 45. 2, 230. 2 biiian 94. b nian leo. 4 wan, ^iran 160. 5 imn 160. 2 ni^ipri 160. 2 ■jn (pron.) 71. (i (3) ■jn (adv.) 236 isa?n 54. 2 iniS3:n i66. 2 : IT • inxain 131. 6 q^5n 91. b, 131. 5 nin 236, 240. 2 ni" (pron.) 1\. a (3) ron (adv.) 235. 3 (4) iinan isi. i nnsn 246. i. a nnDn i89. b bn;n 94. & ipianrn 63. 1. a, 121. ■ ; fit:- • ' 3, 131. 6 nron i3i. 1 innsn 160. 2 nijn, rpiT^ 83. c (1), 160. 1 nnisn leo. 5 tninijn 160. £ DDBiSn 160. 4 ip''5n 150. 2 WSttsn 245. 5. 6 ns:n 160. 4 nssn 160. 2 IWn 141. 1 npsn 173. 2 ?yir\:n 131. 2 ■jhsn 91. 6, 131. 5 ^pRDtl 131. 2 en 240. 1 apn 140. 5 npn61.4, 135.3, 140.5 lapn 61. 4. a, 140. 5 iSpn 61. 4 tliapn 61. 5, 136. 2 Di-lWn (D-ilWiiiin) 53. 2. a, 111. 2. c nnipn 160. 2 iTni?'!1 160. 4 ni&n, nipn leo. 1 •fpn 140. 5 •jspn 94. 6 -'j|Dn 94. d banpn 82. s bbinpn 141. 5 inpn 91. 6 n^i^n 63. 3. 6 (2) ^linnasn 112. 3 ^jin^a^n) 112. 3 Tia^n (inf. abs.) 94. b pra$r\ 112. 2 nn'isn i60. 2 nTS>ri 141. 1 riTyn 160.2 imiyn 60. 3. c 'in'riyn 44. b t3??n, Q^'sn 229. 3 iniTyn 160. 2 b?n (v.) 175. 4 nb:?n, nbsn 112. 2 nb?h 60. 3. 6 (2), 112. 2 nbyn 63. 1. a nib^n 245. 5. 6 ^SfTibyn 104. I inbn 173. 2 D»n 63. 2. J, 229. 4. 6 T T " "Vayt) 60. 3. b (2) TlQ5;ri 94. 6 'rti'asinT 112. 3 naayn io4. e ^inynn 112. 3 ni"iyn 229. 4 i^S'iyn 246. 2. a initon 173. 2 irriton 113. 1 ri?n 18. 2. c niasn 187. 2. a n-jsn 175. 1 mpn 175. 4 risn 140. 5 nan so. 2. j ini2ri£ni 160. 3 "iipn 140. 5 •ysn 112. 5. 6 iDBh 61. 6 •JB3Bn 188 Sbsn 166. 3 INDEX III. 357 xb&n 165. 2 13Bn 95. d D?Bn 245. 3. h ipsn (inf. abs.) 91. 6 IpSn 93. a, 95. a ISn 229. 4. h nsn 140. 5 nSn 65. a, 140. 5 nsn 140.-5 Tien 119. 1 wnari'i loo. 2. a (1) DDISn 141. 3 onsn 141. 3 nn'isn 141. 2 nnsn 126. 1 p^USn 82. 5 i?mn 80. 2. 6 ij'isasn 161. 1 ins-jan lei. 1 jian 145. 2 n^isn 160. 2 nbsn 189. s T T - nban 126. 1 nni3Sn 86. 6 (2 m.) ijiSan 24. h _ nan 140. 5 nan i4o. 5 in'-isni 100. 2. a (1), 141. 2 nSI|5n 229. 4. 6 in!*j;n leo. 2 'isi'ijjn 94. 6 TS'ijpn 94. 6 Diffilpn 229, 4. 6 snipn 119. 1 -bnjpn 119. 1 Ttajpri 94. 6 nipn 160.. 4 0''ipn 160. 4 D-ipn 6Y. 2 (5), 59, 153. 1 riitt'^pn 66. 2 (2) c bjPn 140. 5 bj?n 140. 6 a]?n 160. 4 D|?n, D|5n 160. 5 «b)3n 66. 2 (2) c inb|3n 104. y nisjpn 94. 6, 175. 2 anjpn 119. 1 naii»j?n 98. 1 in 207. 2. a nsin, nsin 114, 175. 1 nknn 173. 2 msnin 173. 2 V»?'?l'^ 114 qinix-in 175. Dinix'pn 24. 6 s-in, na-in 175. 4 nann 175. 2 r\%y\, r!:^;\r\ i7s. 2, 235. 3 (2) riianm 100. 2. a (i) in^aini 100. 2. a (1) T''a';in (inf.) 94. 6, 114 y-^ain (inf.) 114 insinnn 24. s rnn 63. 1. «, 219. 1. -inn 172. 2 inn 92. 6, 174. 1, 3 5l,;inn 53. 3. a -annn 119. 1 Pti'in, VT^y^ 118-1- •^nn 199. c ni»nn 209. 1. a Qinn 59 * T riittinn 160. 2 ''Minh 160. 4 osBinn 160. 4 iS'inn 160. 2 Drii>''nn 160. 2 rfim 16. 1 •inn 140. 5 vasy\ 114 mhn 140. 4 Di^nn (D-''Bni(in) 53 2. a ribnn leo. 2 cnn 111. 1 'S'y'r,, "5^7% 140. 5 ynn 140. 5 "f^ys 160. 2 nisynn 24. 6 'utpy\ 160. 2 t|nn 66. 1 (1), 98. 2, 175. 4 nsnn 175. 4 nsnn i65. 1 mnn 172. 1 innn 221. 6. h innn 221. 6. 6 358 INDEX III. n'^l'in 207. 2. a nnnn 221. 6. 6 rj'i»n 246. 1. a I r T - b2irin, biston 94. 6 ib-ipton 180. a 5nr\irin 82. 5 sisn 166. 3 ininbsjffin 119. 2 : men 65. a I- T ai»n 160. 4 n:n»ai2Jn 104. k IT : - : ■ inatin 86. b (2. m.) inhiom 100. 2. a (1) Diraiam 10. a n©ri 140. 5 n'liBn 160. 4 initijn 60. 3. b (2) inion 60. 3. 6 (2) iniaiffini 33. 4 i^ision 101. 3. a nnhiiBn 160. 2 asiBn 94. 6 asisn 95. a nnsizjn 95. a, cZ T : : T ' D3T»n, D''3on 94. 6 yhm 80. 2. 6 ti"ibiBn 94. b 12"'bTl3n7 100. 2. a (2) ?rbiCn (inf.) 94. 6 tfbujn (imp.) 94. cZ 1\^Vn 95. a npbcn 95. a nsFiDbon 86. 6 (2 pi.) Tvnbvn 95. a naisn 94. 6 npffin (inf. abs.) 91. 6 iri-iaffin (inf.) 94. 6 ^-aiEn 104. 6 'AT : IT ■ rraffin i4o. 6 ITSCn 140. 5 if r iVBim 140. 5 v."'niaian i4i. 3 UnWTj 139. 3 y^iBn 126. 1 reSaiBn 128, 189. b Dy yMtJn 35. 1 T 1- jT -; naffln 64. i, 9i. 6 reiBn 245. 3. b nte triisn 251. 4. a Sffin (yy) i4o. s yen (rfe) 35. 2, 175. 4 nisisn (niaesn) 53. 2. 6, 62. 1 biST»n (inf. abs.) 94. 6 ■y&ffin 91. 6 r.j5ffin 50. 1, 179. 2. a a]5lCn 94. d nanisn 126. 1 IsiniBn 141. 5 mnriffin 168. a niinnisn i76. 2 ■'ri^inncn i76. 1 imrincn i76. 2 ■'riiiririi!Jn'iioo.2.a(i) Dmnncn i76. 2 ninni»n 17 6. 1 nisriiBn i76. 2 woyriffln 141. e ■ysE^iCin 82. 5 w'lisnn 176. 2 i-isnn 126. 2 AT - ; ■ Ijiarin iss. 4 wpann 126. 1 ipb'nann'i 96. 6 n^ann 126. 1 ^ir^anpj 96. a lann i76. 4 ni"i3Pin 176. 2 if^nnn 96. 6 -^bnnn 95. b ■iM^nnm 100. 2. a (1) bbnnn 137 minn 150. 3 (p. I82) yiinn 150. 3 (p. iss) •fWn 187. 2. a nsinn 150. 3 (p. 182) rih?inn 246. 3. a ;Tnn 65. a bbinrin 161. 2 p?nnn 96. 6 bninn i76. 4 AT : • nn;inn so. 2. b vrn ill. 2. f, 172. 1 wn:nn eo. 3. a ^■a'-nn i4i. 3 2a::inn 50. 1, 179. 2. lasrin 96. 6 br,n 115 D-ibm 142. 3 onn 140. 5 Tibnn 141. 5 narramn i4i. e INDEX III. 359 nann i4o. s DBnn 82. 5 Tanttnin i4i. 5 niasrin les. 3. n''33nn les. 3 bbijjm 141. 5 b^ynn i4i. s n''5?riiri ive. 2 anynn 119. 1 niBbsrin 96. 6 lljSBnn 69. a, 96. a inj^ann 96. « ©•nptin 96. 6 -Bj^jjinn 96. 6 W^ptiri 96. 6 ''FiOTjjnn'i 96. 6 DriiB'^j^rin ei. 4. a, 96. b cisjjriri ^6. b •jjinnn 141. 5 inan'inn 121. 1 nisirin 176. 2 nsuaionn 54. 4. a, T : - ; • ' 82. 6. a nbiBirin 45. 2, 230. 2. nnn 141. 3 (p. 175) n 100. 1, 234,, 287 ■n 99. 1 11 66. 2 nri 56. 2 lbl 66. 2 lbl 66. 2 SKt 183. J, 197. c ■laST 216. 1. 6 nXT 11. 1. a mr 39. 4. a nat 60. 1 -T naj 200. c inar 125. 2 ; T wnar 220. 2. c i;nan 100. 2. a(i) ■jibar 193. 2. a IT 186. 2. c nt 73. 1, 236. 3 (4), 249. 2. a nf 39. 4. a nr.iT 11. 1. 6 n'T, iT 73. 1 anr 50. 1, 61. 3, 201. 1 anti 16. 3. b, 61. l.a, 234. a ^T 73. 1 IT 53. 3. a Pibsa IT 22. 6 T : ATr ni^lT 209. 2. a milT 210. a nbiT 237. 1 a inb^T 61. 6. a nsiT 14. a, 93. 6 It ' rrniT I66. 4, i96. c? •jiniT 193. 2. a D'^iil'^T 210. c ri^T 208. 3. c 13T 141. 1 IWT 90. pass. mST 98. 1 111?T 25 lil3T 200^ c, 210, 210.. i, 217 II-IDT 106. 6 ''371'IDT 86. b (2 f.) 5l?bT €8. a n&»bT 210. e miiaT 200. 6 ni'J2T 185. 2. a IMBT 139. 1 ItlT 207. 2. 6 rriBT 92. tz riTaT 196. 5 iri'TST 139. 2 njari'BT 220. 1. 6 11 207. 2. a ajT 200. a niST 200. 5 5f?T 51. 1 D?T 84. 3. a (3), 118. 2 r«5>V 119. 3 ia?T 119. 3 P?J 51. 1 pbT 119. 1 IpST 60. 1. a, 119. 4 "ip?! 119. 4 ?IP?T 119. 3 1l?J (v.) 79. 2, 82. 1. a '(1) ■ipT (adj.) 90, 215. 1 ni5J5T 201. 1. 6 ppT 141. 1 (p. 175) SIT 196. tZ 360 INDEX III. ^nr, ^"IT 156. 2 yilT 183. c, 197. a, 200. c TTIT 187. 1. e TOnT 92. b ynr eo. 3. c, 216. 1. e S^IT 216. 1. e pnr 80. 2. a (3) San 112. 5. a iisan 167. 1 mian, man 60. 2. a tDan 112. 5. a lan 172. 3 ban 50. 1, 112. 5. b bnh 186. 2. a ■^ban 61. 1 Tinban 104. i pan 187. 2 nan 112. 5. « ninanan iss ttJan 84. 3. a (3), 112. 5.6 Sn 186. 2. c san 11. 1. a san 196. cZ nan 112. 5. ffi in 53. 2. 6, 223. 1. a l-nn 100. 2. a (2) bnn 82. 1. a (2), 112. 5. a '^b'ln 24. c nin 216. 1. e IDin 208. 3. 6 Diffl'in 60. 3. 6 (2) nrin 199. c IT nin 207. 1./ nain 14. a bin 158. 2 bbin 161. 4 bbin 141. 4 •jsin 141. 4 fin 200. a ipm 59. «, 141. 3 ■il^in 14. a iin 125. 3 inin 194. 2. 6 p'lin 199. c ibnin 186. 2. a nffiin 158. 2 DJiin 186. 2 nrn 200. a ■jiijn 200. a, 210. b, 216. 2. J pm 84. 3. a (2), 110. 2, 112. 5. 6 pm 185. 2. 6 prn 185. 2. 6 pm 92. c ipTH 61. 1 ifiJpTn, n|ipTn 57. 2 (2) 5 ' ■ ■ nn 207. 2. 6 Kt:n 183. 6, 208. 3 Sm 165. 2 ftsan 220. 1. 6 T : V nSEin 198. a (3) •>Nt:n 60. 3.C, 216. 1. n'^x'pn 57. 2 (3) a, 164. 3 nson 166. 1 nstsn 198. a (3), 205, 217 nsisn ^7. 2 (3) a insbn 166. 2 dristsn 220. 2. n 197. 6, 200. c ''bT^n 194. 2. i, 199. c nbnbn i87. 1. e, i98. «(3) t:bn 112. 6. a "hn 208. 3. (^ •ibh 65 nbibri 219. 1. a, 240. 2 n^sabn 209. 1. a nsbn 209. 1. a bbn 141. 4 nbn 112. 5. c ©■'■abn 195. 1 qbn 80. 2. a (1), 112. 5. c T^n 92. c? pbn 112. 5. 5 npbn 51. 3 It : :• ''j5^n 24. b, 216. 2. a P^)?^*!! 188 nnpbn 104. i tJbn 84. 3. a (3) TtJbn 187. 1 san 196. d ia>7 111- 1, 112. 5. a nan (ns^n) 53. 3. s rran i84. b, 216. 1 ■pian 185. 2. c nian 197. c nian 205. c iriian i4i. 2 iffiiarj 59. a, 227. 1 ban 112. 5. a flban 87, 111. 3. a Oan 84. 3. a (3), 141. 1 (p. 175), 179. 2. a Dan 112. 5. a "pSn 82. 1. a (2), 112. 5. a van 184 insan 106. a, 111. 3. « lan 112. 5. a ^nmari, i"ianan 60. 3. 6 (2) Tia'ian 92. a, 115 ©an 46 ©an 205, 215. 1. b ©ah 227. 3 niBan 223. 1 ''©an 59. a, 227. 1 Dni©an 250. 2 (2) a l^ffian 250. 2 (2) a ?li©an 250. 2 (2) a Bi©an 225. 1 iiri©an 220. 2. « ito n©an 224. « nan 214. vb Dl'tlbh 203. 5. 6 y:! 186. 2. c pn 139. 2 I'lsn 187. 1 misn 139. 2 nissn, niijn 209. 3.0 riisn 199. d, 200. c 5j;n 112. 5. a Kh 220. 1. 6 o:n 235. 2 (1) bajn 195. 1 IJn 80. 1, 84. 3. a (3) ■jsn 141. 4 njin 139. 2 ■'isn 61. 6 BDSSn 106. a, 139, 2 I5i3n 141. 1 tl.?n 82. 1. a (2) psn 60. 1 ■''!7?'7, ''^pn 216. 2. a ncn 112. 5. b ^^:Bn, ^^co 169. 1, , 172. 1 bCtI 112. 5. a ncn 112. 6. a ncn 82. 1. a (2), 112. 6. a nsn 112. 5. a tSn 112. 5. a fSn (v.) 62. l.a(l), 84. 3. a (1), 112. 5. a ytiTj (adj.) 185. 2. 6 ' inssn 86. a lasn 216. 1. 6 362 INDEX III. nStl 82. 1 a (2), 112. ' S. a nan 82. i. a (2), 112. 6. a nina"iBn isa tesn 112. 5. a tesn 80. 1 miBSn 198. a (4) iffiSri 209. 2 niOBn 198. a (4) aan 50. 1, 82. 1. a (1), 84. 3. a (1), 112. 5. a i2rn 199. b •riTi 65, 227. 3 van 141. 1 (p. iY5) masn is 8. a nsn 50. 3, 197. b, 200. c ph207. 2,207. 2.a,215. 1. c, 217 -pn 61. 5 njsn 217 ipn 59. a •"pn 61. 5 pph 141. 5 ppn 141. 5 ippn 20. 2, 207. 2. a npn 50. 1, 112. 5. a iip-ipn 104. y ann iis. 1 ann 197. a lain, iiain 111. 3. « nianri 216. 2. « oniann 220. 2. a •lain 111. 3. a • AT t: atlO 112. 5. a bil'in 193. 2. c Tin 112. 5. c, 118. 1 Tin 185. 2. 6 blin 207. 2. (i yinn 210. a -in-in 187. 2. 6 Dbnn 193. 2. c, 207. 2. c fflinn 185. 2. a itcrn 195. 1 no";!)! 61. 6. a Sinn 118. 1 niB^n 22. a, 216. 2, 2. a pn 118. 1 aann 207. 2. c inn 141. 2 (p. 176) ttinn 187. 1. a, 210. a, 216. 1. a tjnn 50. 1, 80. 2. a (2), 84. 3. a (3), 118. 1 IB^n 187. 1. b, 210. c ''IC'in 216. 1. a rrin 50. i ■^BTOn 194. 2. 6, 199. c tjian 112. 5. 6 qton 112. 5. 6 iBiSn 89 (f. s.). 111. 3.a aon 112. 5. 6 liaffin 200. a nwn 112. 5. c ^iSn 84. 3. a (2), 112, 5. J naisn 200. b, 201. 1. a DiS»n 201. 1. a bttwn 53. 2. a nbiaiBn 66. 2 (2) 5 nn 139. 2, 207. 2. a nnn 112. 5. a T T nnrini87. i.«, 2o7.2.a rr^nn 209. 2 *fnn 112. 5. a binn 112. 5. a DOO 112. 6. a finn 112. 5. a inn 50. 1, 112. 5. a nnn 112. 5. c, i4i. 1 ' (p. 175) iSFipn 104. y ninst:5 IttS"! 24. a !|5S;; 111. 2. a p:s;? 111. 2. a 5lbs;j 111. 2. a, 112. 3 519S!?5, 5|DS!:i 99. 3. a CID8SI 151. 2 IBDS? 112. 3 ''3Bp«;; 112. 3 nbs;^, Qnoi?;! eo. 1. Q^iDS?!;5 104. ff basji 111. 2. 6 "ISS? 113. 1 IS? 159. .3 15ns;; 112. 3 rnnis«;> 105. e ns:;! 61. 2. a, 172. 4 W'S;? 159. 3 iijis;; 172. 1 •'3.':nss5 172. 3 Sa;> 60. 1. a Snil 10. a Sajin 160. 3, 166. 4 aa;i i4i. i (p. 175) ■'jbi'ni;; 105. a !>'na?i 66. 1 (2) 6 iaji 164. 2 sin;i 157. 3 in;ai3;i i58. 4 iwa;i 194. 1 Bin,': 157. 3 Ta;!! 172. 4 !i-Th;i 141. 1 m^^ 126. 1 sia^i, siasi 160. 3, 166. 4 i&ia«i 26 ■ T - *fa?l 61. 4, 172. 4 ■ji'^m;' 172. 1 P^ 158. 2 1?? 172. 4 nan;'! 172. 4 nwj5i;i 125. 1 a Wj:a;i5 20. 2 tl'ih;' 60. 4 ■fna;ii 99. 3. « *in5'na;i5 eo. 3. a nD13"ai 104. b T ■; T ; inD3-ia;i 105. 6 ©a; (v.) 82. 1. a (1), 146, 147. 1 tJa'i 147. 1 Ba;! 148. 1 inffiasi 150. 2 (p. 182) ntca'i 148. 1 ras;! 60. 1 -biaa;! 88 n-iaa;: 60. 2 'ia;i 140. 1 ri75;; 104. h n^fT 160. 2 (p. 182) bW 158. 2 W«T 140. 1 I'lb-'S;' 158. 2 ■iSii;! 216. 1. 6 bS\ bai 158. 2 " T ' -.• T %^^ C^y) 168. 2 b5^5 (yy) i4o. 5 b;o 172. 4 i35;i1 99. 3. a b^'}'] 99. 3. a, b5;;T 175. 3 ba;' 140. 3 nba;! 57. 2 (6) s'aai 165. 2 364 INDEX III. b'aai'^ 65. « 1?? 140. 5 n"! 147. 1 siy5\ wai 147. 4 HT' ' AT ■ n?5;: 60. 2 -13,1 (v.) 82. 1. a (3), 179. 2. a ni;;' (adj.) 9o -Ij;''! 157. 3 157 140. 1 tjnii;'! 99. 3. a DlT»"li|i1 104. gr n'li;' 86. a 1M97.a,215.1, 217,222 S'l^:! 172. 4 P57^ 97. 2 Ipan^l 94. c nan:!! 99. 3 'Tt'; 139. 3 ^i;" 148. 3 fl?\ 53. 3. a, 150. 2 (p. 182) lin:' 139. 3 ■jiT 157. 3, 168. 2 nin;! 203. 5. « ■'11' 216. 1 IT 199. c inin^ 220. 2. c ani'i;i 220. 1. b D'?'!^ 203. 5. a ■Ji'7; 157. 3 SSn;' 167. 7 ^S3'^7 54. 2 ro^i 220. 1. a Q57;; 58. 2, 63. 2. a, 22.1. 1. a 03'i;i 220. 2. 6 b'^': 140. 3 D^;! 140. 1 iot:« 141. 1 yi;" 80. 2. a ,(4), 147. ■yn?5 147. 5 ■5^7;; 55. 2. a, 86. 6 (3 pi.) n^'l'; 60. 3. a rjiD:?'!;' 60. 3. « D^:y'i;i 127. 2 riSI^ 86. 6 (1 c.) nnyn:! 86. 6 (2 m.) T^'S"!'} 104. ^ Dt^y'i;' 60. 3. a P7«T 140. 5 llTi 46 IS'nl^il 94. c n31B'j;'63.1. c, 97.1.a, nn;! 179. 2. a nan^ eo. 3. a Sl^n^ 111. 1 isS'nn;; 105. d sin;' 177. 1 nw;> 197. d nnin;! 150. 2 IW;! 194. 2. a ninin;! 235. 3 (3) nini 47 nin;i'] 234. c D'lpi'in^ 195. 3 Qip;'in;i'' 44. 6 ?iffinn;i 150. 2 in;' 57. 2 (4), 177. 1 ini 177. 1 •AT TT'I 45. 2, 61. 1. a, • ST- ' ' 177. 1 n'^ni 11. 1. a 2 n;in;< 19. 1, eo. a. a, 112. 2, 177. 1 ni>?3 ini'i 22. b ' ib''b''n;i 150. 2 bni 140. 5 -T bn^ (bns:') 53. 3. a, 111. 2. c Ifb'np, 151. 1 nibbn;i 105. e . tfbn^ (n.) 190. a ''liabn;; 111. 1 on^5 140. 1 Ch': 140. 3 cn^Y 80. 2. 5 6 Dinn^ 111. 1 !iD-in^ wnn;; 111, 1 ^ip^n;: 111. 1 bnn^ 142. 3 ^bhn'i 142. 3 IS^i 140. 6 AT sail 167. 2 ISa^i 167. 2 bail 197. b iri^'jii 92. 6 p^li 140. 6 nni''^ 111. 2. (f ibaii 57. 2. (2) a, 111. 2.6 INDEX III. 36, i^V 93. 6 bSS'lT? 57. 2 (3) a nni 147. 2, 179. 2. a nnbii 207. 1. a mni 113. 1 oni 140. 1 UV 200. c, d, 207. 1. / 'rinani 93. a inni 60. 3. b (2) a;")?!"" 203. 3 Oani 60. 3. a, 65. a 'iBni 140. 1 mail 235. 2 (1) «ani 65. a -i^iian: 172. 1 IX'' 215. 1. & Itiani 60. 3. a njiani 88 (3 f. pi.) n:ii 197. c, 200. 6 nni (»») 140. 1 ipnani 121. 2 p5ii 217 ini (IS) 147. 2 pi, 'jnji 140. 1 P|55i'' 207. 1. e, 2l7, ini (»y) 140. 5 •jni 61. 2 221. 5 Wi 109. 2, 172. 4 inil 60. 1. a, 172. 4 n|!l'' 140. 6 Tini 235. 3 (1) ini 140. 6 Eioii^ 90 b'lni 63. 1. h n:ni 172. 4 is'ryi-' 105. h iib'^ni, ibnni 63. 1. h i:ini 60. 1. a USy 140. 6 llb'nni 64. 2, 88 (m. pi.) 1i:risT 99. 3. a Sainl, SSifl^ 166. 4 Dini, Dini 157. 3 T ' T ¥l3rii 61. 1, 141. 3 ISi-i 186. 2. ffl ti-iini 156. 1 ■jSni 139. 3 010)511 (ail»)3i19) 69. 0, l^ijni 172. 1 p3n?5 113. 1 9.3. e ipmi 61. 1 l^icni 169. 1, 172. 1 ni"! 175. 3 xani 63. 1. h icni 113. 1 snii 150. 5 Spni^ 166. 4 5]ni5 25 niCii] 99. 3. a, 150. 3 1171, inil 177. 2 f sni , ysni 65. a Iffl^i 140. 6 ini 65 i^isni, insni 111. 1 : ; - ' AT ! ■/ ijiaiffiii 105. a nini 177. 2 "ll^v' Tr!!'^ 1'72. 4 ■jypii 105. a IDiini 172. 3 npni 141. 1 OSffiii 53. 3. a ntoini 97. 1 ini 147. 1 noil 158. 4 ■jnini 104. g, 141. 3 1^5 175. 3 TT 175. 3 ^"^ ^n? 140. 5 nhi 140. 3 pi, Ti"l 172. 4 sbn^'i 177. 3 T *.■:•.• - -ini 172. 4 nr 140. 3 i?ni 141. 1 in^5 60. 1. a TOTi 141. I i^nii (ibnii) 24. c r-rtni 172. 4 'iH'] 175. 3 pbni 60. 4. a, 113. 1 q-irii 119. 1 'p'$r^'\ 119. 1 Qpbni 59. a tinnii 99. 3. a nT<;i 157. 3 op^n^T 113. 1 qteni 111. 1 ITil 172. 4 r ■ - inbhi 60. 4. a tfon^i 99. 3 366 INDEX III. nn.': (p) 131. 1 nn.':' (»») 140. 1 :wni, nnni 24. c Q'T 175. 3 n^ 112. 4 at?;: iso. i, iY9. 2. a :bcji, ibti'^ 160. 5 813^7 64. 2, 96. a, 166.5 C|'lp? , Sl^T27 65. a IJJai^ 144. 2 jyi'i'i 147. 2 IT" ; bnssT 149. 1 21:1:1 147. 4 atji^'^ 147. 5 SQil^l 150. 3 aipii 145. 2, 160. 2 lipii 150. 2 bibii 150. 2 J|iiT 172. 4 -121S5 147. 4, 5 fpii 63. 2. e, 147. 4 yjji^'l, f|5i's'l 147. 5 "ipii , npii 147. 4 Cnii^ 147. 5 ntois] 147. 5 ^nifflii 150. 1 ■jlS-isi 147. 5 Iffiii 147. 4 nniBis'i 150. 2 (p. 182) ^^11 175. 3 iD^Mi 105. 6 liSi 159. 3 n^SIDi 13. a ISfflSi 61.3, 105.6, 161.3 ©nai 119. 1 *151D1 160. 3 ri'li?:;! 105. a W131 105. a AT - - bbi 80. 2. a (3), 82. 1, a (3) 1551 172. 4 b?i5 174. 4 rtsi 165. 3 ibbi 86. a l^ibai 172. 1 n^bi 148. 1 n5Di) 86. a, 100. 2 inbbi 86. a lipbDi 86. a, 104. h ySr^ 126. 1 CD^I 174. 4 ^10103161. 6, 104./, 172. 1 WM;! 172. 3 Oyri 119. 1 !Tl3i1 172. 4 nraO'131 180. a nnsi 119. 1 ■jinnsi 91. 6 ibllBSi 88 nS"! 140. 6 a■^^^^ aiM^ 88, loi, 2.6 ari3?1 99. 3. a l^ariB^t 88 (m, pi.) ma;? i40. 5, i4i. i aa^i 139. 3 DlSabi 105. a •'Stiabi' 105. (^ nbi 56. 2, 80. 2. a (4), 147. 2 l^'lbi 64. 2 ninbi 22. a ■ inbi 216. 2. a mbi 90 (2 f.) imbi 104. i snnbi, jinnlbi 104. i ^iin^bi 104. ;(; ■'sn'ibi 104. k, ISO. 1 (p. 182) i;ii)i 159. 3 anbi 119. 1 Dnb!'^ 99. 3. a, 119. 1 rbi 160. 1 ^^^ r^D leo. i 5fk'? 151. 1 ■fb?5 65. a ia'^> 91. 6 lab^il 99. 3. a wabi 105. c bbi 139. 3, 150. 1 bbi 183. 6 nbbil 57. 2 (3) a, 234. « ibsi 158. 2 ttlpbi 192. 1 ■jiapbi 88. (m. pi.) Qi 207. 2, 216. 1. a T ' DSBSI 119. 1 TOS'Q'? 139. 3 Ta^l 140. 1 TT - TB": 140. 3 niSttil 99. 3. a INDEX III. 367 niB'? 159. 3 bia;! 159. 3 na? 60. 1. a na^i 173. 3 sin 1B1 220. 1. a Dial 53. 3. a naiM"! 219. 1. a t • T X'ly^ 197. b, 199. a ■jWitti 160. 3 VXm'] 160. 3 ^Bi 140. 3 !:i2«5 157. 3 blQi 140. 1 n?Tai 165. 1 fyq\ --jbKi^ 88 *fbia^1 99. 3. a ID'blQl 88 h : - ■jUi 150. 1 DBi 140. 3 byai 60. 1, a 'I'l?'^ 172. 4 WSSBi 60. 3. c ns^ss^i 105. c Tisatt;! 164. 5 'ISSStti 105. 6 ■'sssa'a'' 105. c ni2'> 150. 1 -T "Itti 135. 2, 140. 1 tJ'a'' 140. 5 nbi 157. 3 nia«i 65, 157. 3 AT- ' tfll>^ 157. 3 T T - Pittil 160. 3 V T - .1»"S«3i 11. I. a fS?;: 67. 2 (3)a (?), 122. 2, 140. 5 fl^SI'l 99. 3. a nr 147. 1 msi 60. 2 - r lis^ 159. 3 yis^ 159. 3 ni^ii 157. 3 ns^l 160. 3 "limti 131. 2 15:1 164. 2 pi 159. 3 insiiii 160. 3 yil'i 157. 3 f['i>^ 160. 3 p5i 147. 1, 150. 1 -3)551 131. 2 nSisSi 131. 2 m'Sji 131. 2 Sltoji 57. 2 (3) a, 86. 6 (3 pi.), 164. 3 afai 61. 3,64.2,135.2, 140. 1 aesi 64. 1, 99. 3. a asi 140. 5 abi 135. 2, 140. 1 5)301 136. 1 T ia©i 61. 3 inaoi 141. 3 15301 61. 5, 141. 3 ib-TiaOi 13. a 101 148. 1 1^01 148. 1 "ITOI (n.) 192. 1 ^01 147, 1 •fOi 140. 5 ' ?IB1 140. 6 DIDDI 157. 3 "lybl 92. b qoi 80. 2. a (3), 151. 2 P|0^5 151. 2 IBDI5 99. 3 101 147. 3 lbi 92. c? 1DX1 60. 1. a -T - ni!?i 92. (? I3"i5)i 104. a 'SISi 104. a inins^i 56r i, 105, b iinsiasi 105. c ijinyi 56. 1 n^i 56. 2, 147. 1 -T ' Tiyi 161. 1 -liyi 159. 3 13113>1 105. b ryi 140. 1 -3T?V64. 1 5nT?i 105. J tt??5 (■•y) 157. 3 W?? (ri'b) 172. 4 ay^i 157. 3 ^?!::i, nbs?i (k.) 172. 4 ^?!:5,i^^S!:5(Hi.)l75.3 nb?i 207. 1. a l^jyil 45. 3 wbyi 161. 2 lb?i 60. 3. b (1) TOiJi 60. 3. 6 (2) 368 INDEX III. !ntt?:i 109. 3. a nnb?^ 112. 4 nj'ib?:; 88 (2 f. pi.) 1?^ 190. 6, 237. 1, 26'7. b niBX 'J?^ 239. 2. (2) I?!!, ™??5 172. 4 nj?^ 207. 1. a HDi;?:; 104. 6 :inyi>;i i42. 2, lei. 2 q?^ (v.) 82. 1. a (2), 147. 1 Sl?;i (adj.) 185. 2. b q?j] 157. 3 q??:] 157. 3 V?: 77. 2, 147. 1, 179. 2. a nD'lfi?:; 104. b mp»i 11. 1. b 1?:: 200. c to?!:i, nto?si 172. 4 nsniB?:! 104. h r\'si 147. 1 n5M85.2.cf, 209. 1,210 n^s-ns;! 43. 5, 188 ns;! (v.) 160. 3 r??? (adj.) 215. 1. 6 n^S;'?^ 92. a bB^i 101. 2. 6 n3B;i 126. 1 'i&i'l 172. 4 ys? 160. 3 1j3?&SS:' 161. 2 ns? 161. 2 -|&\ nS^I 140. 5 IBS5 175. 3 Si-iB^ 177. 3 "OTBBI 65. a ^tJiBSi 65. a na:" 175. 3 ns^i 172. 4 nns;' 192. 1 iris;i 221. 2. b m^'; 147. 2 N2?'1 147. 5 S2'i 164. 3 n&T> 164. 2 as;i 150. 4 a^vi45. 3, 150. 5 -in2;i 192. 1 ISI-I 66. 1 (1), 174. 4 nms;i 156. 1 niaji 157. 3 pna^ 192. 1 pnai 120. 2 S""^^ 145. 2 r?? 158. 2 ys;! 150. 4 'S'S.'l 150. 5 51S:> 172. 4 tlS^il 25 p?;: 150. 4 pS;" 148. 3 pk'1 144. 2, 147. 4 P??5 147. 4 1p27 148. 3 1S;i 50. 3, 84. 3. a (3), 147. 2 -n:2,i (S'i>) 140. 5 "I's;; 140. 1 '^'^^ 147. 5 lk^ 147. 4 'ini'ia': 105. 6 m;> 147. 3, 150. 4 ns;! 144. 2 IPS': 24. c, 149. 1 im;i 164. 2 Sp»1 166. 4 'isajs;? 105. d yapsi 99. 3 ■^sip;! 104. A lajjsi 99. 3. a Ip.'? 144. 2, 147. 4 ■ip:! 140. 1 inp^i 141. 1 DS'lp:' 22. a -01?^ ^"0!?.^ 119. 1 '"i?!!! 119. 1 nnp;! 24. s mp;! 190. 6, 192. 1 tMp"^ 153. 2 11tt1p;> 157. 3 Clttip;i 161. 1 ffi^p^i , ttjip^i 185. 2. e npti 54. 2, 132. 2. np^ 132. 2 l=bp;> 51. 3 D"'p;' 153. 1 Q.")?^ 161. 1 'p!? 64. 2 ^I??> Di?!' 157.3 Dp^l 99. 3. a, 157. 3 INDEX III. 369 D|3*5 99. 3. a, 160. 3 'p>^ i'72. 4 Sp; 147. 2, 179. 2. a T^j?;! 179. 2. a fiJJII 157. 3 V^? 147. 4 •j^lSSJ?:" 88 (m. pi.) llSSp;' 64. 2, 88 (m. pi.) 1)5.^ 147. 4 n]?|''1 172. 4 njl^'] 173. 3 isisn)?': 105. c m]?? 177. 3 nrnpi 97. i. a op; 82. 1. a (3) Op?'] 172. 4 atep?^ 99. 3 ■;i«p;i 86. s (3 pi.) bxnp'; 22. a Sn;i 148. 8 8'-!;i 148. 1 8'l!;'(^082.1.a(l),147.1 Sn;i (adj.) 215. 2. c 8-l!!5 (k.) 60. 1. a, 61. 2. a, 114, 172. 4 Sn^n^Hi.) 175. 3 Sn': 61. 2. a, 172. 4 Sn:^5 173. 3 nsn^i 87, 148. 1, 166. 2 nsn; 114 ns-l^l 172. 4 iJi-nK'i': 19. 1 IST' 164. 3 1«-i:i 19. 1,- 147. 1 1Sn> 19. 1, 147, 1 ISlh 177. 3 ims'n!' 104. h iJS'lti 105. a nSli 164. 1 T "T ail 158. 2 " T a'i;5 (ais?5) iii. 2. a*J'? 61. 2, 172. 4 a'n:; 63. 2. a ans; 175. 3 X^y^ 172. 1 Ta^!" 114 ISSI^I 114 J IT" - "Til 148. 3 "?"?!? I'^S. 3 Tn;! 79. 1, 147. 2 ni^'l 140. 5 VT - ■nn^i 172. 4 Tisi 147. 5 /r" - D^in^i 114 •^y: 114 Sl^n^i 60. 2. a, 114 iS^'lf 105. a i?iB^-|': 105. at in-in;! 86. b (2 f.) nn;i 147. 1 r\y! 148. 3 sii;> 148. 1, 177, 3 if'^r)') 172. 1 DTn; 19. 2. o ■jin;! 140. 1 IB&iT- 161. 4 AT : 1^11,1 (yy) 140. 1 pii;i 185. 2. 6 n''b«!i'Ti, Dbffil-in 47, 203. 5. c riin;> i48. 1 n-i\ n-i^^i 160. 3 -T ' -T - '•StJ'i; 147. 3 TOD'i; 88. (3. f. pi.) c ai"i; (n.) 190. 6, 192. 1 ai'lj (v.) 153. 2 Ti"!; 158. 2 ^^ 197. a, 216. 1. e ^'1.': 140. 1 nail 198. c, 207. 1. o T ; - ' oinani 22. a, 203. 5. a • - T S - ' ^Bh;; 140. 3 $"i; 140. 1 y'l; 140. 5 yiji (s>») 140. 5 yn;5 (I'b) 160. 3 si': (»») 34 Th (nb) 34, 172. 4 D?'l? 119. 1 »»hi 161. 4 Cl-Jfj 172. 4 pi;: 179. 2. a P'n;? 185. 2 ph; 140. 1 ■jipn;? 193. 2 p'npn;> I88, 207. 2, a itn") 82. 1. a (2), 147. 1 nwn;' i48. 3 rtr\«i;i 150. 1 (p. 182) DJpOn;' 61. 4. a, 150. 1 (p. 182) 370 INDEX III. ?i3^S»7 106. c ■j^yatoT 88 (m. pi.) Ti?ato7 127. 2 ijyaiBi 103. a DITB^ 158. 2 "J©:? 172. 4 n)3ito:< 105. a, 158. 2 DiB;i 147. 1 nto;! 158. 2 ntos;! 04. 1, 168. 2 ibsnte': 194. 1 OWi»;i55. 1, 88(m.pl.), 158. 2 "IDWte? 47 -lynis;' 54. 4 ■01: 236, 258. 3. 6 ■jlbSO;! 88 (m. pi.) US'! 146, 147. 2 n«;i 66. 1 (2) 6, 153. 5, 167. 3 -31B'' 157. 3 T T aW;)1 153. 5, 167. 3 ai»>''i 157. 3 AT- a«:;i,3ias5 153.5, 160.3 aTD.7 63. 2. c, 84. 3. b, 144. 2 !ai5?n 147. 6 311J?T 99. 3. a SHJ^!) 172. 4 Tipinaic;' io6. c 121D-' 61. 6. a f^aiBiT 33. 4 r : -T : 'inaiB'' 61. 6. a(?), 90 ■(2f.) •fn^Oi 90 (2 f.) D'^-IO;! 141. 1 nilB^i 140. 1 Dttite? 82. 5. a lio;" 148. 1 nny^T»;« 6i. a. a iSSIO;' 157. 3 no^i 140. 1 nffl7 140. 3 DTOtl©;' 118. 3 iD:'nriiB;i i06. c ilB^ 164. 2 naiffi;'! i60. 3 siis;:: 140. 5 laSIC:' 88. (m. pi.) n3fflvi26. 1 b©.';! 172. 4 iri^bo;' 141. 3 Vbld"} 172. 1 -n^lS^ 92. c Dis;! 140. 1 SttlS: 60. 1. a bmyutt'^ 67. 2 (3) a W 147. 1 SS©:' 177. 3 SI©) 177. 3 ««;" 19. 1, 147. 1 15«;? 19. 1, 147. 1 i3T»;i5 105. a *',?ia;> 216. 1. 6 y«i, y©'' 65. a, 201. yT»<;n 172.4 W«?«'? 141. 6 nSffl'' 19. 2. 6 ItD^BtJ^ 88 jTlbiB©:: 105. a nsbiB©;; 105. 6 ?fBf f5 99- 3- a p«i1 10. a jpTB^il 176. 3 inpffi?1 4. a niD'' 158. 2 T ']r\V'; 193. 2. a nj'IIE'? 88 (3 f. pi.), 147. 4 tnt'l'] 99. 3. a, 119. 1 ?l5im»'' 106. c 'V : IT : n©^ 66. 1 (2) 6, 158. 2 n«?1 66. 1 (1), 172. 4 DBiniCti 82. 5. a inn©ti:js7. 2(4), 176. 1 !iirinc?5 176. 1 '}1''P©7 172. 1 "17SP1B7 54. 4 xn'? 111. 2. 6 «ri»T 177. 3 1!*ri^5 176. 3 finnsn;' 60. 3. c (2) iniNni 19. L 60. 3. b " t: ▼ : ' (2), 120. 1 bsani, ibsan'' 119. 1 -» : • ' ITT ; • b'narit' 96. 6 ban^:? 176. 3 a|5n:i 96. b 1 io?ar)'^ 96. a, 122. 2 i©?an;i 96. a, 122. 2 in^ 197. 6 iinntT' 221. 2. 5 INDEX III. 371 ■an;'5 66. 1 (1), 174. 4 »m'n^ 166. 5 bnnii 17 6. 3 Tri;i 160. 1 D3ri*T 176. 3 msbn-i 96. 6 On^ 140. 6 Dh7 140. 1 imp;' 141. 1 nan'' i4o. i rr- :'J'!lS^ttri:> 166. 5 ItDiiTSni 96. 5 iP;" 54. 2, 84. 3. 6 msn'i 126. 1 oroni 121. 3 SteSn;! 166. 5 »ri;:5 i76. 3 ■ byn:! 176. 3 -obyn;' 96. 6 yyyt}'; ii9. i !^1S|sri;'88.(m.pl.),96.6 ni»>Bni 96. b IT - ! ' ■. IjPBn': 96. a llS'lpri'' 96. 6 0|l5n^ 96. 6 :?|:n7 126. i iS)?ri^ 105. a nri?5 (ii>) i6o. i Dttiiri'? 82. 5. a 3 231. 1, 242. a, 267. 6 aX3 183. 6 n-iaS? 57. 2 (3) a, 231. 3. 6 n'ss (-ii5;i3) 53. 2. a I'lSS 156. 3, 199. 6 11»»3 239. 2 (2) n33 (v.) 82. 1. a (1), 85. 2 133 (adj.) 216. 1. e, 217 Mas 198. a (4) lias 185. 2, 197. 6 Bias 87 833 82. 5. a 033, 033 92. c teas, ntoas 51. 2,197. c ©33 87 rtnna^S 246. 2. a 13 197. h, 200. b rO 235. 3 (4) nn3 121. 1 T T Qi^lnS 231. 6. a ■jnb 186. 2. a ins 80. 2. S nsTO 198. a (2) oaia 186. 2. OS »ai3 50. 1, 216. 1. e D''?ai3 207. 2. a ms 11. 1. 6 a3i3 57. 1, 187. 1. e 113 82. 5. a ■jSiS 59 $15313 161. 4 (T Di3 184. b, 197. a 13T3 22. a ins 116. 4 1iri3 121. 2 SJnS 119. 1 "i? (n.) 53. 3. a, 184. 6 3 (conj.) 239. 1 OS 13 239. 2 (1) ll'i? 187. 1. c 1113 187. 1. c Di^Si 16. 2. ra Ti"? 200. c ibi3 184. J, 194. 2. 6 tibil 186. 2, 210. c ni;? 13 43. 6 ■jiiriiS 57. 2 (3) a, 231. 3. 6 133 187. 1. e, 197. a, 200. c, (?, 207. 1. b Q1133 203. 3 i33 Ml 215. 1. c b3 Ml9. 2. a, 215. l.e fe 277. a Sb3' 179. 1. a SibB 184. a 8^3 220. 1. b Disbs 203. 4 iriSbs 165. 2 ab3 197. c nbs 179. 1. a nb3 174. 3 bis. Qnb3 33. 3, 220. 1. 6 -AT \ ' n5ni)3 220. 1. b T ; T \ lbs 165. 3 1>3 93. a l^l 220. 1. 6 niblbS 201. 1. 6 ni>3 174. 3 -hi 61. 2, 184. 6 ! 372 INDEX III. Sibs 184. a ?!^b? 221. 6. c Dib? 208. 3. d in-ibs, irr'*!? i74. 2 ir]iriib3 174. 2 DWbS 174. 2 bsbS 154. 3, 161. 2 !)b3b3 161. 4 Db2 220. 1. 6 nsbS 220. 1. 6 T T li ''Snb?! 165. 3 nias 231. 4. a riDSn'as 45. 4 TOS 233. a Dtt2 90 (pass.) Tnas 187. 2. c 13 (n.) 221. 6. a 'j3(a(ir.)43.a,235.3(4) n|3 139. 2 njSi 4. a n?? 54. 2 1133 200. c ni;3 211. a ?iri1'b33 24. S, 131. 2 D23 50. 1, 2 ■jySS 208. 3. a :i;3 197. », 210, 217 niSpS 203. 5. a n:iB:3 203. 1 bb3 22. a nin53 45. 2 nS3 198 8S3 51. 3, 200. o ?1KD3 221. 3. a IBS 93. a T nnsios 220. 1. h bos 51. 1, 84. 3. a (2) iass 61, 6 niDB3 200. b ap3 80. 2. a (3) 1BD3 216. 2. a DM 199. d rw-ininss 24. 6, 220. 2. c 053 121. 1 nnoys 104. » Si? 197. a, 217 nB3 198. c ■iSS 237. 2 (2) iaiBS 220. 2. c :n3S3 220. 1. 6 D;ibB3 203. 4 1B3 82. 5. a ■1B3 208. 3. b ng3 80. 2, 92. c, 126. 2 D11B3 187. 2 nnniB3 104. / IT : - - i* '^•2 199. & nWIS 199. d tTQ 50. 3, 197. 6 m3 183. J ••■AT D'13 186. 2. a bl2'n3 50. 3, 193. 2. c, 221. 6. a DO'n? 68. a Tn3 141. 2 (p. 175) icns 221. 5. c -ni3 119. 1 rr^S 60. 4. a, 61. 5 93. a, 121. 1 irrns 119. 4 in'13 199. & ai?3, natos 51. 2 n-^'ntes 197. c? 103 82. 1. a (1) ■jinCS 193. 2 anS 183. 6, 215. 1. a nns 77. 1, 78. 1 nins 139. 2 niri3 216. 2. 6 r:in3 207. 1. d 5)03 197. a, 216. 1. e 51^3 61. 1. b nisns 203. 5. a in3 60. 1 tins 141. 1 (p. 175) b 231. 1, 233, 242. 6, 267. 6, 272. 2. a Sb 11. 1. a, h Sb 61. 4. a, 235. 1 "i'i'i^b, ishsib, I5i!i»b 67. 2 (2) a •ijisb, tjisb, iijisb 67. 2 (2) a O'l'SISb 14. a lisb 159. 2 USb 11. 1. a asb 166. 3 n^Sb'l 39. 4. a in'bsb, D'ln'bsb 67. 3 .(2) a INDEX III. 373 nibsb 51. 2. (2) a UA) 207. 2. c nbxb 57. 2 (2) o, 111. 2. c, 231. 3. a nsin sb 27 2b 61. 3, 186. 2. c, 197. 6, 215. 1 DiSab 208. 3. d anb 141. 1 (p. 175) aab 61. 3, 200. c, 216. 1,217, 221.1, 3,222 aabil 61. 1. a "liraab 104. k lab 235. 3 (1), 237. 2(2) ■jniab 220. 1. b ns'^ab 220. 1. 6 T T ~ : Biab 90 (pass.) S^ab 196. d, 209. 2. 6 y'bab 125. 2 ■jab 80. 2. 6 fab 207. 1. b, 215. 1. a njab 200. b rp, -lyab 35. 1 Oa^, 1»ab 82. 1. a (1) ©a'b 90 (pass.) m»ab 104. h nab (nanb) 53. 2. a y'^p 125. 2 niBjb 231. 4. a nnb 148. 2 rrib 148. 2 ■'P-Ib 148. 2 njpinb 104. jr hb 27 T nanb, n^nb 63. 1. a, 214. 1. b, 216. 2. J nnb 141. 2 (p. 175) unb 119. 1 ni-inb 112. 2, 177. 1 ' QJ>nb 231. 5. a T r t "ipenb 91. 6 bitttonb 180. a n-iatonb 94. b Tittfflnb 94. 6 lb 11. 1. b ib 51. 4. a lb 239. 1 nib 200. a I'lb 194. 2. a, 210 !!?b6 4. a nisb^ib, see nbibb ' T ' T \ ib^b 194. 2. b ib^lb 239. 2 (3) Dibib 187. 1. e yh 158. 3 nb 207. 2. a sirinb 113. 2 Di'^nb 208. 4 ■ - T : ^':nb 216. 1. il^i?b, nbiBb 60. 2. a laob 94. b nb 54. 2, 148. 2 nnb 231. 4. a ?ib nnb. 35. 1 M, tt see IP IStt 235. 3 (1) D'^SJtt 93. d nst: 207. 1./, 226 bj^Stt 93. 6 •'ISB 207. 2. a naiSa 195. 3 lisa 190. b, 191. 5. a, 200. c n^iTSb 203. 2 •'tiriK'a 237. 2 (1) b^JJtt 190. a, 191. 5, 197.6 nbaSB 191. 6. a, 207. 1. e ■jSa 60. 4 DDCSa 19. 2, 119. 3 DCSa 119. 3 rnox'a 33. 2 D'^nosM 33. 2 n^bsstt 195. 3 nStt 237. 2 (1) D'^nS'a 203. 4, 226 naM 2o7. 2. 6 rinoatt 63. 1. a "inCM 60. 1. a ■^aia 164. 2 i'7?b2'a 237. 2 (4) tTiPyStt 119. 1, 221. 2. a nisn'a 25 "ISIM 197. 5, 200. c, 207. 1. b iniaitt 61. 6 yt^yn, "nva 55. 2. a b'^ap 200. c ribbija 142. 1 liSM 207. 1. c ^Va 190. 6, 207. 2, 210. a, 215. 1. b, 216. 1. a nyaa 205 nsaa 216. 1. 6 ViyM 207. 1. 6 caia 61. 5 1M 207. 2. a pa'7'a 95. a n-lSTQ 219. 1 INDEX III. 375 rTnaTn ee. 2 (2) 6, 219. 1 TTtt 141. 5 1"1'!3 184. b ni^a 190. 6, 191. 4 li-M 190. 6, 207. 1./ y^TJ? 235. 2 (3) •\';'}'a 190. 5 •'3;>7a 216. 1. d SSTa 167. 1 n'? 190. 6 yTO 190. ft iDpytJ'a 220. 1. 6 na, ma, na 75. 1, 196. a nira i4i. 2 (p. 175) rnairra i98. a (3) . ni-iTO 177. 1 b nsbna 237. 2 (4) D"'3bTO 94. e, 161, 1 nna 76. 1 nito nia 63. 1. a nDSntt 191. 4, 198. a (3), 207. 1. a, 216. 1. ft niys]?na 96. e ina 60. 4. a, 235. 3 (2) ni^nria 112. 3 asitt 197. t^ T tT'asitt 205 »a^a 167. 2 taia 157. 1 bia, bit: 237. i bbia 141. 4 IDitt 200. c 'TSl'a 150. 5 IDTO 190. ft loiu 200. c n?ia 190. ft nn»TO 90 nisyia 207. 1. a TSTO 140. 6 SSitt 191. 5. o ^53?ia (IS) 94. e, 165. 2 SSia (Sb) 165. 2 ■'SSia 60. 3. c, 216. 1. a risa^itt 167. 2 triip^ia 160. 4 5'nitt 207. 2. a tn^yxi, wy^yn 69. a ifflnia 216. 1. a aCilQ 191. 3, 5. a, 200. c, 215. 1 ''aitOia 61. 6. a tna 61. 2, 183. ft, 208. 3. c, 217 nia 57. 2 (5) nma 61. 6. a ■inia 221. 5. a nattt 60. 2. a, 190. a, 191. 3, 197. ft, 200. a, 215. 1. ft nara 126. i cninara 220. 1. ft DtinaT'a 220. 2. a nja 24. a, 76. 1 lira 53. 2. a, 111. 2. c jbTB 207. 1. a, 210. e nittp? 191. 5, ninsTM 207. 1. a T?T?T^ 161, 2 nn'iT'a 219. 1. ft p'lTM 200. c TiSna 164. 4 riana 54. 1, 205. ft bbina 142. 1 bna 140. 6 Di'^bna 190. ft Qiabna 94. e np'bna 207. 1. d inbrttt 190. a nsna 197. ft, 200, c, 209. 1 i!n;na 220. 1. ft pina 190. a DEOna 180. a ninsjsri'a iso. a n-'iana 94. e cinsritt 180. a "iprna 190. a tTina 19. 2. ft, 196. ft niacria, niaona ea 3. a, 216. 2. a pCna 207. 2. ft na-ja 191. 4 naa 197. ft, 200. c inua 220. 1. 6 innaa, iinaa 24. ft lima 168. a, 174. 1 nisbria i67. 1 ^ibabca 161. 2 nsBtaa i67. 1 376 INDEX III. iSTO'D'a 216. 1. c SB'Q 190. a ly^tt 60. 3. c, 216. 1. a "IM 200. a XIEJa 196. c? T T - ■la is. 1, 196. a Tl^B 220. 2. 6 -I'lnija 13. a ^jr^y^i2, n-i-n si. 2 T T • ' T (2)6 Q^iM 201. 1, 203. 5. c ■>»i)3 57. 2 (2) D"'D''13;''a 150. 1 mpiri2 11. 1. a n)75i» 61. 4, 207. 1. e "i^;)'a 4. a npaiM 150. 4 • liffiitl 190. 6 iDUJ^ia 57. 2 (2) niDi'a 190. 6, 191. 4 D'^lfflia 210. c n^spia 200. c b'SB 260. 2 (1) Vhoii, DbM 94. a nbb'a 53. 2. a DD^ 190. b -iDtt 77. 2, 80. 2 ba-IDU 54. 3, 180. a rn-n 216. 1. 6 n-Ola 98. 1. a, 125. 1 inM 216. 1. a D'lblBD'a 95. a nsiBS'a 207. 1. a ?in!sa 220. 2. a Sbia 82. 1. a (1) »\^ (v.) 77. 3, 82. 1. J(l) Sb^ (adj.) 90 ^ N^tt 166. 2 S^a 165. 2 nS^tt 201. 1. a msbtt 166. 2 msiitt 166. 2 D^Sbtt 201. 1. a nDSb'a57. 2(3)a, 214. 1. 6 niDsba 11. 1. 6 inDSSba 220. 2. c ns'ba 166. 2 "lrl^i!bM 33. 1, 61. 6. a, 218 nabK. 237. 2 (2) ■jnabtt 220. 1. b ^aba 191. 3 nba 200. J, e ibtt 165. 3 naib'a igs. a (2) riDlba 98. 1. a libtt 207. 1. c •"iwiba 92. 5 nbtt 187. 1. a inbtt 216. 1. a ttba 92. d -t2ba,!t:b'a80. 1, 92.c O-'btt, 'J"'>tt 199. a ■fbtt 217 nrbtt 217 -■jbtt 89 •jbtt 63. 2. a, 217. 221 6, 222 •fbtt 65. a baa-'f^'a 44. «■ naba 11. 1. a naba 211, 217, 222 ■jCan-Sfbtt 44. a laba 11. 1. a iabtt 66. 2 (2) a iabtt 61. 1 niab53 22. a, 209. 3, 217 niabi? 64. 9: laba 11. 1. a laba 61. 1, 216. 2, 2. a ■•aba 89 (f. s.) niiaba 62. 2 cabtt 64. 2 'J'^aba 199. a p'lia-iab'a ei. 6. «, 195. 3, 218. a nabtt 75. 1 bbtt 141. 4 nabtt 191. 2 nblJttbtt 235. 2 (3) i:Bba 53. 3. a. 111. 2. c •'SSbtt 237. 2 (2) nipbtt 191. 5 ©ipba 190. a D'^npba 190. a, 203. 2 ipOba 93. a inbtt 164. 2 niynbtt 51. 4 TSaia 139. 3 ninSTji'a 24. 6, 190. a INDEX III. 377 o;'np'a 209. 1. a -[■21212 191. 5. a U^vi^Vn^ 161.1 n3bi3iai9i. 5. a, 211, 214. 1. b nsbtt'O 61. 1. 6 mia3?i2'ai 45. 3 : IT -: 1- I' -\1212 190. 6 'on'i-nsn 24. b, i90, a 1[tS1212 93. e r\)tl212 198. a (3), 214. 1. b, 221. 2. a V2 174. 5 ■jXl 232, 233, 242. a, 260. 1, 267. b .VD4.a ys*na 96. «, 6, 122. 2, 131. 6 TJia, iJa 140. 6 niDB 207. 1. c oisia 207. 1. c -I^nrra 24. 6 ma 160. 5 i3tt 61. 6. a, 199. 6, 232. a "^Sn 232. a TiyDtt 127. 2 ni''|??'a 209. 2. a nf =tt 4. a nsa 196. J, 211. a -riS'a 19. 2. a Ca 54. 2. a, 207. 2, o aDtt 140. 5 nSia 64. 2. a •J'^p'a 140. 5 ln3?ia 196. b i^un 190. 6, 216. 1. a ''nm 194. 2. a nSSa 216. 1. 6 T •• - ISOB 190. a ■jSOa 93. e niDSD'a 50. 2 DiSCjiD'a 167. 1 IMD'a 200. c Dba 139. 2 bya 190. 6 bya 84. 3. a (3), 118. 2 b^a 237. 2 (1) b?b 190.6 rh'$i2 190. 6 T ": - DbStt 119. 3 T "; - Oya 237. 2 (1) IBOa 190. a,. 191. 4, 'i?'a 190. 6 215. 1. b 51'D"™?!''? 60. 4. a rTlDM 53. 2. a nnoa 94. e nnnDB 54. 4 iiasa 216. 1. a rnS12 216. 1. a niD-l5?'a 216. 2. a ■'D'l?'!? 216. 2. a niyia 60. 3. c ni-ia?!?, ni-iastt 207. ni»SB 209. 1 1. 6 itos'a 200. », 215. 1 !? "I^Stt 237. 2 (2) bBTfl 191. 1 'i'l?')? 200. c ''SBtl 237. 2 (2) n^n 210 D'^'^IfB'a 95. a TiSM 190. 6, 210. a, 216. "IBB 140. 5 1. a nPSB 191. 2, 215. 1. 6 yi'S12 207. 1. c S^PSU 221. 7. a triSW 161. 4 VM 156. 2 nijTyTa 54. 3, 221. 6. 6 ssia 11. 1. j D'>"lTS''a 94. e SS'a 57. 2 (2), 163 Uya 60. 3. c, 183. i, DSSSia 61. 1. c, 164. 4 207. 2. a ,'JSS'a 89 (f. pi.) VlTQ 78. 1, 121. 1 nSSb 57. 2 (2), 205 Dni?'a 221. 2. 6 D^yB 201. 1 ■j^iSB 200. c i:;'^^ 61. 6. a Tya 158. 3 nnsi^'a io4. » ninsisK 104. i onhs'a 220. 2. a nsa 190. 6, 200. a maa 190. 6 378 INDEX III. msna 2or. i. c riTOB 198. c bSM 140. 5 yaia i90. 6 n»2p 191. 5 pSTS 150. 5 ISM ISO. 6, 210 ■'"lati 194. 1 n:'ns'a i97. d Di'nS'a 207. 2. a ■'ma 164. 2 pH 186. 2. c mpM 191. 5. a 24. 6, 190. a 216. 2. a nsmpH 104. A, 221. 3. a Diptt 197. 6, 200. a, 216. 1 biapM 217. a lapia 95. a "nsripi 61. 6. o bj?)a 200. a, 215. 1. 6 nDb]5'!2 221. 3. a ■':ibbpB 90 (3 pi.) rOpH 165. 3 n:pa 221. 7 •imsija 90 (2 f.) nbSjJ'a 216. 2. a ''snp'a 167. 1 ■'S'^pW 216. 1. a m;?tt 24. 6 rrnp* 95. <^ npnptt 161. 2 SIM 196. aXi2 159. 1 aiiaj 159. 1 saitts 159. 1 biaa 159. i n-'biia; 159. 3 nb'as 200. J, e T T J ' lbB3 159. 1 DJ^btt3 141. 2 Dtt3, D133 140. 2 SS'n3 207. 1. 6, 209. 3. b inSSM? 60. 1. a nrij5a5'i4i. 2 nttS (1») 159. 1 IBS 185. 2 n^ms 45. 4, 97. 1 D3 174. 5 103 135. 2, 140. 2 nsaos 164. 5 nnD3 141. 1 T J IT 71303 140. 2 nD3 3. 1. a, 131. 3, 165. 1 aiD3 (K. fut.) 157. 3 aiD3 (Ni.) 159. 1 QiaiOS 159. 3 TaiDS 11. 1, a •inaiDS 66. 2 (2) c, 159. 1 tfOS 50. 1 ?ID3 184 ln3D3 220. 1. 6 1303 216. 2. a 003 141. 3 (p. 175) nySST 9,9. 3 nBD35 99. 3 rn^y; 111. 3. a liy? 159. 1 li^^^y^ 62. 2 Oi"lW2 201. 1. b b?3 197. a, 200. c D'lb?? 203. 2, 208. 4 Ob^S 60. 3. a, 112. 3 trab??, D-ipb?? 112. 3 D?3 82. I. a (2) !T7'a?3 32. 3. a f«?3 187. 2. c n?3 121. 1 ny3 58. 1, 184. b lyb 184. 5 STl?? 58. 1 fn?3 111. 3. 6 nto?i5 172. 3 "^riaiBS 159. 1 yiBS 159. 1 atiiailBS 159. 1 D-iaiBS 169. 3 nisbB3 235. 3 (3) nsbs? 166. 1 riSbB3 166. 1, 205. c nnxbB3 166. 1 T - ( : • ib&3 106. a ^S-^bB? 173. 1 ''nibs? 173. 1 bbB3 92. a 1515 61. 4 7B3 179. 2. a %5 60. 2, 102. 1, 197. b, 200. c DiblPB? 187. 2. a. v.? 217 3S3 50. 1, 179. 2. « n^3 217 !Ta«21 99. 3 T T - na? 61. 2 p'las? 54. 4, 96. b 13bS3 65. a ■'Mas 86. 6 (2 m.) 1S3 50. 3, 51. 1 lis 131. 3 nnS3 24. b, 98. 1. a nn^3 24. b, 106. 6 Dm23 104. i 382 INDEX III. m: 149. 1 nap3 131. 3 ISa]?? 91. d ipi 185. 2. b n]5! 174. 3 'iSJ'ipj 24. c ^V)?? 217 oni2p: 159. 1 ipD, Sips 185. 2.d, 209. 2 nip3 173. 1 ipli;?? 173. 1 bp3, bpi 140. 2 iri'jip? 141. 2 Dp3 217 ap3 131. 3 nap3 217 rp3 179. 2. a S'lp? 91. 6, 166. 3 13 43. a, 200. a S13 97. 2. a nnS 183. b T131 99. 3, 147. S 1SB-I3 164. 3 p5 140. 2 stop 82. 5. a Sto3 131. 3 SiB3 131. 4 Sfe3 (Pi.) 165. 2 istoS 164. 4 TJStoS 164. 4 lto3 165. 3 Sltoj 57. 2 (3) a, 86, (3 pi.), 164. 3 lite 165. 3 S«3 177. 3 »TB3 165. 2 bSfflS 119. 1 a»3l 150. 3 niaiB? 205 13nffi3 141. 2 is;?'©? 220. 1. 6 nil^3 207. 2. e D''1B|5 140. 5 ■JIBS 84. 3. a (3) n3.lB3 51. 4 bos 84. 3. a (2) n'b03 124. a ns'^iiB? 97. 1 maiBj 141. 1 nacs 141. 1 •iSIB; 92. c vll?3 50. 2 nplSS 53. 3. a, 128 nniBD 24. c T TT njniB? 83. c (2) nynffi? 172. 3 •jiw 11. 1. 6 DDIW 11. 1. 5 -lOp 50. 1, 80. 2. a 84. 3. a (2) 105 130. 1, 132. 1 fnS, -^W 131. 4 "W 130. 1. 6 isms 24. c TT Di:n3 11. 1. 6 b ?liln5 101. 3. a fK 50. 1 T^ni 131. 3 ini:;?n5 24, 6 Tins 125. 3 era 50. 1 -T DFlW 132. 1 nsp 200. 6, 207. 1./ D'iinSD 203. 3 ab, aho 134. 1, 139.5 aao 138 aao 141. 4 ■'S'laaD, 15250 104. I, 139. 1 litnD 139. 1 iniao 61. 3 3130 11. 1. 6 a^ao 235. 3 (1) aiab 90 ■*iap 19. 2. a iaao 24. b, 221. 5. a laao 19. 1, 45. 2 baO 187. 1. a ibaC 24. 6, 221. 5. a nbap 3. 1. a nsp 61. 1 (3), ninsiD 187. 2. c aaio 137, 141. 4 "710 184. 6 iniO 186. 2. a OTO 58. 1 now 58. 1 iDTO 62. 2 Ipso 66. 1 (2) 6 rWO 62. 2 INDEX III. 383 "itioise. 2. a 110 3. 1. a nhlD 53. 2. a, 220. 1. b aho 119. 1 nnnno 92. a, 122. 1 T'O 197. 6, 200. e, d 5l?D 51. 1,141. 2 (p. 176) b?0 3. 1. a, 51. 1, 80. 2. a (1) ■TDDp 138 ■I3D 3. 1. a, 51. 1 nnbp 125. 1 Isobo 141. 5 nii>DbOl87.1.e,207.2.a pbO 84. 3. a (2) rho 55. 1, 193. 2. c rtb 197. 5 •VtSO 195. 1 iintlMD 104. i : IT T : nSD 183. J, 184. b D'i"l15D 207. 1. a Di|D30 207. 2. a "liaSp 195. 1 ISO 19. 2. a, 89 nnyoi 234. a T T t: Wp 131. 3 ■i?p, i?b 122. 2 nn»p 51. 1 qo 200. c, 207. 2. a nsp 3. 1. a IEOI 156. 4 ]Bp 50. 1 qsb 141. 3 (p. 175) -ISO 61. 4 D1ID 210. a • T ■'pi'lp,, ip'i'lp 60. 3. c n&?'lp 68. a inp 184. 6 Dlttrip 104. g •irip 217 nnnp 217 innp 66. 2 (2) a 3» 197. J, 200. c, 215, 1. a 5? (obh?) 19. 2. a lay 112. 5. c - r lay 65 V AT may 111. 3, a inay 220. 2. 6 T T -J inay 65 AT T iiayi 61. 1. o T -;- ■"•la? 216. 1. a inay 61. 1 ini^ay 195. 3 ;Ti'nay 220. 1. 6 iTiay 22. a nay 112. 5. s ''nayi94. 1,209.2,217 n^iay 62. 2 T • : - nii-nay 62. 2 Qi?")ay, Qi-iay 62. 2 ninay 217 !r|13y 106. a DDiay 106. a, 127, 2 nay 200. c asy 112. 5. a aay i86.'2. t biy 185. 2. 6 bjy 197. c nba? 197. c iy 237. 1, 238. 1, 267. 6 •ly 65. a A- iy, (lyi) 46 ny 43. a n^y 112. 5. a my 184. b tvny 209. 3 I'l? 238. 1. a ■^a iy 239. 2 (2) Eltiy 112. 6. a Tiy 112. 6. a "'ri'iy 220. 2. a aiiy 186. 2. 6 Tiy 235. 3 (1), 236 -i'as 161. 1 Tiy (v.) 157. 1 'l.':iy 156. 1 bjy, bl? 184. 6, 216. l.d biy 161. 1 nbiy 61. 1, 208. 3. c T : - ' ibiy 221. 5. 6 bbiy 142. 1 bbiy 141. 5 nyi obiy 63. 1. c ■■• T T nnbiy 6i. e. « 1"iy 166. 1 f\y 200. c 1?iy 141. 4 Diyiy 187. 1. e S|iy 201. 1 384 INDEX III. yny 1V9. 2. a liy 200. a nW (v.) 57. 2 (5) a, 161. 1 i::',» (adj.) 187. 1. b •jinW 193. 2 nn^y i98. a (3), 201. 1 ni? 161. 1 ty, T'y'65. a fit' T? 200. b, 207. 2 bTi'b"'b? 198. a (4) irb? 239. 2 (3) Dby 112. 5. 6 a|?y-by 237. 2 (2) nsby 93. c iB-by 237. 2 (2) •pby 112. 5. c nnbi> 61. 6. a D? 197. 6, 207. 2. a Oy 237. 1 Toy 110. 1 nb? 60. 3. 6 (1) IIM? 65, 89 (m. pi.) Iltty 60. 1. a •'Itt!? 111. 3. « iri^'H? 45. 2, 106. a niJiiay 209. 2, 210. d •''ay 199. 6 "ifi? 214. 2 •jay 65. a pb'?? 3. 4 Oilitt? 207. 2. a pby 185. 2.6, 207. 1. Ci 217 pay 184 "Day 208. 3. 6 nniay 3. 4 "'asy 24. 6, 216. 2. a risy 174. 3 Ijy 185. 2. c? n^:y eo. 3. 6 (1) inisy 174. 6 ''?? 185. 2. rf :*I3y 104. 6 Ipy 198, 217 Xiy 141. 4 n;:y 198, 217 . ■iDSy 139. 1 D3B3y 221. 5. e psy 50. 1 inhjiy 24. 6 ntnioy i4i. 2 D^SSy 208. 3. rf INDEX III. 385 bS:^ 112. 5. a nsy 200. a ISb 208. 3. 6 D"'nB» 60. 3. 6 (2) nnB5> 61. 6. a mia'iy, many 45. 5. a nnwy 214. 1. 6, 223. 1 •lany 22. « nnto? ige. d, 224 Qisian? 62. 2. J, 209. lintel? 210. h, 22'?. 3 2. a Q-iany y? 43. a, 185. 2 d, 198, tJ^nS; 60. 3. 6 (1) 217 nSin? 187. 1. e lianas' 193. 2 iny 216. 1. a nDiaS? 24. S, 216. 2. a f ilS 210. os na? 184. 6 C's), 217 TOn? lll. 3. a nsy 198 niany 200. c, 216. D:'nb2j> 203. 5 nyn? 137. 1. e DSy 80. 2. a (1), 82. 1. tin? 80. 2. 6 1. 6 a (2) ban? 193. 2. c DSy 197. S, 200. c ten? 197. a n|2> 217 nte? 200. a nm? 217 nsy 60. 3, 112. 6. 6 D3innay 24. 5 nipsy 220. 2. a ' ■ AT T -: 3]?? 112. 6. 6 apy 200. c, (^, 215. 1. 6 itoy (part.) 172. 5 ntes, ajpy 239. 2 (2) itey 172. 2 nia|?y 24. 6, 216. 2. a ite? 172. 2 Ti-iriiaj?? 24. 6 itei? 62. 2. c lajsy 24. h, 216. 2. a PlITlBy l72. 5, 209. 3. a npy 185. 2. 6 ni'tey 221. 7. a b]?b]?? 188 ?i':tey 201. 2 an]?? 195. 1, 207. 2. 6 ■'"I'lte? 227. 1 tep? 112. 5. a riite? 86. J (1 c.) te;?? 187. 1. 6 ''?inito? 102. 1. a n? 156. 2 tltoy 62. 2. c any iis. i ntoy 224 a'^ntoy 208. 3. a, 225. 1 nnto? 225. 1. a nto? 172. 1 pITB? 186. 2. c 11?? 84. 3. a (2), 112. 5. S ■^te? 216. 1. e ib-nptey 17. 2 nte? 79. 2, 112. 6. 6, 125. 3 ntey 197. a IBIC? 224. a nnpitey 207. 1. d any 197. 6 niatey 24. 6, 216. 2. a n? 43. «, 197. 6, 200. c, nte? 172. 2 207. 2, 215. 1. 6 ntiy 62. 2. c nn? so. 2 bsntoy, bx-ntey 13. h nny 219. 1. a ite? (pret.) 62. 2. c ^n? 194. 2 on? 112. 5. a pn? 84. 3. a (2), 112. 5. a nn? 112. 5. a, 125. 3 «B 11. 1. 6 nmSB 189. 2. c T ■inXB 104. c i^inSB 104. 6 iySD 125. 2 bsnns 57. 2 (2) h niirnne 13. 6 nte? 80. 2. 5, 112. 5. a Di'ins 55. i, 193. 2. e 886 INDEX III. I'lna 193. 2. c nns nws 33. i. a, 219. 1. 6 ns 11. 1. 5 ns 185. 2. d, 209. 1. a, 215. 2. 6, 220. 1. c nS) 235. 3 (4) IB 11. 1. b pS 179. 2. a -lis 139. 1 nni3 141. 4 TTB 141. 1 (p. ITS) nns 78. 1 "ins 184. 6 nns 198, 211. a ina 131. 3 nns 131. 4 TD3 125. 3 ID 61. 6. a n^S 198. c ^rpE, ra 62. 2 ffijbiB 59. a, 195. 1, 197. a, 200. 6 ^niB5,bi& 220. 1. 6 Sbs 18. 2. c 5^3 92. c aba 92. c Oaba 59. o, 195. 1, 197. a, 200. J, 208. 3. a n-ipba 66. 2 (2) c taiba 207. 1. c n^iba 198 it2ibB 216. 1. b nbiba 198. a (2) n;bibB i98. a (4) bba 141. 1 {p. 175) iJiabS 68. a, 75. 3 nbbs i3"b? 75. 3 iniDb? 194. 1 inbS 199. 6 •jB 239. 1 n:B 143. a T T ;13B 39. 4. a -IT r D"iDB 197. J, 201. 1 WDS 220. 2. c I'aiSB 194. 2 ''niisi 100. 2. a (1) nSB 187. 1. 6 bOB 208. 3. 5 b?B 76. 2, 83. J, 84. 3. a (3), 118. 2 b?B 60. 1. a, 61. 2, 4, 208. 3 ibSB 60. 3. b (2), 221. 5. a ■ibSB 221. 5. a ■"b^B 60. 3. b (2) iribSB 61. 1 Mbys 19. 2 D?B 60. 1, 63. 2. a, 197. b, 200. c, rf ISB 50. 2, 125. 3 1j?B 80. 2. a (4) "IpB 89 1"IpB 86. a ''S'llpB 106. 6 187. 2 n;?B 187. 1 nip-ni5B43. 6, 188 IB 197. c Sns 18. 2. c, 61. 2. o, 209. 3. 6 nSIB 11. 1. a nsna 199 nana 207. 1. 6 n'lOT-lB 207. 1. a nna 197. c n'lll'IB 207. 1. 6 ■jinB 193. 2 ina 194. 2 nns 50. 1, 79. 2 nnna i87. 1. c? i-lB 57. 2 (4), 184. J, 221. 5. c n^^lB 62. 2. f, 209. 1. a i^inB 62. 2. 6 piB 210. a riDhB 216. 1. a nOIB 200. c na 200. a ny-iB 11. 1. a ni>-iB 104. rf T : IB'IB 141. 4 ■J^nS 50. 2 fn? 200. c pna 50. 1 «na 210. a, 216. 1. a ona 50. 3 ©•^B 119. 1 T»nB50. 3, 68.ffl, 180. a B5ICIB 104. A, 119. I INDEX III. 387 nns 196. b, 209. 1. a TOS1 100. 2. a (2) 121CB 80. 2. a (l), 84. 3. a (3) nF\l»S 200. h BtjJlSB 166. 1 ne 197. a, 200. 6, 207. 2. a OSna 236. 2 (1) nans 216. 1. « nins 139. 2 np£l 80. 1 inn& 106. a, 125. 2 ■^nB 208. 3. d bhbtis 188 83? 148. 3 nxa? (n.) 216. 1. b snsa (v.) 148. 3, 164. 5 njiJJS: 148. 3, 164. 3 whin 208. 3. a ■jx'a 201. 1 iKSSa 216. 1. a n-'S!:?!*:? 188. a nSS 148. 2 iriSSt 148. 2 Tjnxa 30. 2 S3S 200. a, 216. 2. c 01822 56. 4 D'^siias: 53. 4 laS 208. 3. d nsaa 209. 2. 6 T ■ nias 165. 3 T IS 207. 2. a p'l'ns 187. 1 pnS 84. 3. a (2) p'lS 184, 198. a (2) p'12 66. a p'^S 80. 1 np'ia 198. a (2), 216, ■inpIS 65. a • ft tr T ^iFlpnS 92. d nns 50. 1 "in'2 197. a W^y^ 19. 2, 203. 6, 208. 4 1£ 174. 5 -1812 11. 1. « 1812 200. c, 216. 1, 216. 1. d mS 174. 6 n|)2 57. 2 (2) Tllia 11. 1. a Qin^'U, Drills 11. 1. pis 207. 1. c lis (v.) 50. 3 "l!lS (n.) 61. 3 pnS 61. 2 pns 92. e? "ins 50. 1 - T nhS 185. 2. b T •is 209. 2 n^S 208. 3. c n«S 187. 1. a 15'TiS 210. aip 50. 1 1t!p 80. 2. a (1) nijp 156. 4 Blip 11. 1. J "iWp 187. 1. c nsp 11. 1. a n'lp, n?p 174. 3 D?p 83. c (1), 154. 1, ,OSp 156. 3 inilp, ■'Wp 174. 2 161. 1 nsp 196. 5 bip 200. a ©iaip 59. o, 187. 1. c ap 139. 2 D^p 153. 2, 155 13^'^p 220. 1. b nnp 184. b ^^1p, ^^1)5 157. 2 I'ibp'^p 187. 1. e -rap 19. 2, 141. 1 iB^p 34 Tip 200. a niap 104. d iM^p 34 *i!3p i4i. i bap 86. b (3 pi.) Qi^ip 156. 2 l5p1 100. 2. a (2) ibap, ibap 19. 2. c, oiaip 83. c (1) fTibp 214. 2 221. 5. a ni^'Mip 198. a (4) flibp 141. 2 Oy-bap 19. 2 y^p 179. 2. a bbp 84. 3. a (2) i:3p 141. 3 ' nisip 57. 2 (3) a bbp i4i. 4 yap 92. d inh-ip 21. 1 rtbp 20. 2 naip 92. c np 132. 2 ncbp i98. a (3) ?lSap 92. c, 101. 3. a, np 53. 2. a, 132. 2 bpbp 141. 4 104. h inp 132. 2 bp"bp 187. 1. e "lap 78. 1 Onp 132. 2 Dp 57. 2 (5), 153. 1, lap 200. c -nnp eo. 3. c, 132. 2 i85. 2. « iniap io4. j nnp 132. 2 ©inp 59. a, i§7. 1. c tJilp 185. 2. 5 ipnp 132. 2 nittp 156. 2 a''«iip 201. 2 ?;at)p 19. 2, 221. 5. a biap, bap 82. 1. a (1) INDEX III. 389 li)»j? 24. c njiajs 61. 4, 66. 2 (2), 157. 2 yiap 208. 3. b M)? 59 ll? 215. 1. 6 S3|3 92. d, 166. 3 inssj? 166. 2 n5|3 200. c nip 172. 2 i3p 172. 2 "Tasp 215. 1. c nU 141. 1 (p. 175) IIP 80. 2. 6 13?DP 54. 3 ■'ttlDp 89 (f. s.) DDp 84." 3. a (3) -nop 87 DDp 141. 3 (p. 176) n^Bp 196. c nsp 60. 1 > nsp 18. 2. c inSp 220. 1. b ISp 184. 6 Tap 186. 2. a yap 141. 1 (p. 175) "iSp 60. 1, 2, 84. 3. a (3), 125. 3 Oa-lSp 106. a mp 196. J, 211. a S"lp 179. 1. a S"-lp 166. 2 Snp 167. 1 nisnp 166. 2 ?S'1p 104. c nb^ls sip 36. 1 ISnp 60. 3. c, 98. 2, 164. 3 nsnp 166. 1 nsip 166. 2 aip 77. 3, 78. 2, 82. 1. a (2), 118. 1 Sip (imp.) 119. 1 aij? 185. 2. 6 nip 200. a -aip 19. 2. a na-lp 98. 1. a laip' 39. 4. a DSnip 19. 2, 119. 3 ■;aip 19. 2. 6, 193. 2 •iSaip 216. 1. a •■ T ; It D'nip 200. c Silp 179. 1. a T It ailp 186. 2. 5 nip 187. 1. b snip 11. 1. a snip 196. cZ •irilp 89 (f. s.) nip 118. 1 "jlp 197. a niDIp 203. 5. a ■iSIp 214. 2 1\5'^)?, I''?^!? 221. 4 Ol'SIp, n:i31p 203. 1, 208. 4 bblp 193. 2. c Ttll? SO. 2 ypip 187. 1. e Ipip 161. 2 ritoptop 207. 1. « ntDp 79. 2, 84. 3. a (2) ™p 210 nilBp 216. 1. d Uffip 61. 4, 183. b IBp 80. 2. a (2) lisp 80. 1 DIlBp 126. 1 ffiffip 141. 3 (p. 175) niBp 197. b, 199. d Dffip 187. 1. a OniPffip 24. 6 nnffip 216. 2. a nsi 77. 2, 79. 1, 80. 1, 114 n'SI 172. 2 i«1 172. 2 1&1 26, 121. 1 i:aiNi 57. 2 (3) a nixi 172. 2 nisi 172. 2 "iSI 60. 3. b (2) ni'SI 207. 2. d ■jiffiiSI 227. ,1. a nttXI 166. 3 niMSI 11. 1. a hittSI 156. 3 T ''5S1 102. 3 ' insi 11. 1. a bis ttJSI 156. 3 ©SI 61. 2. a, 207. 1. / piaSI 11. 1. 6 390 INDEX III. pCSn 193. 1, 227. 1 roiias'i 235. 3 (3) n-icsn 57. 2 (3) a niffiS^I 198. a (4) yy C'y) 153. 1 an, ah (»») 82. 1. a(3) an 217 an (ly) 15 8. 3 ah (n.) 186. 2. c aan 141. 1 (p. i76), 179. 2. a rnaan 250. 2 (2) « nan 179. 2. « nan 235. 3 (3) nan 172. 3, 174. s lan (i'») 156. 4 lan 141. 1 lah 139. 1 ian, sian 197. a, 209. 3, 226 nian 60. 3. a o:inian 203. 4, 226 a^an 249. 1. a lyian 227. 1 niyian 227. 3 yan, 3>ah 227. 3 Diyan 207. 1. a fan 84. 3. a (2) nan i58. 1 nan 235. 3 (3) ''nan33. 1,61.6.01,218 Tsn 84. 3. a (2) ^an 50. 1 ban 197. a, 217 ''ban 194. 2 n^ban 203. 5. a Sah 126. 1 'T^ (TDr) 53. 2. 6, 150. 1 (p. 182) nn (yi?) 139. 2 in, nnn i48. 3 nnn (inf.) i48. 2 qnn 78. 1 5inn 114 ■"piann 114 •^ann 19. 2. a tfyy 148. 2 innn 148.2 Dann 22. a ain 158. 3 nin 57. 2 (5) a, 156. 1 n^r) 184. J nin 197. b ivn 161. 1 bain I86. 2. a n^n 80. 2. a (4) Diain 157. 1 T^n 179. 1. a yrn ui. 4 ©in 57. 2 (2) a ann, ainn 197. b, 200. « mnn i87. 1 pinn 185. 2. b bnn 197. c, 200. b urn 118. 2 Dnn 119. 1 onn 61. 2. a, 197. 5 nttfin 196. c Q'^ann 201. 1, 208. 3. a fnn 80. 2. a (3) nsnn 119. 3 pnn 185. 2. 5 pnn 119. 1 npnn 119. 3 aon 84. 3. a (2) TCaan 68. a, 180. a - -: \ ' •in 184. b a^n (v.) 153. 2, 155, 158. 2, 3 ain (n.) 186. 2. c niain 158. 1 'p''-\ 186. 2. c Bpin 235. 2 (1) ©in 186. 2. c 'jitjin 57. 2 (2)' a, 227 1. a •fn 50. 1, 186. 2. c aan 84. 3. a (2) 'lan 141. 1 ?ran 141. 1 (p. 175) ban 60. 1 nban 198. a (2) inn 139. 1 •^sian 199. b nwh 208. 3. 6 ■'inian 104. k ijn, "isn-Hi. 1 ']T\ 139. 3 Tn 141. 5 ?n 60. 2, 215. 1. e 3?n (v.) 82. 1. a (2) a?n (adj.) 185. 2. I INDEX III. 391 nyn 139, 2 T n?T 186. 2. a, 215. e in?'l 220. 1. b 13>11 141. 1 lyn 221. 3. a ?I?"1 221. 3. a b?n 114 'J?»'1 122. 1 ^S?"! 187. 1. rf, 207. 2. y?n 141. 3 (p. 175) ISTO'I 220. 1. 6 «&n 186. 2. « SSn 92. B 126. 1 nbffi 126. 1 nnbiB 125. 1 221. 3. a 126. 1 inb© 200. a Nj-nbo 45. 4 nnb© 123. 5. a tlblB 84. 3. a (2) •i^lB 54. 2 ic'^bia 210. a iffi-'b© 199. i ''TBibffl 227. 1 niffiibffl 227. 3 ■ 9 nnfflib© 219. 1. a na^c 92. d bbffl 141. 3 (p. 175) Cbffi 84. 3. a (2) Db© 92. d D^© 92. c Ob© 93. d lab© 92. c ''Sb© 194. 2. a -©b© 215. 1. e ©b© 51. 3 t n©b© 220. 1. b n©bffi 223. 1 Di©b© 225. 1 ni©b© 207. 1. a Dfflb© 235. 2 (1) 5fn©b© 220. 1. 6 CaniCb© 260. 2 (2) a 394 INDEX III. DnWbO 260. 2 (2) a 1jnb» 53. 2. a DID 235. 1 DO 43. a, 200. o, 215. 1. h laO 80. 2. a (3) naiB 219. 1. a iW 221. 3. a niaO 64. 2 niso 139. 2 nritpMIC 86. J (2 m.) "IMIB 66. 2 (2) c DittW 10. a n:>ttT» 201. 1, 203. 5. c n^yat 219. 1 •'31'aO 227. 1 nTgO 82. 1. a (2), -84. 3. a (1), 141. 3 (p. 175) udi 90 yat 79. 2, 84. 3. a (2) njiaia 223. 1 Qiibt? 225. 1 ntoy nsao 224. a yaO 80. 2. a (1), 82. 1. a (2) SiaiB 60. 1. a SblD 65. J yiaffi 184. h ydt 60. 1. a yati 60. 1 nywo 125. 1 TOMB 98. 1, 125. 1 •'yia© 125. 2 ???»» 106. a QSSaiB 125. 2 ')?1Q'D 89 (f. p].), 98. 2, 127. 1 '!vwiyi 127. 2 ■'3?'aO 125. 1 P?TD» 127. 1 n?tti25 205 ■inya© 106. a Tain 77. 2 Ittia 186. 2. a -mMJS 125. 1 T : T nniaB 19. 2 nnaiB 104. e «'!51B 197. h I© 197. a, 217 Si« 196. (f 830 177. 3 n5«200.f,rf, 211, 216.1 ■"inisi? 141. 2 I?© 227. 1 O'l'Sti 203. 4, 223. 1 nwn D^?© 251. 4. a 131D1B 250. 2 (2) a ni3lB 235. 3 (3) 150 141. 1 (p. 175) 13» 141. 5 r:iD 196. 5 n'l'npic 203. 3 yoto' 126. 1 TSUyO 195. 2 b?T» 208. 3. b •"byo 216. 2 y?« 141. 2 (p. 175) 1»SJ 197. 6 niy©, sniy© eo. 3. a IIISO 3. 1. a miiy© 187. 2. c •t -; - y»?«60. 3.J(2),141.6 U^VtSlb 187. 2. 6 ?liS:^ 89 nns© 214. 1 TOBO 89 (m. pi.) ■JB© 80. 2. a (2) i\t>W 89 riDBO re. J, 86. 6 (3 pi.) HDEB 22. a bBffl 82. 1. a (1) bB© 87 nbsttj 196. c ^BT» 207. 2. h nyso 196. 6 li'lSffi 187. 2. c m'nsna 203. 5. a DI'O&T? 203. 5. a nj515!| 131. 3 1|5« 209. 3 f^|3T0 187. 2 nitt|3», lniM|pl» 208. 3. a p)?10 141. 2 (p. 175) nptD 199. rf ninpi© 216. 2, 216. 2. a ■'l!JS''niB 60. 4. a tSin-l© 22. a, 51. 2, 68. a •fl© 60. 4. «, 221. 6. h H^yq 221. 6. 6 tnid 208. 3. 6 ©no, onto" 83. c (1), 92. 6, 122. 2 INDEX III, 395 niB-lW 187. 1. c D1«-I1JJ 19. 2 - T T tic 43. a n»0 223. 1 ■iffiC 227. 1 niffi© 225. 1 n© 200. a nn© 50. 1, 179. 2. a ini» 172. 2 inti, ninti i72. 2 •'tic 209. 2. 6 ' njnia 209. 2. 6 'jniriTB 250. 2 (2) a D'^nO 22. 6, 223. 1. a axn 51. 1 baxn 111. 2. o ^'yh iissriT 35. 1 l^iasn 64. 2 ibKri 111. 2. a lariSJ? 60. 3. c, 111. 2. e isr;\ 57. 2 (3) a, 184. 6 ittisn 216. 1. c Thsn 111. 2. a inbDsn 60. 3, c (?), 93. a, 111. 2. e TObDSn 91. c S|bsri 111. 2. a ■iMSn 216. 1. c " t: T insiatfFi 88 (f. pi.) inasri 88 (m. pi.) nJSn 200. b, 216. 1. 6 'JIBpS'n 151. 2 ■>BD«n 112. 3 ■'ii'lSF) 112. 3 'in!^p,i"isj!!n60.3. 6(2) nsisn 157. 3 niiBsn 190 nrisn iii. 2. 6 «?n 111. 2. 6, 177. 3 nsixhn 157. 3 T V I ,1832? 88 (f. pi.) nssiajj 157. 3 ■'nsan 88 (3 f.), i67. 3 njbnan 11 a 4 nsinn 97. 1. a nnsian 220. 1. 6 nn«ian88(3f.),i67.3 inri!«iari88(3f.),i67.3 Tign 140. 3 ■jiari 192. 2 plan 140. 3 *i35nan 105. 6 inaan 88 (3 f. pi.) *iS5iari 26 iwiari 160. 3 naani 172. 4 nraan 172. 3 ban 190. h, 197. a ban 190. b b^an 190 lani 158. 2 iryan 172. 1 njyan 126. 1 •iliriyan 105. 6 i^isan 126. 1 ^W^an 88 (m. pi.) 234. a wan 120. 3 ''sa-ian 105. b • - : IT : nsinasni 128 bijani 99. 3 ■jW^an 126. 1 mni 158. 2 liiin 172. 1 :ban 174. 4 ban 66. 1 (1), 173. 3 nban 172. 3 nban5 173. 3 nsban i58. 2 ■^nibifiaan 220. 2. c ji?ani 88 (f. pi.) I^psa-in 88 (2 f.) ijpa'in 105. a, cZ la'ini 99. 3 ■Jliann 55. 2. a, 88 (m. pi.) Il-iail? 88 (m. pi.) njna'in 92. e Tin 139. 3 irinn 192. 2 '':3is3'in 105. c njbnn 172. 3 ■j^iirinn 172. 1 ty'im 147. 5 IT " - stjin 45. 2 " : I- inn 61. 2 inn 30. 1 oinrn 190. b, 197, J, 200. a n^nn 172. 3 p;nn 88 (f. pi.) 396 INDEX III. roiinn, nsinn ii. i.a f-iMinn 160. 3 TOnn 94. c inn 140. 5 nbnn 190. 5 ^bnn 19. 1, 60. 3. 6 (2), 112. 2, 15,1. 1 Tlirisnn 220. 2. a -inm 172. 4 nwnrin 11 8. 4 J"'"!^!?!! 172. 3 ^>nnn 24. c, 142. 3 in 185. 2. fZ xin 57. 2 (3) a nam 190. b IJin 63. 2. a, 184. 6 ■lin 216. 1. d njnDin 220. 1. & tyriDin 105. e ^ji'pin 90, 151. 3 ?lDin 22. b, 151. 2 qoin 151. 2 n^yin 20V. 1. a nin 217 min 217 iMTBi-iin 104./ aiDin 190. J, 192. 2 "inwin 216. 1. a mirn 157. 3 ,TiDTn 88 (f. pi.) nnDjn 61. 4. ^ ■'brn 111. 2. b nwn 190. 5, 199. d ■'PTI?! (3 f.) 172. 3 1S'1|P'!:S3. 3.0,111.2. sarins lee. 4 nibiariFi 201. 1 banri eo. 3. a mn 172. 4 Tnhi 111. 2. 6 nmn 172. 4 - Tin 16. 2. a ■j-ibinn 158. 2 bnni 158. 2 bnri 140. 3 nbtin 190. b :iD;'S!ibripi 220. 2. c nji^nn i4i.-2 oijnn 190. a mianni 104. e rii;nri 190. 6 Tl-n^ '220. 2. a Onm 60. 1. a, 157. 3 ftiri 173. 3 T»nFi;i 157. 3 ipaiCriF) 105. e mn 237. 1, 238. 1 fl'in (JE) 131. 1 "innpi 194. 2 OO"'^'!'^ 238. 1. 6 13 nnn 239. 2 (2) Dnnn 238. 1. 6 •iDnrin 238. 1. b latp'^ri 147. 4 ■jiain 193. 1 ^tt-in 190. b, 197. 6 piim 150. 3 nffiS'in 11. 1. b c nto^n 113. 1 npn 147. 4 tJT'n 190. 6 ©^'n 208. 3. c njaiBin 147. 2 nittiijin 147. 4 ti^aan 101. 3. a nam 172. 4 jinani 88 (f. pi.) "inani 119. 1 ban 172. 4 nban 177. 3 lan 50. 1 n«?ari 54. 2 ^yiapi 192. 2 -rrian 88 (2 f.) Sbm 172. 4 njfbn 190. 6, 198. a (3) n^sbn 177. 3 nbni 147. 5 rip^bn 147. 2 nbri 50. 1 D'^Slbn 56. 4, 177. 3 T^n^ni 119. 1 inabri 105. « ^abn 65. b n:abFi ei. 4. a, 151. i Teabpi 88 T^Mbp) 192. 2 -|bn, ilbn 158. 2 on 186. 2. c, 207. 2 on (r.) 139. 2 on (n.) 186. 2. c nan 143. a INDEX III. 397 npniiBi? 118, 4 iwinnn lei. 3 nruTOn 157. 3 biMin 183. c liriTOn 151. 3 nsiTTOn 157. 3 DOT 175. 3 inan (2 m.) 172.3,175.3 O'^ari 53. 3. a iiQsb'an io4./ iD^bttrin 99. 3 Qian B4. 3. a (3), 141. 1 (p. 175) ^iSlsri 54. 3, 141. 2 nrij'an ei. 6. a CDSP'] 175. 3 b3>^n 60. 1. a nrxsian i65. 2 ^■jssian 60. 1. a njipan i4i. 2 lani 175. 3 • IBri 140. 5 iTah 111. 2. 6 Tl-lttn 192. 2 Qi-n-Tan i87. 2. c ©an 157. 3 ■jn 63. 2. a ;n:B!!8;n iia 4 nwasn i3i. 2 nbn 157. 3 T yfniPi 131. 2 nsn 132. 1 nisn 192. 2 Dim 60. 1. a rranin 205. c nnsn 131. 1 lypi 197. J W^iSril 150. 2, 161. 5 "l?n 60. 4, a ni-isin 104. 6 nym 174. 4 stesn 131. 6 te?ri 173. 3 isiBsn 102. 2 nte?r\ 172. 3 njiaoiTi 61. 3, 136. 2, iri^-ni»?r) 27 141.2 ^iteSn 55.2. a, 88. 2./ ^pn 140. 5 insniB^n 105. 6 eio'n 111. 2. 6, 151. 2 trisJBn 192. 2. a nyp 51. 1, 121. 1 nnshi 111. 2. 6 a?r\ 60. 4. a nisn 192. 2 IflhSPi 88 (m. pi.) D3"'in'is'iBn lei. 5 w^^yp, 19. 2, 111. 3. a ns'is'iBr;' 157. 3 'I'lttSn 88 njs^iBiji, nssiBn 157. 3 aa»m 111. 1 nbsn 190. 6 naa:?ni 97. 1. a isrii 172. 4 n3J»n25,88{f.pi.),9i.c yfi'ni 150. 3 nssj^n, nsayn 157. 3 oysnT 99. 3. a, 119. 1 i?rin 172. 4 nyn 51. 3 nnwn 19 8. a (3) tyni 140. 1 awn 91. b atyn 60. 4 wni (i'i>) 157. 3 nbypl 216. 1. a ^b?ni 140. 5 njibsnn 172. 3 nbsn 60. 3. c SjBri 141. 3 (p. 175) lanpsn 105. b nsn 140. 5 •jltaiBBn 88 (m. pi.) njssn 147. 2 njn'iisn lei. 3 nr^sn 141. 2 njbsn 141. 2 ISSlJn 139. 1 nnjpn 190. J, i98. a (3) nsDipri 88 (f. pi.), 161. 3 r.ittipn 160. 3 bpn 140. 1 ■jiTayni 99. s.a a«?n 192. 2, 200. c nps^p, nasyFi i72. 3 ijjn 50. 1 y?n 141. 2 (p. 175) lyjph 46 nsyn 97. 1. a fjjn 157. 3 njjyn 126. 2 «!i)?i?5 166. 4 398 INDEX III. n5S"!j3n 88 (3 f. pi.) iQ-l|5n 88 (3 i pi.) Iianjpm 99. 3. a Cpm 174. 4 nnjjn 95. « 8'in 35. 2 ^ »nni 172. 4 ns-in 172. 3 ■'pS'in 105. e nnni 172. 4 nanni 175. 3 ni3-in 190. 6 inba'in 94. a, iis Tin 147. 2 n'a'!I'ini92. 2.0,216.1.6 n3'l'iri88(3f.pl.),147.2 iniri 147. 3 inn 156. 4 nnnn 190. b np'ciiai-iri lei. 4 T^iin 140. 3 njiBDnn 92. e n-i'a'nr! 192. 2. a n5Dtt'nn88(3£pl.), 91.C •jnh 190. 6 nshn 97. 1. a T T nji'in 88 (f. pi.) y'nn (v.) 140. 6 qnn 175. 3 n''snri 201. 2 npsnFi 165. 3 ^nnT 140. 5 fini 172. 4 inann, ws-in 93. a njiNisn'ias. 2 njsfn 164. 2 ■isatotoFi 161. 2 rraiTDn 61. 4. a, 205. c bston 97. 2 ^biStiter) 180. a njtepi 164. 2 njaian 157. 3 reawn ei. 4, leo. 3 T ! •• T ' nj-iaiBn ss (3 f. pi.) natJn, naen es. a nrniisn 157. 3 D'aiisn 54. 2 TOWni90. 5, 192. 2.a, 198. a (3) 11^7160. 3. J (2), 120.1 nniCPl 119. 1 ion 172. 4 "lyilBn 227. 1 TODDlBri 91. c nsisiBri 88. (f. pi.) njnbipn 88 (3 f. pi.), 105. b -abtjn 97. 2 iDbttn 95. a DCn 147. 4 nniMcn 105. d T02VF\ 65. b IWqVPt 88 (m. pi.) sen 216. 1. e ytDn 60. 3. c ny«ri 223. 1 Diyon 208. 3. a, 225. 1 nsttyiijn 142. 1 ITT: T ittjni 158. 2 - T - njsnisn 11 8. 4 ■jnsnffln 88 (2 f.) yp)i»ri 176. 3 nwenisri, njaBntiin 96. b mn 131. 4 -pin 61. 5 sy^ann 126. 1 IT - ; ■ lann 142. 2 AT T ■ nann 60. 4. a, i76. 3 T ; ■ ' nnn (nntij) 53. 2. 6, 132. 1 T^nnn 126. 2 TOD^nnn 96. b !:r;bnrin 161. 2 nnnpi i76. 3 f^^nOI? 94. a inn 61. 5, 131. 4 iDsnm 176. 3 IT : ■ - onn 140. 1 nrsaiann 161. 3 smsnn 142. 2 inn 132. 1 wnni 105. a steinn 166. 6 ynpi ^2. 4 !b|nn 142. 2 s^snn 166. 5 a?Bnni 99. 3. a, 119. 1 :bn&jnn 96. b asnn ss. 3. 6, iso. 3 (p. 182) «nn 25 :-ilnh:i 150. 3 ynnn 60. 4. a, i76. 3 nsp-jicnn lei. 3 I]S"DEX lY. HEBEEW GRAMMATICAL TEEMS. ni'inis 2 sb?) niBtt iniN 7. 3 tT!?!* 31 nma nabia ■':s 7. 3. a nss ^?a 21. i liira 85. 1. « D-'DI'ia 76. 1 s^ya 45. 4. a T : - pm WW 23. 1 b]? tV\ 21. 1 n5i'i;'n sn 229. 1 nbsisn sn 230. 1 iTiMsn 7. 3 IttiSiT 9. 1, 243. 2. a* *I*n 11 99. 1 IDT 196 qt:n le. 3. a piiin 45. 4. a D?t: 28 sma 29. b t : - D1123 76. 2 D''''133 71. c lian as biTOs 7. 3. a-'n? 46 lip sbi a-^na 46 rtttiab 29. 6 "Vtr; liiab 199 D^an 'jifflb 199 d:"?© liiab 199 •Tinstt 45. 4. a la'i'a 71. c nnaitt 212 n-iba 70. a Dipbtt 28 biybtt 32 yibtt 32 mica 10. 46 p-iStt 26 lip's 85. 1. a ^j?^ 43 ij-^bs ana maia 7. 3. ffl 5in^ 44 niiiw 28. 6 nj 16. 2 a SXQ5 71. c •JtlD? 212 lr>03 71. c T I • 55 16. 2 naps 196 Qin^p? 2 pICB qiO 36. 1 ^TOD 212 Qi'iaS 28 lay 85. 1 a Tny 85. 1. a Qibys 70. a • T 1 im 85. 1. a ''I)? 46 a-^na sibi i-ip 46 nsi 27 lanas pn bstS 7. 3. a saw, «ii» 16. 1 nian ^s laibic 7. s.a nittti 70. a iBoriri nitt© 223. 1 n:ia inasbttuj 7. 3. a niy^jn 12 Names of the letters p 3, their signification §5. 5 Names of the vowels § 12, their signification § 12. 5 Names of the accents § 29, their signification § 29. 6 Names of the verbal species §76. 1, 2. Designations of imperfect verbs § 76. 3. -POSTSOEIPT The folded leaf which follows contains a general view of the inflections of the various kinds of verbs, perfect and im- perfect, the rules for the changes to which nouns are liable, the personal pronouns in their separate and suffixed forms, and the different vowels assumed by the inseparable prefixes and the interrogative n» . It is designed to be taken out of the book and mounted upon pasteboard. The student will thus have the most material parts of the grammar brought together and exhibited to his eye upon a single page. Two sections of the grammar have been inadvertently numbered 141 and two 150. To prevent embarrassment from this cause in the use of the indexes, the page is almost always added when the second of the duplicate sections is intended. m .■':j '<<":;-^^i _ i»» *.. iij 3j , M iii ;,r ,i« - | H ,,ii I ; , I lia ai^ J^ Mi^«i»iiiii 111 I III I'l ,>iii,i mttftii*'^..,. m 1 4 #1 ' ■ '"*'i SB '>' "• •'■^ '-. ■ r,.'. 0.. .' '\ f